diff options
| author |  Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org> | 2015-02-04 08:00:33 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org> | 2015-02-04 08:00:33 -0800 |
| commit | 22949a0004c062f9d2128b6726df8551fbf833e3 (patch) | |
| tree | 717a242c1dd6df1d86c40bfbb6f9dbb7563a7e11 /Documentation | |
| parent | 06e2dde508984b07d548b52c9790f1d3a614acdf (diff) | |
| download | subsurface-22949a0004c062f9d2128b6726df8551fbf833e3.tar.gz | |
Update to pre-built user manualsv4.4.0
And disable Russian manual for the moment - it's too old
Signed-off-by: Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org>
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
| -rw-r--r-- | Documentation/user-manual.html.git | 2283 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git | 2427 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Documentation/user-manual_fr.html.git | 10179 |
3 files changed, 8685 insertions, 6204 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/user-manual.html.git b/Documentation/user-manual.html.git index 3dfa3188f..2e0c1d0fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/user-manual.html.git +++ b/Documentation/user-manual.html.git @@ -404,13 +404,13 @@ asciidoc.install(3); <div id="content">
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Subsurface4Banner.png" alt="Banner" />
+<img src="images/Subsurface4Banner.jpg" alt="Banner" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="big">USER MANUAL</span></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Manual authors</strong>: Willem Ferguson, Jacco van Koll, Dirk Hohndel, Reinout Hoornweg,
-Linus Torvalds, Miika Turkia, Amit Chaudhuri, Jan Schubert, Salvador Cuñat</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="blue"><em>Version 4.2, August 2014</em></span></p></div>
+Linus Torvalds, Miika Turkia, Amit Chaudhuri, Jan Schubert, Salvador Cuñat, Pedro Neves</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="blue"><em>Version 4.4, February 2015</em></span></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Welcome as a user of <em>Subsurface</em>, an advanced dive logging program with
extensive infrastructure to describe, organise, interpret and print scuba
and free dives. <em>Subsurface</em> offers many advantages over other similar
@@ -418,10 +418,16 @@ software solutions:</p></div> <div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
+Do you need a flexible way of logging dives using recreational equipment,
+ even not using a dive computer?
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
Do you use two different dive computer brands, each with its own proprietary
software for downloading dive logs? Do you dive with rebreathers as well
- as open circuit? Do you use a Reefnet Sensus time-depth recorder
- in conjunction with a dive computer? <em>Subsurface</em> offers a standard
+ as open circuit or recreational equipment? Do you use a Reefnet Sensus time-depth
+ recorder in conjunction with a dive computer? <em>Subsurface</em> offers a standard
interface for downloading dive logs from all these different pieces of
equipment and to store and analyse the dive logs within a unified system.
</p>
@@ -430,14 +436,20 @@ Do you use two different dive computer brands, each with its own proprietary <p>
Do you use more than one operating system? <em>Subsurface</em> is fully compatible
with Mac, Linux and Windows, allowing you to access your dive log on each
- of your operating systems with a single application.
+ of your operating systems using a single application.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Do you use Linux or Mac and your dive computer has only Windows-based software
for downloading dive information (e.g. Mares)? <em>Subsurface</em> provides a way of
- storing and analysing your dive logs on other operating systems.
+ downloading and analysing your dive logs on other operating systems.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Do you need an intuitive graphical dive planner that integrates with and takes
+ into account the dives that have already been logged?
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -460,7 +472,16 @@ Divers</p></div> <noscript><p><b>JavaScript must be enabled in your browser to display the table of contents.</b></p></noscript>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_UserSurvey">1. The user survey</h2>
+<h2 id="S_UserSurvey">1. Using this manual</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When opened from within <em>Subsurface</em>, this manual does not have external controls. However,
+a <em>SEARCH</em> function is important. This is activated by pressing control-F or command-F on
+the keyboard. A text box appears at the bottom of the window. Use this to search for
+any term in the manual.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_the_user_survey">2. The user survey</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>In order to develop <em>Subsurface</em> in a way that serves its users in the best possible way,
it is important to have some user information. Upon launching <em>Subsurface</em>
@@ -476,7 +497,7 @@ command line.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_StartUsing">2. Start Using the Program</h2>
+<h2 id="S_StartUsing">3. Start Using the Program</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Subsurface</em> window is usually divided into four panels with a <strong>Main
Menu</strong> (File Import Log View Filter Help) at the top of the window (for Windows
@@ -525,7 +546,7 @@ of the <strong>Dive Info</strong> panel (maximum, minimum and average depths, du temperatures and SAC; total time and number of dives selected).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" id="S_ViewPanels" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/main_window.jpg" alt="The Main Window" />
+<img src="images/main_window_f20.jpg" alt="The Main Window" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The user can determine which of the four panels are displayed by selecting the
@@ -548,51 +569,70 @@ following sections, the procedures to create a new logbook will be described.</p </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_NewLogbook">3. Creating a new logbook</h2>
+<h2 id="S_NewLogbook">4. Creating a new logbook</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Select <em>File → New Logbook</em> from the main menu. All existing dive data are
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Select <em>File → New Logbook</em> from the main menu. All existing dive data are
cleared so that new information can be added. If there are unsaved data in an
open logbook, the user is asked whether the open logbook should be
saved before a new logbook is created.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_GetInformation">4. How to store dive information in the user’s logbook</h2>
+<h2 id="S_GetInformation">5. Storing dive information in the logbook</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
-<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several ways in which dive information can be added to a logbook:</p></div>
-<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now that a new logbook was created, it is simple to add dive data to it.
+<em>Subsurface</em> allows several ways of adding dive data to a logbook, detailed
+in the following sections.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>1) If the user has a handwritten divelog, a spreadsheet or another form of
+ manually maintained divelog, dive data can be added to the logbook using
+ one of these approaches:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Enter dive information by hand. This is typically useful if the diver did not
-use a dive computer and dives were recorded in a written logbook.
+Enter dive information by hand. This is useful if the diver did not
+ use a dive computer and dives were recorded in a written logbook. See:
+ <a href="#S_EnterData">Entering dive information by hand</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Import dive information directly from a dive computer if it is supported by
-<em>Subsurface</em>. The latest list of dive computers supported by <em>Subsurface</em> can
-be found at:
-<a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/supported-dive-computers/">
-Supported dive computers</a>.
+Import dive log information that has been maintained either as a spreadsheet
+ or as a CSV file. Refer to: <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</a> and
+ to <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format</a>.
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>2) If one has dives recorded using a dive computer, the depth profile of the
+ dive and a large amount of additional information can be accessed. These dives
+ can be imported from:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Import dive information from another database or file format. If you
-have kept your dive logs with other log software, these logs can often
-be imported to subsurface. This is discussed in more detail below.
+The divecomputer itself. See: <a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer">Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</a> or
</p>
</li>
-</ol></div>
+<li>
+<p>
+Proprietary software distributed by manufacturers of dive computers. Refer
+ to: <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive information from other digital data sources or other data formats</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Import from spreadsheet or CSV files containing dive profiles.
+ See: <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive computers or other dive log software</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_EnterData">4.1. Entering dive information by hand</h3>
+<h3 id="S_EnterData">5.1. Entering dive information by hand</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This is usually the approach for dives without a dive computer. The basic record
of information within <em>Subsurface</em> is a dive. The most important information
in a simple dive logbook usually includes dive type, date, time, duration,
depth, the names of your dive buddy and of the dive master or dive guide, and
some remarks about the dive. <em>Subsurface</em> can store much more information
than this for each dive. In order to add a dive to a dive log, select <em>Log
-→ Add Dive</em> from the Main Menu. The program then shows three panels to enter
+→ Add Dive</em> from the Main Menu. The program then shows three panels to enter
information for a dive: two tabs in the <strong>Dive Info</strong> panel (<strong>Dive Notes</strong> and
<strong>Equipment</strong>), as well as the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel that displays a graphical profile
of each dive. These panels are respectively marked <span class="red">A</span>, <span class="red">B</span> and
@@ -600,21 +640,31 @@ of each dive. These panels are respectively marked <span class="red">A</span>, < in the figure below. Each of these tabs will now be explained for data entry.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/AddDive1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Add dive" />
+<img src="images/AddDive1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Add dive" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>When one edits a field in Dive notes or Equipment panels, <em>Subsurface</em> enters <strong>Editing Mode</strong>,
-indicated by the message in the blue box at the top of the <em>Dive Notes</em> panel. This message is
+indicated by the message in the blue box at the top of the <em>Dive Notes</em> panel (see the image below). This message is
displayed in all the panels under Dive notes and Equipment when in <strong>Editing Mode</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="Blue edit bar" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Save</em> button should only be selected after all the parts of a dive have been entered.
+When entering dives by hand, the <em>Info</em>, <em>Equipment</em> and <em>Profile</em> tabs should be completed
+before saving the information. By selecting the <em>Save</em> button, a local copy of the information
+for this specific dive is saved in memory. When one closes Subsurface, the program will
+ask again, this time whether the complete dive log should be saved on disk or not.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_dive_notes">4.1.1. Dive Notes</h4>
+<h4 id="_dive_notes">5.1.1. Dive Notes</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel contains the date, time and place information for a particular dive,
environmental conditions, co-divers and buddies, as well as some descriptive
information. If one clicks on the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the following
fields are visible:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/AddDive2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" />
+<img src="images/AddDive2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and the time of the dive. By clicking
@@ -640,25 +690,25 @@ here. These can come from three sources:</p></div> <li>
<p>
One can find the coordinates on the world map in the bottom right hand
-part
-of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "No location
-data - Move the map and double-click to set the dive location". Upon a double-click
-at the appropriate place, the green bar disappears and the coordinates are
-stored.
+ part
+ of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "No location
+ data - Move the map and double-click to set the dive location". Upon a double-click
+ at the appropriate place, the green bar disappears and the coordinates are
+ stored.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The coordinates can be obtained from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if the
-user has an Android device with GPS and if the coordinates of the dive site
-were stored using that device.
-<a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more information</a>
+ user has an Android or iPhone device with GPS and if the coordinates of the dive site
+ were stored using that device.
+ <a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more information</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The coordinates can be entered by hand if they are known, using one of
-four formats with latitude followed by longitude:
+ four formats with latitude followed by longitude:
</p>
<div class="literalblock">
<div class="content">
@@ -677,6 +727,10 @@ name - so adding coordinates to dives that do not have a location description will cause unexpected behaviour (Subsurface will think that all of these
dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates the
same).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive mode</strong>: This is a dropdown box allowing one to choose the type of dive
+performed. The options are OC (Open Circuit, the default setting, meant for most recreational dives),
+Freedive (dive without SCUBA equipment), CCR (Closed-circuit
+rebreather) and pSCR (Passive semi-closed rebreather).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: The name of the dive master or dive guide for this dive can be
entered here.
Again, this field offers auto completion based on the list of dive masters in
@@ -705,12 +759,12 @@ until ALL other information has been added. Here is an example of a completed Dive Notes panel:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" />
+<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_equipment">4.1.2. Equipment</h4>
+<h4 id="_equipment">5.1.2. Equipment</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allows the user to enter information about the type of
cylinder and gas used, as well as the weights used for a dive. This is a highly interactive part of
<em>Subsurface</em> and the information on
@@ -720,7 +774,7 @@ cylinders and gases (entered here) affects the behaviour of the dive profile like this:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Gas_dialogue1.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Initial cylinder dialogue" />
+<img src="images/Gas_dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Initial cylinder dialogue" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The + button at the top right allows the user to add more cylinders for this
@@ -735,7 +789,7 @@ This brings up a button that can be used to display a dropdown list of cylinders:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Gas_dialogue2.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The cylinder drop-down list button" />
+<img src="images/Gas_dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The cylinder drop-down list button" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can be used to select the cylinder type used
@@ -760,7 +814,7 @@ is an example of a complete description for a dive made using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" />
+<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used during a dive can be entered
@@ -769,14 +823,14 @@ clicks the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks like this:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Weights dialogue" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Weights dialogue" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If one then clicks on the <strong>Type</strong> field, a drop-down list becomes accessible
through a down-arrow:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Weights type drop-down list button" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Weights type drop-down list button" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the type of weight system or the user may start
@@ -793,14 +847,14 @@ dustbin icon on the left hand. Here is an example of information for a dive with two types of weights: integrated and a weight belt:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>There’s NO need to click the <em>Save</em> button before the dive
profile has been completed.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">4.1.3. Creating a Dive Profile</h4>
+<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">5.1.3. Creating a Dive Profile</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive Profile</strong> (a graphical representation of the depth of the dive as a
function of time) is indicated in the panel on the top right hand of the
<em>Subsurface</em> window. When a dive is manually added to a logbook, <em>Subsurface</em>
@@ -808,7 +862,7 @@ presents a default dive profile that needs to be modified to best represent the dive being described:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial dive profile" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Modifying the dive profile</em>: When the cursor is moved around the dive profile,
@@ -829,7 +883,7 @@ time duration for the dive. Below is a dive profile that represents a dive to 20 m for 30 min, followed by a 5 minute safety stop at 5 m.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Edited dive profile" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Edited dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Specifying the gas composition:</em> The gas composition used is clearly indicated
@@ -844,20 +898,20 @@ waypoint. Note that only the gases defined in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab context menu.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Gas composition context menu" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Gas composition context menu" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is the profile of a dive to 20 m for 30 min and with a switch from air to
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is the profile of a dive to 25 m for 30 min and with a switch from air to
EAN50 at the end of the duration at 20m. In this case the first cylinder in the
<strong>Equipment</strong> tab contained air and the second cylinder contained EAN50.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Completed dive profile" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Completed dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_saving_the_hand_entered_dive_information">4.1.4. Saving the hand-entered dive information</h4>
+<h4 id="_saving_the_hand_entered_dive_information">5.1.4. Saving the hand-entered dive information</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The information entered in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab as well as
the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> can now be saved in the user’s logbook by using the two
buttons
@@ -870,9 +924,9 @@ once more to save the logbook with the new dive(s).</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportDiveComputer">4.2. Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportDiveComputer">5.2. Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</h3>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_connecting_and_importing_data_from_a_dive_computer">4.2.1. Connecting and importing data from a dive computer.</h4>
+<h4 id="_connecting_and_importing_data_from_a_dive_computer">5.2.1. Connecting and importing data from a dive computer.</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The use of dive computers allows the collection of a large amount of
information about
each dive, e.g. a detailed record of depth, duration, rates of ascent/descent
@@ -930,19 +984,20 @@ The dive computer should be placed into PC Communication mode. </li>
<li>
<p>
-In <em>Subsurface</em>, from the Main Menu, the user must select <em>Import → Import
-From Dive Computer</em>.
-Dialogue <strong>A</strong> in the figure below appears:
+In <em>Subsurface</em>, from the Main Menu, the user must select <em>Import → Import
+ From Dive Computer</em>.
+ Dialogue <strong>A</strong> in the figure below appears:
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/ImportFromDC1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download dialogue 1" />
+<img src="images/DC_import_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download dialogue 1" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive computers tend to keep a certain number of dives in their memory, even
-though these dives have already been imported to <em>Subsurface</em>. For that reason
+though these dives have already been imported to <em>Subsurface</em>. For that reason, if
+the divecomputer allows this,
<em>Subsurface</em> only imports dives that have not been uploaded before. This makes
the download process faster on most dive computers and also saves battery power
of the dive computer (at least for those not charging while connected via USB).
@@ -953,25 +1008,25 @@ even though some may already be in the logbook, then check the check box labelle <li>
<p>
The dialogue has two drop-down lists, <strong>Vendor</strong> and <strong>Dive Computer</strong>. On the
-<strong>vendor</strong> drop-down list select the make of the computer, e.g.
-Suunto, Oceanic,
-Uwatec, Mares. On the <strong>Dive Computer</strong> drop-down list, the model name of
-the dive computer must be selected, e.g. D4 (Suunto), Veo200 (Oceanic), or Puck
-(Mares).
+ <strong>vendor</strong> drop-down list select the make of the computer, e.g.
+ Suunto, Oceanic,
+ Uwatec, Mares. On the <strong>Dive Computer</strong> drop-down list, the model name of
+ the dive computer must be selected, e.g. D4 (Suunto), Veo200 (Oceanic), or Puck
+ (Mares).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The <strong>Device or Mount Point</strong> drop-down list contains the USB or Bluetooth port
-name that <em>Subsurface</em> needs in order to communicate with the dive computer.
-The appropriate port name must be selected. Consult
-<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix A</a>
-and
-<a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix B</a>
-for technical details on how to find the appropriate port information for a
-particular dive
-computer and, in some cases, how to do the correct settings to the operating
-system of the computer on which <em>Subsurface</em> is running.
+ name that <em>Subsurface</em> needs in order to communicate with the dive computer.
+ The appropriate port name must be selected. Consult
+ <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix A</a>
+ and
+ <a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix B</a>
+ for technical details on how to find the appropriate port information for a
+ particular dive
+ computer and, in some cases, how to do the correct settings to the operating
+ system of the computer on which <em>Subsurface</em> is running.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -992,46 +1047,61 @@ If all the dives on the dive computer need to be downloaded, check the If the checkbox <em>Always prefer downloaded dives</em>
has been checked and, during download, dives with identical date-times exist on
the dive computer and on the <em>Subsurface</em>
- <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, the record in the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog will be overwritten
- by the record from the dive computer
+ <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, the dive in the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog will be overwritten
+ by the dive record from the dive computer
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The checkbox marked <em>Download into new trip</em> ensures that, after upload, the downloaded dives
+ are grouped together as a new trip(s) in the <strong>Dive List</strong>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Do <strong>not</strong> check the checkboxes labelled <em>Save libdivecomputer logfile</em> and
- <em>Save libdivecomputer dumpfile</em>. These are only used as diagnostic tools
- when problems with downloads are experienced (see below).
+ <em>Save libdivecomputer dumpfile</em>. These are only used as diagnostic tools
+ when problems with downloads are experienced (see below).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-The <em>OK</em> button must then be clicked. Dialogue <strong>B</strong> in the figure above
-appears.
+Then select the <em>Download</em> button. After successful download, Dialogue <strong>B</strong>
+ in the figure above appears.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
With communication established, one can see how the data are
-retrieved from the dive computer.
-Depending on the make of the dive computer and/or number of recorded dives, this
-could take some time. The user should be patient. The <em>Download</em> dialogue
-shows a
-progress bar at the bottom of the dialogue (for some dive computers the
-progress information could be inaccurate as we cannot determine how much
-downloadable data there is until all data have been downloaded). When the
-download of the dive information is complete, all the imported dives appear
-in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, sorted by date and time. Disconnect and
-switch off the dive
-computer to conserve its battery power.
-If a particular dive is selected, the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel shows an informative
-graph of dive depth against time for that particular dive.
+ retrieved from the dive computer.
+ Depending on the make of the dive computer and/or number of recorded dives, this
+ could take some time. Be patient. The <em>Download</em> dialogue
+ shows a
+ progress bar at the bottom of the dialogue (for some dive computers the
+ progress information could be inaccurate as we cannot determine how much
+ downloadable data there is until all data have been downloaded). When the
+ download of the dive information is complete, all the imported dives appear
+ in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, sorted by date and time. Disconnect and
+ switch off the dive
+ computer to conserve its battery power.
+ If a particular dive is selected, the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel shows an informative
+ graph of dive depth against time for that particular dive.
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After the dives have been downloaded, they appear in a tabular format on the righthand
+side of the dialogue (see image <strong>B</strong>, above). Each dive comprises a row in the table, with the date, duration
+and depth shown. Next to each dive is a checkbox: check all the dives that need to
+be transfered to the <strong>Dive List</strong>. In the case of the image above, the last six dives are
+checked and will be transfered to the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After this has been completed, select the OK button.
+The checked dives are transfered to the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
If there is a problem in communicating with the dive computer, an error
-message will be shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares
-(Puck Pro)". Refer to the text in the box below.
+ message will be shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares
+ (Puck Pro)". Refer to the text in the box below.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1050,35 +1120,35 @@ message will be shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares <li>
<p>
Is the dive computer still in PC-communication or
-Upload mode?
+ Upload mode?
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Is the battery of the dive computer fully charged? If not then the battery
-must be charged or replaced.
+ must be charged or replaced.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Is the connecting cable faulty? Does the cable work perfectly using other
-software? Has it worked before, or is this the first time the cable is being used? Are the contacts
-on the dive computer and the cable clean?
+ software? Has it worked before, or is this the first time the cable is being used? Are the contacts
+ on the dive computer and the cable clean?
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Consult
-<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix A</a>
-and make sure that the correct Mount Point
-was specified (see above).
+ <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix A</a>
+ and make sure that the correct Mount Point
+ was specified (see above).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
On Unix-like operating systems, does the user have write permission to the
-USB port? If not, consult
-<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix A</a>
+ USB port? If not, consult
+ <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix A</a>
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1115,7 +1185,7 @@ as well as contextual information about the dives recorded on the dive computer. </div></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_DeviceNames">4.2.2. Changing the name of a dive computer</h4>
+<h4 id="S_DeviceNames">5.2.2. Changing the name of a dive computer</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>It may be necessary to distinguish between different dive computers used to
upload dive logs to <em>Subsurface</em>. For instance if one’s partner’s dive computer is the
same make and model as one’s own and dive logs are uploaded from both dive computers
@@ -1125,32 +1195,33 @@ one would perhaps like to call one dc "Alice’s Suunto D4" and the other on dive computers of the same model, the logs of both (or all) being uploaded.
In this case it might be prudent to call one of them
"Suunto D4 (1)" and another one "Suunto D4 (2)". This is easily done in <em>Subsurface</em>.
-On the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, select <em>Log → Edit device names</em>. A dialog opens, indicating the
+On the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, select <em>Log → Edit device names</em>. A dialog opens, indicating the
current Model, ID and Nickname of the dive computers used for upload. Edit the Nickname
field for the appropriate dive computer. After saving the Nickname, the dive logs
show the nickname for that particular device instead of the model name,
allowing easy identification of devices.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_EditDiveInfo">4.2.3. Updating the dive information imported from the dive computer.</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The information from the dive computer is not complete and more
-details must be added in order to have a fuller record of the dives. To
-do this,
+<h4 id="S_EditDiveInfo">5.2.3. Updating the dive information imported from the dive computer.</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>With the uploaded dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the information from the dive
+computer is not complete and more details must be added in order to have
+a fuller record of the dives. To do this,
the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and the <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs on the top left hand of the
<em>Subsurface</em> window should be used.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_dive_notes_2">4.2.4. Dive Notes</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The date and time of the dive, gas mixture and (often) water temperature is
-shown as obtained from the dive computer, but the user needs to add some
-additional information by hand in order to have a more complete dive record.
+<h4 id="_dive_notes_2">5.2.4. Dive Notes</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The date and time of the dive, gas mixture and (often) water temperature are usually
+shown as obtained from the dive computer, but the user needs to add
+additional information by hand in order to have a more complete dive record. In a few cases,
+(e.g. APD rebreathers) one also has to provide the date and time of the dive.
If the contents of this tab is changed or edited in any way, the message in a blue box at
the top of the panel indicates that the dive is being edited. If one
clicks on the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the following fields are
visible:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/AddDive3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" />
+<img src="images/AddDive3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and time of the dive. By clicking
@@ -1179,25 +1250,25 @@ here. These can come from three sources:</p></div> <li>
<p>
The user can find the coordinates on the world map in the bottom right hand
-part
-of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "Move the map
-and double-click to set the dive location". Double-click
-at the appropriate place, the green bar disappears and the coordinates are
-stored.
+ part
+ of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "Move the map
+ and double-click to set the dive location". Double-click
+ at the appropriate place, the green bar disappears and the coordinates are
+ stored.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The user can obtain the coordinates from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if
-an Android device with GPS was used and if the coordinates of the dive site
-were stored using that device.
-<a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more information</a>
+ an Android or iPhone device with GPS was used and if the coordinates of the dive site
+ were stored using that device.
+ <a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more information</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The coordinates can be entered by hand if they are known, using one of
-four formats with latitude followed by longitude:
+ four formats with latitude followed by longitude:
</p>
<div class="literalblock">
<div class="content">
@@ -1216,6 +1287,10 @@ name - so adding coordinates to dives that do not have a location description will cause unexpected behaviour (Subsurface will think that all of these
dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates the
same).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive mode</strong>: This is a dropdown box allowing one to choose the type of dive
+performed. The options are OC (Open Circuit, the default seting, meant for most recreational dives),
+Freedive (dive without SCUBA equipment), CCR (Closed-circuit
+rebreather) and pSCR (Passive semi-closed rebreather).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: The name of the dive master or dive guide for this dive should be
entered in this field
which offers auto completion based on the list of dive masters in
@@ -1248,18 +1323,18 @@ until ALL other information has been added. Here is an example of a completed Dive Notes panel:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" />
+<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_equipment_2">4.2.5. Equipment</h4>
+<h4 id="_equipment_2">5.2.5. Equipment</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allows one to enter information about the type of
cylinder and gas used as well as the weights used for the dive. The
message in a blue box at the top of the panel:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/BlueEditBar.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Blue edit bar" />
+<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Blue edit bar" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>indicates that the dive is being edited. This is a highly interactive part of
@@ -1270,7 +1345,7 @@ cylinders and gases (entered here) determines the behaviour of the dive profile like this:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DC_gas_dialogue1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial cylinder dialogue" />
+<img src="images/DC_gas-dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial cylinder dialogue" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>In most cases <em>Subsurface</em> obtains the gas used from the dive computer and
@@ -1285,7 +1360,7 @@ brings up a list button that can be used to display a dropdown list of cylinders:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DC_gas_dialogue2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The cylinder drop-down list button" />
+<img src="images/DC_gas-dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The cylinder drop-down list button" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the cylinder type that was used
@@ -1308,7 +1383,7 @@ button at the top right hand. Following is an example of a complete description for a dive using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" />
+<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used can be entered
@@ -1318,14 +1393,14 @@ the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks like this:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The Weights dialogue" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The Weights dialogue" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>By clicking on the <strong>Type</strong> field, a drop-down list becomes accessible through a
down-arrow:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Weights type drop-down list button" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Weights type drop-down list button" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the type of weight system
@@ -1343,12 +1418,12 @@ the dustbin icon on the left hand. Here is an example of information for a dive with two types of weights: integrated as well as a weight belt:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_editing_several_selected_dives_simultaneously">4.2.6. Editing several selected dives simultaneously</h4>
+<h4 id="_editing_several_selected_dives_simultaneously">5.2.6. Editing several selected dives simultaneously</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>METHOD 1</em>: After uploading dives from
a dive computer, the dive profiles of the uploaded dives are shown in the <strong>Dive profile</strong> tab, as well
as a few items of information
@@ -1372,23 +1447,24 @@ edited dive is changed, even though several dives have been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This greatly speeds
up the completion of the dive log after several similar dives.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph" id="S_CopyComponents"><p><em>METHOD 2</em>:There is a different way of achieving the same goal. Select a dive with all the appropriate information
-typed into the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Copy dive components</em>.
+typed into the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Copy dive components</em>.
A box is presented with a selection of check boxes for most of the fields in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs.
Select the fields to be copied from the currently selected dive, then select <em>OK</em>. Now, in the <strong>Dive List</strong>,
select the dives
-into which this information is to be pasted. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Paste dive components</em>. All the selected dives now contain the data initially selected in the original source dive log.</p></div>
+into which this information is to be pasted. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Paste dive components</em>.
+All the selected dives now contain the data initially selected in the original source dive log.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_adding_bookmarks_to_a_dive">4.2.7. Adding Bookmarks to a dive</h4>
+<h4 id="_adding_bookmarks_to_a_dive">5.2.7. Adding Bookmarks to a dive</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers wish to annotate their dives with text that indicate particular events
-during the dive, e.g. "Saw dolphins", or "Released surface bouy". This is easily
+during the dive, e.g. "Saw dolphins", or "Released surface buoy". This is easily
done:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Right-click at the appropriate point on the dive profile.
-This brings up the dive profile context menu. Select <em>Add bookmark</em>. A red flag is
-placed on the dive profile at the point that was initially selected (see <strong>A</strong> below).
+ This brings up the dive profile context menu. Select <em>Add bookmark</em>. A red flag is
+ placed on the dive profile at the point that was initially selected (see <strong>A</strong> below).
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1399,13 +1475,13 @@ Right-click on the red flag. This brings up the context menu (see <strong>B</str <li>
<p>
A text box is shown. Type the explanatory text for the bookmark (see <strong>C</strong> below). Select <em>OK</em>.
-This saves the text associated with the bookmark.
+ This saves the text associated with the bookmark.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
If one hovers using the mouse over the red bookmark, the appropriate text is shown at
-the bottom of the information box (see <strong>D</strong> below).
+ the bottom of the information box (see <strong>D</strong> below).
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1416,7 +1492,7 @@ the bottom of the information box (see <strong>D</strong> below). </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_saving_the_updated_dive_information">4.2.8. Saving the updated dive information</h4>
+<h4 id="_saving_the_updated_dive_information">5.2.8. Saving the updated dive information</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The information entered in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab and the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab can be
saved by
using the
@@ -1430,7 +1506,7 @@ that the new data should be saved.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importing_dive_information_from_other_digital_data_sources_or_other_data_formats">4.3. Importing dive information from other digital data sources or other data formats</h3>
+<h3 id="_importing_dive_information_from_other_digital_data_sources_or_other_data_formats">5.3. Importing dive information from other digital data sources or other data formats</h3>
<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>If a user has been diving for some time, it is possible that several dives were
logged using other dive log software. This information does not need retyping
because these dive logs can probably be
@@ -1454,7 +1530,7 @@ them from there with <em>Subsurface</em>, as divelogs.de supports a few additional logbook formats that
<em>Subsurface</em> currently cannot parse.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If the format of other software is supported natively on Subsurface, it should be sufficient to select
-either <em>Import→Import log files</em> or <em>File→Open log file</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> supports the data formats
+either <em>Import → Import log files</em> or <em>File → Open log file</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> supports the data formats
of many dive computers, including Suunto and Shearwater. When importing dives, <em>Subsurface</em>
tries to detect multiple records for
the same dive and merges the information as best as it can. If
@@ -1462,13 +1538,13 @@ there are no time zone issues (or other reasons that would cause the beginning time of the dives to be significantly different) <em>Subsurface</em>
will not create duplicate entries.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_using_the_universal_import_dialogue">4.3.1. Using the universal import dialogue</h4>
+<h4 id="_using_the_universal_import_dialogue">5.3.1. Using the universal import dialogue</h4>
<div class="paragraph" id="Unified_import"><p>Importing dives from other software is performed through a universal interface
that is activated by selecting <em>Import</em> from the Main Menu, then clicking on
<em>Import Log Files</em>. This brings up the dialogue <strong>A</strong> below.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Import1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Import dialogue: step 1" />
+<img src="images/Import1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Import dialogue: step 1" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Towards the bottom right is a dropdown selector with a default label
@@ -1477,7 +1553,7 @@ available, as in dialogue <strong>B</strong>, above. Currently these are:</p></d <div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-XML-formatted dive logs (Divinglog 5.0, MacDive and several other dive log systems)
+XML-formatted dive logs (DivingLog 5.0, MacDive and several other dive log systems)
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1492,7 +1568,7 @@ UDCF-formatted dive logs </li>
<li>
<p>
-Poseidon CCR logs
+Poseidon MkVI CCR logs
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1516,63 +1592,7 @@ the imported dive log in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong>. Som accessible through the Import dialogue are also supported, as explained below.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importing_dive_logs_from_closed_circuit_rebreather_ccr_systems">4.3.2. Importing dive logs from closed circuit rebreather (CCR) systems</h4>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/APD.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Closed system rebreathers use avanced technology to recirculate
-gas that has been breathed while doing two things to maintain a
-breathable oxygen concentration:
-a) remove carbon dioxide from the gas that has been exhaled
-b) regulate the oxygen concentration to remain within safe diving limits.
-Currently, within <em>Subsurface</em>, the Poseidon MkVI Discovery is the best
-supported CCR dive computer. The CCR interface of <em>Subsurface</em> is currently experimental
-and under active development. In contrast to a conventional open circuit
-dive computer, a CCR system computer does not allow the download of a log
-containg multiple dives. Rather, each dive is stored independently. This
-means that <em>Subsurface</em> cannot download a dive log directly from a CCR
-dive computer, but that it imports CCR dive logs in the same way that it
-imports dive log data from other databases.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_import_a_ccr_dive">Import a CCR dive</h5>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>See the section dealing with <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive information from other
-digital sources</a>. From the main menu of <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import→Import
-log files</em> to bring up the <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>. As
-explained in the previous section, the bottom right
-hand of the import dialogue contains a dropdown list of appropriate devices
-that currently includes an option for MkVI files. Having selected the appropriate CCR format and
-the directory where the original dive logs have been stored from the CCR dive
-computer, one can select a particular dive log file (in the case of the MkVI
-it is a file with a .txt extension). After selecting the appropriate dive log,
-activate the <em>Open</em> button at the bottom right hand of the universal import dialogue.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_displayed_information_for_a_dive">Displayed information for a dive</h5>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Partial pressures of gases</em>: The graph of oxygen partial pressure shows the
-information from the oxygen sensors of the CCR equipment. In the case of the
-Poseidon MKVI, the mean value of the two oxygen sensors are shown. In the case
-of the APD equipment, the mean of the three oxygen sensors are shown. If one
-sensor shows a very different oxygen PO2 reading compared to the others, the
-divergent sensor is ingnored. For CCR dives the graph for oxygen partial pressure
-should be fairly flat, reflecting the setpoint settings during the dive.
-Partial pressures for nitrogen (and helium,
-if applicable) are shown in the usual way as for other dives.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Cylinder pressures</em>: CCR dive computers like the Poseidon MkVI record the
-pressures of the oxygen and diluent cylinders. The pressure of the oxygen cylinder
-is shown on the dive profile. In addition, start and end pressures for both oxygen
-and diluent cylinders are shown in the <em>Equipment Tab</em>.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Equipment-specific information</em>: Equipment-specific information gathered by
-<em>Subsurface</em> is shown in the <em>Extra data</em> tab. This may include setup information
-or metadata about the dive.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>More equipment-specific information for downloading CCR dive logs can be found in <a href="#S_PoseidonMkVI">Appendix B</a>.</p></div>
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importing_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">4.3.3. Importing from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h4>
+<h4 id="_importing_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">5.3.2. Importing from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Since Mares utilise proprietary Windows software not compatible with
multi-platform applications, these dive logs cannot be
directly imported into
@@ -1582,33 +1602,33 @@ using <em>www.divelogs.de</em> as a mechanism to extract the dive log informatio <li>
<p>
The dive log data from Mares Dive Organiser need to be exported to the user’s
-desktop, using
- a <em>.sdf</em> file name extension. Refer to <a href="#Mares_Export">Appendix C</a> for more
-information.
+ desktop, using
+ a <em>.sdf</em> file name extension. Refer to <a href="#Mares_Export">Appendix C</a> for more
+ information.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Data should then be imported into <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. One needs to create a user
-account in
-<em>www.divelogs.de</em>, log into that web site, then
-select <em>Import Logbook → Dive Organiser</em> from the menu on the left hand side.
-The instructions must be carefully followed to transfer the dive information
-(in <em>.sdf</em> format) from the Dive Organiser database to <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.
+ account in
+ <em>www.divelogs.de</em>, log into that web site, then
+ select <em>Import Logbook → Dive Organiser</em> from the menu on the left hand side.
+ The instructions must be carefully followed to transfer the dive information
+ (in <em>.sdf</em> format) from the Dive Organiser database to <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Finally, import the dives
-from <em>divelogs.de</em> to <em>Subsurface</em>, using the instructions below.
+ from <em>divelogs.de</em> to <em>Subsurface</em>, using the instructions below.
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">4.3.4. Importing dives from <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
+<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">5.3.3. Importing dives from <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The import of dive information from <em>divelogs.de</em> is simple, using a single
-dialogue box. The <em>Import→Import form Divelogs.de</em> option should be selected
+dialogue box. The <em>Import → Import from Divelogs.de</em> option should be selected
from the Main Menu. This
brings up a dialogue box (see figure on left [<strong>A</strong>] below). Enter a
user-ID and password for <em>divelogs.de</em> into the appropriate fields and then
@@ -1625,167 +1645,208 @@ success status is indicated (see figure on the right [<strong>B</strong>], below </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingCSV">4.3.5. Importing dives in CSV format</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes dive computers export dive information as files with
-<em>comma-separated values</em> (.CSV). For example, the APD Inspiration and Evolution
-closed circuit rebreather (CCR) systems export dive information in a CSV
-formatted file that normally contains information for a single dive only. These
-files can easily be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>.
-CSV files are normally organised into
-a single line that provides the headers of the data columns, followed by the
-data, one record per line. CSV files can be opened with a normal text editor.
-Following is a highly simplified and shortened example of a CSV file from an
-APD rebreather:</p></div>
-<div class="literalblock">
-<div class="content">
-<pre><code> Dive Time (s) Depth (m) pO₂ - Setpoint (Bar) pO₂ - C1 Cell
-1 (Bar) Ambient temp. (Celsius)
- 0 0.0 0.70 0.81 13.1
- 0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
- 0 0.0 0.70 0.71 13.1
- 0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.2
- 0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
- 10 1.6 0.70 0.72 12.7
- 20 1.6 0.70 0.71 12.6
- 30 1.7 0.70 0.71 12.6
- 40 1.8 0.70 0.68 12.5
- 50 1.6 0.70 0.68 12.5
- 60 2.4 0.70 0.69 12.5
- 70 3.5 0.70 0.69 12.4
- 80 4.2 0.70 0.72 12.5
- 90 4.0 0.70 0.71 12.4</code></pre>
-</div></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that each title may comprise more than one word; for instance
-<em>Dive Time (s)</em> in the above data example. Before being able to import the data
-to <em>Subsurface</em> one first needs to know:</p></div>
-<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
+<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVData">5.3.4. Importing data in CSV format</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A comma-separated file (.csv) can be used to import dive information either as dive profiles
+(as in the case of the APD Inspiration and Evolution closed circuit rebreathers) or as dive
+metadata (in case the user keeps dive data in a spreadsheet). The <em>CSV</em> format is a universal
+simplified format that allows for easy information exchange between different computers or
+software packages. For an introduction to CSV-formatted files see <a href="#S_CSV_Intro">A Diver’s
+Introduction To CSV Files</a>. <em>Subsurface</em> dive logs can also be exported in <em>CSV</em> format to
+other software that reads this format. See <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet
+to CSV format</a> for information that may be helpful for importing spreadsheet-based data
+into <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive computers or other dive log software</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One can view a <em>CSV</em> file by using an ordinary text editor. It is normally organised into
+a single line that provides the headers (or <em>field names</em> or <em>column headings</em>) of the data
+columns, followed by the data, one record per line.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are two types of <em>CSV</em> dive logs that can be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-Which character separates the different columns within a single line of
-data? This field separator should be either a comma (,) or a TAB character.
-This can be determined by opening the file with a text editor. If it is
-comma-delimited, then the comma
-characters between the values are clearly visible. If no commas are evident and
-the numbers are aligned in columns,
-the file is probably TAB-delimited (i.e. it uses a TAB as a field separator, as
-in the above example).
+<em>CSV dive details</em>: This dive log format contains similar information to that of a
+ typical written dive log, e.g. dive date and time, dive depth, dive duration, names of
+ buddy and dive master and perhaps some information about cylinder pressures before and
+ after the dive, as well as a comment or two about the dive. All the data for a single
+ dive go on a single line of text, following the order of the column headings.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Which data columns need to be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>? The Dive Time and
-Depth columns are always required. Open the file using a text editor and note
-the titles of the columns to be imported and their column positions. For
-instance for the above example:
+<em>CSV dive profile</em>: This dive log format includes much more information about a single
+ dive. For instance there may be information at 30-second intervals, indicating depth, water
+ temperature at that depth, and cylinder pressure at that moment in time. Each line contains
+ the information for a single instant in time during the dive, 30 seconds after that
+ of the previous instant. Many lines
+ are required to complete the depth profile information for a single dive. This is a common
+ export format used by closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive equipment and many software
+ packages that handle dive computer data and/or dive logs.
</p>
-<div class="literalblock">
-<div class="content">
-<pre><code>Time: column 1
-Depth: column 2
-Temperature: column 5
-pO₂: column 4</code></pre>
-</div></div>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Armed with this information, importing the data into <em>Subsurface</em> is
-straightforward. Select
-<em>Import→Import Log Files</em> from the main menu. In the resulting file
-selection menu, select <em>CSV files</em>, after which a common configuration dialog
-appears for all the
-files with a CSV extension:</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Import_CSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV download dialogue" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>There are pre-configured definitions for some dive computers, e.g. the APD
-rebreathers. If the user’s dive computer is on this list, it should be selected
-using the dropdown
-box labeled <em>Pre-configured imports</em>. Select the button at the bottom right
-to indicate whether the dive data are in metric of imperial units.
-Finally <em>OK</em> should be clicked and
-the dive will be imported and listed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> tab of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>If the dive computer is not on the pre-configured list, the user must
-select the <em>Field
-Separator</em> (TAB or comma) for the particular CSV file, using the appropriate
-dropdown list. and indicate which columns in the CSV file
-contain which data
-variables. For each data column used for import, the user must check the
-appropriate check box
-and indicate in which column these data are found. For instance, the image above
-corresponds to the dialogue that would apply to the CSV data set described above
-the image. After completing the column specification, select the <em>OK</em> button
-and the dive will be imported and listed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> tab of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingManualCSV">4.3.6. Importing dives from manually kept CSV file</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>If one keeps dive logs in a spreadsheet, there is an option to import
-those dives as well. Spreadsheet data, exported as a CSV file, can
-be imported to <em>Subsurface</em>. When importing manually
-kept log files, the information needed is quite different as we are
-importing only metadata, not profile samples.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Similarly to importing dives in CSV format (see above), one needs to
-know the internal format
-of the CSV data to import.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Before being able to import the <em>CSV</em> data to <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>one needs to know a few
+things about the data being imported</strong>:</p></div>
<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
<li>
<p>
Which character separates the different columns within a single line of
-data? This
-should be either a comma (,), semicolon (;) or a TAB
-character, and could be determined by opening the file with a text
-editor. If it is comma-delimited, then the comma
-characters between the values are clearly visible. If no commas are evident and
-the data
-are in clear columns, the file
-is probably TAB-delimited (i.e. it uses a TAB as a field separator, as in the
-above example).
-A recommended field separator for the export is tab, as commas might be part of
-the
-field values themselves. Therefore the use of an appropriate field separator
-in very important.
+ data? This field separator should be either a comma (,) or a TAB character.
+ This can be determined by opening the file with a text editor. If it is
+ comma-delimited, then the comma
+ characters between the values are clearly visible. If no commas are evident and
+ the numbers are aligned in columns,
+ the file is probably TAB-delimited (i.e. it uses a TAB as a field separator).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Which columns need to be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>? We do not
-currently have any mandatory input fields, but some, e.g. dive duration
-are crucial for the log file to make any sense. Possible options
-can be seen in the image below and one should include all the
-fields available in both your log file and in the <em>Subsurface</em>
-import.
+Which data columns need to be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>? Is it a <em>CSV dive details</em>
+ file or a <em>CSV dive profile</em> file? Open the file using a text editor and note
+ the titles of the columns to be imported and their column positions.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Units used for depth, weight and temperature. We consider depth to be
-either feet or meters, weight kilograms or pounds and temperature either
-Celsius or Fahrenheit. However, the users can select <em>Metric</em> or
-<em>Imperial</em> in the <em>Preferences</em> tab of <em>Subsurface</em>. No mixture of unit
-systems is allowed for the different fields.
+Is the numeric information (e.g. dive depth) in metric or in imperial unis?
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Importing manually kept CSV log files is quite straight forward, but
-there might be many fields and counting the field numbers is error
-prone. Therefore validation of the data to be imported is critical.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>To import the dives, select <em>Import→Import Log Files</em> from the menu
-bar. If the CSV option in the dropdown list is selected and the file list
-includes file names ending with .CSV, one can select the
-<em>Manual dives</em> tab that will bring up the following configuration dialog:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Armed with this information, importing the data into <em>Subsurface</em> is
+straightforward. Select
+<em>Import → Import Log Files</em> from the main menu. In the resulting file
+selection menu, select <em>CSV files</em> (towards the bottom right). This shows all .CSV files in the selected
+directory. Select the file that needs to be imported. A configuration panel
+appears as depicted below:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/csv_import1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV download dialogue 1" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Notice that, at the top left, there is a dropdown list containing pre-configured
+settings for some of the more common dive computers and software packages
+encountered by divers. If the <em>CSV</em> file being imported originated from any of
+these pre-configured items, then select it. Otherwise use the <em>Manual Import</em>
+option. The configuration panel also has dropdown lists for the specification of the appropriate
+field separator (Tab, comma or semicolon), the date format used in the <em>CSV</em> file,
+the time units (seconds, minutes or minutes:seconds), as well as the unit system
+(metric or imperial). Selecting the appropriate options among these is critical for
+the successful import of the data.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The last remaining task is to ensure that all the data columns have the appropriate
+column headings. The top line of the white part of the data table contains the column
+headings found in the <em>CSV</em> data file. The blue row of cells immediately above these
+contains the names understood by <em>Subsurface</em>. The white area below the dropdown
+lists contains all the field names that <em>Subsurface</em> recognises. These names are
+in blue balloons and can be moved using a drag-and-frop action. For
+instance, <em>Subsurface</em> expects the column heading for Dive number (" # ") to be "Dive # ". If
+the column heading that <em>Subsurface</em> expects is not in the blue cells, then drag the
+appropriate column heading from the upper area and drop it in the appropriate blue
+cell at the top of the table. To indicate the correct column for "Dive #", drag
+the ballooned item labelled "Dive # " and drop it in the blue
+cell immediately above the white cell containing " # ". This is depicted in
+the image below.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Import_CSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download dialog for Manual CSV logs" />
+<img src="images/csv_import2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV download dialogue 2" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Continue in this way to ensure that all the column headings in the blue row of
+cells correspond to the headings listed in the top part of the dialogue. Having
+completed this task, select the <em>OK</em> button to the bottom right og the dialogue.
+The data from the <em>CSV</em> file are imported and shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
+<div class="sidebarblock" id="S_CSV_Intro">
+<div class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>A Diver’s Introduction to <em>CSV</em> Files</strong></p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content"><em>CSV</em> is an abbreviation for a data file format: <em>Comma-Separated Variables</em>. It is a
+file format allowing someone to view or edit the information using a text editor such
+as Notebook (Windows), gedit (Linux) or TextWrangler (OS/X). The two main advantages of
+the <em>CSV</em> format is that the data are easily editable as text without any proprietary software
+and ensuring all information is human-readable, not being obscured by any custom or
+proprietary attributes that proprietary software insert into files.
+Because of its simplicity the <em>CSV</em> format is used
+as an interchange format between many software packages, e.g. between
+spreadsheet, statistical, graphics, database and diving software. Within <em>Subsurface</em>, <em>CSV</em> files can also
+be used to import information from other sources such as spreadsheet-based dive logs and
+even from some dive computers.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>CSV</em> files can be created or edited with a normal text editor. The most important attribute of a
+<em>CSV</em> file is the <em>field separator</em>, the character used to separate fields within a single line. The
+field separator is frequently a comma, a colon, a SPACE character or a TAB character. When exporting data from
+spreadsheet software, the field separator needs to be specified in order to create the <em>CSV</em> file. <em>CSV</em> files are
+normally organised into a single line that provides the headers (or <em>field names</em>) of the data columns,
+followed by the data, one record per line. Note that each field name
+may comprise more than one word separated by spaces; for instance <em>Dive site</em>, below. Here is an example of
+dive information for four dives using a comma as a field separator:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive site,Dive date,Time,Dive_duration, Dive_depth,Dive buddy
+Illovo Beach,2012-11-23,10:45,46:15,18.4,John Smith
+Key Largo,2012-11-24,09:12,34:15,20.4,Jason McDonald
+Wismar Baltic,2012-12-01,10:13,35:27,15.4,Dieter Albrecht
+Pulau Weh,2012-12-20,09:46,55:56,38.6,Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In this format the data are not easily read by a human. Here is the same information in TAB-delimited format:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive site Dive date Time Dive_duration Dive_depth Dive buddy
+Illovo Beach 2012-11-23 10:45 46:15 18.4 John Smith
+Key Largo 2012-11-24 09:12 34:15 20.4 Jason McDonald
+Wismar Baltic 2012-12-01 10:13 35:27 15.4 Dieter Albrecht
+Pulau Weh 2012-12-20 09:46 55:56 38.6 Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>It is clear why many people prefer the TAB-delimited format to the comma-delimited format. The
+disadvantage is that one cannot see
+the TAB characters. For instance, the space between <em>Dive</em> and <em>date</em> in the top line may be
+a SPACE character or a TAB character (in this case it is a SPACE character: the tabs are before and
+after <em>Dive date</em>). If the field names in the first line are long, the alignment with data in the other lines
+cannot be maintained. Here is a highly simplified and shortened TAB-delimited example of a <em>CSV</em> dive log
+from an APD closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive computer:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive Time (s) Depth (m) pO₂ - Setpoint (Bar) pO₂ - C1 Cell 1 (Bar) Ambient temp. (Celsius)
+0 0.0 0.70 0.81 13.1
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
+0 0.0 0.70 0.71 13.1
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.2
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
+10 1.6 0.70 0.72 12.7
+20 1.6 0.70 0.71 12.6
+30 1.7 0.70 0.71 12.6
+40 1.8 0.70 0.68 12.5</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When a <em>CSV</em> file is selected for import, <em>Subsurface</em> displays the column headers as well as some of the data
+in the first few lines of the <em>CSV</em> file, making it much easier to work with <em>CSV</em> files.
+<em>CSV</em> files can therefore be used in many contexts for importing data into a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log.
+Knowledge of a few basic things about the content of the <em>CSV</em> file allows a smooth import
+of the dives into <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+</div></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">The <em>CSV</em> import has a couple of caveats. One should avoid some special characters
+like ampersand (&), less than (<), greater than (>) and double quotes (") as part
+of the numbers or text within a cell. The
+file should use UTF-8 character set, if using non-ASCII characters. Also the
+size of the <em>CSV</em> file might cause problems. Importing 100 dives at a time
+(<em>CSV dive details</em>) works, but larger files might exceed
+limits of the parser used. When encountering problems with <em>CSV</em> imports, first try with
+a smaller file to make sure everything works.</td>
+</tr></table>
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The input fields can be configured as appropriate, and when everything is done
-the <em>OK</em> button should be selected to perform the import. New dives should
-appear in the <strong>Dive List</strong> area of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Companion">4.4. Importing GPS coordinates with the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> for mobile phones</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the <strong>Subsurface Companion App</strong> on an Android device with a GPS, the coordinates
+<h3 id="S_Companion">5.4. Importing GPS coordinates with the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> for mobile phones</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the <strong>Subsurface Companion App</strong> on an <em>Android device</em> with a GPS or
+<a href="#S_iphone"><em>iPhone</em></a>, the coordinates
for the diving
location can be automatically passed to the <em>Subsurface</em>
dive log. The Companion App stores the dive locations on
@@ -1793,49 +1854,49 @@ a dedicated Internet-based file server. <em>Subsurface</em>, in turn, can collec the localities from the file server.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>To do this:</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_create_a_companion_app_account">4.4.1. Create a Companion App account</h4>
+<h4 id="_create_a_companion_app_account">5.4.1. Create a Companion App account</h4>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Register on the <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web page</em></a>.
-A confirmation email with instructions and a personal <strong>DIVERID</strong> will be sent,
-a long number that gives access to the file server and Companion App capabilities.
+ A confirmation email with instructions and a personal <strong>DIVERID</strong> will be sent,
+ a long number that gives access to the file server and Companion App capabilities.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Download the app from
-<a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.subsurface">Google Play Store</a>
-or from
-<a href="http://f-droid.org/repository/browse/?fdfilter=subsurface&fdid=org.subsurface">F-Droid</a>.
+ <a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.subsurface">Google Play Store</a>
+ or from
+ <a href="http://f-droid.org/repository/browse/?fdfilter=subsurface&fdid=org.subsurface">F-Droid</a>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_using_the_subsurface_companion_app_on_a_smartphone">4.4.2. Using the Subsurface companion app on a smartphone</h4>
+<h4 id="_using_the_subsurface_companion_app_on_an_android_smartphone">5.4.2. Using the Subsurface companion app on an Android smartphone</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>On first use the app has three options:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<em>Create a new account.</em> Equivalent to registering in <em>Subsurface</em> companion
-page using an Internet browser. One can request a <strong>DIVERID</strong> using this option,
-but this is supplied via email and followed up by interaction with the
-<a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web page</em></a> in order to
-activate the account.
+ page using an Internet browser. One can request a <strong>DIVERID</strong> using this option,
+ but this is supplied via email and followed up by interaction with the
+ <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web page</em></a> in order to
+ activate the account.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Retrieve an account.</em> If users forgot their <strong>DIVERID</strong> they will receive an email
-to recover the number.
+ to recover the number.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Use an existing account.</em> Users are prompted for their <strong>DIVERID</strong>. The app saves
-this <strong>DIVERID</strong> and does not ask for it again unless one uses the <em>Disconnect</em> menu
-option (see below).
+ this <strong>DIVERID</strong> and does not ask for it again unless one uses the <em>Disconnect</em> menu
+ option (see below).
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1846,7 +1907,7 @@ option (see below). </td>
<td class="content">In the <em>Subsurface</em> main program, the <strong>DIVERID</strong> should also be entered on the
Default Preferences
-panel, obtained by selecting <em>File→Preferences→Defaults</em> from the main menu
+panel, obtained by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Defaults</em> from the main menu
in <em>Subsurface</em> itself.
This facilitates synchronisation between <em>Subsurface</em> and the Companion App.</td>
</tr></table>
@@ -1862,19 +1923,19 @@ showed with 3 options:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Current: A prompt for a place name (or a request to activate the GPS if it is turned
-off) will be displayed, after which the current location is saved.
+ off) will be displayed, after which the current location is saved.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Use Map: This option allows the user to fix a position by searching a world map. A
-world map is shown (see <strong>B</strong> below) on which one should indicate the desired position
-with a <em>long press</em> on the touch
-sensitive screen (if the marked location is erroneous, simply indicate a new location)
-and select the check symbol in the upper right. A dialog is shown allowing to enter the
-name of the dive location and the date-time of the dive (see <strong>C</strong> below). In order to import this
-dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> it’s advisable to set the time to agree with the time of
-that dive on the dive computer.
+ world map is shown (see <strong>B</strong> below) on which one should indicate the desired position
+ with a <em>long press</em> on the touch
+ sensitive screen (if the marked location is erroneous, simply indicate a new location)
+ and select the check symbol in the upper right. A dialog is shown allowing to enter the
+ name of the dive location and the date-time of the dive (see <strong>C</strong> below). In order to import this
+ dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> it’s advisable to set the time to agree with the time of
+ that dive on the dive computer.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1887,10 +1948,10 @@ that dive on the dive computer. <li>
<p>
Import local GPX file: The android device searches for .gpx files and located
-archives will be shown. The selected .gpx file is opened and the stored
-locations shown. Now one needs to select the appropriate locations, then select the
-tab in the upper right, after which the locations will be sent to the web service
-and added to the list on the Android device.
+ archives will be shown. The selected .gpx file is opened and the stored
+ locations shown. Now one needs to select the appropriate locations, then select the
+ tab in the upper right, after which the locations will be sent to the web service
+ and added to the list on the Android device.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1971,8 +2032,8 @@ downloaded to a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log (see below).</p></div> <li>
<p>
<em>User ID.</em> The DIVERID obtained by registering as described above. The easiest way to
-obtain it is simply to copy and paste from the confirmation email but, of
-course, users can also type this information.
+ obtain it is simply to copy and paste from the confirmation email but, of
+ course, users can also type this information.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1983,13 +2044,13 @@ course, users can also type this information. <li>
<p>
<em>Synchronize on startup.</em> If selected, dive locations in the Android device and those
-on the web service synchronise each time the app is started.
+ on the web service synchronise each time the app is started.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Upload new dives.</em> If selected, each time the user adds a dive location it is
-automatically sent to the server.
+ automatically sent to the server.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2003,7 +2064,7 @@ in the background of their Android device, allowing the continuous collection of <li>
<p>
<em>Min duration.</em> In minutes. The app will try to get a location every X minutes
-until stopped by the user.
+ until stopped by the user.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2077,7 +2138,28 @@ of another registered diver.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_downloading_dive_locations_to_the_em_subsurface_em_divelog">4.4.3. Downloading dive locations to the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog</h4>
+<h4 id="S_iphone">5.4.3. Using the Subsurface companion app on an <em>iPhone</em> to record dive locations</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The iPhone interface is quite simple. One needs to type the user ID (obtained
+during registration) into the space reserved for it, then select "Dive in"
+(see left part of the image below) and start collecting dive location information.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/iphone.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Using iPhone companion application" width="640" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives can be added automatically or manually. In manual mode, a dive location or waypoint is added to the GPS input stream. In automatic mode, a continuous path of GPS locations is created from which, much later, after import, subsurface can select the appropriate GPS locations based on the times of dives. The default mode for the <em>iphone</em> is automatic. When one adds a dive, the
+location service is started automatically and a red bar appears at the bottom
+of the screen. After the dive one can click on the red
+bar to end the location service. While the location
+service is running one can only add dives using the manual mechanism.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One can edit the site name afterwards by selecting the dive
+from the dive list and clicking on the site name. There are no other
+editable fields. The dive list is automatically uploaded from the iphone
+to the webservice and there is not an option to
+trigger upload manually.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_downloading_dive_locations_to_the_em_subsurface_em_divelog">5.4.4. Downloading dive locations to the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Download dive(s) from a dive computer or enter them manually into
<em>Subsurface</em> before obtaining the GPS coordinates from the server. The download
dialog can be reached via <em>Ctrl+G</em> or from the <em>Subsurface</em> Main Menu <em>Import
@@ -2121,43 +2203,43 @@ downloading GPS data.</p></div> <li>
<p>
<em>Background service</em>, being a very powerful tool, may fill the location list with
-many unnecessary locations not corresponding to the exact dive point but reflecting the boat’s route.
-Currently these locations are difficult to delete from the server. In some situations it
-is therefore prudent to clean up the list on the Android device before sending the dive points to the web
-server by simply deleting the inappropriate locations. This might be necessary, for
-instance, if one wants to keep the location list clear to see dives in the web service map display (see above).
+ many unnecessary locations not corresponding to the exact dive point but reflecting the boat’s route.
+ Currently these locations are difficult to delete from the server. In some situations it
+ is therefore prudent to clean up the list on the Android device before sending the dive points to the web
+ server by simply deleting the inappropriate locations. This might be necessary, for
+ instance, if one wants to keep the location list clear to see dives in the web service map display (see above).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
It may also make sense to give informative names to the locations sent to the web server, or at least
-to use an informative name in the <em>Name Template</em> setting while running the <em>background service</em>,
-especially on a dive trip with many dives and dive locations.
+ to use an informative name in the <em>Name Template</em> setting while running the <em>background service</em>,
+ especially on a dive trip with many dives and dive locations.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_LoadImage">4.5. Adding photographs to dives</h3>
+<h3 id="S_LoadImage">5.5. Adding photographs to dives</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Many (if not most) divers take a camera with them and take photographs
during a dive. One would like to associate each photograph with a specific
dive. <em>Subsurface</em> allows one to load photos into a dive. Photos are superimposed
on the dive profile, from where they can be viewed.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_loading_photos_and_getting_synchronisation_between_dive_computer_and_camera">4.5.1. Loading photos and getting synchronisation between dive computer and camera</h4>
+<h4 id="_loading_photos_and_getting_synchronisation_between_dive_computer_and_camera">5.5.1. Loading photos and getting synchronisation between dive computer and camera</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Left-lick on a dive or on a group of dives on the dive list. Then right-click on this
dive or group of dives and choose the option <em>Load Images</em>:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The system file browser appears. Select the folder and photographs that need
to be loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and click the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This brings one to the time synchronisation dialog, shown below. The
@@ -2172,42 +2254,42 @@ the dive profile.</p></div> <li>
<p>
<strong>Manually</strong>: If the user wrote down the exact camera time at the start of a dive, the
-difference in time between the two devices can be determined. Actually, as long as the device
-settings for time has not been changed in either device, one could write down the times of
-both devices after the dive or even at the end of the day. One can then manually set the time
-difference in the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. Towards the top of the dialog is a time setting tool
-immediately under the heading <em>Shift times of image(s) by</em>, evident in figure <strong>A</strong> below.
-If the camera time is 7 minutes later than that of the dive computer, set the time setting
-tool to a value of 00:07. Select either the <em>earlier</em> or <em>later</em> radio button.
-In the above example, the <em>earlier</em> option is appropriate, since the photos need to be shifted
-7 minutes earlier (camera is 7 minutes ahead of dive computer). Ignore any "AM" or "PM" suffix
-in that tool. Click the <em>OK</em> button and synchronisation is achieved.
+ difference in time between the two devices can be determined. Actually, as long as the device
+ settings for time has not been changed in either device, one could write down the times of
+ both devices after the dive or even at the end of the day. One can then manually set the time
+ difference in the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. Towards the top of the dialog is a time setting tool
+ immediately under the heading <em>Shift times of image(s) by</em>, evident in figure <strong>A</strong> below.
+ If the camera time is 7 minutes later than that of the dive computer, set the time setting
+ tool to a value of 00:07. Select either the <em>earlier</em> or <em>later</em> radio button.
+ In the above example, the <em>earlier</em> option is appropriate, since the photos need to be shifted
+ 7 minutes earlier (camera is 7 minutes ahead of dive computer). Ignore any "AM" or "PM" suffix
+ in that tool. Click the <em>OK</em> button and synchronisation is achieved.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage3b.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronisation dialog" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage3b_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronisation dialog" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<strong>By photograph</strong>: There is a very slick way of achieving synchronisation. If one takes a
-photograph of the face of the dive computer showing the time, then <em>Subsurface</em> can obtain
-the exact time the photograph was taken, using the metadata that the camera stores within
-each photo. In order to do this, use the bottom half of the Time shift_ dialog. If one uses
-the bottom part, the top part of the dialog is ignored. Click on
-the horizontal bar entitled "<em>Select image of divecomputer showing time</em>. This brings up
-a file browser with which one can select the photograph of the dive computer. Select the
-photograph using the file browser and click on <em>OK</em>. This photograph of the dive computer
-appears in the bottom panel of the <em>Shift times</em> dialog. Now <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly
-when the photograph has been taken. Now set the date-time dialog to the left of the photo
-so that this tool reflects the date and time of the dive computer in the photo. When the
-date-time tool has been set, <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly what the time difference between
-camera and dive computer is, and synchronisation is achieved. There is a
-photograph with the face of the dive computer and with the date-time tool set to the
-date-time on image <strong>B</strong> above.
+ photograph of the face of the dive computer showing the time, then <em>Subsurface</em> can obtain
+ the exact time the photograph was taken, using the metadata that the camera stores within
+ each photo. In order to do this, use the bottom half of the Time shift_ dialog. If one uses
+ the bottom part, the top part of the dialog is ignored. Click on
+ the horizontal bar entitled "<em>Select image of divecomputer showing time</em>. This brings up
+ a file browser with which one can select the photograph of the dive computer. Select the
+ photograph using the file browser and click on <em>OK</em>. This photograph of the dive computer
+ appears in the bottom panel of the <em>Shift times</em> dialog. Now <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly
+ when the photograph has been taken. Now set the date-time dialog to the left of the photo
+ so that this tool reflects the date and time of the dive computer in the photo. When the
+ date-time tool has been set, <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly what the time difference between
+ camera and dive computer is, and synchronisation is achieved. There is a
+ photograph with the face of the dive computer and with the date-time tool set to the
+ date-time on image <strong>B</strong> above.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2215,12 +2297,12 @@ date-time on image <strong>B</strong> above. the dive profile. If the timestamp of the photo is within 30 minutes of the dive, it is shown.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_viewing_the_photos">4.5.2. Viewing the photos</h4>
+<h4 id="_viewing_the_photos">5.5.2. Viewing the photos</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>In order to view the photos added to a dive, activate the <em>show-photos</em> button in the tool bar
to the left of the dive profile:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:left;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos.png" alt="FIGURE:Show photos toolbar button" />
+<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos_f20.png" alt="FIGURE:Show photos toolbar button" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>After the images have been loaded, they appear in two places:</p></div>
@@ -2239,14 +2321,14 @@ as tiny icons (stubs) on the dive profile at the appropriate positions reflectin </ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Photos on dive profile" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Photos on dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If one hovers with the mouse over any of the photo icons, then a thumbnail photo
is shown of the appropriate photo. See the image below:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage5.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Thumbnail photo on dive profile" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Thumbnail photo on dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Clicking on the thumbnail brings up a full size
@@ -2258,12 +2340,12 @@ is required when clicking on a thumbnail. Images can also be deleted using the <em>Photos</em> tab (see text below).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage6.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Full-screen photo on dive profile" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Full-screen photo on dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_the_em_photos_em_tab">4.5.3. The <em>Photos</em> tab</h4>
+<h4 id="_the_em_photos_em_tab">5.5.3. The <em>Photos</em> tab</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Photographs associated with a dive are shown as thumbnails in the <em>Photos</em> tab of the <em>Dive Notes</em>
panel. Photos taken in rapid succession during a dive (therefore sometimes with large
overlap on the dive profile) can easily be accessed in the <em>Photos</em> tab. This tab serves as
@@ -2275,7 +2357,7 @@ it (single-click) and then by pressing the <em>Del</em> key on the keyboard. Thi from the <em>Photos</em> tab as well as the dive profile.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_photos_on_an_external_hard_disk">4.5.4. Photos on an external hard disk</h4>
+<h4 id="_photos_on_an_external_hard_disk">5.5.4. Photos on an external hard disk</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Most underwater photographers store their photos on an external drive. If such a drive can be mapped
(almost always the case) the photos can be directly accessed by <em>Subsurface</em>. This facilitates the interaction
between <em>Subsurface</em> and an external repository of photos. When associating a dive profile with photos from an
@@ -2287,13 +2369,202 @@ In addition the <em>Photos</em> tab only shows the file names of the photos. Thi If, later, the external drive with the photos is connected again, the photos can be seen in the normal way.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_logging_special_types_of_dives">5.6. Logging special types of dives</h3>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_sidemount_dives">5.6.1. Sidemount dives</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> easily handles dives involving more than one cylinder. Sidemount dive logging involves
+three steps:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>During the dive, recording cylinder switch events</strong>. Since sidemount diving normally involves two
+ cylinders with air or with the same gas mixture, <em>Subsurface</em> distinguishes among these different
+ cylinders. In contrast, most dive computers that allow gas switching only distinguish among different
+ <em>gases</em> used, not among different <em>cylinders</em> used. This means that when sidemount dives are downloaded
+ from these dive computers, the events of switching between cylinders with the same gas are not downloaded. This may mean
+ that one may have to keep a written log of cylinder switch times using a slate, or (if the dive computer
+ has this facility) marking each cylinder switch with a bookmark that can be retrieved later. Returning
+ from a dive with the information about cylinder changes is the only tricky part of logging sidemount dives.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Within <em>Subsurface</em> describe the cylinders used during the dive</strong>. The diver needs to provide the
+ specifications of the different cylinders, using the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Info Panel</strong> (see
+ image below where two 12 litre cylinder were used).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Indicate cylinder change events on the <em>Subsurface</em> dive profile</strong>. Once the dive log has been imported
+ from a dive computer into <em>Subsurface</em>, the cylinder switch events need to be indicated on the dive profile.
+ Cylinder changes are recorded by right-clicking at the appropriate point on the dive profile and then
+ selecting <em>Add gas change</em>. A list of the appropriate cylinders is shown with the
+ currently used cylinder greyed out. In the image below Tank 1 is greyed out, leaving only Tank 2
+ to be selected. Select the appropriate cylinder. The cylinder change is then indicated on the dive
+ profile with a cylinder symbol. If the <strong>Tank Bar</strong> is activated using the toolbar to the left of the
+ profile, then the cylinder change is also indicated on the Tank Bar (see image below). After all
+ the cylinder change events have been recorded on the dive profile, the correct cylinder pressures
+ for both cylinders are shown on the dive profile, as inthe image below.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/sidemount1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Sidemount profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This section gives an example of the versatility of <em>Subsurface</em> as a give logging tool.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_CCR_dives">5.6.2. Closed circuit rebreather (CCR) dives</h4>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/APD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Closed system rebreathers use advanced technology to recirculate
+gas that has been breathed while doing two things to maintain a
+breathable oxygen concentration:
+a) remove carbon dioxide from the gas that has been exhaled
+b) regulate the oxygen concentration to remain within safe diving limits.
+Currently, within <em>Subsurface</em>, the Poseidon MkVI Discovery is the best
+supported CCR dive computer. The CCR interface of <em>Subsurface</em> is currently experimental
+and under active development. In contrast to a conventional recreational
+dive computer, a CCR system computer does not allow the download of a log
+containing multiple dives. Rather, each dive is stored independently. This
+means that <em>Subsurface</em> cannot download a dive log directly from a CCR
+dive computer, but that it imports CCR dive logs in the same way that it
+imports dive log data from other digital databases.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_import_a_ccr_dive">Import a CCR dive</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>See the section dealing with <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive information from other
+digital sources</a>. From the main menu of <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import → Import
+log files</em> to bring up the <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>. As
+explained in that section, the bottom right
+hand of the import dialogue contains a dropdown list of appropriate devices
+that currently includes an option for (Poseidon) MkVI files (import for other
+CCR equipment is under active development). Having selected the appropriate CCR format and
+the directory where the original dive logs have been stored from the CCR dive
+computer, one can select a particular dive log file (in the case of the MkVI
+it is a file with a .txt extension). After selecting the appropriate dive log,
+activate the <em>Open</em> button at the bottom right hand of the universal import dialogue.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_displayed_information_for_a_ccr_dive">Displayed information for a CCR dive</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Partial pressures of gases</em>: The graph of oxygen partial pressure shows the
+information from the oxygen sensors of the CCR equipment. In contrast to recreational
+equipment (where pO<sub>2</sub> values are calculated based on gas composition and dive depth),
+CCR equipment provide actual measurements of pO<sub>2</sub>, derived from oxygen sensors.
+In this case the graph for oxygen partial pressure
+should be fairly flat, reflecting the setpoint settings during the dive. The mean
+pO<sub>2</sub> is NOT the mean oxygen partial pressure as given by the CCR equipment, but
+a value calculated by <em>Subsurface</em> as follows:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+For TWO O<sub>2</sub> sensors the mean value of the two sensors are given.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+For THREE-sensor systems (e.g. APD), the mean value is also used. However
+ differences of more than 0,1 bar in the simultaneous readings of different sensors are
+ treated as spurious. If one of the three sensors provides spurious data, it is ignored.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If no sensor data is available, the pO<sub>2</sub> value is assumed to be equal to the setpoint.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The mean pO<sub>2</sub> of the sensors is indicated with a green line,</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The oxygen setpoint values as well as the readings from the individual
+oxygen sensors can be shown. The display of additional CCR information is turned on by
+checking the appropriate checkboxes in the <em>Preferences</em> panel (accessible by
+selecting <a href="#S_CCR_options"><em>File → Preferences → Graph</em></a>). This part of
+the <em>Preferences</em> panel look like this, representing two checkboxes that modify
+the display of pO<sub>2</sub> when the appropriate toolbar button on the Dive Profile
+has been activated.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_preferences_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR preferences panel" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Checking any of the check boxes allows the display of additional oxygen-related
+information whenever the pO<sub>2</sub> toolbar button on the <em>Profile</em> panel is activated.
+The first checkbox allows the display of setpoint information. This is a red line
+superimposed on the green oxygen partial pressure graph and allows a comparison of the
+mean measured oxygen partial pressure and the setpoint values, as in the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_setpoint_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR setpoint and po2 graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The second checkbox allows the display of the data from each individual oxygen sensor
+of the CCR equipment. The data for each sensor is colour-coded as follows:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 1: grey
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 2: blue
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 3: brown
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The mean oxygen pO<sub>2</sub> is indicated by the green line. This allows the direct comparison
+of data from each of the oxygen sensors, useful for detecting abnormally low or erratic
+readings from a particular sensor.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_sensor_data_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR sensor data graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The setpoint data can be overlaid on the oxygen sensor data by activating both of the above
+check boxes. Partial pressures for nitrogen (and helium, if applicable) are shown in the
+usual way as for open circuit dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Events</em>: Several events are logged, e.g. switching the mouthpiece to open circuit.
+These events are indicated by yellow triangles and, if one hovers over a triangle,
+a description of that event is given as the bottom line in the <a href="#S_InfoBox">Information Box</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Cylinder pressures</em>: Some CCR dive computers like the Poseidon MkVI record the
+pressures of the oxygen and diluent cylinders. The pressures of these two cylinders
+are shown as green lines overlapping the depth profile. In addition, start and
+end pressures for both oxygen and diluent cylinders are shown in the <em>Equipment Tab</em>.
+Below is a dive profile for a CCR dive, including an overaly
+of setpoint and oxygen sensor data, as well as the cylinder pressure data. In this
+case there is good agreement from the readings of the two oxygen sensors.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_dive_profile_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Equipment-specific information</em>: Equipment-specific information gathered by
+<em>Subsurface</em> is shown in the <a href="#S_ExtraDataTab">Extra data tab</a>. This may include setup information
+or metadata about the dive.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>More equipment-specific information for downloading CCR dive logs for
+Poseidon MkVI and APD equipment can be found in <a href="#S_PoseidonMkVI">Appendix B</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_obtaining_more_information_about_dives_entered_into_the_logbook">5. Obtaining more information about dives entered into the logbook</h2>
+<h2 id="_obtaining_more_information_about_dives_entered_into_the_logbook">6. Obtaining more information about dives entered into the logbook</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_strong_dive_info_strong_tab_for_individual_dives">5.1. The <strong>Dive Info</strong> tab (for individual dives)</h3>
+<h3 id="_the_strong_dive_info_strong_tab_for_individual_dives">6.1. The <strong>Dive Info</strong> tab (for individual dives)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The Dive Info tab gives some summary information about a particular dive that
has been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Useful information here includes the
surface interval before the dive, the maximum and mean depths of the dive, the
@@ -2312,7 +2583,21 @@ Users should refer to <a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Appendix D</a> for more informa </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_strong_stats_strong_tab_for_groups_of_dives">5.2. The <strong>Stats</strong> tab (for groups of dives)</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ExtraDataTab">6.2. The <strong>Extra Data</strong> tab (usually for individual dives)</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When using a dive computer, it often reports several data items that cannot easily be
+presented in a standardised way because the nature of the information differs from one
+dive computer to another. These data often comprise setup information, metadata about
+a dive, battery levels, no fly times, or gradient factors used during the dive. When
+possible, this information is presented in the <strong>Extra Data</strong> tab. Below is an
+image showing extra data for a dive using a Poseidon rebreather.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ExtraDataTab_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Extra Data tab" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_the_strong_stats_strong_tab_for_groups_of_dives">6.3. The <strong>Stats</strong> tab (for groups of dives)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The Stats tab gives summary statistics for more than one dive, assuming that
more than one dive has been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong> using the standard
Ctrl-click or Shift-click of the mouse. If only one
@@ -2324,7 +2609,7 @@ water temperature and surface air consumption (SAC). It also shows the depth of shallowest and deepest dives of those selected.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">5.3. The <strong>Dive Profile</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">6.4. The <strong>Dive Profile</strong></h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Profile2.jpg" alt="Typical dive profile" />
@@ -2398,7 +2683,9 @@ frequently increases the size of the dive profile to fill the area of the panel placed adjacent to significant changes.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive profile can include graphs of the <strong>partial pressures</strong>
of O2, N2, and He during the dive (see figure above) as well as a calculated and dive computer
-reported deco ceilings (only visible for deep, long, or repetitive dives). Partial pressures of oxygen are indicated in green, those of nitrogen in black, and those of helium in dark red. These
+reported deco ceilings (only visible for deep, long, or repetitive dives).
+Partial pressures of oxygen are indicated in green, those of nitrogen in black,
+and those of helium in dark red. These
partial pressure graphs are shown below the profile data.</p></div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
@@ -2557,6 +2844,22 @@ compartments following the Bühlmann model (<strong>B</strong> in figure below). <div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ShowCylindersButton.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">By selecting this icon, the different cylinders used during a dive can be represented as a coloured bar at the bottom
+of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. In general oxygen is represented by a green bar, nitrogen with a yellow bar and helium with a
+red bar. The image below shows a dive which first uses a trimix cylinder (red and green), followed by a switch to a nitrox cylinder
+(yellow and green) after 23 minutes. Cylinders with air are shown as a light blue bar.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ShowCylinders_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Cylinder use graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
<td class="content">Display inert gas tissue pressures relative to ambient inert gas pressure (horizontal grey line).
@@ -2595,21 +2898,26 @@ during the dive. For more information external to this manual see:</p></div> </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_dive_profile_context_menu">5.4. The Dive Profile context menu</h3>
+<h3 id="_the_dive_profile_context_menu">6.5. The Dive Profile context menu</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu for the Dive Profile is accessed by right-clicking while the
mouse cursor is over the Dive Profile panel. The menu allows the creation of
-Bookmarks or Gas Change Event markers other than the ones that might have been
+Bookmarks or Gas Change Event markers or manual CCR set-point changes other than the ones that might have been
imported from a Dive Computer. Markers are placed against the depth profile line
and with the time of the event set by where the mouse cursor was when the right
mouse button was initially clicked to bring up the menu. Gas Change events
-open a further selection of which gas is being switched to, the list based on
-the available gases defined in the Equipment Tab. By right-clicking while over
-an existing marker, the menu extends adding options to allow deletion of the
+involve a selection of which gas is being switched to, the list of choices being based on
+the available gases defined in the Equipment Tab. Set-point change
+events open a dialog allowing to choose the next set-point value. As
+in the planner, a set-point value of zero indicates the diver is
+breathing from an open circuit system while any non-zero value
+indicates the use of a closed circuit rebreather (CCR).
+By right-clicking while over
+an existing marker a menu appears, adding options to allow deletion of the
marker or to allow all markers of that type to be hidden. Hidden events can be
restored to view by selecting Unhide all events from the context menu.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_strong_information_box_strong">5.5. The <strong>Information Box</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_InfoBox">6.6. The <strong>Information Box</strong></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The Information box displays a large range of information pertaining to the dive
profile. Normally the Information Box is located to the top left of the <strong>Dive
Profile</strong> panel. If the mouse points outside of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, then
@@ -2702,7 +3010,7 @@ air diving at a depth equalling the END.</td> </div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Figure (<strong>B</strong>) above shows an information box with a nearly complete set of data.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">5.5.1. The Gas Pressure Bar Graph</h4>
+<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">6.6.1. The Gas Pressure Bar Graph</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>On the left of the <strong>Information Box</strong> is a vertical bar graph indicating the
pressures of the nitrogen (and other inert gases, e.g. helium, if applicable) that the diver
was inhaling <em>at a particular instant during the dive</em>, indicated by the position
@@ -2717,40 +3025,40 @@ meaning of the different parts of the Gas Pressure Bar Graph.</p></div> <li>
<p>
The light green area indicates the total gas, with the top margin of the light green
-area indicating the total gas pressure inhaled by the diver and measured from the bottom
-of the graph to the top of the light green area. This pressure has a <em>relative</em> value in the graph
-and does not indicate absolute pressure.
+ area indicating the total gas pressure inhaled by the diver and measured from the bottom
+ of the graph to the top of the light green area. This pressure has a <em>relative</em> value in the graph
+ and does not indicate absolute pressure.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The horizontal black line underneath the light green margin indicates the equilibrium pressure
-of the inert gases inhaled by the diver, usually nitrogen. In
-the case of trimix, it is the pressures of nitrogen and helium combined. In this example,
-the user is diving with EAN32, so the inert gas pressure is 68% of the distance from the
-bottom of the graph to the total gas pressure value.
+ of the inert gases inhaled by the diver, usually nitrogen. In
+ the case of trimix, it is the pressures of nitrogen and helium combined. In this example,
+ the user is diving with EAN32, so the inert gas pressure is 68% of the distance from the
+ bottom of the graph to the total gas pressure value.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The dark green area at the bottom of the graph represents the pressures of inert gas in each
-of the 16 tissue compartments, following the Bühlmann algorithm, the fast tissues being on the
-left hand side.
+ of the 16 tissue compartments, following the Bühlmann algorithm, the fast tissues being on the
+ left hand side.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-The top black horizontal line indicates the the gradient factor that applies to the depth of
-the diver at the particular point on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The appropriate gradient factor is an
-interpolation between the FGLow and GFHigh values specified in the Graph tab of the <strong>Preferences
-Panel</strong> of <strong>Subsurface</strong>.
+The top black horizontal line indicates the gradient factor that applies to the depth of
+ the diver at the particular point on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The appropriate gradient factor is an
+ interpolation between the FGLow and GFHigh values specified in the Graph tab of the <strong>Preferences
+ Panel</strong> of <strong>Subsurface</strong>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The bottom margin of the red area in the graph indicates the Bühlman-derived M-value, that is the
-pressure value of inert gases at which bubble formation is expected to be severe, resulting
-in decompression sickness.
+ pressure value of inert gases at which bubble formation is expected to be severe, resulting
+ in decompression sickness.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2760,38 +3068,38 @@ during a dive is indicated on the right hand side of the above figure for a dive <li>
<p>
Graph <strong>A</strong> indicates the situation at the start of a dive with diver at the surface. The pressures in all
-the tissue compartments are still at the quilibrium pressure because no diving has taken place.
+ the tissue compartments are still at the equilibrium pressure because no diving has taken place.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Graph <strong>B</strong> indicates the situation after a descent to 30 meters. Few of the tissue compartments have had
-time to respond to the descent, their gas pressures being far below the equilibrium gas pressure.
+ time to respond to the descent, their gas pressures being far below the equilibrium gas pressure.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Graph <strong>C</strong> represents the pressures after 30 minutes at 30 m. The fast compartments have attained
-equilibrium (i.e. they have reached the hight of the black line indicating the equilibrium pressure). The
-slower compartments (towards the right) have not reached equilibrium and are in the process of slowly
-increasing in pressure.
+ equilibrium (i.e. they have reached the hight of the black line indicating the equilibrium pressure). The
+ slower compartments (towards the right) have not reached equilibrium and are in the process of slowly
+ increasing in pressure.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Graph <strong>D</strong> shows the pressures after ascent to a depth of 4.5 meters. Since, during ascent, the total
-inhaled gas pressure has decreased strongly from 4 bar to 1.45 bar, the pressures in the different tissue
-compartments now exceed that of the total gas pressure and approaches the gradient factor value (i.e.
-the top black horizontal line). Further ascent will result in exceeding the gradient
-factor value (GFHigh), endangering the diver.
+ inhaled gas pressure has decreased strongly from 4 bar to 1.45 bar, the pressures in the different tissue
+ compartments now exceed that of the total gas pressure and approaches the gradient factor value (i.e.
+ the top black horizontal line). Further ascent will result in exceeding the gradient
+ factor value (GFHigh), endangering the diver.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Graph <strong>E</strong> indicates the situation after remaining at 4.5 meters for 10 minutes. The fast compartments
-have decreased in pressure. As expected, the pressures in the slow compartments have not changed much.
-The pressures in the fast compartments do not approach the GFHigh value any more and the diver is safer
-than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>.
+ have decreased in pressure. As expected, the pressures in the slow compartments have not changed much.
+ The pressures in the fast compartments do not approach the GFHigh value any more and the diver is safer
+ than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2800,10 +3108,10 @@ than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>. </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_organising_the_logbook_manipulating_groups_of_dives">6. Organising the logbook (Manipulating groups of dives)</h2>
+<h2 id="_organising_the_logbook_manipulating_groups_of_dives">7. Organising the logbook (Manipulating groups of dives)</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_dive_list_context_menu">6.1. The Dive List context menu</h3>
+<h3 id="_the_dive_list_context_menu">7.1. The Dive List context menu</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Many actions within <em>Subsurface</em> are dependent on a context menu used
mostly to manipulate groups of dives. The context menu is found by selecting
a dive or a group of dives and then right-clicking.</p></div>
@@ -2814,21 +3122,21 @@ a dive or a group of dives and then right-clicking.</p></div> </div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu is used in many manipulations described below.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_customising_the_information_showed_in_the_strong_dive_list_strong_panel">6.1.1. Customising the information showed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel</h4>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:left;">
+<h4 id="_customising_the_information_showed_in_the_strong_dive_list_strong_panel">7.1.1. Customising the information showed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel</h4>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/DiveListOptions.jpg" alt="Example: Dive list info options" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The default information in the <strong>Dive List</strong> includes, for each dive, Dive_number, Date, Rating, Dive_depth,
-Dive_duration and Dive_location. This information can be contolled and changed by right-clicking on the
+Dive_duration and Dive_location. This information can be controlled and changed by right-clicking on the
header bar of the <strong>Dive List</strong>. For instance, a right-click on the <em>Date</em> header brings up a list of items
that can be shown in the dive list (see above). Select an item to be shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> or to be
deleted from the dive list, and the list is immediately updated accordingly. Preferences for information
shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> is saved and used when <em>Subsurface</em> is re-opened.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_selecting_dives_from_a_particular_dive_site">6.1.2. Selecting dives from a particular dive site</h4>
+<h4 id="_selecting_dives_from_a_particular_dive_site">7.1.2. Selecting dives from a particular dive site</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers have long dive lists and it may be difficult to locate all the dives at a particular site.
By pressing <em>Ctl-F</em> on the keyboard, a text box is opened at the top left hand of the <strong>Dive List</strong>.
Type the name of a dive site in this text box and the <strong>Dive List</strong> is immediately filtered to
@@ -2836,20 +3144,20 @@ show only the dives for that site.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Renumber">6.2. Renumbering the dives</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Renumber">7.2. Renumbering the dives</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives are normally numbered incrementally from non-recent dives (low sequence
numbers) to recent dives (having the highest sequence numbers). The numbering
of the dives is not always consistent. For instance, when non-recent dives are
added to the dive list the numbering does not automatically follow on because
of the dives that are more recent in date/time than the newly-added dive with
an older date/time. Therefore, one may sometimes need to renumber the dives.
-This is performed by selecting (from the Main Menu) <em>Log → Renumber</em>. Users are
+This is performed by selecting (from the Main Menu) <em>Log → Renumber</em>. Users are
given a choice with respect to the lowest sequence number to be used.
Completing this operation results in new sequence numbers (based on date/time)
for the dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Group">6.3. Grouping dives into trips and manipulating trips</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Group">7.3. Grouping dives into trips and manipulating trips</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>For regular divers, the dive list can rapidly become very long. <em>Subsurface</em>
can group dives into <em>trips</em>. It performs this by grouping dives that have
date/times that are not separated in time by more than two days, thus creating
@@ -2863,10 +3171,10 @@ list comprising five dive trips (<strong>B</strong>, on the right):</p></div> </div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Grouping into trips allows a rapid way of accessing individual dives without
having to scan a long lists of dives. In order to group the dives in a dive list,
-(from the Main Menu) users must select <em>Log → Autogroup</em>. The <strong>Dive List</strong> panel
+(from the Main Menu) users must select <em>Log → Autogroup</em>. The <strong>Dive List</strong> panel
now shows only the titles for the trips.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_editing_the_title_and_associated_information_for_a_particular_trip">6.3.1. Editing the title and associated information for a particular trip</h4>
+<h4 id="_editing_the_title_and_associated_information_for_a_particular_trip">7.3.1. Editing the title and associated information for a particular trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, in the dive list, minimal information is included in the trip title.
More information about a trip can be added by selecting its trip title from
the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This shows a <strong>Trip Notes</strong> tab in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel. Here
@@ -2880,26 +3188,26 @@ tab. The trip title in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel should now reflect s edited information.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_viewing_the_dives_during_a_particular_trip">6.3.2. Viewing the dives during a particular trip</h4>
+<h4 id="_viewing_the_dives_during_a_particular_trip">7.3.2. Viewing the dives during a particular trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dives have been grouped into trips, users can expand one or more
trips by clicking the arrow-head on the left of each trip title. This expands
the selected trip, revealing the individual dives performed during the trip.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_collapsing_or_expanding_dive_information_for_different_trips">6.3.3. Collapsing or expanding dive information for different trips</h4>
+<h4 id="_collapsing_or_expanding_dive_information_for_different_trips">7.3.3. Collapsing or expanding dive information for different trips</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If a user right-clicks after selecting a particular trip in the dive list, the
resulting context menu allows several possibilities to expand or collapse dives
within trips. This includes expanding all trips, collapsing all trips and
collapsing all trips except the selected one.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_merging_dives_from_more_than_one_trip_into_a_single_trip">6.3.4. Merging dives from more than one trip into a single trip</h4>
+<h4 id="_merging_dives_from_more_than_one_trip_into_a_single_trip">7.3.4. Merging dives from more than one trip into a single trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>By right-clicking on a selected trip title in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, a
context menu shows up that allows the merging of trips by either merging of the selected trip
with the trip below or with the trip above.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_splitting_a_single_trip_into_more_than_one_trip">6.3.5. Splitting a single trip into more than one trip</h4>
+<h4 id="_splitting_a_single_trip_into_more_than_one_trip">7.3.5. Splitting a single trip into more than one trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If a trip includes five dives, the user can split this trip into two trips (trip 1:
top 3 dives; trip 2: bottom 2 dives) by selecting and right-clicking the top
three dives. The resulting context menu allows the user to create a new trip by
@@ -2916,9 +3224,9 @@ the completed action on the right (B):</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_manipulating_single_dives">6.4. Manipulating single dives</h3>
+<h3 id="_manipulating_single_dives">7.4. Manipulating single dives</h3>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_delete_a_dive_from_the_dive_log">6.4.1. Delete a dive from the dive log</h4>
+<h4 id="_delete_a_dive_from_the_dive_log">7.4.1. Delete a dive from the dive log</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives can be permanently deleted from the dive log by selecting and
right-clicking them to bring up the context menu, and then selecting <strong>Delete
dive(s)</strong>. Typically this would apply to a case where a user wishes to delete
@@ -2926,7 +3234,7 @@ workshop calibration dives of the dive computer or dives of extremely short duration.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_unlink_a_dive_from_a_trip">6.4.2. Unlink a dive from a trip</h4>
+<h4 id="_unlink_a_dive_from_a_trip">7.4.2. Unlink a dive from a trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Users can unlink dives from the trip to which they belong. In order to do this,
select and right-click
the relevant dives to bring up the context menu. Then select the option <strong>Remove dive(s)
@@ -2934,7 +3242,7 @@ from trip</strong>. The dive(s) now appear immediately above the trip to which they belonged.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_add_a_dive_to_the_trip_immediately_above">6.4.3. Add a dive to the trip immediately above</h4>
+<h4 id="_add_a_dive_to_the_trip_immediately_above">7.4.3. Add a dive to the trip immediately above</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Selected dives can be moved from the trip to which they belong and placed within
the trip immediately above the currently active trip. To do this, select
and right-click
@@ -2942,7 +3250,7 @@ the dive(s) to bring up the context menu, and then select <strong>Add dive(s) to immediately above</strong>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_shift_the_start_time_of_dive_s">6.4.4. Shift the start time of dive(s)</h4>
+<h4 id="_shift_the_start_time_of_dive_s">7.4.4. Shift the start time of dive(s)</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the start time of a dive. This may apply to
situations where dives are performed in different time zones or when the dive
computer has an erroneous time. In order to do this, user must select and right-click
@@ -2954,7 +3262,7 @@ time option indicating whether the time adjustment should be forwards or backwards.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_merge_dives_into_a_single_dive">6.4.5. Merge dives into a single dive</h4>
+<h4 id="_merge_dives_into_a_single_dive">7.4.5. Merge dives into a single dive</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes a dive is briefly interrupted, e.g. if a diver returns to the surface
for a few minutes, resulting in two or more dives being recorded by the dive
computer and appearing as different dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel. Users can
@@ -2971,12 +3279,12 @@ below shows the depth profile of two such dives that were merged:</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_filtering_the_dive_list">6.5. Filtering the dive list</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Filter">7.5. Filtering the dive list</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel can be filtered, that is, one can select only some
of the dives based on their attributes, e.g. dive tags, dive site, dive master, buddy or protective
clothing. For instance, filtering allows one to list the deep dives at a particular
dive site, or otherwise the cave dives with a particular buddy.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>To open the filter, select <em>Log → Filter divelist</em> from the main menu. This opens the
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To open the filter, select <em>Log → Filter divelist</em> from the main menu. This opens the
<em>Filter Panel</em> at the top of the <em>Subsurface</em> window. Three icons are located at the top
right hand of the filter panel. The <em>Filter Panel</em> can be reset
(i.e. all current filters cleared) by selecting the <strong>+</strong>. The <em>Filter Panel</em> may also be
@@ -3000,22 +3308,75 @@ of search terms for filtering the dive list.</p></div> the four check lists needs to be checked. The dive list is then shortened to include
only the dives that pertain to the selection criteria specified in the check lists.
The four check lists work as a filter with <em>AND</em> operators, Subsurface
-filters therfore for <em>cave</em> as a tag AND <em>Joe Smith</em> as a buddy; but the
+filters therefore for <em>cave</em> as a tag AND <em>Joe Smith</em> as a buddy; but the
filters within a category are inclusive - filtering for <em>cave</em> and <em>boat</em>
shows those dives that have either one or both of these tags.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_ExportLog">7. Exporting the dive log or parts of the dive log</h2>
+<h2 id="S_ExportLog">8. Exporting the dive log or parts of the dive log</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The export function can be reached by selecting <em>File → Export</em>, which brings up
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are two routes for the export of dive information from Subsurface:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Export dive information to <em>Facebook</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Export_other">Export dive information to other destinations or formats</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_facebook">8.1. Exporting dive information to <em>Facebook</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Export of dives to <em>Facebook</em> is handled differently from other types of export. This is because
+export to <em>Facebook</em> needs a connection to <em>Facebook</em>, requiring a <em>Facebook</em> userID and password.
+If, from the Main Menu, one selects <em>File → Preferences → Facebook</em>, a login screen is presented
+(see image <strong>A</strong> to the left, below). Provide your <em>Facebook</em> userID and password.
+Once successful login to <em>Facebook</em> has been achieved, the panel
+in image <strong>B</strong>, below is presented. This panel has a button that needs to be selected in order to close the
+<em>Facebook</em> connection.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/facebook1_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Facebook login" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Having established a login to <em>Facebook</em>, transfer of a dive profile to one’s <em>Facebook</em> timeline is easy.
+A <em>Facebook</em> icon appears in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em> (See image <strong>A</strong> below). Ensure that the dive
+that you want to transfer to the timeline is depicted in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. Select the
+<em>Facebook</em> icon, and a dialogue is shown, determining the amount of additional information transferred
+with the dive profile (see image <strong>B</strong>, below). In order to transfer a dive profile to <em>Facebook</em>, the name of a
+<em>Facebook</em> album needs to be provided. The checkboxes on the lefthand side allow one to determine how much
+additional information should be transferred with the dive profile. This information is shown in the text box
+on the right hand side of the panel (see image <strong>B</strong>, below). You can easily edit the message that will be posted
+right there in the text box. Having specified the additional information and verified the text you want to post, select
+the <em>OK</em> button which triggers the transfer to <em>Facebook</em>. After a while, an acknowledgement dialogue appears,
+indicating successful transfer to <em>Facebook</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Both the Album created and the post to your time line will be marked as
+private. In order for friends to be able to see the post you have to
+change its permissions from a regular Facebook login either in a browser
+or a Facebook app. While this is an extra step the developers felt that
+this was the better solution to avoid having unwanted posts in your public
+timeline.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/facebook2_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Facebook login" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If required, then close the <em>Facebook</em> connection by either closing <em>Subsurface</em> or by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Facebook</em> from the Main Menu, and clicking the appropriate button on the Facebook Preferences panel.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Export_other">8.2. Export dive information to other destinations or formats</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For non-<em>Facebook exports</em>, the export function can be reached by selecting <em>File → Export</em>, which brings up
the Export dialog. This dialog always gives two options: save ALL dives, or save only
the dives selected in <strong>Dive List</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em>. Click the appropriate
radio button (see images below).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Export.jpg" alt="Figure: Export dialog" />
+<img src="images/Export_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Export dialog" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>A dive log or part of it can be saved in three formats:</p></div>
@@ -3028,39 +3389,74 @@ radio button (see images below).</p></div> <li>
<p>
Universal Dive Data Format (<em>UDDF</em>). Refer to <em>http://uddf.org</em> for more information.
-UDDF is a generic format that enables communication among many dive computers
-and computer programs.
+ UDDF is a generic format that enables communication among many dive computers
+ and computer programs.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Divelogs.de</em>, an Internet-based dive log repository. In order to upload to <em>Divelogs.de</em>,
-one needs a user-ID as well as a password for <em>Divelogs.de</em>. Log into <em>http://en.divelogs.de</em>
-and subscribe to this service in order to upload dive log data from <em>Subsurface</em>.
+ one needs a user-ID as well as a password for <em>Divelogs.de</em>. Log into <em>http://en.divelogs.de</em>
+ and subscribe to this service in order to upload dive log data from <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>CSV</em> format, that includes the most critical information of the dive
-profile. Included information of a dive is: dive number, date, time,
-duration, depth, temperature and pressure.
+<em>DiveShare</em> is also a dive log repostory on the Internet focusing on the recreational
+ dives. In order to upload dives one has to provide a used ID, so registration with
+ <em>http://scubadiveshare.com</em> is required.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Worldmap</em> format, an HTML file with a world map upon which each dive and
-some information about it are indicated. This map is not editable.
+<em>CSV dive details</em>, that includes the most critical information of the dive
+ profile. Included information of a dive is: dive number, date, time, buddy,
+ duration, depth, temperature and pressure: in short, most of the information
+ that recreational divers enter into handwritten log books.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CSV dive profile</em>, that includes a large amount of detail for each dive, including
+ the depth profile, temperature and pressure information of each dive.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>HTML</em> format, in which the dive(s) are stored in HTML files, readable
-with an Internet browser. Most modern web browsers are supported, but Javascript
-must be enabled. This generated HTML file is not intended to be edited
-by the users.
-The HTML dive log contains most of the information and also contains a search
-option to search the dive log. HTML export is specified on the second tab of the
-Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above).
+ with an Internet browser. Most modern web browsers are supported, but JavaScript
+ must be enabled. This HTML file is not intended to be edited
+ by the users.
+ The HTML dive log contains most of the information and also contains a search
+ option to search the dive log. HTML export is specified on the second tab of the
+ Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above). A typical use of this option is to export all one’s
+ dives to a smartphone or a tablet where it would serve as a very portable record
+ of dives useful for dive companies that wish to verify the dive history of a diver.
+ This does away with the need to carry one’s original logbook with one
+ when doing dives with dive companies.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Worldmap</em> format, an HTML file with a world map upon which each dive and
+ some information about it are indicated. This map is not editable. However, if one selects any
+ of the dive sites on the map, a summary of the dive is available in text, as shown
+ in the image below.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/mapview_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: HTML Map export view" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Image depths</em>, which creates a text file that contains the file names of all
+ photos or images attached
+ to any of the selected dives in the <em>Dive List</em>, together with the depth under water where
+ of each of those photos were taken.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3071,20 +3467,20 @@ Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above). <li>
<p>
Subsurface Numbers: if this option is checked, the dive(s) are exported with the
-numbers associated with them in Subsurface, Otherwise the dive(s) will be numbered
-starting from 1.
+ numbers associated with them in Subsurface, Otherwise the dive(s) will be numbered
+ starting from 1.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Export Yearly Statistics: if this option is checked, a yearly statistics table will
-be attached with the HTML exports.
+ be attached with the HTML exports.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Export List only: a list of dives will only be exported and the detailed dive
-information will not be available.
+ information will not be available.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3092,7 +3488,7 @@ information will not be available. <li>
<p>
Under <em>Style Options</em> some style-related options are available like font
-size and theme.
+ size and theme.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3100,8 +3496,9 @@ size and theme. instance <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
+</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">8. Keeping a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log in the Cloud</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">9. Keeping a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log in the Cloud</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>For each diver, dive log information is highly important. Not only is it a record
of diving activities for one’s own pleasure, but it is important information required
@@ -3137,9 +3534,9 @@ involved for this service. Dropbox (Windows, Mac and Linux) can be installed by accessing the
<a href="http://www.dropbox.com/install"><em>Install Page on the Dropbox website</em></a>
. Alternatively one can use <em>Dropbox</em> as a mechanism to backup one’s dive log. To
-Store a dive log in the Cloud, select <em>File→Save as</em> from the <em>Subsurface</em> main menu,
+Store a dive log in the Cloud, select <em>File → Save as</em> from the <em>Subsurface</em> main menu,
navigate to the <em>Dropbox</em> folder and select the <em>Save</em> button. To access the dive log
-in the Cloud, select <em>File→Open Logbook</em> from the <em>Subsurface</em>
+in the Cloud, select <em>File → Open Logbook</em> from the <em>Subsurface</em>
main menu and navigate to the dive log file in the <em>Dropbox</em> folder and select the
<em>Open</em> button.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Several paid services exist on the Internet (e.g. Google, Amazon) where the same
@@ -3147,7 +3544,7 @@ process could be used for the Cloud-based storage of dive logs.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">9. Printing a dive log</h2>
+<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">10. Printing a dive log</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> provides a simple interface to print a whole dive log or only a
few selected dives, including dive profiles and other contextual information.</p></div>
@@ -3156,17 +3553,17 @@ few selected dives, including dive profiles and other contextual information.</p <li>
<p>
Should the whole dive log be printed or only part of it? If only part of the
-dive log is required, then the user must select the required dives from the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.
+ dive log is required, then the user must select the required dives from the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
What gas partial pressure information is required on the dive profile? Users should select
-the appropriate toggle-buttons on the button bar to the left of the Dive Profile panel.
+ the appropriate toggle-buttons on the button bar to the left of the Dive Profile panel.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Now the print options should be selected to match the user’s needs. To do this, user should select <em>File→Print</em> from
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now the print options should be selected to match the user’s needs. To do this, user should select <em>File → Print</em> from
the Main menu. The following dialogue appears (see the image on the left [A],
below).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -3184,19 +3581,19 @@ Print the complete Dive List: to do this, <em>Table Print</em> should be selecte <li>
<p>
Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 6
-dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>6 dives per page</em>.
+ dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>6 dives per page</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 2
-dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>2 dives per page</em>.
+ dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>2 dives per page</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 1
-dive per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>1 dive per page</em>.
+ dive per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>1 dive per page</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3205,8 +3602,8 @@ dive per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>1 dive per page</em>. <li>
<p>
Printing only the dives that have been selected from the dive list prior to
-activating the print dialogue, achieved by checking the box <em>Print only
-selected dives</em>.
+ activating the print dialogue, achieved by checking the box <em>Print only
+ selected dives</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3241,83 +3638,136 @@ the output for one particular page.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Preferences">10. Setting user <em>Preferences</em> for <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="S_Configure">11. Configuring a dive computer</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> enables one to configure a dive computer. Currently the Heinrichs-Weikamp (OSTC 2, OSTC 3) and
+Suunto Vyper (Stinger, Mosquito, D3, Vyper, Vytec,
+Cobra, Gekko and Zoop) family of dive computers are supported. A large number of settings of these dive computers
+can be read and changed to different values. As a first step, ensure that the appropriate hardware driver
+is installed for the dive computer and that the device name of the dive computer is known.
+See <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">APPENDIX A</a> for information on how to do this.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dive computer is connected to the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, select <em>File → Configure dive
+computer</em> from the <em>Main Menu</em>. Provide the appropriate device name in the text box at the
+top of the configuration panel that opens and select the appropriate dive
+computer model from the panel on the lefthand (see image below).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Configure_dc_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Configure dive computer" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the appropriate buttons on the configuration panel, the following actions can be performed:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Retrieve available details</strong>. This loads the existing configuration from the dive computer
+ to <em>Subsurface</em>, showing this in the configuration panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Save changes to device</strong>. This changes the configuration of the
+ dive computer to correspond to the information shown in the configuration panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Backup</strong>. This saves the configuration data to a file. <em>Subsurface</em> asks for
+ a file location and file name for the saved information.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Restore backup</strong>. This loads the information from a backup file and displays it
+ in the configuration panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Update firmware</strong>. If new firmware is available for the dive computer, this is
+ loaded into the dive computer.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_Preferences">12. Setting user <em>Preferences</em> for <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings within <em>Subsurface</em> that the user can specify. These
-are found when selecting <em>File→Preferences</em>. The settings are performed in
+are found when selecting <em>File → Preferences</em>. The settings are performed in
five groups: <strong>Defaults</strong>, <strong>Units</strong>, <strong>Graph</strong>, <strong>Language</strong> and <strong>Network</strong>. All five sections
operate on the same principles: the user must specify the settings that are to be changed, then
these changes are saved using the <strong>Apply</strong> button. After applying all the new settings users can then
leave the settings panel by selecting <strong>OK</strong>.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_defaults">10.1. Defaults</h3>
+<h3 id="_defaults">12.1. Defaults</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings in the <strong>Defaults</strong> panel:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences defaults page" />
+<img src="images/Pref1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences defaults page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Lists and tables</strong>: Here one can specify the font type and font size of the
-<strong>Dive Table</strong> panel. By decreasing the font size of the <strong>Dive Table</strong>, users can see more dives on a screen.
+ <strong>Dive Table</strong> panel. By decreasing the font size of the <strong>Dive Table</strong>, users can see more dives on a screen.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Dives</strong>: For the <em>Default Dive File</em> one need to specify the directory and
-file name of one’s
-electronic dive log book. This is a file with filename extension .xml. When
-launched, <em>Subsurface</em> will automatically load the specified dive log book.
+ file name of one’s
+ electronic dive log book. This is a file with filename extension .xml. When
+ launched, <em>Subsurface</em> will automatically load the specified dive log book.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Display invalid</strong>: Dives can be marked as invalid (when a user wishes to hide
-dives that he/she don’t consider valid dives, e.g. pool dives, but still want to
-keep them in the dive log). This controls whether those dives are displayed in
-the dive list.
+ dives that he/she don’t consider valid dives, e.g. pool dives, but still want to
+ keep them in the dive log). This controls whether those dives are displayed in
+ the dive list.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Default cylinder</strong>: Here users can specify the default cylinder listed in
-the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel.
+ the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Animations</strong>: Some actions in showing the dive profile are performed using
-animations. For instance, the axis values for depth and time change from dive to
-dive. When viewing a different dive, these changes in axis characteristics do not
-happen instantaneously, but are animated. The <em>Speed</em> of animations can be controlled
-by setting this slider
-with faster animation speed to the left, with a 0 value representing no animation
-at all.
+ animations. For instance, the axis values for depth and time change from dive to
+ dive. When viewing a different dive, these changes in axis characteristics do not
+ happen instantaneously, but are animated. The <em>Speed</em> of animations can be controlled
+ by setting this slider
+ with faster animation speed to the left, with a 0 value representing no animation
+ at all.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Subsurface web service</strong>: When one subscribes to the <a href="#S_Companion">Subsurface web service</a>, a very
-long and hard-to-remember userID is issued. This is the place to save that userID. By
-checking the option <em>Save User ID locally?</em>, one ensures that a local copy of that userID
-is saved.
+ long and hard-to-remember userID is issued. This is the place to save that userID. By
+ checking the option <em>Save User ID locally?</em>, one ensures that a local copy of that userID
+ is saved.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Clear all settings</strong>: As indicated in the button below this heading, all settings are
-cleared and set to default values.
+ cleared and set to default values.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_units">10.2. Units</h3>
+<h3 id="_units">12.2. Units</h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Units page" />
+<img src="images/Pref2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Units page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Here user can choose between metric and imperial units of depth, pressure,
@@ -3327,10 +3777,10 @@ Alternatively, if one selects the <strong>Personalise</strong> radio button, uni independently, with some units in the metric system and others in imperial.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_graph">10.3. Graph</h3>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<h3 id="_graph">12.3. Graph</h3>
+<div class="imageblock" id="S_CCR_options" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Graph page" />
+<img src="images/Pref3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Graph page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph" id="S_GradientFactors"><p>This panel allows two type of selections:</p></div>
@@ -3338,24 +3788,24 @@ independently, with some units in the metric system and others in imperial.</p>< <li>
<p>
<strong>Show</strong>: Here users can specify the amount of information shown as part of
-the dive profile:
+ the dive profile:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Thresholds: <em>Subsurface</em> can display the nitrogen, oxygen and the helium partial pressures during
-the dive. These are enabled using the toolbar on the left hand side of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
-panel. For each of these graphs users can specify a threshold value on the right-hand side of the
-Preferences panel. If any of the graphs go above this threshold level, the graph is
-highlighted in red, indicating that the threshold has been exceeded.
+ the dive. These are enabled using the toolbar on the left hand side of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
+ panel. For each of these graphs users can specify a threshold value on the right-hand side of the
+ Preferences panel. If any of the graphs go above this threshold level, the graph is
+ highlighted in red, indicating that the threshold has been exceeded.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Draw dive computer reported ceiling red</em>: This checkbox allows exactly what it says.
-Not all dive computers report ceiling values. If the dive computer does report it, it may differ
-from the ceilings calculated by <em>Subsurface</em>. This is because of the different algorithms and gradient factors available for calculating ceilings, as well as the dynamic way that a
-dive computer can calculate ceilings during a dive.
+ Not all dive computers report ceiling values. If the dive computer does report it, it may differ
+ from the ceilings calculated by <em>Subsurface</em>. This is because of the different algorithms and gradient factors available for calculating ceilings, as well as the dynamic way that a
+ dive computer can calculate ceilings during a dive.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3366,7 +3816,7 @@ dive computer can calculate ceilings during a dive. <li>
<p>
<em>Show average depth</em>: Activating this checkbox causes <em>Subsurface</em> to draw a red line across
-the dive profile, indicating the mean depth of the dive.
+ the dive profile, indicating the mean depth of the dive.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3379,18 +3829,18 @@ the dive profile, indicating the mean depth of the dive. <li>
<p>
Gradient Factors:* Here users can set the <em>gradient factors</em> used while diving. GF_Low is
-the gradient factor at depth and GF_High is used just below the surface.
-At intermediate depths gradient factors between GF_Low and GF_High are used.
-Gradient factors add conservatism to the nitrogen exposure during a dive, in a
-similar way that many dive computers have a conservatism setting. The lower
-the value of a gradient factor, the more conservative the calculations are with
-respect to nitrogen loading and the deeper the ascent ceilings are. Gradient
-factors of 20/60 are considered conservative and values of 60/90 are considered
-harsh. Checking <strong>GFLow at max depth</strong> box causes GF_Low to be used at the
-deepest depth of a dive. If this box is not checked, GF_Low is applied at
-all depths deeper than the first deco stop. For more information see:
+ the gradient factor at depth and GF_High is used just below the surface.
+ At intermediate depths gradient factors between GF_Low and GF_High are used.
+ Gradient factors add conservatism to the nitrogen exposure during a dive, in a
+ similar way that many dive computers have a conservatism setting. The lower
+ the value of a gradient factor, the more conservative the calculations are with
+ respect to nitrogen loading and the deeper the ascent ceilings are. Gradient
+ factors of 20/60 are considered conservative and values of 60/90 are considered
+ harsh. Checking <strong>GFLow at max depth</strong> box causes GF_Low to be used at the
+ deepest depth of a dive. If this box is not checked, GF_Low is applied at
+ all depths deeper than the first deco stop. For more information see:
</p>
-</li>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
@@ -3403,14 +3853,60 @@ all depths deeper than the first deco stop. For more information see: </li>
</ul></div>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CCR: Show setpoints when viewing pO2:</em> With this checkbox ativated, the pO<sub>2</sub>
+ graph on the dive profile has an overlay in red which inticates the CCR setpoint
+ values. See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CCR: Show individual O<sub>2</sub> sensor values when viewing pO<sub>2</sub>:</em> Show the pO<sub>2</sub>
+ values associated with each of the individual oxygen sensors of a CCR system.
+ See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Configuring dive planning using rebreather equipment:</strong>
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Default CCR setpoint for dive planning:</em> Specify the O<sub>2</sub> setpoint for a
+ CCR dive plan. This determines the pO<sub>2</sub> that will be maintained
+ during a particular dive. This is the setpoint that is used at the start
+ of any CCR dive. Setpoint changes during the dive can be added via the
+ profile context menu.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>pSCR O<sub>2</sub> metabolism rate:</em> For a semiclosed rebreather (pSCR) system, this is the
+ volume of oxygen used by a diver each minute. Set this value for pSCR dive planning
+ and decompression calculations.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>pSCR ratio:</em> For pSCR equipment the dump ratio is the ratio of gas released to the
+ environment to that of the gas recirculated to the diver. Set this value for a
+ pSCR dive plan.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_language">10.4. Language</h3>
+<h3 id="_language">12.4. Language</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Choose a language that <em>Subsurface</em> will use.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Language page" />
+<img src="images/Pref4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Language page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>A checkbox allows one to use the <em>System Default</em> language which in most cases
@@ -3423,11 +3919,11 @@ or French. This particular preference requires a restart of <em>Subsurface</em> effect.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_network">10.5. Network</h3>
+<h3 id="_network">12.5. Network</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel facilitates communication between <em>Subsurface</em> and data sources on the Internet.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref5.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Network page" />
+<img src="images/Pref5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Network page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This is important, for instance, when <em>Subsurface</em> needs to communicate with Internet
@@ -3442,14 +3938,31 @@ be provided. If the proxy server uses authentication, the appropriate userID and password also needs to be provided so that <em>Subsurface</em> can automatically pass
through the proxy server to access the Internet.</p></div>
</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_facebook_accesss">12.6. Facebook Accesss</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel allows one to log into a Facebook account in order to transfer information
+from Subsurface to Facefook.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Facebook login panel" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If one provides a valid Facebook userID and password, a
+connection to Facebook is created. The connection to Facebook is closed when one
+closes down Subsurface. At this point the checkbox labelled "Keep connection to Subsurface",
+on the login screen has no effect.
+See the section <a href="#S_facebook">Exporting dive profiles to Facebook</a>
+for more information.</p></div>
+</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">11. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner</h2>
+<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">13. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive planning is an advanced feature of <em>Subsurface</em>, accessible by selecting <em>Log → Plan Dive</em> from the main menu. It allows calculation of
-nitrogen load during a dive by using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm with the addition of gradient factors as
-implemented by Erik Baker.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive planning is an advanced feature of <em>Subsurface</em>, accessible by selecting
+<em>Log → Plan Dive</em> from the main menu. It allows calculation of
+nitrogen load during a dive by using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm with the addition
+of gradient factors as implemented by Erik Baker.</p></div>
<div class="sidebarblock">
<div class="content">
<div class="admonitionblock">
@@ -3466,7 +3979,7 @@ user interface. It is explicitly used under the following conditions:</td> <li>
<p>
The user is conversant with dive planning and has the necessary training to perform
-dive planning.
+ dive planning.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3477,8 +3990,8 @@ The user plans dives within his/her certification limits. <li>
<p>
Dive planning makes large assumptions about the characteristics of the <em>average person</em>
-and cannot compensate for individual physiology or health or personal history or
-life style characteristics.
+ and cannot compensate for individual physiology or health or personal history or
+ life style characteristics.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3494,13 +4007,13 @@ The user is familiar with the user interface of <em>Subsurface</em>. <li>
<p>
A user who is not absolutely sure about any of the above requirements should not use
-this feature.
+ this feature.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_em_subsurface_em_dive_planner_screen">11.1. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner screen</h3>
+<h3 id="_the_em_subsurface_em_dive_planner_screen">13.1. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner screen</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Like the <em>Subsurface</em> dive log, the planner screen is divided into several sections (see image below). The <strong>setup</strong>
parameters for a dive are entered into the several sections on the left hand side of the screen.
The setup is divided into several sections: Available Gases, Rates, Planning, Gas Options and Dive Notes.</p></div>
@@ -3512,70 +4025,72 @@ the dive plan are provided in a way that can easily be copied to other software. any warning messages about the dive plan are printed.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/PlannerWindow1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Dive planner startup window" />
+<img src="images/PlannerWindow1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Dive planner startup window" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_initiating_dive_planning">11.2. Initiating dive planning</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive planner comprises two parts: <strong>constructing a dive plan</strong> and <strong>evaluating</strong>
-that dive plan. To perform dive planning, perform these steps:</p></div>
+<h3 id="_open_circuit_dives_as_an_example_of_dive_planning">13.2. Open circuit dives as an example of dive planning</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Clear the existing dive log by creating a new planning log. This is achieved by selecting
-<em>File → New logbook</em> from the main menu. This way, dive plans are kept separate
-from the existing dive log of completed dives.
+Towards the left bottom of the planner (circled in blue in the image below) is a dropbox with three options. Select the appropriate one of these:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Open Circuit (the default)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+CCR
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+pSCR
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
-In the top left-hand area of the screen, ensure that the constant dive parameters are
-appropriate. These are: Start date and time of the dive, Atmospheric Pressure and Altitude
-above sea level of the dive site. The atmospheric pressure can also be entered as an altitude
-in metres, assuming an atmospheric pressure of 1.013 bar.
+In the top left-hand area of the planning screen, ensure that the constant dive parameters are
+ appropriate. These are: Start date and time of the dive, Atmospheric Pressure and Altitude
+ above sea level of the dive site. The atmospheric pressure can also be entered as an altitude
+ in metres, assuming an atmospheric pressure of 1.013 bar.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
In the table labelled <em>Available Gases</em>, add the information of the cylinders to be used
-as well as the gas composition within that cylinder. This is done in a similar way as for
-<a href="#S_CylinderData">providing cylinder data for dive logs</a>. Choose the cylinder type by
-double clicking the cylinder type and using the dropdown list, then specify the work
-pressure of this cylinder. By leaving the oxygen concentration (O2%) filed empty,
-the dive gas is assumed to be air. Otherwise enter the oxygen and/or helium
-concentration in the boxes provided in this dialogue. Add additional cylinders by using the
-"+" icon to the top righthand of the dialogue.
+ as well as the gas composition within that cylinder. This is done in a similar way as for
+ <a href="#S_CylinderData">providing cylinder data for dive logs</a>. Choose the cylinder type by
+ double clicking the cylinder type and using the dropdown list, then specify the work
+ pressure of this cylinder. By leaving the oxygen concentration (O2%) filed empty,
+ the cylinder is assumed to contain air. Otherwise enter the oxygen and/or helium
+ concentration in the boxes provided in this dialogue. Add additional cylinders by using the
+ "+" icon to the top righthand of the dialogue.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
The dialogue indicating <em>Dive Planner Points</em> is usually not used at this stage of the dive
-planning.
+ planning.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_managing_nitrogen_oxygen_and_gas_consumption">11.3. Managing nitrogen, oxygen and gas consumption</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The planning is performed in three stages:</p></div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-<strong>a) Nitrogen management</strong>: This is performed by specifying the rates for descent and ascent,
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>The planning is performed in three stages</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>a) Nitrogen management</strong>: This is performed by specifying the rates for descent and ascent,
as well as the gradient factors (GFLow and GFHigh) under the headings <em>Rates</em> and <em>Planning</em>
to the bottom left of the planning screen. Initially, the GFHigh and GFLow values in the <em>Preferences</em>
panel of <em>Subsurface</em> is used. If these are changed within the planner (see <em>Gas Options</em> within
the planner), the new values are
-used without changing the original specifications in the <em>Preferences</em>. Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their depths.
+used without changing the original values in the <em>Preferences</em>. Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their depths.
A very low GFLow value brings about decompression stops early on during the dive.
-</p>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>.
-For more information external to this manual see:
-</p>
+ ** For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>.
+For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -3594,112 +4109,82 @@ An excellent non-technical review. </p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-The ascent rate is critical for nitrogen off-gassing at the end of the dive and is specified
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The ascent rate is critical for nitrogen off-gassing at the end of the dive and is specified
for several depth ranges, utilising the average (or mean) depth as a yardstick. The mean depth
-of the dive plan is indicated on the dive profile in the green panel of the dive planner. Ascent rates
+of the dive plan is indicated by a light grey line on the dive profile. Ascent rates
at deeper levels are often in the range of 8-12 m/min, while ascent rates near the surface are
often in the range of 4-9 m/min. The descent rate is also specified. If the option <em>Drop to first depth</em>
is activated, then the descent phase of the planned dive will be at the maximal descent rate specified
-in the <em>Rates</em> section of the dive setup.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-<strong>b) Oxygen management</strong>: In the <strong>Gas Options</strong> part of the dive specification, the maximum partial
+in the <em>Rates</em> section of the dive setup.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>b) Oxygen management</strong>: In the <strong>Gas Options</strong> part of the dive specification, the maximum partial
pressure for oxygen needs to be specified for the
bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom po2</em>) as well as for the decompression part of the dive (<em>deco po2</em>).
The most commonly
used values are 1.4 bar for the bottom part of the dive and 1.6 bar for any decompression
stages. Normally, a partial pressure of 1.6 bar is not exceeded. PO2 settings and the depth at which switching to a gas takes place can also be edited in the
<em>Available Gases</em> dialog. Normally the planner decides on switching to a new gas when, during
-ascent, the partial pressure of the new gas has decreased to 1.6 bar.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-<strong>c) Gas management</strong>: One needs keep within the limits of the amount of gas contained in the dive
-cylinder(s), allowing for an appropriate margin for safe return to the surface, possibly
+ascent, the partial pressure of the new gas has increased to 1.6 bar.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>c) Gas management</strong>: With open-circuit dives this is a primary consideration. One needs to keep within the limits of the amount of gas within the dive
+cylinder(s), allowing for an appropriate margin for a safe return to the surface, possibly
sharing with a buddy. Under the <em>Gas Options</em> heading, specify the best (but conservative) estimate
of your surface-equivalent air consumption (SAC, also termed RMV) in
litres/min (for the time being, only SI units are supported). Specify the SAC during the
bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom SAC</em>) as well as during the decompression or safety stops of the
-dive (<em>deco SAC</em>). Values of 20-30 l/min are common. For good gas management, a thumbsuck guess
+dive (<em>deco SAC</em>). Values of 15-30 l/min are common. For good gas management, a thumbsuck guess
is not sufficient and one needs to
monitor one’s gas consumption on a regular basis, dependent on different dive conditions and/or equipment.
-The planner will calculate the total volume of gas used during the dive and will issue a warning
+The planner calculates the total volume of gas used during the dive and issues a warning
if one exceeds the total amount of gas available. Good practice demands that one does not dive to
the limit of the gas supply but that an appropriate reserve is kept for unforeseen circumstances.
-For technical diving, this reserve can be up to 66% of the total available gas.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Now (at last) one can start the detailed time-depth planning of the dive. <em>Subsurface</em> offers a unique
+For technical diving, this reserve can be up to 66% of the total available gas.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now (at last) one can start the detailed time-depth planning of the dive. <em>Subsurface</em> offers a unique
graphical interface for performing this part of the planning. The mechanics of doing this is
similar to hand-entering a dive profile in the dive log part of <em>Subsurface</em>. Upon activating the
-planner, a default dive of depth 15 m for 40 min is offered in the green design surface to the top
+planner, a default dive of depth 15 m for 40 min is offered in the bue design surface to the top
right hand of the screen. The white dots (waypoints) on the
profile can be dragged with a mouse. Create more waypoints by double-clicking on the profile
line and ensuring that the profile reflects the intended dive. Drag the waypoints to represent
-the depth and duration of the dive.
+the depth and duration of the dive. It is NOt necessary to specify the ascent part of the dive
+since the planner calculates this, based on the settings that have been specified.
If any of the management limits (for nitrogen, oxygen or gas) is exceeded, the surface
-above the dive profile changes from BLUE to RED.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Each waypoint on the dive profile creates a <em>Dive Planner Point</em> in the table on the
+above the dive profile changes from BLUE to RED.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Each waypoint on the dive profile creates a <em>Dive Planner Point</em> in the table on the
left of the dive planner panel. Ensure that the <em>Used Gas</em> value in each row
-of that table corresponds to one of the gas mixtures specified in the table with
-<em>Available Gases</em> immediately above the Dive Planner Points. Add new waypoints
-until the main features of the dive have been completed, e.g. the
+of that table corresponds to one of the gas mixtures specified in the <em>Available Gases</em> table.
+Add new waypoints until the main features of the dive have been completed, e.g. the
bottom time segment and deep stops (if these are implemented). Leave the remaining
waypoints on the ascent to <em>Subsurface</em>. In most cases <em>Subsurface</em>
computes additional way points in order to fulfil decompression requirements for that
-dive.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-A waypoint can be moved by selecting that waypoint and by using the arrow keys.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
+dive. A waypoint can be moved by selecting that waypoint and by using the arrow keys.
The waypoints listed in the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialogue can be edited by hand in
order to obtain a precise presentation of the dive plan. In fact, one can create the
-whole dive profile by editing the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialog.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Indicate any changes in gas cylinder used by indicating gas changes as explained
+whole dive profile by editing the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialog.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Indicate any changes in gas cylinder used by indicating gas changes as explained
in the section <a href="#S_CreateProfile">hand-creating a dive profile</a>. These changes should
reflect the cylinders and gas compositions defined in the table with <em>Available Gases</em>.
If two or more gases are used, automatic gas switches will be suggested during the ascent to
the surface. However, these changes can be deleted by right-clicking the gas change and by
-manually creating a gas change by right-clicking on the appropriate waypoint.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
+manually creating a gas change by right-clicking on the appropriate
+waypoint.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A non-zero value in the "CC set point" column of the table of dive planner points
+indicates a valid setpoint for oxygen partial pressure and that the segment
+is dived using a closed circuit rebreather (CCR). If the last manually entered
+segment is a CCR segment, the decompression phase is computed assuming the diver
+uses a CCR with the specified set-point. If the last segment (however
+short) is on open circuit (OC, indicated by a zero set-point) the
+decompression is computed in OC mode. The planner only considers gas
+changes in OC mode.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an example of a dive plan to 45m using EAN26, followed by an ascent using EAN50
and using the settings as described above.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DivePlanner2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a dive: setup" />
+<img src="images/DivePlanner2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a dive: setup" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the above has been completed, one can save it by clicking the <em>Save</em> button
-towards the bottom left of the green design panel. The saved dive plan will appear
+towards the top middle of the planner. The saved dive plan will appear
in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_dive_plan_details">11.4. The dive plan details</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>The dive plan details</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>On the bottom right of the dive planner, under <em>Dive Plan Details</em>, the exact details
of the dive plan are provided. These details may be modified by checking any of the
options under the <em>Dive Notes</em> section of the dive planner, immediately to the left
@@ -3713,15 +4198,64 @@ time to get to that level. However, if the <em>Display transition in deco</em> o the transitions are shown separately from the segment durations at a particular level.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Replan">11.5. Modifying an existing dive plan</h3>
+<h3 id="_planning_ccr_dives">13.3. Planning CCR dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To plan a dive using a closed circuit rebreather, select the <em>CCR</em> option in the dropdown
+list, circled in blue in the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Available gases</strong>: In the <em>Available gases</em> table, enter the cylinder information for the
+diluent cylinder and for any bail-out cylinders. Do NOT enter the information for the oxygen
+cylinder since it is implied when the <em>CCR</em> dropdown selection is made.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Entering setpoints</strong>: Specify a default setpoint in the Preferences tab, by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Graph</em> from the main menu. All user-entered segments in the <em>Dive planner points</em> table
+use the default setpoint value. Then, different setpoints can be specified for dive segments
+in the <em>Dive planner points</em> table. A zero setpoint
+means the diver bails out to open circuit mode for that segment. The decompression is always calculated
+using the setpoint of the last manually entered segment. So, to plan a bail out ascent for a
+CCR dive, add a one-minute dive segment to the end with a setpoint value of 0. The decompression
+algorithm does not switch deco-gases automatically while in CCR mode (i.e. when a positive setpoint is specified) but, of course, this is calculated for bail out ascents.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive profile for a CCR dive may look something like the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Planner_CCR1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a CCR dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that, in the <em>Dive plan details</em>, the gas consumption for a CCR segment is not calculated,
+so gas consumptions of 0 litres are the norm.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_planning_pscr_dives">13.4. Planning pSCR dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To plan a dive using a passive semi-closed rebreather (pSCR), select <em>pSCR</em> rather than
+<em>Open circuit</em> in the dropdown list.
+The parameters of the pSCR diver can be set by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Graph</em>
+from the main menu, where the gas consumption calculation takes into account the pSCR dump
+ratio (default 10:1) as well as the metabolism rate. The calculation also takes the oxygen drop
+accross the mouthpiece of the rebreather into account. If the
+pO<sub>2</sub> drops below what is considered a save value, a warning apears in the <em>Dive plan
+details</em>. A typical pSCR configuration is with a single cylinder and one or more bail-out
+cylinders. Therefore the setup of the <em>Available gases</em> and the <em>Dive planner points</em> tables
+are very similar to that of a CCR dive plan, described above. However, no oxygen setpoints
+are specified for pSCR dives. Below is a dive plan for a pSCR dive. The dive is comparable
+to that of the CCR dive above, but note the longer ascent duration due to the lower oxygen
+in the loop due to the oxygen drop accross the mouthpiece of the pSCR equipment.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Planner_pSCR1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a pSCR dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Replan">13.5. Modifying an existing dive plan</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, when a dive plan has been saved, it is accessible from the <strong>Dive List</strong>, like any
other dive log. Within the <strong>Dive List</strong> there is not a way to change a saved dive plan.
To perform changes to a dive plan, select it on the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Then, in the main menu,
-select <em>Log → Re-plan dive</em>. This will open the selected dive plan within the dive planner,
+select <em>Log → Re-plan dive</em>. This will open the selected dive plan within the dive planner,
allowing changes to be made and saved as usual.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In addition there is the option "Save new". This keeps the original
+planned dive and adds a (possibly modified) copy to the dive list. If
+that copy is saved with the same start time as the original, the two
+dives are considered two versions of the same dive and do not
+influence other each during decompression calculation (see next section).</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_planning_for_repetitive_dives">11.6. Planning for repetitive dives</h3>
+<h3 id="_planning_for_repetitive_dives">13.6. Planning for repetitive dives</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Repetitive dives can easily be planned if the dates and start times of the
repetitive dive set
is specified appropriately in the top left-hand <em>Start Time</em> field. <em>Subsurface</em>
@@ -3738,7 +4272,7 @@ this configuration, just highlight the template dive in the <strong>Dive List</s planner: the planner takes into account the configuration in the highlighted dive.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_printing_the_dive_plan">11.7. Printing the dive plan</h3>
+<h3 id="_printing_the_dive_plan">13.7. Printing the dive plan</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the <em>Print</em> button in the planner allows printing of the <em>Dive Plan Details</em>
for wet notes. Alternatively one can cut and paste the <em>Dive Plan Details</em> for
inclusion in a text file or word processing document.</p></div>
@@ -3749,29 +4283,30 @@ the <em>Print</em> button in the dive planner. This prints the dive details and in the <em>Dive Plan Details</em> panel of the dive planner. However, after the plan has been saved, it is
represented in a way very similar to a dive log and the gas calculations cannot be
accessed in the same way as during the planning process. The only way to print the
-dive plan is to use the <em>File→Print</em> facility on the main menu in the same way as for dive logs.</p></div>
+dive plan is to use the <em>File → Print</em> facility on the main menu in the
+same way as for dive logs or by copy and paste to a word processor.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_description_of_the_subsurface_main_menu_items">12. Description of the Subsurface Main Menu items</h2>
+<h2 id="_description_of_the_subsurface_main_menu_items">14. Description of the Subsurface Main Menu items</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>This section describes the functions and operation of the items in the Main Menu
of Subsurface. Several of the items below are links to sections of this manual
dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_file">12.1. File</h3>
+<h3 id="_file">14.1. File</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_NewLogbook"><em>New Logbook</em></a> - Close the currently open dive logbook and
-clear all dive information.
+ clear all dive information.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Open logbook</em> - This opens the file manager in order to select a dive
-logbook to open.
+ logbook to open.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3792,7 +4327,7 @@ logbook to open. <li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ExportLog"><em>Export</em></a> - Export the currently open dive logbook (or
-the selected dives in the logbook) to one of several formats.
+ the selected dives in the logbook) to one of several formats.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3807,47 +4342,47 @@ the selected dives in the logbook) to one of several formats. </li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Quit</em> - Quit <em>Subsurface</em>.
+<a href="#S_Configure"><em>Configure dive computer</em></a> - Edit the configuration of a dive computer.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Configure dive computer</em> - This option is currently experimental and under development.
+<em>Quit</em> - Quit <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_import">12.2. Import</h3>
+<h3 id="_import">14.2. Import</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer"><em>Import from dive computer</em></a> - Import dive information
-from a dive computer.
+ from a dive computer.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#Unified_import"><em>Import Log Files</em></a> - Import dive information from a file in
-in a <em>Subsurface</em>-compatible format.
+ in a <em>Subsurface</em>-compatible format.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Import GPS data from Subsurface Service</em></a> - Load GPS
-coordinates from the <em>Subsurface</em> mobile phone app.
+<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Import GPS data from Subsurface web service</em></a> - Load GPS
+ coordinates from the <em>Subsurface</em> mobile phone app.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ImportingDivelogsDe"><em>Import from Divelogs.de</em></a> - Import dive information
-from <em>www.Divelogs.de</em>.
+ from <em>www.Divelogs.de</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_log">12.3. Log</h3>
+<h3 id="_log">14.3. Log</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -3873,19 +4408,19 @@ from <em>www.Divelogs.de</em>. <li>
<p>
<em>Paste dive components</em> - Paste, into the selected dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong>,
- the information copied using the <em>Copy dive components</em> option.
+ the information copied using the <em>Copy dive components</em> option.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_Renumber"><em>Renumber</em></a> - Renumber the dives listed in the <strong>Dive List</strong>
-panel.
+ panel.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_Group"><em>Auto Group</em></a> - Group the dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel into dive
-trips.
+ trips.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3893,15 +4428,20 @@ trips. <a href="#S_DeviceNames"><em>Edit Device Names</em></a> - Edit the names of dive computers to facilitate your logs.
</p>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Filter"><em>Filter divelist</em></a> - Select only some dives, based on specific tags or dive criteria.
+</p>
+</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_view">12.4. View</h3>
+<h3 id="_view">14.4. View</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>All</em></a> - View the four main <em>Subsurface</em> panels
-simmultaneously.
+ simmultaneously.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3927,17 +4467,17 @@ simmultaneously. <li>
<p>
<em>Yearly Statistics</em> - Display summary statistics about dives during this and past
-years.
+ years.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Prev DC</em> - Switch to next dive computer.
+<em>Prev DC</em> - Switch to previous dive computer.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Next DC</em> - Switch to previous dive computer.
+<em>Next DC</em> - Switch to next dive computer.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3948,33 +4488,28 @@ years. </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_filter">12.5. Filter</h3>
+<h3 id="_help">14.5. Help</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Select Events</em> - This option is not implemented yet.
+<em>About Subsurface</em> - Show a panel with the version number of <em>Subsurface</em> as
+ well as licensing information.
</p>
</li>
-</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_help">12.6. Help</h3>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<em>About Subsurface</em> - Show a panel with the version number of <em>Subsurface</em> as
-well as licensing information.
+<em>Check for updates</em> - Find out whether a newer version of Subsurface is available
+ on the <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/"><em>Subsurface</em> web site</a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Check for updates</em> - Find out whether a newer version of Subsurface is available
-on the <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/"><em>Subsurface</em> web site</a>.
+<a href="#S_UserSurvey"><em>User survey</em></a> - Help to make <em>Subsurface</em> even better by taking part in our user survey.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>User Manual</em> - Open a window showing this user manual.
+<em>User manual</em> - Open a window showing this user manual.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3982,10 +4517,10 @@ on the <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/"><em>Subsurface</em> web site</a> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">13. APPENDIX A: Operating system specific information for importing dive information from a dive computer.</h2>
+<h2 id="_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">15. APPENDIX A: Operating system specific information for importing dive information from a dive computer.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_make_sure_that_the_os_has_the_required_drivers_installed">13.1. Make sure that the OS has the required drivers installed</h3>
+<h3 id="_make_sure_that_the_os_has_the_required_drivers_installed">15.1. Make sure that the OS has the required drivers installed</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4026,7 +4561,7 @@ On a Mac users sometimes have to manually hunt for the correct </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">13.2. How to Find the Device Name for USB devices and set its write permission</h3>
+<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">15.2. How to Find the Device Name for USB devices and set its write permission</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4117,6 +4652,12 @@ be listed among the different IDs.
</p>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Under some circumstances this change takes only effect (eg. on Ubuntu) after
+one logs out and then logs in again.
+</p>
+</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>With the appropriate device name (e.g. <code>dev/ttyUSB3</code>) and with write permission
to the USB
@@ -4124,7 +4665,7 @@ port, the dive computer interface can connect and one should be able to import dives.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">13.3. Setting up bluetooth enabled devices</h3>
+<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">15.3. Setting up bluetooth enabled devices</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4145,7 +4686,7 @@ different procedure to get the devices name to communicate with </ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>For Bluetooth pairing of the dive computer, refer to the
manufacturer’s user guide. When using a Shearwater Predator/Petrel, select
-<em>Dive Log → Upload Log</em> and wait for the <em>Wait PC</em> message.</p></div>
+<em>Dive Log → Upload Log</em> and wait for the <em>Wait PC</em> message.</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -4154,9 +4695,9 @@ manufacturer’s user guide. When using a Shearwater Predator/Petrel, select </li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On Windows:</div><p>Bluetooth is most likely already enabled. For pairing with the dive computer choose
-<em>Control Panel→Bluetooth Devices→Add Wireless Device</em>.
+<em>Control Panel → Bluetooth Devices → Add Wireless Device</em>.
This should bring up a dialog showing your dive computer (in Bluetooth mode) and
-allowing pairing. Right click on it and choose <em>Properties→COM
+allowing pairing. Right click on it and choose <em>Propertie s→ COM
Ports</em> to identify the port used for your dive computer. If there are several
ports listed, use the one saying "Outgoing" instead of "Incoming".</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>For downloading to <em>Subsurface</em>, the <em>Subsurface</em> drop-down list should contain
@@ -4187,23 +4728,23 @@ enable it, in case of <code>initd</code>, run something like <code>rc.config sta <li>
<p>
<code>hciconfig</code> shows the Bluetooth devices available on your
-computer (not dive computer), most likely one will see a hci0, if not
-try <code>hcitool -a</code> to see inactive devices and run <code>sudo
-hciconfig hci0 up</code> to bring them up.
+ computer (not dive computer), most likely one will see a hci0, if not
+ try <code>hcitool -a</code> to see inactive devices and run <code>sudo
+ hciconfig hci0 up</code> to bring them up.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<code>hcitool scanning</code> gets a list of bluetooth enabled
-client devices, look for the dive computer and remember the MAC
-address are shown there
+ client devices, look for the dive computer and remember the MAC
+ address are shown there
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<code>bluez-simple-agent hci0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> pairs
-the dive computer with the bluetooth stack of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, copy/paste
-the MAC address from the output of <em>hcitool scanning</em>
+ the dive computer with the bluetooth stack of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, copy/paste
+ the MAC address from the output of <em>hcitool scanning</em>
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4213,10 +4754,10 @@ manually by running:</p></div> <li>
<p>
<code>rfcomm bind /dev/rfcomm0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> binds the dive
-computer to a communication device in the desktop computer, in case rfcomm is
-already taken use rfcomm1 or up. IMPORTANT: Copy/paste the MAC address
-from the output of <code>hcitool scanning</code>, the MAC address shown above will not
-work.
+ computer to a communication device in the desktop computer, in case rfcomm is
+ already taken use rfcomm1 or up. IMPORTANT: Copy/paste the MAC address
+ from the output of <code>hcitool scanning</code>, the MAC address shown above will not
+ work.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4226,10 +4767,10 @@ address in the last step above, e.g. <em>/dev/rfcomm0</em>.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">14. APPENDIX B: Dive Computer specific information for importing dive information.</h2>
+<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">16. APPENDIX B: Dive Computer specific information for importing dive data.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">14.1. Import from a Uemis Zurich</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">16.1. Importing from Uemis Zurich</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4267,7 +4808,7 @@ may have to do this more than once, depending on how many dives are stored on the dive computer.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">14.2. Importing dives from the Uwatec Galileo</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">16.2. Importing from Uwatec Galileo</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4297,7 +4838,7 @@ available from some Internet web sites e.g. available for OSX 10.6 or higher.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">14.3. Importing dives from Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">16.3. Importing from Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4315,7 +4856,24 @@ factors in the <em>Graph Settings</em> in <em>Subsurface</em> to generate a deco </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_import_from_shearwater_predator_using_bluetooth">14.4. Import from Shearwater Predator using Bluetooth</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingXDeep">16.4. Importing from xDEEP BLACK</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/HW_xdeepblack.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Each dive has to be individually saved as UDDF file using "Export UDDF" option in BLACK’s logbook menu.
+When mounted as a USB drive UDDF files are available in LOGBOOK directory.
+Note: The xDEEP BLACK saves NDL time but does not seem to store gradient factors nor deco information, so
+for <em>Subsurface</em> it is not possible to display them. Adjust the gradient
+factors in the <em>Graph Settings</em> in <em>Subsurface</em> to generate a deco overlay in the
+<em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel but please note that the deco calculated by
+<em>Subsurface</em> will most likely differ from the one displayed on the xDEEP BLACK.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_importing_from_shearwater_predator_using_bluetooth">16.5. Importing from Shearwater Predator using Bluetooth</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4349,7 +4907,7 @@ switch off WiFi while using Bluetooth </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">14.5. Importing dive logs from the Poseidon MkVI Discovery</h3>
+<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">16.6. Importing from Poseidon MkVI Discovery</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4367,7 +4925,7 @@ can be downloaded at a time, comprising three files:</td> <li>
<p>
Setup configuration for the dive and key dive parameters (file with a .txt
-extension)
+ extension)
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4378,14 +4936,14 @@ Dive log details (file with a .csv extension) <li>
<p>
Redbook format dive log (file with .cvsr extension). This is a compressed
-version of the dive log using a propriatary format.
+ version of the dive log using a proprietary format.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> accesses the .txt and the .csv files to obtain dive log information.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importing_dive_logs_from_the_apd_inspiration_ccr">14.6. Importing dive logs from the APD Inspiration CCR</h3>
+<h3 id="_importing_from_apd_inspiration_ccr">16.7. Importing from APD Inspiration CCR</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4423,12 +4981,12 @@ Open a text editor, e.g. Notepad (Windows), TextWrangler (Mac). <li>
<p>
Copy the contents of the clipboard into the text editor and save the text file
-with a filename extension of .CSV
+ with a filename extension of .CSV
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Within <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import→Import log files</em> to open the <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>.
+Within <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import → Import log files</em> to open the <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4439,13 +4997,13 @@ In the dropdown list towards the bottom right of the dialogue, select "<em>CSV f <li>
<p>
On the list of file names select the .CSV file that has been created above. An import
-dialogue opens.
+ dialogue opens.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
In the dropdown list on the middle right labeled '<em>Pre-configured imports</em>",
-select <em>APD Log Viewer</em>.
+ select <em>APD Log Viewer</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4459,7 +5017,7 @@ Ensure the other settings for the ADP dive log are appropriate, then select <em> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_appendix_c_exporting_dive_log_information_from_external_dive_log_software">15. APPENDIX C: Exporting Dive log information from external dive log software.</h2>
+<h2 id="_appendix_c_exporting_dive_log_information_from_external_dive_log_software">17. APPENDIX C: Exporting Dive log information from external dive log software.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>The import of dive log data from external dive log software is mostly performed
using
@@ -4472,7 +5030,7 @@ However, in some cases, a two-step process may be required:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Export the foreign dive log data to format that is accessible from
-<em>Subsurface</em>.
+ <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4485,15 +5043,16 @@ Import the accessible dive log data into <em>Subsurface</em>. data from foreign
dive log software. The procedures below mostly apply to Linux and/or Windows.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">15.1. Exporting dives from <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3 and DM4)</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">17.1. Exporting from <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3, DM4 or DM5)</strong></h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/suuntologo.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Divemanager 3 (DM3) is an older version of the Suunto software. More recent
-Suunto dive computers use Divemanager 4 (DM4). The
-two versions of Divemanager use different methods and different file naming
+<td class="content">DiveManager is a MS Windows application for Suunto dive computers.
+Divemanager 3 (DM3) is an older version of the Suunto software. More recent
+Suunto dive computers use Divemanager version 4 or 5 (DM4 or DM5). The
+different versions of Divemanager use different methods and different file naming
conventions to export dive log data.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
@@ -4512,7 +5071,7 @@ Do not start the import wizard to import dives from the dive computer. <li>
<p>
In the navigation tree on the left side of the program-window, select the appropriate
-dives.
+ dives.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4528,15 +5087,14 @@ To select certain dives: hold <em>ctrl</em> and click the dive <li>
<p>
To select all dives: Select the first dive, hold down shift and
-select the
-last dive
+ select the last dive
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-With the dives marked, use the program menu <em>File → Export</em>
+With the dives marked, use the program menu <em>File → Export</em>
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4557,7 +5115,7 @@ A file-manager like window pops up <li>
<p>
Navigate to the directory for storing the
-Divelog.SDE file
+ Divelog.SDE file
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4585,20 +5143,21 @@ The dives are now exported to the file Divelog.SDE. </p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 4 (DM4):</strong></p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>To export divelog from <em>Suunto DM4</em>, one needs to locate the DM4 database
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 4 (DM4) and Divemanager 5 (DM5):</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>DM4 and DM5 use identical mechanisms for exporting dive logs.
+To export a divelog from Divemanager one needs to locate the DM4/DM5 database
where the dives are stored. the user can either look for the original
database or make a backup of the dives. Both methods are described here.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Locating the Suunto DM4 database:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Locating the Suunto DM4 (or DM5) database:</p></div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-Start Suunto DM4
+Start Suunto DM4/DM5
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Select <em>Help → About</em>
+Select <em>Help → About</em>
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4618,15 +5177,15 @@ Paste the address to the path box at the top of the File Explorer </li>
<li>
<p>
-The database is called DM4.db
+The database is called DM4.db or DM5.db
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Backing up Suunto DM4:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Making a backup copy of the Suunto DM4/DM5 database:</p></div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-Start Suunto DM4
+Start Suunto DM4/DM5
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4637,7 +5196,7 @@ Select <em>File - Create backup</em> <li>
<p>
From the file menu select the location and name for the backup, we’ll
- use DM4 in here with the default extension .bak
+ use DM4 (or DM5) in here with the default extension .bak
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4647,13 +5206,28 @@ Click <em>Save</em> </li>
<li>
<p>
-The dives are now exported to the file DM4.bak
+The dives are now exported to the file DM4.bak (or DM5.bak)
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_exporting_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">15.2. Exporting from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
+<h3 id="_exporting_from_atomic_logbook">17.2. Exporting from Atomic Logbook</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock" id="Atomic_Export">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="./images/icons/note.png" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Atomic Logbook is a Windows software by Atomic Aquatics. It allows
+downloading of dive information from Cobalt and Cobalt 2 dive computers.
+The divelog is kept in a SQlite database at
+C:\ProgramData\AtomicsAquatics\Cobalt-Logbook\Cobalt.db. This file can
+be directly imported to Subsurface.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_exporting_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">17.3. Exporting from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock" id="Mares_Export">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4671,16 +5245,16 @@ which can be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>.</td> <li>
<p>
Within Dive Organiser, select
-<em>Database → Backup</em> from the main menu and back up the database to the desk
-top.
-This creates a zipped file DiveOrganiserxxxxx.dbf.
+ <em>Database → Backup</em> from the main menu and back up the database to the desk
+ top.
+ This creates a zipped file DiveOrganiserxxxxx.dbf.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Rename the file to
-DiveOrganiserxxxxx.zip. Inside the zipped directory is a file
-<em>DiveOrganiser.sdf</em>.
+ DiveOrganiserxxxxx.zip. Inside the zipped directory is a file
+ <em>DiveOrganiser.sdf</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4696,7 +5270,7 @@ The password for accessing the .zip file is <em>mares</em>. </ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDivinglog">15.3. Exporting dives from <strong>DivingLog 5.0</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivingLog">17.4. Exporting from <strong>DivingLog 5.0</strong></h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4707,14 +5281,14 @@ indication on the preferences set on one’s system. So in order for <em>Subsurface</em> to be able to successfully import XML files from DivingLog
one first needs to ensure that DivingLog is configured
to use the Metric system (one can easily change this within Diving Log by
-selecting <em>File → Preferences → Units and Language</em> by clicking the <em>Metric</em>
+selecting <em>File → Preferences → Units and Language</em> by clicking the <em>Metric</em>
button). Then do the following:</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-In Divinglog open the <em>File → Export → XML</em> menu
+In DivingLog open the <em>File → Export → XML</em> menu
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4732,10 +5306,143 @@ Click on the export button and select the filename </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_appendix_d_faqs">16. APPENDIX D: FAQs.</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Appendix_D">18. APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers keep a diving log in some form of a digital file, commonly a spreadsheet
+with various fields of information. These logs can be easily imported into <em>Subsurface</em> after the
+spreadsheet is converted in a .CSV file.
+This section explains the procedure to convert a diving logbook stored in a spreadsheet
+to a .CSV file that will later be imported from <em>Subsurface</em>.
+Creating a .CSV is a straightforward task, although the procedure is somewhat different
+according to which spreadsheet program is used.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The first step is to organize the diving data in the spreadsheet, so that the first row
+contains the names (or titles) of each column and the information for each dive is stored in a single row.
+<em>Subsurface</em> supports many data items (Dive #, Date,
+Time, Duration, Location, GPS, Max Depth, Mean Depth, Buddy, Notes, Weight and Tags).
+The user can organize dive data following a few simple rules:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Date: use one of the following formats: yyyy-mm-dd, dd.mm.yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Duration: the format should be minutes:seconds.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Unit system: only one unit system shold be used (i.e., no mixture between imperial and metric units)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Tags and buddies: values should be separated using a comma.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+GPS position: users must use decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 30.821798
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_em_libreoffice_calc_em_and_em_openoffice_calc_em">18.1. <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> and <em>OpenOffice Calc</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>These are open source spreadsheet applications forming parts of larger open source office suite applications. The user interaction with <em>LibreOffice</em> and <em>OpenOffice</em> is very similar.
+In Libreoffice Calc the time format should be set to minutes:seconds - [mm]:ss and dates should be set to one of: yyyy-mm-dd, dd.mm.yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy. A typical dive log may look like this:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_spreadsheetdata.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Spreadsheet data" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To export the data as a .CSV file from within LibreOffice click <em>File → Save As</em>. On the dialogue that comes up, select the <em>Text CSV (.csv)</em> as the file type and select the option <em>Edit filter settings</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_save_as_options.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Save as options" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After selecting <em>Save</em>, select the appropriate field delimiter (choose <em>Tab</em> to prevent conflicts with the comma when using this as a decimal point), then select <em>OK</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_field_options.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Field options" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One can double check the .CSV file by opening it with a text editor, and then import the dive data as explained on the section <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing CSV dives</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_microsoft_em_excel_em">18.2. Microsoft <em>Excel</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The field delimiter (called "<em>list separator</em>" in Microsoft manuals) is not accessible
+from within <em>Excel</em> and needs to be set through the <em>Microsoft Control Panel</em>. After changing the
+separator character, all software on the Windows machine use the new character as a separator.
+One can change the character back to the default character by following the same procedure, outlined below.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+In Microsoft Windows, click the <strong>Start</strong> button, and then select <em>Control Panel</em> from the list on the right-hand side.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Open the <em>Regional and Language Options</em> dialog box.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Do one of the following:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+In Windows 7, click the <em>Formats</em> tab, and then click <em>Customize this format</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In Windows XP, click the <em>Regional Options</em> tab, and then click <em>Customize</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Type a new separator in the <em>List separator</em> box. To use a TAB-delimited file, type the word TAB in the box.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click <em>OK</em> twice.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an image of the <em>Control Panel</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Win List separator" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To export the dive log in CSV format:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>With the dive log opened in <em>Excel</em>, select the round Windows button at the top left, then <em>Save As</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save as option" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Click on the left-hand part of the <em>Save as</em> option, NOT on the arrow on the right-hand. This brings up a dialogue for saving the spreadsheet in an alternative format. From the dropdown list at the bottom of the dialogue, marked <em>Save as Type:</em>, select <em>CSV(Comma delimited) (*.CSV)</em>. Ensure that the appropriate folder has been selected to save the CSV file into.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save CSV dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Select the <em>Save</em> button. The CSV-formatted file is saved into the folder that was selected. One can double check the .CSV file by opening it with a text editor, and then import the dive data as explained on the section <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing CSV dives</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_appendix_e_faqs">19. APPENDIX E: FAQs.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_subsurface_appears_to_miscalculate_gas_consumption_and_sac">16.1. Subsurface appears to miscalculate gas consumption and SAC</h3>
+<h3 id="_subsurface_appears_to_miscalculate_gas_consumption_and_sac">19.1. Subsurface appears to miscalculate gas consumption and SAC</h3>
<div class="paragraph" id="SAC_CALCULATION"><p><em>Question</em>: I dived with a 12.2 l tank, starting with 220 bar and ending with 100 bar, and I calculate a different SAC compared what <em>Subsurface</em> calculates. Is <em>Subsurface</em>
miscalculating?</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Answer</em>: Not really. What happens is that <em>Subsurface</em> actually calculates gas
@@ -4766,7 +5473,7 @@ starts becoming much more noticeable at high pressure. A 400 bar really does not contain twice as much air as a 200 bar one. At lower pressures, air acts pretty much like an ideal gas.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_some_dive_profiles_have_time_discrepancies_with_the_recorded_samples_from_my_dive_computer_8230">16.2. Some dive profiles have time discrepancies with the recorded samples from my dive computer…</h3>
+<h3 id="_some_dive_profiles_have_time_discrepancies_with_the_recorded_samples_from_my_dive_computer_8230">19.2. Some dive profiles have time discrepancies with the recorded samples from my dive computer…</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> ends up ignoring surface time for many things (average depth, divetime, SAC, etc).
<em>Question</em>: Why do dive durations in my dive computer differ from that given by <em>Subsurface</em>?</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Answer</em>: For example, if you end up doing a weight check (deep enough to trigger the "dive started")
@@ -4775,7 +5482,7 @@ that your dive is 50 minutes long - because you have fifty minutes worth of samp subsurface will say it’s 45 minutes - because you were actually diving for 45 minutes.
It’s even more noticeable if you do things like divemastering the initial OW dives, when
you may stay in the water for a long time, but spend most of it at the surface. And then
- you don’t want that to count as some kind of long dive”.</p></div>
+you don’t want that to count as some kind of long dive”.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
@@ -4783,7 +5490,7 @@ you may stay in the water for a long time, but spend most of it at the surface. <div id="footnotes"><hr /></div>
<div id="footer">
<div id="footer-text">
-Last updated 2014-11-18 13:04:00 GMT
+Last updated 2015-02-04 07:44:40 PST
</div>
</div>
</body>
diff --git a/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git b/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git index 6fbdd7622..3f47e6ac5 100644 --- a/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git +++ b/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git @@ -404,13 +404,14 @@ asciidoc.install(3); <div id="content">
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Subsurface4Banner.png" alt="Banner" />
+<img src="images/Subsurface4Banner.jpg" alt="Banner" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="big">MANUAL DE USUARIO</span></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Autores</strong>: Willem Ferguson, Jacco van Koll, Dirk Hohndel, Reinout Hoornweg,
-Linus Torvalds, Miika Turkia, Amit Chaudhuri, Jan Schubert, Salvador Cuñat</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="BLUE"><em>Versión 4.2, Agosto 2014</em></span></p></div>
+Linus Torvalds, Miika Turkia, Amit Chaudhuri, Jan Schubert, Salvador Cuñat,
+Pedro Neves</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="BLUE"><em>Versión 4.4, February 2015</em></span></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Bienvenido como usuario de <em>Subsurface</em>, un avanzado programa de registro de
inmersiones con extensa infraestructura para describir, organizar e
interpretarbuceos en apnea o con botella. <em>Subsurface</em> ofrece muchas ventajas
@@ -418,12 +419,18 @@ sobre otras soluciones de software similares:</p></div> <div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
+¿Necesitas una forma flexible de registrar inmersiones usando equipo
+recreativo, incluso aunque no uses ordenador?
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
¿Utilizas dos ordenadores de buceo diferentes, cada uno con su software
propietario para descargar los diarios de buceo? ¿Buceas con reciclador y con
-circuito abierto? ¿Usas un bottom-timer junto a un ordenador de buceo?
-<em>Subsurface</em> ofrece una interfaz estándar para descargar diarios de buceo desde
-todas estas piezas de equipo y para almacenarlos y analizarlos en un sistema
-unificado.
+circuito abierto o equipo recreativo? ¿Usas un bottom-timer junto a un ordenador
+de buceo? <em>Subsurface</em> ofrece una interfaz estándar para descargar diarios de
+buceo desde todas estas piezas de equipo y para almacenarlos y analizarlos en un
+sistema unificado.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -441,6 +448,12 @@ proporciona una manera de almacenar y analizar las inmersiones en otro sistema operativo.
</p>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+¿Necesitas un planificador de inmersiones gráfico que sea intuitivo, tenga
+en cuenta las inmersiones ya guardadas y se integre con ellas?
+</p>
+</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay binarios disponibles para PCs con Windows (XP o posterior), Macs basados en
Intel (OS/X) y muchas distribuciones de Linux. <em>Subsurface</em> puede compilarse
@@ -460,7 +473,16 @@ Buceadores profesionales.</p></div> <noscript><p><b>JavaScript must be enabled in your browser to display the table of contents.</b></p></noscript>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_UserSurvey">1. La Encuesta de Usuarios</h2>
+<h2 id="S_UserSurvey">1. Utilizar este manual</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Cuando se abre desde dentro de <em>Subsurface</em> este manual no tiene controles
+externos. Sin embargo, una función <em>BUSCAR</em> es importante. Se activa pulsando
+control-F en el teclado. Aparecerá una ventana de texto al pié de la ventana.
+Utilízala para buscar cualquier término en el manual.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_la_encuesta_de_usuarios">2. La Encuesta de Usuarios</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para poder desarrollar <em>Subsurface</em> de una forma que sirva a sus usuarios de la
mejor manera posible, es importante tener alguna información de los mismos. Al
@@ -478,7 +500,7 @@ se puede hacer lanzando <em>Subsurface</em> desde la línea de comandos con la o </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_StartUsing">2. Empezar a usar el programa</h2>
+<h2 id="S_StartUsing">3. Empezar a usar el programa</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>La ventana <em>Subsurface</em> está, habitualmente, dividida en cuatro paneles con un
<strong>Menú principal</strong> (Archivo Importar Registro Vista Filtros Ayuda) en la parte
@@ -531,7 +553,7 @@ temperaturas del agua, consumos de gases; el tiempo total y el número de inmersiones seleccionadas).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" id="S_ViewPanels" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/main_window.jpg" alt="La ventana principal" />
+<img src="images/main_window_f20.jpg" alt="La ventana principal" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El usuario puede elegir cual de los cuatro paneles se mostrará seleccionando la
@@ -555,7 +577,7 @@ siguientes se describirán los procedimientos para crear un nuevo registro.</p>< </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_NewLogbook">3. Crear un nuevo diario</h2>
+<h2 id="S_NewLogbook">4. Crear un nuevo diario</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecciona <em>Archivo → Nuevo Registro</em> en el menú principal. Todos los datos de
buceo existentes se borran para poder añadir nueva información. Si hubieran
@@ -564,35 +586,49 @@ guardar el diario abierto antes de crear uno nuevo.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_GetInformation">4. Como guardar información en el diario de buceo del usuario</h2>
+<h2 id="S_GetInformation">5. Guardar información en el diario de buceo</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varias formas de añadir información a un registro:</p></div>
-<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Ahora que se ha creado un nuevo diario, es simple añadirle datos de buceo.
+<em>Subsurface</em> permite varias maneras distintas de añadir información a un diario,
+todas las cuales las veremos en detalle en las secciones
+siguientes.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>1) Si el usuario tiene un diario en papel, una hoja de cálculo u otra
+forma de diario manual, se pueden añadir los datos de una de estas formas:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Introducir la información de buceo a mano. Esto es útil cuando el buceador no
-utilizó un ordenador de buceo y las inmersiones se guardaron en un diario
-escrito.
+Introducir la información de buceo a mano. Esto es útil si el buceador no
+usa un ordenador de buceo y las inmersiones se guardaban en un diario
+escrito. Ver <a href="#S_EnterData">Introducir información de buceo a mano</a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Importar información de la inmersión directamente de un ordenador de buceo si
-está soportado por <em>Subsurface</em>. La lista más actualizada de ordenadores
-soportados por <em>Subsurface</em> puede encontrarse en:
-<a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/supported-dive-computers/">Ordenadores soportados</a>.
+Importar datos de buceo que se han guardado bien como hoja de cálculo o
+bien como un archivo CSV. Ver el <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APÉNDICE D: Exportar una hoja de cáculo a formato CSV</a>
+y el texto <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importar buceos de archivos <em>CSV</em> creados a mano</a>.
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>2) Si el usuario ya tiene inmersiones registradas con un ordenador de buceo,
+el perfil de profundidad del buceo y otra gran cantidad de información ya está
+disponible.Estas inmersiones pueden importarse de las siguientes formas:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Importar información de inmersiones de otra base de datos o formato de
-archivo. Si se tienen diarios guardados con otro software, a menudo podrán
-importarse a <em>Subsurface</em>.Esto se comentará con detalle más adelante.
+El propio ordenador de buceo. Ver <a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer">Importar nueva información desde un ordenador de buceo</a>)
</p>
</li>
-</ol></div>
+<li>
+<p>
+Software propietario distribuido por los fabricantes de los ordenadores de
+ buceo.
+ Ver <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importar información de inmersiones de otras fuentes u otros formatos de datos</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_EnterData">4.1. Introducir información de buceo a mano</h3>
+<h3 id="S_EnterData">5.1. Introducir información de buceo a mano</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Este es habitualmente el caso para inmersiones sin ordenador de buceo. La unidad
básica de información en <em>Subsurface</em> es una inmersión. La información más
importante en un diario de inmersiones incluye, habitualmente, el tipo de
@@ -608,7 +644,7 @@ perfil gráfico de cada buceo. Estos paneles estan marcados respectivamente como las pestañas usadas para introducir la información.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/AddDive1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Añadir inmersión" />
+<img src="images/AddDive1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Añadir inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Al editar un campo de los paneles <em>Notas de la Inmersión</em> o <em>Equipo</em>, <em>Subsurface</em>
@@ -618,18 +654,25 @@ muestra en todos los paneles dependientes de <em>Notas de la Inmersión</em> mie se esté en modo de edición.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/BlueEditBar.jpg" alt="Blue edit bar" />
+<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="Blue edit bar" />
</div>
</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El botón <em>Guardar</em> solo debería utilizarse cuando todas las partes de la
+inmersión hayan sido rellenadas. Cuando se introduzcan inmersiones a mano,
+deberían haberse completado las pestañas <em>Información</em>, <em>Equipo</em> y <em>Perfil</em>
+antes de guardar la información. Al seleccionar el botón <em>Guardar</em>, se guarda
+en memoria una copia local de la información. Al salir de <em>Subsurface</em>, el
+programa preguntará de nuevo, esta vez si se guarda el diario completo en el
+disco o no.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_notas_de_la_inmersión">4.1.1. Notas de la inmersión</h4>
+<h4 id="_notas_de_la_inmersion">5.1.1. Notas de la inmersión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Este panel contiene la información de fecha, hora y lugar de un buceo concreto,
condiciones ambientales, compañeros así como alguna información descriptiva. Si
pulsas en la pestaña <strong>Notas de la inmersión</strong>, los siguientes campos aparecen
visibles:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/AddDive2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: La pestaña Notas de la inmersión" />
+<img src="images/AddDive2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: La pestaña Notas de la inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El campo <strong>Hora</strong> refleja la fecha y la hora de la inmersión. Clicando la fecha se
@@ -652,23 +695,23 @@ provenir de tres orígenes:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Se pueden encontrar las coordenadas en el mapamundi situado abajo a la
-derecha en la ventana de <em>Subsurface</em>. El mapa muestra una barra verde indicando
-"Mueve el mapa y haz doble clic para fijar la posición del buceo". Al hacer
-doble clic en el lugar apropiado, la barra verde desaparece y las coordenadas
-quedan grabadas
+ derecha en la ventana de <em>Subsurface</em>. El mapa muestra una barra verde indicando
+ "Mueve el mapa y haz doble clic para fijar la posición del buceo". Al hacer
+ doble clic en el lugar apropiado, la barra verde desaparece y las coordenadas
+ quedan grabadas
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Las coordenadas pueden obtenerse desde la app <em>Subsurface Companion</em> si se
-tiene de un dispositivo android con GPS y se guardaron las coordenadas del punto
-de buceo usando ese dispositivo. <a href="#S_Companion">Pulsa aquí para más información.</a>
+ tiene de un dispositivo android o iPhone con GPS y se guardaron las coordenadas del
+ punto de buceo usando ese dispositivo. <a href="#S_Companion">Pulsa aquí para más información.</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Si se conocen, las coordenadas pueden introducirse a mano usando uno de los
-cuatro formatos siguientes, con la latitud seguida de la longitud:
+ cuatro formatos siguientes, con la latitud seguida de la longitud:
</p>
<div class="literalblock">
<div class="content">
@@ -687,6 +730,11 @@ así, al añadir coordenadas a inmersiones en las que no se ha facilitado una descripción de la ubicación se producirá un comportamiento inesperado
(<em>Subsurface</em> pensará que todas estas inmersiones tienen la misma localización e
intentará conservar las mismas coordenadas para todas).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Modo de buceo</strong>: Esta es una casilla desplegable que permite elegir el tipo de
+inmersión que se ha realizado. Las opciones son OC (circuito abierto, del
+inglés "open circuit", el ajuste por defecto, valido para la mayoría de buceos
+recreativos), Apnea, CCR (rebreather de circuito cerrado, del inglés "closed
+circuit rebreather") o pSCR (rebreather pasivo de circuito semi-cerrado).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: Aqui puede introducirse el nombre del divemaster o el del guía de
inmersión. De nuevo, este campo ofrece autocompletado basándose en la lista de
divemasters del diario actual.</p></div>
@@ -716,12 +764,12 @@ necesidad de usarlos hasta que se ha añadido TODA la información. Aquí hay un ejemplo de panel de Notas de la Inmersión completo:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Una pestaña de Notas de la Inmersión completada" />
+<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Una pestaña de Notas de la Inmersión completada" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_equipo">4.1.2. Equipo</h4>
+<h4 id="_equipo">5.1.2. Equipo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pestaña Equipo permite al usuario introducir información acerca del tipo de
botella y gas utilizado, así como el lastre utilizado en una inmersión. Esta
parte de <em>Subsurface</em> es altamente interactiva y la información de botellas y
@@ -731,7 +779,7 @@ gases que se introduzca determinará el comportamiento del perfil de la inmersi este:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Gas_dialogue1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Dialogo de botellas inicial" />
+<img src="images/Gas_dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Dialogo de botellas inicial" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El botón + arriba a la derecha permite al usuario añadir más botellas para esta
@@ -745,7 +793,7 @@ Para seleccionar una botella hay que hacer clic en la casilla Tipo. Esto mostrará un botón que puede usarse para desplegar una lista de botellas:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Gas_dialogue2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Botón del desplegable de la lista de botellas" />
+<img src="images/Gas_dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Botón del desplegable de la lista de botellas" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La lista desplegable puede utilizarse para seleccionar el tipo de botella que se
@@ -770,7 +818,7 @@ derecha. Aquí hay un ejemplo de descripción completa para una inmersión en la que se han utilizado dos botellas (aire y EAN50):</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con la información de botellas completada" />
+<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con la información de botellas completada" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Lastre</strong>: Se puede introducir información sobre el sistema de lastre utilizado
@@ -779,14 +827,14 @@ botellas. Si el usuario pulsa el botón + de arriba a la derecha en el dialogo d lastre, la tabla aparecerá como sigue</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: El diálogo lastre" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: El diálogo lastre" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si se hace clic en el campo <strong>Tipo</strong>, se accede a una lista desplegable con la
flecha:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Desplegable con la lista de tipos de lastre" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Desplegable con la lista de tipos de lastre" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La lista desplegable puede utilizarse para seleccionar el tipo de sistema de
@@ -800,14 +848,14 @@ la izquierda. A continuación, un ejemplo de información para una inmersión co dos tipos de lastre: integrado y cinturón:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con la información de lastre completada" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con la información de lastre completada" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>No es necesario pulsar el botón Guardar antes de que se haya terminado el perfil
de la inmersión.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">4.1.3. Crear un perfil de inmersión</h4>
+<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">5.1.3. Crear un perfil de inmersión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>EL <strong>Perfil de la Inmersión</strong> (una representación gráfica de la profundidad de
buceo en función del tiempo) se muestra en el panel de arriba a la derecha de la
ventana de <em>Subsurface</em> . Cuando se añade manualmente una inmersión a un diario,
@@ -815,7 +863,7 @@ ventana de <em>Subsurface</em> . Cuando se añade manualmente una inmersión a u representar mejor el buceo que se está describiendo.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Perfil de inmersión inicial" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Perfil de inmersión inicial" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Modificar el perfil de la inmersión</em>: Cuando se mueve el cursor por el perfil,
@@ -836,7 +884,7 @@ inmersión que representa un buceo a 20m durante 30 minutos, seguido de una parada de seguridad de 5 minutos a 5m.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Perfil de buceo editado" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Perfil de buceo editado" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Especificar la composición del gas</em>: La composición del gas usado se indica
@@ -850,21 +898,21 @@ izquierda <em>a la izquierda</em> del punto. Nótese que únicamente los gases d en la pestaña <strong>Equipo</strong> aparecen en el menú contextual:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Menú contextual de la composición del gas" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Menú contextual de la composición del gas" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Abajo está el perfil de una inmersión a 20m durante 30 minutos, a la que se ha
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Abajo está el perfil de una inmersión a 25m durante 30 minutos, a la que se ha
añadido un cambio de aire a EAN50 a 20 m tras los 30 minutos. En este caso, la
primera botella en la pestaña <strong>Equipo</strong> contenía aire y la segunda contenía
EAN50.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DiveProfile4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Perfil de inmersión completado" />
+<img src="images/DiveProfile4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Perfil de inmersión completado" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_guardar_la_información_introducida_a_mano">4.1.4. Guardar la información introducida a mano</h4>
+<h4 id="_guardar_la_informacion_introducida_a_mano">5.1.4. Guardar la información introducida a mano</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La información introducida en las pestañas <strong>Notas de la inmersión</strong>, Equipo y
<strong>Perfil de la inmersión</strong> puede guardarse en el registro de inmersiones del
usuario utilizando los dos botones arriba a la derecha de la pestaña "Notas de
@@ -875,9 +923,9 @@ registro con la nueva(s) inmersión(es).</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportDiveComputer">4.2. Importar nueva información desde un ordenador de buceo</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportDiveComputer">5.2. Importar nueva información desde un ordenador de buceo</h3>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_conectar_e_importar_datos_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">4.2.1. Conectar e importar datos desde un ordenador de buceo.</h4>
+<h4 id="_conectar_e_importar_datos_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">5.2.1. Conectar e importar datos desde un ordenador de buceo.</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El uso de ordenadores de buceo permite recoger una gran cantidad de información
de cada inmersión, por ejemplo un registro detallado de la profundidad,
duración, ratios de ascenso/descenso y de presiones parciales de los gases.
@@ -906,10 +954,10 @@ puerto de comunicaciones (o el punto de montaje) del PC con <em>Subsurface</em> conecta con el ordenador de buceo. Para poder ajustar esta comunicación, es
necesario encontrar la información adecuada para indicar a <em>Subsurface</em> donde y
como importar la información. El
-<a href="#_apéndice_a_información_específica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>
+<a href="#_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>
proporciona información técnica para ayudarte a conseguir esto en diferentes
sistemas operativos y el
-<a href="#_apéndice_b_información_específica_por_ordenadores_de_buceo">Apéndice B</a>
+<a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Apéndice B</a>
contiene información específica de ordenadores de buceo.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Ahora es el momento de conectar el ordenador de buceo al PC del usuario, para
lo que hay que seguir estos pasos:</p></div>
@@ -917,87 +965,88 @@ lo que hay que seguir estos pasos:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Conectar el cable de conexión a un puerto USB libre (o activar la conexión
-infrarroja o bluetooth como describiremos más adelante en este manual).
+ infrarroja o bluetooth como describiremos más adelante en este manual).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Poner el ordenador de buceo en modo de comunicación con PC. El usuario debe
-consultar el manual de su ordenador de buceo en concreto.
+ consultar el manual de su ordenador de buceo en concreto.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
En <em>Subsurface</em>, desde el Menú principal, seleccionar Importar → Importar del
-ordenador de buceo. Aparecerá el diálogo <strong>A</strong> en la figura a continuación:
+ ordenador de buceo. Aparecerá el diálogo <strong>A</strong> en la figura a continuación:
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/ImportFromDC1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de descarga 1" />
+<img src="images/DC_import_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de descarga 1" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Los ordenadores de buceo tienden a mantener un cierto número de inmersiones en
su memoria, incluso cuando estas inmersiones ya han sido importadas a
<em>Subsurface</em>. Por este motivo <em>Subsurface</em> solo importa buceos que no han sido
-descargados previamente. Esto hace que el proceso de descarga sea más rápido en
-la mayoría de ordenadores de buceo y ahorra batería en el ordenador (por lo
-menos en aquellos que no cargan mientras están conectados vía USB). Si , por
-algún motivo, el usuario quisiera importar todas las inmersiones del ordenador
-de buceo aunque algunas puede que ya estén en el registro, se puede marcar la
-casilla llamada Forzar descarga de todas las inmersiones.</p></div>
+descargados previamente, si el ordenador de buceo lo permite. Esto hace que el
+proceso de descarga sea más rápido en la mayoría de ordenadores de buceo y
+ahorra batería en el ordenador (por lo menos en aquellos que no cargan mientras
+están conectados vía USB). Si , por algún motivo, el usuario quisiera importar
+todas las inmersiones del ordenador de buceo aunque algunas puede que ya estén
+en el registro, se puede marcar la casilla llamada Forzar descarga de todas las
+inmersiones.</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
El diálogo tiene dos listas desplegables, <strong>Vendedor</strong> y <strong>Ordenador de buceo</strong>.
-En la lista desplegable <strong>Vendedor</strong> se selecciona la marca del ordenador, p.e.
-Suunto, Oceanic, Uwatec, Mares. En el desplegable <strong>Ordenador de buceo</strong>, se
-selecciona el modelo del ordenador, p.e. D4 (Suunto), Veo200 (Oceanic) o Puck
-(Mares).
+ En la lista desplegable <strong>Vendedor</strong> se selecciona la marca del ordenador, p.e.
+ Suunto, Oceanic, Uwatec, Mares. En el desplegable <strong>Ordenador de buceo</strong>, se
+ selecciona el modelo del ordenador, p.e. D4 (Suunto), Veo200 (Oceanic) o Puck
+ (Mares).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El desplegable <strong>Dispositivo o punto de montaje</strong> contiene el nombre del puerto
-USB o Bluetooth que <em>Subsurface</em> necesita conocer para comunicarse con el
-ordenador de buceo. Debe seleccionarse el nombre de puerto apropiado. Consultar
-el
-<a href="#_apéndice_a_información_específica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>
-y <a href="#_apéndice_b_información_específica_por_ordenadores_de_buceo">Apéndice B</a>
-para detalles técnicos de como encontrar la información apropiada sobre
-puertos, para un ordenador en concreto y, en algunos casos, como hacer los
-ajustes correctos al Sistema Operativo del ordenador que ejecuta <em>Subsurface</em>.
+ USB o Bluetooth que <em>Subsurface</em> necesita conocer para comunicarse con el
+ ordenador de buceo. Debe seleccionarse el nombre de puerto apropiado. Consultar
+ el
+ <a href="#_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>
+ y <a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Apéndice B</a>
+ para detalles técnicos de como encontrar la información apropiada sobre
+ puertos, para un ordenador en concreto y, en algunos casos, como hacer los
+ ajustes correctos al Sistema Operativo del ordenador que ejecuta <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Si todas las inmersiones del ordenador de buceo han de descargarse, hay que
-seleccionar la casilla Forzar descarga de todas las inmersiones. Normalmente
-<em>Subsurface</em> solo descarga las inmersiones posteriores a la fecha/hora de la
-última inmersión del panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>. Si una o más de sus
-inmersiones en <em>Subsurface</em> se han borrado accidentalmente o si hay buceos más
-antiguos que todavía necesitan descargarse del ordenador de buceo, debe
-activarse esta casilla. Algunos ordenadores (p.e. Mares Puck) no facilitan una
-lista de contenido antes de la descarga para poder seleccionar solo las
-inmersiones nuevas. En consecuencia, para estos ordenadores de buceo, se
-descarga la totalidad de los buceos.
+ seleccionar la casilla Forzar descarga de todas las inmersiones. Normalmente
+ <em>Subsurface</em> solo descarga las inmersiones posteriores a la fecha/hora de la
+ última inmersión del panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>. Si una o más de sus
+ inmersiones en <em>Subsurface</em> se han borrado accidentalmente o si hay buceos más
+ antiguos que todavía necesitan descargarse del ordenador de buceo, debe
+ activarse esta casilla. Algunos ordenadores (p.e. Mares Puck) no facilitan una
+ lista de contenido antes de la descarga para poder seleccionar solo las
+ inmersiones nuevas. En consecuencia, para estos ordenadores de buceo, se
+ descarga la totalidad de los buceos.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Si se ha seleccionado la casilla <em>Preferir siempre inmersiones descargadas</em> y,
-durante la descarga, existen inmersiones con idénticas fechas/horas en el
-ordenador de buceo y en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> de <em>Subsurface</em> , se
-sobrescribirá el registro de <em>Subsurface</em> con los datos del ordenador de buceo.
+ durante la descarga, existen inmersiones con idénticas fechas/horas en el
+ ordenador de buceo y en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> de <em>Subsurface</em> , se
+ sobrescribirá la inmersión de <em>Subsurface</em> con los datos del ordenador de buceo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>NO</strong> seleccionar las casillas etiquetadas <em>Guardar registro de
-libdivecomputer</em> y <em>Guardar volcado de libdivecomputer</em>. Estas opciones se
-utilizan como herramientas diagnósticas cuando se experimentan problemas con las
-descargas (ver a continuación).
+ libdivecomputer</em> y <em>Guardar volcado de libdivecomputer</em>. Estas opciones se
+ utilizan como herramientas diagnósticas cuando se experimentan problemas con las
+ descargas (ver a continuación).
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1008,24 +1057,36 @@ Pulsar el botón <em>Aceptar</em> y aparecerá el diálogo <strong>B</strong> de <li>
<p>
Con la comunicación establecida puede verse como se transfiere la información
-del ordenador de buceo. Dependiendo del ordenador de buceo y/o el número de
-inmersiones guardadas, esto podría llevar algún tiempo. El usuario debe ser
-paciente. El diálogo <em>Descarga</em> muestra una barra de progreso en la parte
-inferior de la ventana (en algunos ordenadores de buceo la información del
-progreso puede ser imprecisa al no poder determinarse cuantos datos había hasta
-haberse descargado). Cuando se ha completado la descarga de la información de
-buceo, todas las inmersiones importadas aparecen en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>
-ordenadas por fecha y hora. Es el momento de desconectar y apagar el ordenador
-de buceo para ahorrar batería. Si se selecciona un buceo, el panel <strong>Perfil</strong>
-muestra un gráfico informativo de profundidad/tiempo para esa inmersión
-concreta.
+ del ordenador de buceo. Dependiendo del ordenador de buceo y/o el número de
+ inmersiones guardadas, esto podría llevar algún tiempo. El usuario debe ser
+ paciente. El diálogo <em>Descarga</em> muestra una barra de progreso en la parte
+ inferior de la ventana (en algunos ordenadores de buceo la información del
+ progreso puede ser imprecisa al no poder determinarse cuantos datos había hasta
+ haberse descargado). Cuando se ha completado la descarga de la información de
+ buceo, todas las inmersiones importadas aparecen en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>
+ ordenadas por fecha y hora. Es el momento de desconectar y apagar el ordenador
+ de buceo para ahorrar batería. Si se selecciona un buceo, el panel <strong>Perfil</strong>
+ muestra un gráfico informativo de profundidad/tiempo para esa inmersión
+ concreta.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Tras haber sido descargadas, las inmersiones aparecen en forma de tabla a la
+ derecha del diálogo (ver imagen <strong>B</strong> anterior). Cada buceo ocupa una línea de
+ la tabla, mostrando la fecha, la duración y la profundidad. Junto a cada
+ línea hay una casilla seleccionable; selecciona todas las inmersiones que se
+ necesite transferir a la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>. En el caso de la figura
+ anterior, se han seleccionado los últimos seis buceos y se transferirán a la
+ <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>.
+ Pulsar el botón <em>OK</em> y los buceos seleccionados serán transferidos.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Si hubiera algún problema de comunicación con el ordenador de buceo, se
-mostraría un mensaje de error similar a este: "No puedo abrir /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares
-(Puck Pro)". Ver el texto en la figura a continuación.
+ mostraría un mensaje de error similar a este: "No puedo abrir /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares
+ (Puck Pro)". Ver el texto en la figura a continuación.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1049,28 +1110,28 @@ mostraría un mensaje de error similar a este: "No puedo abrir /dev/ttyUSB0 Mare <li>
<p>
¿ Está completamente cargada la batería del ordenador de buceo ? Si nó debe
-cargarse o ser reemplazada.
+ cargarse o ser reemplazada.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
¿ Falla el cable ? ¿ Funciona bien el cable usando otro software ? ¿ Ha
-funcionado antes o es la primera vez que se usa ? ¿ Están limpios los contactos
-entre el cable y el ordenador de buceo ?
+ funcionado antes o es la primera vez que se usa ? ¿ Están limpios los contactos
+ entre el cable y el ordenador de buceo ?
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Consultar el
-<a href="#_apéndice_a_información_específica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>
-y asegurarse de que se especificó el punto de montaje correcto.
+ <a href="#_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>
+ y asegurarse de que se especificó el punto de montaje correcto.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
En sistemas operativos tipo unix, comprobar que el usuario tiene permisos de
-escritura en el puerto USB. Si nó, consultar el
-<a href="#_apéndice_a_información_específica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>.
+ escritura en el puerto USB. Si nó, consultar el
+ <a href="#_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">Apéndice A</a>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1106,7 +1167,7 @@ información sobre las inmersiones grabadas en el ordenador de buceo.</p></div> </div></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_DeviceNames">4.2.2. Cambiar el nombre de un ordenador de buceo</h4>
+<h4 id="S_DeviceNames">5.2.2. Cambiar el nombre de un ordenador de buceo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Es posible que sea necesario distinguir entre diferentes ordenadores de buceo
usados para cargar inmersiones en <em>Subsurface</em>. Por ejemplo, si el ordenador del
compañero es de la misma marca y modelo que el del usuario y los diarios de
@@ -1124,24 +1185,26 @@ aparecerá el nombre que se haya asignado a ese dispositivo en particular en lugar del modelo, permitiendo una identificación de dispositivos más fácil.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_EditDiveInfo">4.2.3. Actualizar la información de buceo importada del ordenador.</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>La información del ordenador no está completa y es necesario añadir más detalles
-para tener un registro más completo de las inmersiones. Para ello se usanlas
-pestañas <strong>Notas de la Inmersión</strong> y <strong>Equipo</strong> arriba a la izquierda de la ventana
-de <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+<h4 id="S_EditDiveInfo">5.2.3. Actualizar la información de buceo importada del ordenador.</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Con los buceos descargados en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>, la información del
+ordenador no está completa y es necesario añadir más detalles para tener un
+registro más detallado de las inmersiones. Para ello se usan las pestañas
+<strong>Notas de la Inmersión</strong> y <strong>Equipo</strong> arriba a la izquierda de la ventana de
+<em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_notas_de_la_inmersión_2">4.2.4. Notas de la inmersión</h4>
+<h4 id="_notas_de_la_inmersion_2">5.2.4. Notas de la inmersión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La fecha y hora del buceo, la mezcla de gases y, a menudo, la temperatura del
agua se muestran al haberse obtenido del ordenador de buceo, pero el usuario
necesita añadir a mano alguna información para tener un registro más completo de
-la inmersión. Si se cambia o edita de alguna manera el contenido de esta pestaña,
-el mensaje de la barra azul arriba del panel indicará que se está editando el
-buceo. Si se pulsa en la pestaña <strong>Notas de la inmersión</strong>, se visualizan los
-siguientes campos:</p></div>
+la inmersión. En algunos casos (p.e. rebreathers APD) también se ha de facilitar
+la fecha y la hora. Si se cambia o edita de alguna manera el contenido de esta
+pestaña, el mensaje de la barra azul arriba del panel indicará que se está
+editando el buceo. Si se pulsa en la pestaña <strong>Notas de la inmersión</strong>, se
+visualizan los siguientes campos:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/AddDive3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: La pestaña Notas de la inmersión" />
+<img src="images/AddDive3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: La pestaña Notas de la inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El campo <strong>Hora</strong> refleja la fecha y la hora de la inmersión. Clicando la fecha se
@@ -1168,23 +1231,24 @@ provenir de tres orígenes:</p></div> <li>
<p>
El usuario puede encontrar las coordenadas en el mapamundi situado abajo a la
-derecha en la ventana de <em>Subsurface</em>. El mapa muestra una barra verde indicando
-"Mueve el mapa y haz doble clic para fijar la posición del buceo". Al hacer
-doble clic en el lugar apropiado, la barra verde desaparece y las coordenadas
-quedan grabadas
+ derecha en la ventana de <em>Subsurface</em>. El mapa muestra una barra verde indicando
+ "Mueve el mapa y haz doble clic para fijar la posición del buceo". Al hacer
+ doble clic en el lugar apropiado, la barra verde desaparece y las coordenadas
+ quedan grabadas
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Se pueden obtener las coordenadas desde la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion si se
-dispone de un dispositivo android con GPS y se guardaron las coordenadas del
-punto de buceo usando ese dispositivo. <a href="#S_Companion">Pulsa aquí para más información</a>
+ dispone de un dispositivo android o iPhone con GPS y se guardaron las
+ coordenadas del punto de buceo usando ese dispositivo.
+ <a href="#S_Companion">Pulsa aquí para más información</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Se pueden introducir las coordenadas a mano, si son conocidas, usando uno de
-estos cuatro formatos, con la latitud seguida de la longitud:
+ estos cuatro formatos, con la latitud seguida de la longitud:
</p>
<div class="literalblock">
<div class="content">
@@ -1198,6 +1262,11 @@ Grados decimales, p.e. 30.22496 , 30.821798</code></pre> <div class="paragraph"><p>Las latitudes del hemisferio sur se dan con una <strong>S</strong>, p.e. S30º o con un valor
negativo, p.e. -30.22496. De igual forma, las longitudes al oeste se facilita
con una <strong>W</strong>, p.e. W07°, o con un valor negativo, p.e. -7.34323.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Modo de buceo</strong>: Esta es una casilla desplegable que permite elegir el tipo de
+inmersión que se ha realizado. Las opciones son OC (circuito abierto, del
+inglés "open circuit", el ajuste por defecto, valido para la mayoría de buceos
+recreativos), Apnea, CCR (rebreather de circuito cerrado, del inglés "closed
+circuit rebreather") o pSCR (rebreather pasivo de circuito semi-cerrado).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: Introducir el nombre del divemaster o el del guía de inmersión. De
nuevo, este campo ofrece autocompletado basándose en la lista de divemasters del
diario actual.</p></div>
@@ -1226,18 +1295,18 @@ necesidad de usarlos hasta que se ha añadido TODA la información. Aquí hay un ejemplo de panel de Notas de la Inmersión completo:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo.jpg" alt="FIGURA:Una pestaña completa de Notas de la Inmersión" />
+<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA:Una pestaña completa de Notas de la Inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_equipo_2">4.2.5. Equipo</h4>
+<h4 id="_equipo_2">5.2.5. Equipo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pestaña Equipo permite al usuario introducir información acerca del tipo de
botella y gas utilizado, así como el lastre utilizado en una inmersión. El
mensaje en azul arriba del panel</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/BlueEditBar.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Barra azul de edición" />
+<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Barra azul de edición" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>indica que la inmersión se está editando. Esta parte de <em>Subsurface</em> es
@@ -1248,7 +1317,7 @@ derecha).</p></div> este:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DC_gas_dialogue1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de Botellas inicial" />
+<img src="images/DC_gas_dialogue1_f20_jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de Botellas inicial" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En la mayoría de los casos <em>Subsurface</em> obtiene el gas usado del ordenador de
@@ -1263,7 +1332,7 @@ la casilla <strong>Tipo de botella</strong>. Esto hará aparecer un botón que p mostrar una lista desplegable de botellas.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DC_gas_dialogue2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Botón del desplegable de la lista de botellas" />
+<img src="images/DC_gas_dialogue2_f20_jpg" alt="FIGURA: Botón del desplegable de la lista de botellas" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La lista desplegable puede usarse para seleccionar el tipo de botella que
@@ -1284,7 +1353,7 @@ botón + de arriba a la derecha. Aquí hay un ejemplo de descripción completa p una inmersión en la que se han utilizado dos botellas (aire y EAN50):</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con la informaación de botellas completada" />
+<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con la informaación de botellas completada" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Lastre</strong>: Se puede introducir información sobre el sistema de lastre utilizado
@@ -1293,14 +1362,14 @@ botellas. Si se pulsa el botón + de arriba a la derecha en el dialogo de lastre la tabla aparecerá como sigue</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: El diálogo Lastre" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: El diálogo Lastre" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si se hace clic en el campo Tipo, se accede a una lista desplegable con la
flecha:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Desplegable con la lista de tipos de lastre" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Desplegable con la lista de tipos de lastre" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La lista desplegable puede usarse para seleccionar el tipo de sistema de lastre
@@ -1315,12 +1384,12 @@ papelera de la izquierda. A continuación, un ejemplo de información para una inmersión con dos tipos de lastre: integrado y cinturón:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con información de lastre completada" />
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Tabla con información de lastre completada" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_editar_simultáneamente_varias_inmersiones_seleccionadas">4.2.6. Editar simultáneamente varias inmersiones seleccionadas</h4>
+<h4 id="_editar_simultaneamente_varias_inmersiones_seleccionadas">5.2.6. Editar simultáneamente varias inmersiones seleccionadas</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>METODO 1</em>: Tras descargar inmersiones de un ordenador de buceo, los perfiles
de los buceos descargados se mostrarán en el panel "Perfil de la inmersión",
así como algunas otras informaciones en las pestañas "Notas de la Inmersión" y
@@ -1355,7 +1424,7 @@ a los que pegar esta información. Desde el menú principal, selecciona <em>Regi contendrán los datos seleccionados previamente de la anterior inmersión.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_añadir_marcas_a_una_inmersión">4.2.7. Añadir Marcas a una inmersión</h4>
+<h4 id="_anadir_marcas_a_una_inmersion">5.2.7. Añadir Marcas a una inmersión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores desean anotar en sus inmersiones textos que indiquen sucesos
concretos durante el buceo, p.e. "Avistamos delfines" o "Lanzada boya deco".
Esto se hace fácilmente:</p></div>
@@ -1363,28 +1432,28 @@ Esto se hace fácilmente:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Clic derecho sobre el punto adecuado del perfil de inmersión, se desplegará
-el menú contextual del perfil. Se selecciona <em>Añadir marca</em>. Una bandera roja
-aparecerá sobre el perfil en el punto inicialmente seleccionado (ver <strong>A</strong> a
-continuación).
+ el menú contextual del perfil. Se selecciona <em>Añadir marca</em>. Una bandera roja
+ aparecerá sobre el perfil en el punto inicialmente seleccionado (ver <strong>A</strong> a
+ continuación).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Clic derecho sobre la bandera roja. Se desplegará el menú contextual (ver
-<strong>B</strong> a continuación). Se selecciona <em>Editar nombre</em>.
+ <strong>B</strong> a continuación). Se selecciona <em>Editar nombre</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Se mostrará una casilla de texto. Se teclea en ella el texto oportuno para la
-marca (ver <strong>C</strong> a continuación). Se selecciona <em>Aceptar</em>, con lo que se guarda el
-texto asociado a la marca.
+ marca (ver <strong>C</strong> a continuación). Se selecciona <em>Aceptar</em>, con lo que se guarda el
+ texto asociado a la marca.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Cuando el ratón pase sobre el marcador rojo, el texto guardado se mostrará en
- la parte de debajo del cajetín de información (ver <strong>D</strong> a continuación).
+ la parte de debajo del cajetín de información (ver <strong>D</strong> a continuación).
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1395,7 +1464,7 @@ Cuando el ratón pase sobre el marcador rojo, el texto guardado se mostrará en </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_guardar_la_información_de_buceo_actualizada">4.2.8. Guardar la información de buceo actualizada</h4>
+<h4 id="_guardar_la_informacion_de_buceo_actualizada">5.2.8. Guardar la información de buceo actualizada</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La información introducida en las pestañas Notas de la inmersión y Equipo puede
guardarse utilizando los dos botones de arriba a la derecha de la pestaña <strong>Notas
de la Inmersión</strong>. Si se pulsa <em>Guardar</em> los datos del buceo se guardan. Si se
@@ -1406,7 +1475,7 @@ nuevos datos se guardan.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar_información_de_inmersiones_de_otras_fuentes_u_otros_formatos_de_datos">4.3. Importar información de inmersiones de otras fuentes u otros formatos de datos</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar_informacion_de_inmersiones_de_otras_fuentes_u_otros_formatos_de_datos">5.3. Importar información de inmersiones de otras fuentes u otros formatos de datos</h3>
<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>Si el usuario bucea desde hace algún tiempo, es posible que bastantes
inmersiones hayan sido registradas usando otro software. No es necesario teclear
de nuevo esta información ya que, probablemente, estos diarios puedan importarse
@@ -1414,7 +1483,7 @@ a <em>Subsurface</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> puede importar un amplio abanico de d otros softwares de registro. Mientras que algún software se soporta nativamente,
en otros casos el usuario debe exportar el(los) diario(s) a un
formato intermedio para que pueda ser importado a <em>Subsurface</em>.
-Actualmente, <em>Subsurface</em> soporta importar archivos CSV de diferentes origenes.
+Actualmente, <em>Subsurface</em> soporta importar archivos <em>CSV</em> de diferentes origenes.
Los archivos de APD LogViewer, XP5, Sensus y Seabear están preconfigurados,
pero dado que es flexible, los usuarios pueden configurar sus propias
importaciones. Diarios creados manualmente (p.e. en hojas de cálculo) también
@@ -1436,14 +1505,14 @@ con las zonas horarias (u otras razones que hagan que la hora de comienzo de las inmersiones sean significativamente diferentes) <em>Subsurface</em> no creará entradas
duplicadas.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="Unified_import">4.3.1. Utilizar el diálogo de importación universal</h4>
+<h4 id="Unified_import">5.3.1. Utilizar el diálogo de importación universal</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El importar buceos desde otros programas se hace a través de una interfaz
universal que se activa seleccionando Importar desde el menú principal y
haciendo clic en <em>Importar archivos de registro</em>. Con ello se mostrará el
dialogo <strong>A</strong> a continuación.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Import1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Importar: paso 1" />
+<img src="images/Import1_f20_jpg" alt="FIGURA: Importar: paso 1" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Abajo a la derecha hay un desplegable con una etiqueta por defecto Archivos de
@@ -1452,7 +1521,7 @@ importar directamente, como en el dialogo <strong>B</strong> anterior. Actualmen <div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Diarios en formato XML (Divinglog 5.0, MacDive y varios otros)
+Diarios en formato XML (DivingLog 5.0, MacDive y varios otros)
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1467,7 +1536,7 @@ Diarios en formato UDCF </li>
<li>
<p>
-Diarios de CCR Poseidon
+Diarios de CCR Poseidon MKVI
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1482,7 +1551,7 @@ Suunto Dive Manager (DM3 y DM4) </li>
<li>
<p>
-Diarios en formato CSV (basados en texto o en hojas de cálculo), incluidos
+Diarios en formato <em>CSV</em> (basados en texto o en hojas de cálculo), incluidos
diarios de CCR APD.
</p>
</li>
@@ -1493,68 +1562,7 @@ están soportados algunos otros formatos, no accesibles desde el diálogo Importar, como se explica a continuación.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importar_diarios_de_sistemas_de_recicladores_de_circuito_cerrado_ccr">4.3.2. Importar diarios de sistemas de recicladores de circuito cerrado (CCR)</h4>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/APD.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Los recicladores de circuito cerrado utilizan tecnologías avanzadas para
-reciclar el gas expirado, llevando a cabo dos acciones para mantener una
-concentración de oxígeno respirable:
-a) Eliminan dióxido de carbono del gas que ha sido exhalado.
-b) Regulan la concentración de oxígeno para que sea segura en la inmersión.
-Actualmente, en <em>Subsurface</em>, el Poseidon MKVI Discovery es el ordenador de
-buceo mejor soportado. El interfaz CCR de <em>Subsurface</em> es todavía experimental
-y se halla bajo desarrollo activo. En contraste con un ordenador de circuito
-abierto convencional, el ordenador de un sistema CCR no permite la descarga de
-un diario que contenga múltiples inmersiones. En su lugar, cada buceo se guarda
-independientemente. Esto supone que <em>Subsurface</em> no pueda descargar un diario
-directamente del ordenador CCR, sino que se importa de la misma manera que se
-importan los diarios de otras bases de datos.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importar_una_inmersión_con_ccr">4.3.3. Importar una inmersión con CCR</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Consulta la sección que trata
-<a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">la importación de otras fuentes digitales</a>.
-Desde el menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em>, selecciona <em>Importar → Importar
-archivos de registro</em> para desplegar el
-<a href="#Unified_import">diálogo unificado de importación</a>. Como se explicó en la
-sección anterior, la parte inferior derecha del diálogo contiene una lista
-desplegable de dispositivos que incluye una opción para los archivos de MKVI.
-Tras seleccionar el formato CCR apropiado y el directorio donde se hallan
-guardados los archivos originales del ordenador CCR, se puede seleccionar un
-archivo de diario concreto (en el caso del MKVI será un archivo con extensión
-.txt). Después de haber seleccionado el archivo, pulsa el botón <em>Abrir</em> debajo
-a la derecha en el diálogo de importación.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_información_mostrada_para_una_inmersión">4.3.4. Información mostrada para una inmersión</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Presiones parciales de los gases</em>: El gráfico de presión parcial de oxígeno
-muestra la información de los sensores de oxígeno del equipo CCR. En el caso
-del Poseidon MKVI, se muestra el valor promedio de los dos sensores. En el
-caso del equipo APD, se muestra el promedio de los 3 sensores de oxígeno. Si
-uno de los sensores muestra una lectura muy diferente en comparación a los
-otros dos, se ignora el sensor que diverge. Para las inmersiones con CCR, el
-gráfico de presiones parciales de oxígeno debería ser bastante plano,
-reflejando el ajuste del "setpoint" durante la inmersión.
-Las presiones parciales de nitrógeno (y helio en su caso) se muestran de la
-forma habitual como en el resto de inmersiones.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Presiones de las botellas</em>: Los ordenadores de buceo con CCR como el Poseidon
-MKVI registran las presiones de las botellas de oxígeno y diluyente. La presión
-de la botella de oxígeno es la que se muestra en el perfil. Además, en la
-pestaña <em>Equipo</em> se mostrarán las presiones inicial y final de ambas, la de
-oxígeno y la de diluyente.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Información específica del equipo</em>: La información específica del equipo
-recabada por <em>Subsurface</em> se muestra en la pestaña <em>Otros datos</em>. Puede incluir
-información de ajustes o metadatos sobre la inmersión.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede encontrar más información especifica sobre descarga de diarios de CCR
-en el <a href="#S_PoseidonMkVI">Apéndice B</a>.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importar_desde_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">4.3.5. Importar desde Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h4>
+<h4 id="_importar_desde_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">5.3.2. Importar desde Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Dado que Mares utiliza software propiedad de Microsoft no compatible con
aplicaciones multiplataforma, estos diarios no pueden importarse directamente a
<em>Subsurface</em>. Los diarios de Mares necesitan ser importados usando un proceso en
@@ -1564,29 +1572,29 @@ información.</p></div> <li>
<p>
Los datos del Mares Dive Organiser necesitan exportarse al escritorio del
-usuario utilizando una extensión de archivo <em>.sdf</em>. Dirigirse a
-<a href="#Mares_Export">Apendice C</a> para más información.
+ usuario utilizando una extensión de archivo <em>.sdf</em>. Dirigirse a
+ <a href="#Mares_Export">Apendice C</a> para más información.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Los datos deben ser importados entonces desde <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. Se necesita
-crear una cuenta de usuario en <em>www.divelogs.de</em>, entrar a la página, entonces
-seleccionar <em>Import Logbook → Dive Organiser</em> en el menú de la izquierda. Hay
-que seguir cuidadosamente las instrucciones para transferir la información (en
-formato <em>.sdf</em>) desde la base de datos de Dive Organiser a <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.
+ crear una cuenta de usuario en <em>www.divelogs.de</em>, entrar a la página, entonces
+ seleccionar <em>Import Logbook → Dive Organiser</em> en el menú de la izquierda. Hay
+ que seguir cuidadosamente las instrucciones para transferir la información (en
+ formato <em>.sdf</em>) desde la base de datos de Dive Organiser a <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Finalmente importar las inmersiones desde <em>divelogs.de</em> a <em>Subsurface</em>,
-utilizando las instrucciones a continuación.
+ utilizando las instrucciones a continuación.
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">4.3.6. Importar inmersiones desde <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
+<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">5.3.3. Importar inmersiones desde <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Importar información de inmersiones desde <em>divelogs.de</em> es simple, se usa un
único diálogo. Se selecciona <em>Importar → Importar desde Divelogs.de</em> en el menú
principal. Esto despliega un diálogo (ver figura [<strong>A</strong>] abajo a la izquierda). Es
@@ -1603,198 +1611,257 @@ inmersiones importadas aparecerán en el panel <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</str </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingCSV">4.3.7. Importar inmersiones en formato CSV</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>En ocasiones, los ordenadores de buceo exportan la información en ficheros con
-<em>comma separated values</em> (.CSV, valores separados por comas). Por ejemplo, los
-sistemas CCR Inspiration y Evolution de APD exportan ficheros en formato CSV que
-contienen datos de una sola inmersión. Estos archivos pueden importarse
-fácilmente en <em>Subsurface</em>. Los archivos CSV están organizados en una única
-línea que proporciona los nombres de las columnas de datos, seguida de los datos
-a un registro por línea. Los archivos CSV pueden abrirse con cualquier editor de
-texto. A continuación un ejemplo muy simplificado y acortado de un archivo CSV
-de un rebreather aPD:</p></div>
-<div class="literalblock">
-<div class="content">
-<pre><code>Dive Time (s) Depth (m) pO2 - Setpoint (Bar) pO2 - C1 ...
-0 0.0 0.70 0.81 13.1
-0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
-0 0.0 0.70 0.71 13.1
-0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.2
-0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
-10 1.6 0.70 0.72 12.7
-20 1.6 0.70 0.71 12.6
-30 1.7 0.70 0.71 12.6
-40 1.8 0.70 0.68 12.5
-50 1.6 0.70 0.68 12.5
-60 2.4 0.70 0.69 12.5
-70 3.5 0.70 0.69 12.4
-80 4.2 0.70 0.72 12.5
-90 4.0 0.70 0.71 12.4</code></pre>
-</div></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>fíjate en que un título puede estar formado por más de una palabra, por ejemplo
-<em>Dive Time (s)</em> en el ejemplo. Antes de poder importar los datos en <em>Subsurface</em>
-se necesita saber:</p></div>
-<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
+<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVData">5.3.4. Importar datos en formato CSV</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede utilizar un archivo .csv (valores separados por comas) para importar
+información de buceo así como perfiles de inmersión (como en el caso de los
+CCRs APD Inspiration o el Evolution) o como metadatos de buceo (en caso de que
+el usuario guarde los datos en una hoja de cálculo). El formato <em>CSV</em> es un
+formato universal simplificado que permite un intercambio facil de información
+entre difeerentes ordenadores o paquetes de software. Para una introducción a
+archivos en formato <em>CSV</em> ver <a href="#S_CSV_Intro">Introducción de un buceador a los archivos CSV</a>.
+Los diarios de <em>Subsurface</em> también pueden exportarse a formato <em>CSV</em> para
+otro software que lea este formato. Ver el <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exportar una hoja de cálculo a formato CSV</a>
+para información que puede resultar útil para importar datos basados en hojas
+de cálculo a <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVDives">5.3.5. Importar inmersiones en formato <em>CSV</em> desde ordenadores u otro software</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede visualizar un archivo <em>CSV</em> usando un editor de textos ordinario. Se
+organiza, normalmente, en una sola línea que proporciona las cabeceras (o
+<em>nombres de campo</em> o <em>encabezamientos</em>) de las columnas de datos, seguidos por
+los datos a un registro (inmersión en nuestro caso) por línea.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay dos tipos de archivo <em>CSV</em> que pueden importarse en <em>Subsurface</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-¿ Que carácter separa las distintas columnas en una línea de datos ? Este
-separador de campos debería ser una coma (,) o un tabulador. Puede averiguarse
-abriendo el archivo con un editor de textos. Si se trata de una coma, el
-carácter será claramente visible entre valores. Si no hay comas a la vista,
-seguramente esté delimitado por tabuladores como en el ejemplo anterior.
+<em>Detalles de inmersión CSV</em>: Este formato contiene información similar a la
+ de un típico diario escrito, p.e. fecha, hora, profundidad, duración, nombre
+ de los compañeros y divemaster, y tal vez alguna información sobre botellas,
+ así como algunos comentarios sobre la inmersión. Toda la información sobre
+ un buceo va en una sola línea siguiendo el orden del encabezamiento de las
+ columnas.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-¿ Que columnas de datos necesitamos importar a <em>Subsurface</em> ? Las columnas de
-la hora y la profundidad son indispensables. Abre el archivo con un editor de
-textos y anota los títulos de las columnas a importar y sus posiciones, en el
-ejemplo anterior:
+<em>Perfil de inmersión CSV</em>: Este formato incluye mucha más información
+ sobre una sola inmersión. Por ejemplo, puede haber información a intervalos
+ de 30 segundos indicando la profundidad, la temperatura del agua a esa
+ profundidad y presión de las botellas en ese instante. Cada línea contiene
+ la información de un solo instante durante la inmersión, 30 segundos tras el
+ anterior. Se requieren muchas líneas para completar la información del
+ perfil de profundidad de un buceo. Es un formato utilizado comúnmente para
+ exportar por los equipos de buceo en circuito cerrado (CCR) y muchos
+ paquetes de software que manejan ordenadores de buceo y/o diarios.
</p>
-<div class="literalblock">
-<div class="content">
-<pre><code>Time: columna 1
-Depth: columna 2
-Temperature: columna 5
-pO2: columna 4</code></pre>
-</div></div>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Armado con esta información, importar en <em>Subsurface</em> es muy fácil. Selecciona
-<em>Importar→Importar CSV</em> en el menú principal. Aparecerá el siguiente dialogo:</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Import_CSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: diálogo de descarga CSV" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay definiciones preconfiguradas para algunos ordenadores de buceo, p.e. los
-rebreathers APD. Si el ordenador de buceo del usuario está en la lista, hay que
-seleccionarlo utilizando el desplegable etiquetado <em>Importaciones
-preconfiguradas</em>. Selecciona el botón de abajo a la derecha para indicar si los
-datos están en el Sistema Métrico o Imperial. Finalmente clicar <em>Aceptar</em> y la
-inmersión será importada y aparecerá en la pestaña <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> de
-<em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Si el ordenador de buceo no está en la lista preconfigurada, el usuario ha de
-seleccionar el <em>Separador de campos</em> (tabulador o coma) de su archivo CSV
-utilizando el desplegable apropiado e indicar qué columnas del archivo CSV
-contienen qué variables de datos. Para cada columna usada al importar, el
-usuario ha de seleccionar la casilla adecuada e indicar en que columna de datos
-se encuentran. Por ejemplo, la imagen anterior corresponde al diálogo que se
-aplicaría al conjunto de datos del ejemplo. Tras haber especificado las
-columnas, se selecciona el botón <em>Aceptar</em> y el buceo será importado y aparecerá
-en la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong> de <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingManualCSV">4.3.8. Importar inmersiones de archivos CSV mantenidos manualmente</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Si uno mantiene sus diarios en una hoja de cálculo, también hay una opción para
-importarlos. Los datos de la hoja de cálculo, exportados a un archivo CSV,
-pueden ser importados a <em>Subsurface</em>. Al importar registros mantenidos
-manualmente, la información necesaria es un poco diferente, ya que estamos
-importando metadatos, no muestras del perfil.
-Al igual que al importar buceos en formato CSV, se necesita conocer el formato
-interno de los datos a importar.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Antes de poder importar los datos a <em>Subsurface</em> se necesitan saber algunas
+cosas sobre los mismos:</p></div>
<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
<li>
<p>
¿ Que carácter separa las distintas columnas en una línea de datos ? Este
-separador de campos debería ser una coma (,) o un tabulador. Puede averiguarse
-abriendo el archivo con un editor de textos. Si se trata de una coma, el
-carácter será claramente visible entre valores. Si no hay comas a la vista,
-seguramente esté delimitado por tabuladores como en el ejemplo anterior. Un
-separador de campos recomendado para exportar es el tabulador, ya que las comas
-pueden formar parte de los propios campos. Así pues, el uso de un separador de
-campos apropiado es muy importante.
+ separador de campos debería ser una coma (,) o un tabulador. Puede averiguarse
+ abriendo el archivo con un editor de textos. Si se trata de una coma, el
+ carácter será claramente visible entre valores. Si no hay comas a la vista,
+ seguramente esté delimitado por tabuladores.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-¿ Que columnas necesitan importarse a <em>Subsurface</em> ? Actualmente no hay
-ningún campo de entrada obligatorio, pero algunos, p.e. la duración de la
-inmersión, son cruciales para que el diario tenga algún sentido. En la imagen de
-abajo pueden verse posibles opciones y deberían incluirse todos los campos que
-estén disponibles tanto en <em>Subsurface</em> como en el registro.
+¿ Que columnas de datos necesitamos importar a <em>Subsurface</em> ? ¿ Es un archivo
+ de <em>Detalles de inmersión CSV</em> o de <em>Perfil de inmersión CSV</em> ? Ábrelo con un
+ editor de textos y fíjate en los títulos de las columnas a importar y sus
+ posiciones.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Las unidades utilizadas para profundidad, peso y temperatura. Consideramos
-que la profundidad debe estar en pies o metros, el peso en libras o kilogramos y
-la temperatura en Fahrenheit o Celsius. Sin embargo, los usuarios pueden
-seleccionar <em>Métrico</em> o <em>Imperial</em> en la pestaña Preferencias de <em>Subsurface</em>.
-No se permite la mezcla de sistemas de unidades para los diferentes campos.
+¿ Está la información numérica (la profundidad por ejemplo) en unidades
+ métricas o imperiales ?
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Importar archivos CSV mantenidos a mano es bastante fácil, pero puede haber
-muchos campos y contar el número de estos es propenso a errores. Así pues, la
-validación de los datos a importar es crítica. Para importar los buceos, se
-selecciona <em>Importar → Importar archivos de registro</em> en la barra de menú. Si se
-selecciona la opción CSV en el desplegable y la lista de archivos incluye
-archivos que terminen en .csv, se puede seleccionar la pestaña <em>Inmersiones
-manuales</em> que traerá el siguiente diálogo de configuración:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Armado con esta información, importar en <em>Subsurface</em> es muy fácil. Selecciona
+<em>Importar→Importar CSV</em> en el menú principal. Aparecerá el siguiente dialogo:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Import_CSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Diálogo de descarga de archivos CSV manuales" />
+<img src="images/csv_import1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Diálogo 1, Descarga CSV" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Fíjate que, arriba a la izquierda, hay una lista desplegable que contiene ajustes
+preconfigurados para algunos de los ordenadores de buceo y paquetes de software
+más comunes que podemos encontrar los buceadores. Si el archivo <em>CSV</em> que vamos
+a importar se originó en alguno de estos paquetes o dispositivos, selecciónalo.
+En otro caso, utiliza la opción <em>Importación manual</em>. El panel de configuración
+también tiene listas desplegables para especificar el separador de campos
+adecuado (tabulado, coma o punto y coma), el formato de fecha usado en el CSV,
+las unidades de tiempo (segundos, minutos o minutos:segundos), así como el
+sistema de unidades (métrico o imperial) utilizado. Seleccionar las opciones
+correctas es crítico para importar correctamente los datos.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La última tarea es asegurarse que todas las columnas de datos tienen las
+cabeceras correctas. La línea superior de la parte blanca de la tabla contiene
+las cabeceras de columnas encontradas en el archivo <em>CSV. La fila de celdas
+azules inmediatamente sobre la anterior contiene los nombres que _Subsurface</em>
+ha entendido. La zona blanca inmediatamente debajo de las listas desplegables
+contiene los nombres de campos que <em>Subsurface</em> reconoce. Estos nombres están
+en globos azules que se pueden arrastrar y soltar en las celdas azules a las
+que correspondan en la parte superior de la tabla. Esto se muestra en la
+imagen a continuación.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/csv_import2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo 2, Descarga CSV" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Los campos de entrada pueden configurarse como corresponda, y cuando todo esté
-terminado, se selecciona el botón Aceptar para llevar a cabo la acción. Los
-nuevos buceos deberían aparecer en el área Lista de inmersiones de <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Continua haciendo hasta que todas los encabezamientos de columnas en la fila
+azul de celdas correspondan a las cabeceras listadas en la parte alta del
+diálogo. Habiendo completado esta tarea, selecciona el botón <em>OK</em> abajo a la
+derecha del diálogo. Los datos del archivo <em>CSV</em> se importarán y se mostrarán
+en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="sidebarblock" id="S_CSV_Intro">
+<div class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Introducción de un buceador a los archivos <em>CSV</em></strong></p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content"><em>CSV</em> es una abreviatura para un formato de archivo de datos: <em>Comma-Separated
+Variables</em> en inglés. Es un formato de archivo que permite visualizar o editar
+la información usando un editor de textos como el Bloc de Notas (Windows),
+Gedit (linux) o TextWrangler (OS/X). Las dos principales ventajas del formato
+CSV son que los datos son fácilmente editables como texto sin usar ningún
+software propietario y asegurando que toda la información es legible, no siendo
+ofuscada por ningún atributo de los que el software propietario inserta en los
+archivos.
+A causa de su simplicidad, el formato <em>CSV</em> se utiliza como formato de intercambio
+entre muchos paquetes de software, por ejemplo entre hojas de cálculo,
+estadísticas, gráficos, bases de datos y software de buceo. En <em>Subsurface</em>, los
+archivos <em>CSV</em> también se pueden usar para importar información de otras fuentes
+tales como diarios basados en hojas de cálculo o, incluso, de algunos ordenadores.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El atributo más importante de un archivo <em>CSV</em> es el <em>separador de campos</em>, esto
+es, el carácter utilizado para separar campos dentro de una línea. El separador
+de campos es, habitualmente, una coma, un punto y coma, un espacio o un
+tabulador. Al exportar datos desde una hoja de cálculo, se necesita especificar
+el carácter separador para poder crear el archivo CSV. Los archivos <em>CSV</em> están,
+normalmente, organizados en una sola línea que proporciona las cabeceras (o
+<em>nombres de campos</em>) de las columnas de datos, seguido por los datos, a un
+registro por línea. Nótese que cada nombre de campo puede estar formado por más
+de una palabra separadas por espacios; por ejemplo <em>Punto de buceo</em>. A
+continuación, un ejemplo de información de cuatro inmersiones utilizando la coma
+como separador de campos:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive site,Dive date,Time,Dive_duration, Dive_depth,Dive buddy
+Illovo Beach,2012-11-23,10:45,46:15,18.4,John Smith
+Key Largo,2012-11-24,09:12,34:15,20.4,Jason McDonald
+Wismar Baltic,2012-12-01,10:13,35:27,15.4,Dieter Albrecht
+Pulau Weh,2012-12-20,09:46,55:56,38.6,Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>En este formato los datos no son legibles con facilidad para los humanos. A
+continuación los mismos datos usando el tabulador como separador:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive site Dive date Time Dive_duration Dive_depth Dive buddy
+Illovo Beach 2012-11-23 10:45 46:15 18.4 John Smith
+Key Largo 2012-11-24 09:12 34:15 20.4 Jason McDonald
+Wismar Baltic 2012-12-01 10:13 35:27 15.4 Dieter Albrecht
+Pulau Weh 2012-12-20 09:46 55:56 38.6 Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Es obvio por qué mucha gente prefiere el formato con tabulador al separado por
+comas. La desventaja es que los tabuladores no se pueden ver. Por ejemplo el
+espacio entre <em>Dive</em> y <em>date</em> en la primera línea puede ser un espacio o un
+tabulador (en este caso un espacio). Si los nombres de campo de la primera línea
+son largos, no se puede mantener la alineación con los otros campos de datos.
+A continuación un ejemplo muy simplificado y recortado de un diario <em>CSV</em> del
+ordenador de buceo de un rebreather CCR APD:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive Time (s) Depth (m) pO₂ - Setpoint (Bar) pO₂ - C1 Cell 1 (Bar) Ambient temp. (Celsius)
+0 0.0 0.70 0.81 13.1
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
+0 0.0 0.70 0.71 13.1
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.2
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
+10 1.6 0.70 0.72 12.7
+20 1.6 0.70 0.71 12.6
+30 1.7 0.70 0.71 12.6
+40 1.8 0.70 0.68 12.5</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Cuando un archivo <em>CSV</em> se selecciona para importar, <em>Subsurface</em> muestra las
+cabeceras de las columnas y unas pocas lineas de datos del archivo, facilitando
+mucho, de esta forma, trabajar con archivos <em>CSV</em>.
+Conocer algunas cosas básicas sobre el contenido del archivo <em>CSV</em> permite una
+importación mejor de las inmersiones a <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>+[IMPORTANT]
+La importación <em>CSV</em> tiene un par de advertencias. Se deberían evitar algunos
+caracteres especiales como el signo &, menor que (<), mayor que (>) y comillas
+(") como parte de los número o del texto de una casilla. El archivo debería
+usar el conjunto de caracteres UTF-8, si se usan caracteres no ASCII. También
+podría causar problemas el tamaño del archivo <em>CSV</em>. Importar 100 buceos de una
+sola vez (<em>Detalles de inmersión CSV</em>) funciona, pero archivos mayores podrían
+exceder los límites del analizador utilizado. Si se encontraran problemas al
+importar <em>CSV</em> sería conveniente probar con un archivo más pequeño solo para
+asegurarse de que el resto funciona.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Companion">4.4. Importar coordenadas GPS con la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion para teléfonos móviles</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Utilizando la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion en un dispositivo Android con GPS, se
-pueden pasar automáticamente las coordenadas de los puntos de buceo al registro
-de <em>Subsurface</em>. La app Companion guarda las ubicaciones de buceo en un servidor
-dedicado basado en internet. <em>Subsurface</em> puede recoger las coordenadas desde
-este servidor.</p></div>
+<h3 id="S_Companion">5.4. Importar coordenadas GPS con la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion para teléfonos móviles</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Utilizando la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion en un dispositivo Android con GPS o
+<a href="#S_iphone"><em>iPhone</em></a>, se pueden pasar automáticamente las coordenadas de los
+puntos de buceo al registro de <em>Subsurface</em>. La app Companion guarda las
+ubicaciones de buceo en un servidor dedicado basado en internet. <em>Subsurface</em>
+puede recoger las coordenadas desde este servidor.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para hacer esto:</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_crear_una_cuenta_para_la_app_companion">4.4.1. Crear una cuenta para la app Companion</h4>
+<h4 id="_crear_una_cuenta_para_la_app_companion">5.4.1. Crear una cuenta para la app Companion</h4>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Registrarse en la <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/">página web de <em>Subsurface</em>
-companion</a>. Se recibirá un correo de confirmación con instrucciones y un
-<strong>DIVERID</strong> personal, un largo número que te dará acceso a las capacidades de la
-app Companion.
+ companion</a>. Se recibirá un correo de confirmación con instrucciones y un
+ <strong>DIVERID</strong> personal, un largo número que te dará acceso a las capacidades de la
+ app Companion.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Descargar la app desde
-<a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.subsurface">Google Play Store</a>
-o desde
-<a href="http://f-droid.org/repository/browse/?fdfilter=subsurface&fdid=org.subsurface">F-Droid</a>.
+ <a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.subsurface">Google Play Store</a>
+ o desde
+ <a href="http://f-droid.org/repository/browse/?fdfilter=subsurface&fdid=org.subsurface">F-Droid</a>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_utilizar_em_subsurface_em_companion_en_un_smartphone">4.4.2. Utilizar <em>Subsurface</em> companion en un smartphone</h4>
+<h4 id="_utilizar_em_subsurface_em_companion_en_un_smartphone_android">5.4.2. Utilizar <em>Subsurface</em> companion en un smartphone Android</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La primera vez que se utiliza, la app tiene tres opciones:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<em>Create a new account</em>. Equivalente a registrase en la página de <em>Subsurface</em>
-companion utilizando un navegador de internet. Se puede solicitar un <strong>DIVERID</strong>
-con esta opción que se recibirá vía correo electrónico y se confirmará a través
-de la <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/">_página web de Subsurface companion</a> para
-activar la cuenta.
+ companion utilizando un navegador de internet. Se puede solicitar un <strong>DIVERID</strong>
+ con esta opción que se recibirá vía correo electrónico y se confirmará a través
+ de la <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/">_página web de Subsurface companion</a> para
+ activar la cuenta.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Retrieve an account</em>. Si el usuario olvidó su <strong>DIVERID</strong> recibirá un correo
-para recuperar el número.
+ para recuperar el número.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Use an existing account</em>. Se pide el <strong>DIVERID</strong>. La app conserva el <strong>DIVERID</strong>
-y no lo vuelve a pedir, a menos que se utilice la opción <em>Disconnect</em> en el menú
-(ver a continuación).
+ y no lo vuelve a pedir, a menos que se utilice la opción <em>Disconnect</em> en el menú
+ (ver a continuación).
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1811,7 +1878,7 @@ Esto facilitará la sincronización entre <em>Subsurface</em> y la app Companion </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_crear_nuevas_ubicaciones_de_buceo">4.4.3. Crear nuevas ubicaciones de buceo</h4>
+<h4 id="_crear_nuevas_ubicaciones_de_buceo">5.4.3. Crear nuevas ubicaciones de buceo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Ahora se está preparado para tomar una posición de buceo y enviarla al servidor.
La pantalla de Android se verá como lo imagen de abajo a la izquierda (<strong>A</strong>),
pero sin ninguna inmersión.</p></div>
@@ -1820,20 +1887,20 @@ pero sin ninguna inmersión.</p></div> <li>
<p>
Current: Se pedirá un nombre para el lugar (o que se active el GPS si estaba
-apagado). Tras lo cual se guardará la posición actual.
+ apagado). Tras lo cual se guardará la posición actual.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Use map: Esta opción permite al usuario fijar una posición buscándola en un
-mapamundi. Se muestra un mapamundi(ver <strong>B</strong> a continuación) sobre el cual indicar
-la posición con una pulsación larga en la pantalla táctil (si la posición
-marcada es errónea, simplemente se indica una nueva). A continuación hay que
-seleccionar el símbolo de chequeo arriba a la derecha. Se mostrará un dialogo
-que permitirá introducir un nombre para el punto seleccionado y la fecha y hora
-del buceo (ver <strong>C</strong> abajo). De cara a importar esta posición de buceo a
-<em>Subsurface</em> es recomendable fijar la misma hora de inmersión que la marcada por
-el ordenador de buceo.
+ mapamundi. Se muestra un mapamundi(ver <strong>B</strong> a continuación) sobre el cual indicar
+ la posición con una pulsación larga en la pantalla táctil (si la posición
+ marcada es errónea, simplemente se indica una nueva). A continuación hay que
+ seleccionar el símbolo de chequeo arriba a la derecha. Se mostrará un dialogo
+ que permitirá introducir un nombre para el punto seleccionado y la fecha y hora
+ del buceo (ver <strong>C</strong> abajo). De cara a importar esta posición de buceo a
+ <em>Subsurface</em> es recomendable fijar la misma hora de inmersión que la marcada por
+ el ordenador de buceo.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1846,17 +1913,17 @@ el ordenador de buceo. <li>
<p>
Importar desde archivos GPX: El dispositivo android buscará archivos .gpx y
-mostrará los que se localicen. El archivo que se seleccione se abrirá y se
-mostrarán las posiciones que contiene. Ahora hay que elegir las ubicaciones
-correctas y luego seleccionar el símbolo de chequeo arriba ala derecha, tras lo
-cual las posiciones se enviarán al servicio web y se añadirán a la lista del
-dispositivo android.
+ mostrará los que se localicen. El archivo que se seleccione se abrirá y se
+ mostrarán las posiciones que contiene. Ahora hay que elegir las ubicaciones
+ correctas y luego seleccionar el símbolo de chequeo arriba ala derecha, tras lo
+ cual las posiciones se enviarán al servicio web y se añadirán a la lista del
+ dispositivo android.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_listas_de_ubicaciones_de_buceo">4.4.4. Listas de ubicaciones de buceo</h4>
+<h4 id="_listas_de_ubicaciones_de_buceo">5.4.4. Listas de ubicaciones de buceo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pantalla principal muestra una lista de ubicaciones de buceo, cada una con un
nombre, fecha y hora (ver <strong>A</strong> debajo). Algunas posiciones pueden tener una
flechita sobre la casilla de selección, lo que indica que necesitan remitirse al
@@ -1882,7 +1949,7 @@ arriba de la pantalla:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Edit (lapiz): Permite cambiar el nombre u otras características del punto de
-buceo.
+ buceo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1895,7 +1962,7 @@ Maps: Muestra el punto de buceo sobre un mapa. al servidor, como se explicará a continuación.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_subir_puntos_de_buceo">4.4.5. Subir puntos de buceo</h4>
+<h4 id="_subir_puntos_de_buceo">5.4.5. Subir puntos de buceo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varias formas de enviar los buceos al servidor; la más fácil es simplemente
seleccionar la inmersión (ver la imagen <strong>A</strong> abajo) y luego pulsar la flecha
arriba a la derecha de la pantalla.</p></div>
@@ -1918,7 +1985,7 @@ estarán listos para ser descargados a un diario de <em>Subsurface</em> (ver a continuación).</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_ajustes_de_la_companion_app">4.4.6. Ajustes de la Companion app</h4>
+<h4 id="_ajustes_de_la_companion_app">5.4.6. Ajustes de la Companion app</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Seleccionar la opción Settings del menú, resulta en la imagen B de arriba a la
derecha.</p></div>
<div class="sect4">
@@ -1932,8 +1999,8 @@ derecha.</p></div> <li>
<p>
<em>User ID.</em> El DIVERID obtenido al registrarse como indicábamos antes. La forma
-más fácil de introducirlo es simplemente copiar y pegar desde el correo de
-confirmación pero, desde luego, el usuario teclearlo carácter a carácter.
+ más fácil de introducirlo es simplemente copiar y pegar desde el correo de
+ confirmación pero, desde luego, el usuario teclearlo carácter a carácter.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1944,14 +2011,14 @@ confirmación pero, desde luego, el usuario teclearlo carácter a carácter. <li>
<p>
<em>Synchronize on startup</em>. Si se selecciona, los puntos de buceo del
-dispositivo android y los del servicio web se sincronizarán cada vez que se
-inicie la app.
+ dispositivo android y los del servicio web se sincronizarán cada vez que se
+ inicie la app.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Upload new dives</em>. Si se selecciona, cada vez que el usuario añada una
-ubicación de buceo, se enviará automáticamente al servidor.
+ ubicación de buceo, se enviará automáticamente al servidor.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -1966,7 +2033,7 @@ continuamente posiciones GPS</p></div> <li>
<p>
<em>Min duration</em>. En minutos. La app intentará tomar una posición cada X minutos
-hasta que el usuario la detenga.
+ hasta que el usuario la detenga.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1977,7 +2044,7 @@ hasta que el usuario la detenga. <li>
<p>
<em>Name template</em>. La plantilla de nombre que usará la app cuando guarde las
-posiciones.
+ posiciones.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2003,7 +2070,7 @@ mueve, puede llegar a tener una traza de su viaje al guardar una ubicación cada <li>
<p>
<em>Mailing List</em>. El buzón de correo de <em>Subsurface</em>. El usuario enviar mails a
-la lista de correo de <em>Subsurface</em>.
+ la lista de correo de <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2043,7 +2110,34 @@ servidor.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_descargar_ubicaciones_de_buceo_al_diario_en_em_subsurface_em">4.4.7. Descargar ubicaciones de buceo al diario en <em>Subsurface</em></h4>
+<h4 id="S_iphone">5.4.7. Usar la app Subsurface companion en un <em>iPhone</em> para registra puntos de buceo</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El interfaz de iPhone es bastante simple. Se necesita introducir la ID de
+usuario (obtenida durante el registro) en el espacio reservado para ello, luego
+seleccionar "Dive in" (ver parte izquierda de la imágen de abajo) y se empieza
+a recoger información de las ubicaciones.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/iphone.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Usiar la aplicación iPhone companion" width="640" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones se pueden añadir de forma automática o manual. En modo manual,
+se añade una sola ubicación de buceo o "waypoint" al flujo de entrada de datos
+del GPS. En modo automático se crea una traza continua de posiciones GPS de las
+cuales, posteriormente, después de haberse importado, <em>Subsurface</em> puede
+seleccionar las posiciones correctas en base a las horas de los buceos. El modo
+por defecto para el <em>iPhone</em> es el automático. Cuando se añade una inmersión,
+el servicio de posicionamiento se inicia automáticamente y aparece una barra
+roja en la parte de abajo de la pantalla. Tras el buceo, se puede hacer clic en
+la barra roja para detener el servicio de posicionamiento. Mientras el servicio
+se está ejecutando, solo se pueden añadir inmersiones usando el mecanismo
+manual.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede editar el nombre del punto de buceo posteriormente, seleccionando la
+inmersión de la lista y clicando en el nombre. No hay otros campos editables.
+La lista se sube automáticamente desde el <em>iPhone</em> al servicio web y no hay
+opción a hacerlo manualmente.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_descargar_ubicaciones_de_buceo_al_diario_en_em_subsurface_em">5.4.8. Descargar ubicaciones de buceo al diario en <em>Subsurface</em></h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay que descargar a <em>Subsurface</em> las inmersiones del ordenador de buceo, o
crearlas manualmente, antes de obtener las coordenadas del servifor. El diálogo
de descarga se puede obtener vía <em>Ctrl+G</em> o desde el menú principal de
@@ -2092,22 +2186,22 @@ de estos, y luego volver a cambiarla a la correcta <strong>después</strong> de <li>
<p>
El servicio en segundo plano es una herramienta poderosa, pero puede llenar la
-lista de localizaciones con muchas posiciones innecesarias que no correspondan a
-los puntos exactos de buceo, sino a la ruta seguida por el barco. Actualmente,
-borrar estas posiciones del servidor resulta difícil. En algunas situaciones
-resulta, pues, prudente limpiar la lista del dispositivo android antes de enviar
-los puntos al servidor simplemente borrando los que no sean correctos. Esto
-puede ser necesario, por ejemplo, si se desea mantener limpia la lista de
-ubicaciones para poder visualizarlas en el mapa del servidor o del dispositivo
-android.
+ lista de localizaciones con muchas posiciones innecesarias que no correspondan a
+ los puntos exactos de buceo, sino a la ruta seguida por el barco. Actualmente,
+ borrar estas posiciones del servidor resulta difícil. En algunas situaciones
+ resulta, pues, prudente limpiar la lista del dispositivo android antes de enviar
+ los puntos al servidor simplemente borrando los que no sean correctos. Esto
+ puede ser necesario, por ejemplo, si se desea mantener limpia la lista de
+ ubicaciones para poder visualizarlas en el mapa del servidor o del dispositivo
+ android.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
También tendría sentido proporcionar nombres significativos a las
-localizaciones enviadas al servidor o, al menos, usar tal nombre en el ajuste
-<em>Name Template</em> si se va a ejecutar el background service, especialmente durante
-los viajes de buceo con muchas inmersiones y puntos de buceo.
+ localizaciones enviadas al servidor o, al menos, usar tal nombre en el ajuste
+ <em>Name Template</em> si se va a ejecutar el background service, especialmente durante
+ los viajes de buceo con muchas inmersiones y puntos de buceo.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2116,7 +2210,7 @@ los viajes de buceo con muchas inmersiones y puntos de buceo. </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_LoadImage">5. El cargador de fotografías de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="S_LoadImage">6. El cargador de fotografías de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores (si no la mayoría) llevan consigo una cámara y toman
fotografías durante sus inmersiones. Sería interesante poder asociar cada
@@ -2124,12 +2218,12 @@ fotografía con una inmersión concreta. <em>Subsurface</em> nos permite cargar una inmersión. Las fotos se superponen en el perfil de la inmersión, desde donde
pueden visualizarse.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_cargar_fotos_y_sincronizar_la_cámara_con_el_ordenador_de_buceo">5.1. Cargar fotos y sincronizar la cámara con el ordenador de buceo</h3>
+<h3 id="_cargar_fotos_y_sincronizar_la_camara_con_el_ordenador_de_buceo">6.1. Cargar fotos y sincronizar la cámara con el ordenador de buceo</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se selecciona una inmersión o un grupo de ellas en la lista. Luego se hace
clic-derecho en la selección y se elige la opción <em>Carga imagenes</em>:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción de carga de imágenes" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción de carga de imágenes" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Aparecerá el navegador de archivos del sistema. Se selecciona la carpeta y las
@@ -2137,7 +2231,7 @@ fotografías que se necesitan cargar en <em>Subsurface</em> y se hace clic en el <em>Abrir</em>.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción de carga de imágenes" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción de carga de imágenes" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esto desplegará el diálogo de sincronización que se muestra a continuación. El
@@ -2150,42 +2244,42 @@ posicionarlas en el perfil de la inmersión.</p></div> <li>
<p>
<strong>Manualmente</strong>: Si el usuario anotó la hora exacta de la cámara al inicio de la
-inmersión, se puede obtener la diferencia de tiempo entre los dos dispositivos.
-En realidad, si no se han variado los ajustes horarios, se pueden conseguir tras
-la inmersión o, incluso, al final del día. Entonces se puede indicar manualmente
-la diferencia en el diálogo de <em>Desplazamiento horario</em>. En la parte de arriba
-del diálogo hay una herramienta para indicar tiempos, evidente en la figura <strong>A</strong>
-a continuación. Si la cámara lleva un adelanto de 7 minutos sobre el ordenador
-de buceo, fijamos en la herramienta un valor de 00:07. Se ignora cualquier
-sufijo "AM" o "PM". Seleccionamos el botón <em>OK</em> y se habrá obtenido la
-sincronización. Hay que marcar <em>Más pronto</em> o <em>Más tarde</em> según corresponda. En
-el ejemplo a continuación, la opción <em>Más pronto</em> es la correcta ya que la
-cámara de fotos va 7 minutos por delante del ordenador de buceo.
+ inmersión, se puede obtener la diferencia de tiempo entre los dos dispositivos.
+ En realidad, si no se han variado los ajustes horarios, se pueden conseguir tras
+ la inmersión o, incluso, al final del día. Entonces se puede indicar manualmente
+ la diferencia en el diálogo de <em>Desplazamiento horario</em>. En la parte de arriba
+ del diálogo hay una herramienta para indicar tiempos, evidente en la figura <strong>A</strong>
+ a continuación. Si la cámara lleva un adelanto de 7 minutos sobre el ordenador
+ de buceo, fijamos en la herramienta un valor de 00:07. Se ignora cualquier
+ sufijo "AM" o "PM". Seleccionamos el botón <em>OK</em> y se habrá obtenido la
+ sincronización. Hay que marcar <em>Más pronto</em> o <em>Más tarde</em> según corresponda. En
+ el ejemplo a continuación, la opción <em>Más pronto</em> es la correcta ya que la
+ cámara de fotos va 7 minutos por delante del ordenador de buceo.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images//LoadImage3b.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de sincronización" />
+<img src="images//LoadImage3b_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de sincronización" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Por fotografía</strong>: Hay una forma muy cómoda de conseguir sincronización. Si se
-toma una foto de la pantalla del ordenador mostrando la hora, <em>Subsurface</em> puede
-obtener la hora exacta a la que se tomó la foto usando los metadatos que la
-cámara guarda en cada foto. Para ello se utiliza la mitad inferior del diálogo
-<em>Desplazamiento horario</em>. Si se selecciona la barra horizontal titulada
-"<em>Selecciona la imagen del ordenador de buceo mostrando la hora</em>", aparece un
-navegador de archivos. Se selecciona la fotografía y se pulsa <em>Abrir</em>. La foto
-del ordenador de buceo aparecerá en el recuadro inferior del diálogo.
-<em>Subsurface</em> sabe exactamente cuando se tomó la foto. Ajusta la fecha y hora en
-el diálogo a la izquierda de la foto para que refleje los de la pantalla del
-ordenador. Tras el ajuste <em>Subsurface</em> conoce exactamente cual es la diferencia
-entre cámara y ordenador y se podrán sincronizar. La figura anterior muestra una
-fotografía del ordenador de buceo y la herramienta de tiempo ajustada a la fecha
-y hora de la imagen <strong>B</strong> anterior.
+ toma una foto de la pantalla del ordenador mostrando la hora, <em>Subsurface</em> puede
+ obtener la hora exacta a la que se tomó la foto usando los metadatos que la
+ cámara guarda en cada foto. Para ello se utiliza la mitad inferior del diálogo
+ <em>Desplazamiento horario</em>. Si se selecciona la barra horizontal titulada
+ "<em>Selecciona la imagen del ordenador de buceo mostrando la hora</em>", aparece un
+ navegador de archivos. Se selecciona la fotografía y se pulsa <em>Abrir</em>. La foto
+ del ordenador de buceo aparecerá en el recuadro inferior del diálogo.
+ <em>Subsurface</em> sabe exactamente cuando se tomó la foto. Ajusta la fecha y hora en
+ el diálogo a la izquierda de la foto para que refleje los de la pantalla del
+ ordenador. Tras el ajuste <em>Subsurface</em> conoce exactamente cual es la diferencia
+ entre cámara y ordenador y se podrán sincronizar. La figura anterior muestra una
+ fotografía del ordenador de buceo y la herramienta de tiempo ajustada a la fecha
+ y hora de la imagen <strong>B</strong> anterior.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2193,7 +2287,7 @@ y hora de la imagen <strong>B</strong> anterior. perfil de la inmersión. Si está en un rango de 30 minutos, sí se muestra.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_visualizar_las_imágenes">5.2. Visualizar las imágenes</h3>
+<h3 id="_visualizar_las_imagenes">6.2. Visualizar las imágenes</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Después que las imágenes han sido cargadas aparecen en dos lugares:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -2204,20 +2298,20 @@ La pestaña <em>Fotos</em> del panel <em>Notas de la inmersión</em>. <li>
<p>
Como pequeños iconos (chinchetas) sobre el perfil de inmersión, en posiciones
- que relejan la hora en que se tomó cada fotografía. Ver a continuación:
+ que relejan la hora en que se tomó cada fotografía. Ver a continuación:
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage4.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Fotos sobre un perfil de inmersión" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Fotos sobre un perfil de inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si se sitúa el ratón sobre uno de los iconos, se mostrará una versión reducida
de la foto. Ver imagen a continuación:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage5.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Foto reducida sobre perfil de inmersión" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Foto reducida sobre perfil de inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si hacemos clic sobre la imagen reducida aparecerá la fotografía a tamaño
@@ -2230,11 +2324,11 @@ sobre las imágenes. Las imágenes también puede borrase desde la pestaña <em (ver en el siguiente punto).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage6.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Foto a pantalla completa sobre el perfil de inmersión" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Foto a pantalla completa sobre el perfil de inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_la_pestaña_em_fotos_em">5.2.1. La pestaña <em>Fotos</em></h4>
+<h4 id="_la_pestana_em_fotos_em">6.2.1. La pestaña <em>Fotos</em></h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las fotografías asociadas a una inmersión se muestran como miniaturas en la
pestaña <em>Fotos</em> del <em>Panel de inmersión</em>. Se puede acceder con facilidad a las
fotos hechas en rápida sucesión durante la inmersión, desde la pestaña <em>Fotos</em>.
@@ -2249,7 +2343,7 @@ teclado. Esto eliminará la foto tanto de la pestaña <em>Fotos</em> como del <e la inmersión</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_fotos_en_disco_duro_externo">5.2.2. Fotos en disco duro externo</h4>
+<h4 id="_fotos_en_disco_duro_externo">6.2.2. Fotos en disco duro externo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La mayoría de fotosubs guardan sus fotografías en un disco duro externo. Si este
disco puede mapearse (como es casi siempre el caso) <em>Subsurface</em> puede acceder
directamente a las fotos. Esto facilita la interacción entre <em>Subsurface</em> y un
@@ -2265,13 +2359,203 @@ es el funcionamiento normal. Si, posteriormente, el disco externo con las fotos se vuelve a conectar, las fotos se visualizarán normalmente.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_registrar_tipos_de_inmersion_especiales">6.3. Registrar tipos de inmersión especiales</h3>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_inmersiones_en_montaje_lateral_sidemount">6.3.1. Inmersiones en montaje lateral (sidemount)</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>_Subsurface maneja fácilmente buceos en los que se use más de una botella.
+Registrar inmersiones en lateral se hace en tres pasos:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+*Durante el buceo, registrar los eventos de cambio de botella". Ya que bucear
+ en lateral supone, normalmente, usar 2 botellas con aire o con la misma mezcla,
+ <em>Subsurface</em> distingue entre estas botellas. En comparación, la mayoría de
+ ordenadores de buceo que contemplan cambios de gas solo distinguen entre
+ diferentes <em>gases</em> usados, no entre diferentes <em>botellas</em> usadas. Esto supone
+ que, cuando se descargan inmersiones en sidemount desde estos ordenadores, los
+ eventos de cambio entre las diferentes botellas no se descargan. Esto puede
+ suponer que se tenga que guardar un registro manual de cambios de botella o
+ (si el ordenador tiene esta posibilidad) marcando cada cambio de botella con
+ una marca que se pueda descargar posteriormente. Regresar de una inmersión
+ en lateral con la información de cambios de botella es la única parte con
+ truco en cuanto a registrar buceos en sidemount.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>En <em>Subsurface</em> detalla las botellas usadas en la inmersión</strong>. El usuario
+ registra las especificaciones para las diferentes botellas usando la pestaña
+ <strong>Equipo</strong> del <strong>Panel de información</strong> (véase imagen a continuación en la que se
+ usó una botella de 12 litros).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Indicar eventos de cambio de botella sobre el perfil de <em>Subsurface</em></strong>. Una
+ vez que se ha importado la inmersión desde el ordenador de buceo, es necesario
+ indicar los eventos de cambio de botella sobre el perfil. Los cambios se
+ anotan haciendo clic-derecho en el punto correspondiente del perfil y entonces
+ seleccionando <em>Añadir cambio de gas</em>. Se muestra una lista de las botellas con
+ la que se está utilizando en gris. En la imagen a continuación, Tank 1 está en
+ gris, permitiendo solo la selección de Tank 2. Tras seleccionar la botella
+ correspondiente el cambio se indicará sobre el perfil con un icono de una
+ botella. Si está activada la <strong>Barra de botellas</strong> también se indicará el cambio
+ sobre ella (ver imagen a continuación). Una vez que todos los cambios de
+ botella han sido registrados sobre el perfil, las presiones correctas de ambas
+ botellas se mostrarán en el perfil, como en la imagen de ejemplo.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/sidemount1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Sidemount profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta sección es un ejemplo de la versatilidad de <em>Subsurface</em> como herramienta
+de registro de inmersiones.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_CCR_dives">6.3.2. Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito cerrado (CCR)</h4>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/APD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Los rebreathers de circuito cerrado utilizan tecnología avanzada para
+reciclar el gas que se ha respirado, mientras mantienen una concentración de
+oxígeno respirable llevando a cabo dos acciones:
+a) Eliminan dióxido de carbono del gas que se ha exhalado.
+b) Regulan la concentración de oxígeno para que permanezca en los límites.
+En la actualidad, en <em>Subsurface</em> el Poseidon MKVI Discovery es el ordenador
+de buceo CCR mejor soportado. El interfaz CCR de <em>Subsurface</em> es, ahora mismo,
+experimental y está bajo desarrollo activo. En contraste con un ordenador
+de buceo recreativo convencional, el ordenador de un sistema CCR no permite
+descargar un diario que contenga múltiples inmersiones. En su lugar, cada buceo
+se guarda independientemente. Esto significa que <em>SUbsurface</em> no puede descargar
+el diario directamente desde un CCR, sino que lo importa de la misma manera que
+se importan datos de otras fuentes digitales.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_importar_una_inmersion_con_ccr">6.3.3. Importar una inmersión con CCR</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Véase la sección que trata de <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importar información de buceo de otras fuentes digitales</a>.
+Desde el menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em>, seleccionar <em>Import → Importar archivos
+de registro</em> para desplegar el <a href="#Unified_import">Diálogo de importación universal</a>.
+Como se explicaba en esa sección, en la parte de abajo a la derecha hay una lista
+desplegable de dispositivos que incluye una opción para los archivos del
+(Poseidon) MKVI (la funcionalidad para otros dispositivos CCR está en desarrollo
+actualmente). Tras haber seleccionado el dispositivo y el directorio donde se
+hallan los archivos originales del ordenador CCR, se puede seleccionar un
+archivo concreto (en el caso del MKVI es un archivo con extensión .txt). Tras
+seleccionar el archivo, activar el botón <em>Abrir</em> de abajo a la derecha.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_informacion_mostrada_para_un_buceo_con_ccr">6.3.4. Información mostrada para un buceo con CCR</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Presiones parciales de los gases</em>: El gráfico de presión parcial de oxígeno
+muestra la información de los sensores de oxígeno del equipo CCR. A diferencia
+del equipo de circuito abierto (donde los valores de pO<sub>2</sub> se calculan en base
+a la composición del gas y la profundidad), los equipos CCR proporcionan
+mediciones instantáneas de pO<sub>2</sub>, a partir de sensores de oxígeno. En este
+caso el gráfico de presión parcial de oxígeno debería se bastante plano,
+reflejando el ajuste del setpoint durante la inmersión. La pO<sub>2</sub> media no es
+la media de presiones parciales de oxígeno que facilita el equipo CCR, sino
+un valor calculado por <em>Subsurface</em> de la siguiente forma:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Para DOS sensores de O<sub>2</sub> se da en valor medio de ambos sensores.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Para sistemas de TRES sensores (p.e. APD), también se usa la media. Sin
+ embargo las lecturas simultaneas de diferentes sensores con diferencias de
+ más de 0,1 bar, se consideran falsas y se ignoran.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La pO<sub>2</sub> media de los sensores se indica con una línea verde.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El valor del setpoint así como las lecturas de de los sensores de oxígeno
+individuales puede mostrarse. La presentación en pantalla de información CCR
+adicional se activa seleccionando las opciones adecuadas en el panel <em>Preferencias</em>
+(accesible seleccionando <a href="#S_CCR_options"><em>Archivo → Preferencias → Gráfico</em></a>).
+Esta parte del panel <em>Preferencias</em> se presenta como dos casillas seleccionables
+que modifican la presentación de la pO<sub>2</sub> cuando se halla activada la opción
+correspondiente de la barra de herramientas del Perfil de Inmersión.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_preferences_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Panel de preferencias de CCR" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Clicar cualquiera de las casillas seleccionables permite mostrar información
+adicional relativa al oxígeno, siempre que el botón pO<sub>2</sub> de la barra de
+herramientas del panel <em>Perfil</em> esté activado.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La primera casilla permite mostrar información del setpoint. Esta es una línea
+roja superpuesta al gráfico verde de presión parcial de oxígeno y permite
+comparar la media de presiones parciales de oxígeno medidas, frente al valor
+del setpoint, como en la imagen a continuación.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>image::images/CCR_setpoint_f20.jpg"FIGURA: Gráfico de pO2 y setpoint del CCR",align="center"]</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La segunda casilla permite mostrar datos de cada sensor de oxígeno individual
+del equipo CCR. Los datos de cada sensor se colorean de la siguiente forma:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 1: gris
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 2: azul
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 3: marrón
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La media de pO<sub>2</sub> se indica por la línea verde. Así se pueden comparar los
+datos de cada uno de los sensores de oxígeno, lo cual es útil para detectar
+lecturas erráticas o anormalmente bajas de un sensor en particular.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_sensor_data_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Gráfico de datos de los sensores del CCR" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El dato del setpoint puede ser superpuesto sobre los datos de los sensores de
+oxígeno activando ambas casillas. Las presiones parciales del nitrógeno y del
+helio (en su caso) se muestran de la forma habitual para las inmersiones OC.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Eventos</em>: Se registran diversos eventos, p.e. los cambios a circuito abierto
+de la boquilla. Estos eventos se muestran como triángulos amarillos y, si se
+pasa el ratón sobre el icono, se da una descripción del evento en la línea
+inferior del <a href="#S_InfoBox">Recuadro de información</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Presiones de las botellas</em>: Algunos ordenadores de buceo CCR, como el MKVI de
+Poseidon, registran las presiones de las botellas de oxígeno y diluyente. Las
+presiones de estas dos botellas se muestran como líneas verdes sobre el perfil
+de la inmersión. Además, las presiones iniciales y finales de ambas botellas se
+muestran en la pestaña <em>Equipo</em>. A continuación, un perfil de inmersión con CCR
+incluyendo capas con el setpoint, las lecturas de los sensores de oxígeno y la
+información de presión de las botellas. En este caso hay una buena coincidencia
+entre las lecturas de los dos sensores de oxígeno.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_dive_profile_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Perfil de inmersión con CCR" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Información especifica del equipo</em>: <em>Subsurface</em> recoge información que puede
+ser especifica de un tipo de equipo concreto. Se muestra en la <a href="#S_ExtraDataTab">pestaña Otros Datos</a>.
+Puede incluir información de ajustes o metadatos sobre la inmersión.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_obtener_más_información_sobre_inmersiones_guardadas_en_el_diario">6. Obtener más información sobre inmersiones guardadas en el diario</h2>
+<h2 id="_obtener_mas_informacion_sobre_inmersiones_guardadas_en_el_diario">7. Obtener más información sobre inmersiones guardadas en el diario</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_la_pestaña_información_de_la_inmersión_para_inmersiones_individuales">6.1. La pestaña Información de la inmersión (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
+<h3 id="_la_pestana_informacion_de_la_inmersion_para_inmersiones_individuales">7.1. La pestaña Información de la inmersión (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pestaña Información de la inmersión proporciona alguna información resumida
sobre un buceo en particular que ha sido seleccionado en la <strong>Lista de
inmersiones</strong>. La información útil incluye el intervalo en superficie antes de la
@@ -2286,15 +2570,31 @@ oxígeno (OTU) en las que se ha incurrido.</p></div> <td class="content">Consumo de gas y cálculos de CAS <em>Subsurface</em> calcula el CAS y el consumo de gas
teniendo en cuenta la incompresibilidad de los gases, particularmente a
presiones en las botellas superiores a 200 bar, haciéndolos más precisos. Los
-usuarios deberían consultar el Apendice_D para más información.</td>
+usuarios deberían consultar el <a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Apéndice_D</a> para más información.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_la_pestaña_estadísticas_para_grupos_de_inmersiones">6.2. La pestaña Estadísticas (para grupos de inmersiones)</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ExtraDataTab">7.2. La pestaña <strong>Otros datos</strong> (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Cuando se utiliza un ordenador de buceo, a menudo facilita determinadas
+informaciones que no pueden presentarse de forma estandarizada ya que la
+naturaleza de la información varía de un ordenador a otro. Estos datos suelen
+comprender informaciones de ajustes, metadatos sobre una inmersión, niveles de
+batería, tiempos de "no vuelo" o factores de gradiente usados durante el buceo.
+Si es posible, toda esta información se presenta en la pestaña <strong>Otros datos</strong>. A
+continuación hay una imagen que muestra otros datos para un buceo con un
+rebreather Poseidon.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ExtraDataTab_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Pestaña Otros datos" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_la_pestana_estadisticas_para_grupos_de_inmersiones">7.3. La pestaña Estadísticas (para grupos de inmersiones)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pestaña Estadísticas facilita información resumida para más de una inmersión,
suponiendo que se haya seleccionado más de un buceo en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>
-con los estándares "Ctrl+clic" o "Shift+clic" del ratón. Si solo se ha
+tcon los estándares "Ctrl+clic" o "Shift+clic" del ratón. Si solo se ha
seleccionado una los cálculos se efectuarán solo para esa inmersión. Esta
pestaña muestra el número de inmersiones seleccionadas, el tiempo total de buceo
para estas inmersiones, así como los máximos, mínimos y medios para la duración,
@@ -2303,7 +2603,7 @@ profundidad máxima de las inmersiones más profunda y más superficial de las seleccionadas.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">6.3. El Perfil de inmersión</h3>
+<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">7.4. El Perfil de inmersión</h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Profile2.jpg" alt="Típico perfil de buceo" />
@@ -2455,7 +2755,7 @@ el área blanca horizontal bajo los dos puntos.</td> <div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos.png" alt="Note" />
+<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos_f20.png" alt="Note" />
</td>
<td class="content">Las fotografías que se han añadido a una inmersión pueden mostrarse en el perfil
seleccionando el botón <strong>Mostrar foto</strong> en la barra de herramientas a la izquierda
@@ -2535,6 +2835,52 @@ de 3m</strong> entonces el techo se muestra con saltos de 3 en 3 metros.</td> <img src="images/Ceilings2.jpg" alt="Figura: Techo con resolución de 3 metros" />
</div>
</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ShowCylindersButton.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Al seleccionar este icono, los diferentes gases utilizados durante una inmersión
+se presentarán en forma de barras de colores en la parte de abajo del perfil. En
+general, el oxígeno se presenta con una barra verde, el nitrógeno con una barra
+amarilla y el helio con una barra roja. La imagen a continuación muestra un buceo
+que primero utiliza una botella de trimix (rojo y verde), seguida por un cambio a
+una botella de nitrox (amarillo y verde) tras 23 minutos. Las botellas con aire
+se muestran con una barra azul claro.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ShowCylinders_f20.jpg" alt="Figura: Gráfico de uso de botellas" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Muestra presiones de los gases inertes en los tejidos, en relación con la
+presión ambiental (línea gris horizontal).
+Las presiones en los tejidos se calculan utilizando el algoritmo Bühlmann ZH-16
+y se muestran como líneas de colores que varían desde el verde (tejidos rápidos)
+al azul (tejidos más lentos).
+La línea negra, dibujada sobre la presión ambiental, es la máxima sobresaturación
+de tejidos permitida, en la que se incluyen los factores de gradiente que se
+establecieron en <em>Preferencias</em>. Para buceadores que hacen buceo con descompresión
+planificada, se obtienen ritmos de desaturación eficientes manteniendo los tejidos
+entre la presión ambiental de los gases inertes (línea gris) y la presión límite
+(línea negra). Lo que se muestra en pantalla es una representación de la presión
+en los tejidos durante toda la inmersión. En contraste, el
+<a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gráfico de presión de gases</a> de la ventana <strong>Información</strong>
+del <strong>Perfil</strong> es un reflejo de las presiones de los tejidos en el instante de
+tiempo señalado por la posición del cursor sobre el perfil de la inmersión.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/tissuesGraph.jpg" alt="Figura: Gráfico de presión de gases inertes en los tejidos" />
+</div>
+</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El ajuste de los factores de gradiente afecta mucho a los techos calculados y
sus profundidades. Para más información acerca de factores de gradiente,
consultar la sección <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Ajuste de preferencias de factores de gradiente</a>.
@@ -2557,43 +2903,27 @@ detallada de los factores de gradiente, consultar los siguientes links:</p></div </p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Muestra presiones de los gases inertes en los tejidos, en relación con la
-presión ambiental (línea gris horizontal).
-Las presiones en los tejidos se calculan utilizando el algoritmo Bühlmann ZH-16
-y se muestran como líneas de colores que varían desde el verde (tejidos rápidos)
-al azul (tejidos más lentos).
-La línea negra, dibujada sobre la presión ambiental, es la máxima sobresaturación
-de tejidos permitida, en la que se incluyen los factores de gradiente que se
-establecieron en <em>Preferencias</em>.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/tissuesGraph.jpg" alt="Figura: Gráfico de presión de gases inertes en los tejidos" />
-</div>
-</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_el_menú_contextual_del_perfil_de_inmersión">6.4. El menú contextual del Perfil de Inmersión</h3>
+<h3 id="_el_menu_contextual_del_perfil_de_inmersion">7.5. El menú contextual del Perfil de Inmersión</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se accede al menú contextual del Perfil de Inmersión haciendo clic-derecho
mientras el cursor del ratón está sobre el panel del Perfil de Inmersión. El
-menú permite la creación de marcadores o eventos de cambio de gas aparte de los
-que se hayan podido importar del ordenador de buceo. Las marcas se sitúan contra
-la línea de profundidad del perfil y con el tiempo fijado donde estaba el cursor
-cuando el botón derecho se clicó para desplegar el menú. Los eventos de cambio
-de gas abren otra selección sobre el gas al que se esta cambiando, basada en la
-lista de gases definida en la pestaña Equipo. Si hacemos clic-derecho mientras
-estamos sobre un marcador preexistente, el menú se extiende añadiendo opciones
-para permitir el borrado del marcador o permitir ocultar todos los marcadores de
-ese tipo.</p></div>
+menú permite la creación de marcadores, eventos de cambio de gas o cambios
+manuales en setpoint de un CCR, aparte de los que se hayan podido importar del
+ordenador de buceo. Las marcas se sitúan contra la línea de profundidad del
+perfil y con el tiempo fijado donde estaba el cursor cuando el botón derecho
+se clicó para desplegar el menú. Los eventos de cambio de gas suponen una
+selección sobre el gas al que estamos cambiando, habiendo sido definida la lista
+de posibilidades en la pestaña <strong>Equipo</strong>. Los eventos de cambio de setpoint
+abren un diálogo en el que se permite elegir el valor del próximo setpoint. Como
+en el planificador, un setpoint cero indica que el buceador está respirando en
+circuito abierto, mientras cualquier valor diferente de cero indica el uso de
+circuito cerrado. Si hacemos clic-derecho mientras estamos sobre
+un marcador preexistente, el menú se extiende añadiendo opciones para permitir
+el borrado del marcador o permitir ocultar todos los marcadores de ese tipo.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_el_strong_recuadro_información_strong">6.5. El <strong>Recuadro Información</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_InfoBox">7.6. El <strong>Recuadro Información</strong></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El recuadro de Información muestra una amplia gama de información del <strong>perfil de
inmersión</strong>. Normalmente el recuadro se situa en la parte de arriba a la
izquierda del panel <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>. Si el ratón apunta fuera del panel,
@@ -2677,7 +3007,7 @@ respirando aire a una profundidad igual a la PNE.</td> <div class="paragraph"><p>La figura (<strong>B</strong>) anterior muestra un Recuadro de Información con un conjunto de
datos casi completo.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_el_gráfico_de_barras_de_presión_de_gases">6.5.1. El gráfico de barras de presión de gases</h4>
+<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">7.6.1. El gráfico de barras de presión de gases</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>A la izquierda del <strong>Recuadro de Información</strong> hay un gráfico de barras vertical
que indica las presiones de los gases inertes que el buceador estaba respirando
<em>en un momento dado de la inmersión</em>, señalado por la posición del cursor sobre
@@ -2688,28 +3018,50 @@ de las diferentes partes del gráfico de barras.</p></div> <img src="images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Gráfico de barras de presiones de gases" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El área verde claro indica el gas total, con el margen superior de esta zona
-indicando la presión total de gas inhalada por el buceador y medida desde el
-fondo del gráfico a la parte superior. Esta presión tiene un valor <em>relativo</em>
-en el gráfico y no indica presión absoluta.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>La línea negra horizontal por debajo de la zona verde claro indica la presión de
-equilibrio de los gases inertes respirados, habitualmente nitrógeno. En el caso
-del trimix, es la presión combinada del helio y el nitrógeno. En este ejemplo,
-el usuario esta buceando con EAN32, por lo tanto la presión del gas inerte está
-al 68% de la distancia desde el fondo del gráfico hasta el valor de la presión
-total.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>La zona verde oscura en la parte baja del gráfico representa las presiones de
-los gases inertes en cada uno de los 16 compartimentos de tejidos, según el
-algoritmo de Bühlmann, estando los tejidos rápidos en el lado izquierdo.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>La línea horizontal negra superior indica el factor de gradiente que se aplica
-a la profundidad del buceador para el punto concreto del <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>.
-Este factor de gradiente es una interpolación entre el GFbajo y el GFalto que
-se hayan especificado en la pestaña Gráfico del <strong>Panel de preferencias</strong> de
-<em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El margen inferior de la zona roja del gráfico indica el valor M derivado de
-Bühlman, o sea el valor de la presión de gases inertes a partir de la cual la
-formación de burbujas se espera que sea severa, resultando en una enfermedad
-descompresiva.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+El área verde claro indica el gas total, con el margen superior de esta zona
+ indicando la presión total de gas inhalada por el buceador y medida desde el
+ fondo del gráfico a la parte superior. Esta presión tiene un valor <em>relativo</em>
+ en el gráfico y no indica presión absoluta.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+La línea negra horizontal por debajo de la zona verde claro indica la presión de
+ equilibrio de los gases inertes respirados, habitualmente nitrógeno. En el caso
+ del trimix, es la presión combinada del helio y el nitrógeno. En este ejemplo,
+ el usuario esta buceando con EAN32, por lo tanto la presión del gas inerte está
+ al 68% de la distancia desde el fondo del gráfico hasta el valor de la presión
+ total.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+La zona verde oscura en la parte baja del gráfico representa las presiones de
+ los gases inertes en cada uno de los 16 compartimentos de tejidos, según el
+ algoritmo de Bühlmann, estando los tejidos rápidos en el lado izquierdo.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+La línea horizontal negra superior indica el factor de gradiente que se aplica
+ a la profundidad del buceador para el punto concreto del <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>.
+ Este factor de gradiente es una interpolación entre el GFbajo y el GFalto que
+ se hayan especificado en la pestaña Gráfico del <strong>Panel de preferencias</strong> de
+ <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El margen inferior de la zona roja del gráfico indica el valor M derivado de
+ Bühlman, o sea el valor de la presión de gases inertes a partir de la cual la
+ formación de burbujas se espera que sea severa, resultando en una enfermedad
+ descompresiva.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Estos cinco valores se indican a la izquierda en la figura anterior. La forma
en que el gráfico de barras cambia durante una inmersión, se representa en el
lado derecho de la figura anterior, para un buceador usando EAN32.</p></div>
@@ -2717,44 +3069,44 @@ lado derecho de la figura anterior, para un buceador usando EAN32.</p></div> <li>
<p>
El gráfico <strong>A</strong> indica la situación al inicio de una inmersión, con el buzo
-en superficie. Las presiones en los compartimentos de tejidos todavía están
-a la presión de equilibrio ya que aún no se ha buceado.
+ en superficie. Las presiones en los compartimentos de tejidos todavía están
+ a la presión de equilibrio ya que aún no se ha buceado.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El gráfico <strong>B</strong> indica la situación tras un descenso a 30 metros. Pocos de
-los compartimentos de tejidos han tenido tiempo de responder al descenso, las
-presiones de los gases muy por debajo de presión de equilibrio.
+ los compartimentos de tejidos han tenido tiempo de responder al descenso, las
+ presiones de los gases muy por debajo de presión de equilibrio.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El gráfico <strong>C</strong> representa las presiones tras 30 minutos a 30 metros. Los
-compartimentos rápidos han llegado al equilibrio (p.e. han alcanzado la altura
-de la línea negra que indica la presión de equilibrio). Los compartimentos más
-lentos (hacia la derecha) no han alcanzado el equilibrio y están en proceso de
-incrementar lentamente la presión.
+ compartimentos rápidos han llegado al equilibrio (p.e. han alcanzado la altura
+ de la línea negra que indica la presión de equilibrio). Los compartimentos más
+ lentos (hacia la derecha) no han alcanzado el equilibrio y están en proceso de
+ incrementar lentamente la presión.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El gráfico <strong>D</strong> muestra las presiones tras ascender a una profundidad de 4.5
-metros. Ya que, durante el ascenso, la presión total del gas inhalado ha caído
-mucho, de 4 bares a 1.45 bares, las presiones en los diferentes compartimentos
-de tejidos sobrepasan la presión total del gas y se aproximan al factor de
-gradiente (la línea negra superior en la imagen). Continuar el ascenso haría
-que rebasáramos el valor del factor de gradiente (GFalto), poniendo en peligro
-al buceador.
+ metros. Ya que, durante el ascenso, la presión total del gas inhalado ha caído
+ mucho, de 4 bares a 1.45 bares, las presiones en los diferentes compartimentos
+ de tejidos sobrepasan la presión total del gas y se aproximan al factor de
+ gradiente (la línea negra superior en la imagen). Continuar el ascenso haría
+ que rebasáramos el valor del factor de gradiente (GFalto), poniendo en peligro
+ al buceador.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El gráfico <strong>E</strong> indica la situación después de permanecer a 4.5 metros durante
-10 minutos. Los compartimentos rápidos han bajado su presión. Como era de
-esperar, las presiones en los compartimentos lentos no han variado mucho. Las
-presiones en los compartimentos rápidos ya no se acercan al valor de GFalto y
-el buceador está más seguro que en la situación expuesta en el gráfico <strong>D</strong>.
+ 10 minutos. Los compartimentos rápidos han bajado su presión. Como era de
+ esperar, las presiones en los compartimentos lentos no han variado mucho. Las
+ presiones en los compartimentos rápidos ya no se acercan al valor de GFalto y
+ el buceador está más seguro que en la situación expuesta en el gráfico <strong>D</strong>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2763,10 +3115,10 @@ el buceador está más seguro que en la situación expuesta en el gráfico <stro </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_organizar_el_registro_manipular_grupos_de_inmersiones">7. Organizar el registro (Manipular grupos de inmersiones)</h2>
+<h2 id="_organizar_el_registro_manipular_grupos_de_inmersiones">8. Organizar el registro (Manipular grupos de inmersiones)</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_el_menú_contextual_de_la_lista_de_inmersiones">7.1. El menú contextual de la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
+<h3 id="_el_menu_contextual_de_la_lista_de_inmersiones">8.1. El menú contextual de la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchas acciones en <em>Subsurface</em> dependen de un menú contextual que se usa
básicamente para manipular grupos de inmersiones. El menú contextual se
encuentra seleccionando una inmersión o un grupo de ellas y haciendo
@@ -2779,7 +3131,7 @@ clic-derecho.</p></div> <div class="paragraph"><p>El menú contextual se usa en muchas de las acciones que se describen a
continuación.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_personalizar_la_información_mostrada_en_el_panel_strong_lista_de_inmersiones_strong">7.1.1. Personalizar la información mostrada en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong></h4>
+<h4 id="_personalizar_la_informacion_mostrada_en_el_panel_strong_lista_de_inmersiones_strong">8.1.1. Personalizar la información mostrada en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong></h4>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/DiveListOptions.jpg" alt="Ejemplo: Opciones de la Lista de inmersiones" />
@@ -2795,7 +3147,7 @@ la lista, esta se actualiza inmediatamente. Las preferencias para la informació que muestre la lista se guardan y reutilizan cada vez que se abre <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_seleccionar_inmersiones_en_una_ubicación_concreta">7.1.2. Seleccionar inmersiones en una ubicación concreta</h4>
+<h4 id="_seleccionar_inmersiones_en_una_ubicacion_concreta">8.1.2. Seleccionar inmersiones en una ubicación concreta</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores tienen largas listas de inmersiones, y puede resultar difícil
localizar todos los buceos en un punto en concreto. Presionando <em>Ctrl+F</em> en el
teclado se abre una casilla de texto en la parte de arriba a la izquierda de la
@@ -2805,7 +3157,7 @@ en esta ubicación.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Renumber">7.2. Renumerar las inmersiones</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Renumber">8.2. Renumerar las inmersiones</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones normalmente se numeran incrementando desde las no-recientes
(menores números de secuencia) a las más recientes (números de secuencia más
altos). Numerar los buceos no siempre es consistente. Por ejemplo, cuando se
@@ -2818,7 +3170,7 @@ nuevos números de secuencia (basados en fecha/hora) para los buceos del panel <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Group">7.3. Agrupar las inmersiones en viajes y manipularlos</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Group">8.3. Agrupar las inmersiones en viajes y manipularlos</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si buceas regularmente, la lista de inmersiones puede hacerse rápidamente muy
larga. <em>Subsurface</em> puede agrupar los buceos en <em>viajes</em>. Lo hace agrupando
inmersiones que tengan fechas/horas que no estén separadas más de dos días y
@@ -2836,7 +3188,7 @@ lista de inmersiones (desde el menú principal) se selecciona <em>Registro → Autoagrupar</em>. El panel Lista de Inmersiones ahora muestra solo los títulos de
los viajes.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_editar_el_título_y_la_información_asociada_a_un_viaje_en_particular">7.3.1. Editar el título y la información asociada a un viaje en particular</h4>
+<h4 id="_editar_el_titulo_y_la_informacion_asociada_a_un_viaje_en_particular">8.3.1. Editar el título y la información asociada a un viaje en particular</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normalmente, en la lista de inmersiones se incluye una mínima información en el
título del viaje. Puede añadirse mucha más sobre un viaje seleccionando su
título en la lista. Esto muestra una pestaña <strong>Notas del Viaje</strong> en el panel Notas
@@ -2847,26 +3199,26 @@ El título en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> debería reflejar ya algo información editada.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_ver_los_buceos_de_un_viaje_en_concreto">7.3.2. Ver los buceos de un viaje en concreto</h4>
+<h4 id="_ver_los_buceos_de_un_viaje_en_concreto">8.3.2. Ver los buceos de un viaje en concreto</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Una vez que las inmersiones agrupadas en viajes, los usuarios pueden expandir
uno o más viajes clicando la punta de flecha a la izquierda del título. Con ello
se expande el viaje mostrando los buceos individuales efectuados.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_colapsar_o_expandir_información_de_diferentes_viajes">7.3.3. Colapsar o expandir información de diferentes viajes</h4>
+<h4 id="_colapsar_o_expandir_informacion_de_diferentes_viajes">8.3.3. Colapsar o expandir información de diferentes viajes</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si se hace clic-derecho después de seleccionar un viaje concreto de la lista, el
menú resultante te ofrece varias posibilidades de expandir o contraer buceos
incluidos en viajes. Entre ellas expandir todos los viajes, contraer todos los
viajes y contraer todos excepto el seleccionado.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_mezclar_inmersiones_de_más_de_un_viaje_en_uno_solo">7.3.4. Mezclar inmersiones de más de un viaje en uno solo</h4>
+<h4 id="_mezclar_inmersiones_de_mas_de_un_viaje_en_uno_solo">8.3.4. Mezclar inmersiones de más de un viaje en uno solo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Al hacer clic-derecho en el título de un viaje seleccionado del panel <strong>Lista de
Inmersiones</strong>, el menú permite mezclar viajes con el viaje de abajo o con el de
arriba.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_separar_un_viaje_en_más_de_uno">7.3.5. Separar un viaje en más de uno</h4>
+<h4 id="_separar_un_viaje_en_mas_de_uno">8.3.5. Separar un viaje en más de uno</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si un viaje incluye cinco inmersiones, el usuario puede separar el viaje en dos
(viaje 1: tres inmersiones de arriba; viaje 2: dos inmersiones de abajo)
seleccionando y haciendo clic-derecho en las tres inmersiones de arriba. El menú
@@ -2882,30 +3234,30 @@ izquierda (A), la acción completada a la derecha (B):</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_manipular_inmersiones_individuales">7.4. Manipular inmersiones individuales</h3>
+<h3 id="_manipular_inmersiones_individuales">8.4. Manipular inmersiones individuales</h3>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_borrar_una_inmersión_del_diario">7.4.1. Borrar una inmersión del diario</h4>
+<h4 id="_borrar_una_inmersion_del_diario">8.4.1. Borrar una inmersión del diario</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones pueden borrarse permanentemente del diario seleccionándolas y
haciendo clic-derecho para mostrar el menú y, entonces, seleccionando <strong>Borrar
inmersión</strong>. Habitualmente esto se hará en casos donde se desee borrar
inmersiones de prueba o buceos de duración extremadamente corta.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_separar_una_inmersión_de_un_viaje">7.4.2. Separar una inmersión de un viaje</h4>
+<h4 id="_separar_una_inmersion_de_un_viaje">8.4.2. Separar una inmersión de un viaje</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se pueden separar inmersiones del viaje al que pertenecen. Para ello se
selecciona y hace clic-derecho en los buceos para mostrar el menú. Luego se
selecciona <strong>Quitar inmersión(es) del viaje</strong>. Las inmersiones que han sido
separadas aparecerán ahora encima del viaje al que pertenecieron.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_añadir_una_inmersión_al_viaje_de_arriba">7.4.3. Añadir una inmersión al viaje de arriba</h4>
+<h4 id="_anadir_una_inmersion_al_viaje_de_arriba">8.4.3. Añadir una inmersión al viaje de arriba</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones seleccionadas pueden moverse del viaje al que pertenecen al
inmediatamente superior al actual. Para ello se selecciona y hace clic-derecho
en los buceos para mostrar el menú, luego se selecciona <strong>Añadir inmersión(es) al
viaje de arriba</strong>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_desplazar_la_hora_de_inicio_del_buceo_s">7.4.4. Desplazar la hora de inicio del buceo(s)</h4>
+<h4 id="_desplazar_la_hora_de_inicio_del_buceo_s">8.4.4. Desplazar la hora de inicio del buceo(s)</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En ocasiones es necesario ajustar la hora de comienzo de una inmersión. Esto
puede aplicarse a situaciones en las que las inmersiones se han efectuado en
diferentes zonas horarias o si el ordenador de buceo tiene mal configurada la
@@ -2915,7 +3267,7 @@ horas y minutos) en el que deben ajustarse los buceos y se hace clic en la opción que indica si el ajuste debe ser hacia adelante o hacia atrás.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_juntar_buceos_en_uno_solo">7.4.5. Juntar buceos en uno solo</h4>
+<h4 id="_juntar_buceos_en_uno_solo">8.4.5. Juntar buceos en uno solo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En ocasiones una inmersión se interrumpe brevemente, p.e. si un buceador regresa
a superficie unos pocos minutos, dando como resultado dos o más inmersiones
grabadas por el ordenador y apareciendo como buceos distintos en el panel <strong>Lista
@@ -2933,10 +3285,49 @@ inmersiones que fueron unidas:</p></div> </div>
</div>
</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Filter">8.5. Filtrar la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Los buceos del panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> pueden filtrarse, esto es, se pueden
+seleccionar únicamente algunos de los buceos basándose en sus atributos, p.e.
+las etiquetas, el lugar de buceo, el divemaster, compañeros o traje protector.
+El filtrado permite, por ejemplo, listar las inmersiones profundas en un punto
+determinado o, por el contrario, las inmersiones en cuevas con cierto
+compañero.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para abrir el filtrado, seleccionar <em>Registro → Filtrar la lista de inmersiones</em>
+desde el menú principal. Esto abrirá el <em>Panel de filtrado</em> en la parte de arriba
+de la ventana de <em>Subsurface</em>. Arriba a la derecha del panel se ubican tres
+iconos. El <em>Panel de filtrado</em> puede reiniciarse (p.e. limpiar todos los filtros
+actuales) seleccionando el <strong>+</strong>. El <em>Panel de filtrado</em> también puede minimizarse
+seleccionando el icono central. Cuando está minimizado solo se muestran los tres
+iconos. El panel puede maximizarse clicando el icono que lo minimizó. El filtro
+se cierra y reinicia seleccionando el icono con la bandera.
+Un ejemplo del <em>Panel de filtrado</em> se muestra en la figura a continuación.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Filterpanel.jpg" alt="Figura: Panel de filtrado" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Se pueden utilizar cuatro criterios para filtrar la lista de inmersiones:
+las etiquetas, las personas (compañeros/divemasters), punto de inmersión y traje
+de buceo, cada uno de los cuales viene representado por una lista seleccionable.
+Sobre cada lista hay un segundo nivel de filtrado. Por ejemplo, tecleando "<em>Ba</em>"
+en la casilla de texto sobre las ubicaciones, la lista podría quedar reducida a
+"<em>Bajo Piles I</em>", "<em>Bajo Piles II</em>" y "<em>Bajo de Testa</em>". Filtrar la lista
+permite encontrar rápidamente términos de búsqueda para filtrar la lista de
+inmersiones.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para activar el filtrado de la lista de inmersiones, se necesita seleccionar
+al menos una casilla en una de las cuatro listas. La lista de inmersiones se
+reduce para mostrar solo los buceos que cumplen los criterios seleccionados en
+las listas. Las cuatro listas funcionan como un filtro con operadores <em>Y</em>,
+<em>Subsurface</em> filtraría, pues, para "<em>cueva</em>" como etiqueta y "<em>José García</em>"
+como compañero; pero los filtros dentro de una categoría son inclusivos, esto
+es, filtrar por etiquetas con "cueva" y "barco" mostraría todas las inmersiones
+en las que aparezcan las etiquetas "cueva" <em>O</em> "barco", solas o conjuntamente.</p></div>
+</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_ExportLog">8. Exportar el registro de inmersiones o parte del mismo</h2>
+<h2 id="S_ExportLog">9. Exportar el registro de inmersiones o parte del mismo</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se llega a la función de exportación seleccionando <em>Archivo → Exportar</em> lo que
despliega el diálogo de exportación. Este diálogo siempre ofrece dos opciones:
@@ -2945,7 +3336,7 @@ el panel <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong> de <em>Subsurface</em>. Marca la apropiada (ver imagen a continuación).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Export.jpg" alt="Figura: Diálogo de exportaación" />
+<img src="images/Export_f20.jpg" alt="Figura: Diálogo de exportación" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Un registro de buceo puede guardarse en tres formatos:</p></div>
@@ -2958,66 +3349,100 @@ Formato XML de <em>Subsurface</em>. Es el formato usado nativamente por <em>Subs <li>
<p>
Universal Dive Data format (UDDF). Ver <a href="http://uddf.org">http://uddf.org</a> para más información.
-UDDF es un formato genérico que permite la comunicación entre muchos ordenadores
-de buceo y programas de de ordenador.
+ UDDF es un formato genérico que permite la comunicación entre muchos ordenadores
+ de buceo y programas de de ordenador.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Divelogs.de</em>, un registro de inmersiones basado en internet. Para enviar
-buceos a <em>Divelogs.de</em>, se necesita un usuario y una password de <em>Divelogs.de</em>.
-Hay que registrarse en <em>htttp://es.divelogs.de</em> y suscribir el servicio para
-poder enviar datos de inmersiones desde <em>Subsurface</em>.
+ buceos a <em>Divelogs.de</em>, se necesita un usuario y una password de <em>Divelogs.de</em>.
+ Hay que registrarse en <em>htttp://es.divelogs.de</em> y suscribir el servicio para
+ poder enviar datos de inmersiones desde <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Formato CSV, que incluye la información más crítica del perfil de la
-inmersión. La información que se incluye es número, fecha, hora, duración,
-profundidad, temperatura y presión.
+<em>DiveShare</em> es también un repositorio de inmersiones basado en internet que se
+ dirige a inmersiones recreativas. Para subir inmersiones se necesita una
+ identificación de usuario, por lo que es necesario registrase en <em>http://scubadiveshare.com</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Formato <em>mapamundi</em>, un archivo HTML con un mapa del mundo en el que quedará
-marcada cada inmersión y alguna información sobre ella. El mapa <strong>NO</strong> es
-editable.
+<em>Detalles de inmersión CSV</em>, que incluye la información más crítica del perfil de la
+ inmersión. La información que se incluye es número, fecha, hora, duración,
+ profundidad, temperatura y presión. En resumen, la mayoría de la información
+ que un buceador recreativo conserva en un registro escrito.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Perfil de inmersión CSV</em>, que incluye una gran cantidad de detalles para
+ cada inmersión, entre ellos el perfil de profundidad, temperaturas
+ e información de presiones para cada inmersión.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Formato <em>HTML</em>, en el cual los buceos se guardan en archivos HTML,
-visualizables con un navegador de internet.Se soportan la mayoría de navegadores
-modernos, pero debe estar activado Javascript. Este archivo <strong>NO</strong> es editable. El
-registro de inmersiones en HTML contiene la mayor parte de la información y
-dispone de una opción de búsqueda que permite rastrear el diario. La exportación
-a HTML se especifica en la segunda pestaña del diálogo de exportación (imagen
-<strong>B</strong> anterior).
+ visualizables con un navegador de internet.Se soportan la mayoría de navegadores
+ modernos, pero debe estar activado Javascript. Este archivo <strong>NO</strong> es editable. El
+ registro de inmersiones en HTML contiene la mayor parte de la información y
+ dispone de una opción de búsqueda que permite rastrear el diario. La exportación
+ a HTML se especifica en la segunda pestaña del diálogo de exportación (imagen
+ <strong>B</strong> anterior). Un uso típico de esta opción es exportar todas nuestros buceos
+ a un smartphone o tablet donde nos serviría de registro portátil, util para
+ compañías a las que les gusta verificar el historial de un buceador.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Formato <em>mapamundi</em>, un archivo HTML con un mapa del mundo en el que quedará
+ marcada cada inmersión y alguna información sobre ella. El mapa <strong>NO</strong> es
+ editable, sin embargo, si se selecciona cualquiera de los puntos de buceo
+ sobre el mapa, se muestra en texto un sumario de la inmersión, como se ve
+ en la imagen a continuación.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/mapview_f20.jpg" alt="Figura: Vista de exportación en formato Mapamundi" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Profundidad de imágenes</em>, que crea un fichero de texto que contiene los
+ nombres de todos los archivos de imágenes añadidos a cualquiera de los buceos
+ seleccionados del la <em>Lista de inmersiones</em>, junto con la profundidad a la
+ fue tomada la fotografía.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Ajustes generales</em>, en la pestaña HTML, se proporcionan las siguientes
-opciones:
+ opciones:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Numeración de Subsurface: Si se activa esta opción, las inmersiones se
-exportan con la misma numeración que tienen asociada en <em>Subsurface</em>. De lo
-contrario, los buceos se numerarán a partir de 1.
+ exportan con la misma numeración que tienen asociada en <em>Subsurface</em>. De lo
+ contrario, los buceos se numerarán a partir de 1.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Exportar estadísticas anuales: Si se selecciona esta opción, se anexará una
-tabla con estadísticas anuales a los datos exportados a HTML.
+ tabla con estadísticas anuales a los datos exportados a HTML.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Solo exportar lista: Solo se exportará una lista de inmersiones. No se
-dispondrá de información detallada de los buceos.
+ dispondrá de información detallada de los buceos.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3025,14 +3450,14 @@ dispondrá de información detallada de los buceos. <li>
<p>
<em>Opciones de estilo</em>: Algunas opciones relativas al estilo de visualización
-en el navegador, como el tamaño de la letra o el tema aplicado.
+ en el navegador, como el tamaño de la letra o el tema aplicado.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">9. Guardar un diario de <em>Subsurface</em> en la Nube</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">10. Guardar un diario de <em>Subsurface</em> en la Nube</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para cualquier buceador, la información contenida en su diario es muy importante.
No es únicamente un registro de actividades de buceo para su propio placer
@@ -3079,7 +3504,7 @@ la nube.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">10. Imprimir un diario</h2>
+<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">11. Imprimir un diario</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> proporciona un interfaz simple para imprimir el diario completo o
solo unas pocas inmersiones seleccionadas, incluyendo los perfiles de buceo y
@@ -3089,15 +3514,15 @@ otra información.</p></div> <li>
<p>
¿ Se desea imprimir el registro completo o solo parte de él ? Si solo se desea
-parte del registro, entonces el usuario selecciona los buceos deseados en el
-panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>.
+ parte del registro, entonces el usuario selecciona los buceos deseados en el
+ panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
¿ Que información sobre presiones parciales de los gases se desea tener en el
-perfil ? El usuario activaría los botones apropiados de la barra de la izquierda
-del perfil.
+ perfil ? El usuario activaría los botones apropiados de la barra de la izquierda
+ del perfil.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3119,19 +3544,19 @@ Imprimir la lista de inmersiones. Para ello se selecciona Impresión de tabla. <li>
<p>
Imprimir los registros de buceo completos (perfiles y resto de información) a
-6 inmersiones por página. Para ello se selecciona <em>6 inmersiones por página</em>.
+ 6 inmersiones por página. Para ello se selecciona <em>6 inmersiones por página</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Imprimir los registros de buceo completos (perfiles y resto de información) a
-2 inmersiones por página. Para ello se selecciona <em>2 inmersiones por página</em>.
+ 2 inmersiones por página. Para ello se selecciona <em>2 inmersiones por página</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Imprimir los registros de buceo completos (perfiles y resto de información) a
-1 inmersión por página. Para ello se selecciona <em>1 inmersión por página</em>.
+ 1 inmersión por página. Para ello se selecciona <em>1 inmersión por página</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3140,8 +3565,8 @@ Imprimir los registros de buceo completos (perfiles y resto de información) a <li>
<p>
Imprimir solo los buceos que han sido seleccionados de la lista de inmersiones
-antes de activar el diálogo de impresión. Para ello se activa la opción
-<em>Imprimir solo inmersiones seleccionadas</em>.
+ antes de activar el diálogo de impresión. Para ello se activa la opción
+ <em>Imprimir solo inmersiones seleccionadas</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3175,7 +3600,65 @@ continuación hay un ejemplo (bastante pequeño) de la salida de una impresión. </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Preferences">11. Ajustar las Preferencias del usuario para <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="S_Configure">12. Configurar un ordenador de buceo</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> permite configurar algunos ordenadores de buceo. En estos momentos,
+los Heinrichs-Weikamp OSTC2 y OSTC3 y los Suunto de la familia Vyper (Stinger,
+Mosquito, D3, Vyper, Vytec, Cobra, Gekko y Zoop). Se pueden leer y modificar un
+gran número de ajustes. En primer lugar hay que asegurarse de tener instalado el
+driver adecuado para el ordenador de buceo y de conocer el nombre de dispositivo
+asignado al ordenador por el sistema operativo.
+Ver el <a href="#_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">APÉNDICE A</a>
+para información sobre como hacerlo.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Una vez que el ordenador de buceo está al PC con <em>Subsurface</em>, se selecciona
+<em>Archivo → Configurar ordenador de buceo</em> en el menú principal. Si se ha
+indicado el nombre de dispositivo correcto en el campo de texto de la parte
+superior, esto abrirá y seleccionará el modelo correcto en el panel de la
+izquierda (ver imagen a continuación).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Configure_dc_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Configurar ordenador de buceo" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Utilizando los botones apropiados del panel de configuración, pueden llevarse
+a cabo las siguientes acciones:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Descargar detalles disponibles</strong>. Descarga a <em>Subsurface</em> la configuración
+del ordenador de buceo, mostrándola en el panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Guardar cambios en el dispositivo</strong>. Esto cambia la configuración del
+ordenador de buceo para hacerla coincidir con la que se muestra en el panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Copia de seguridad</strong>. Guarda los datos de configuración en un archivo.
+<em>Subsurface</em> solicitará una ubicación y un nombre de archivo para guardar la
+información.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Restaurar copia de seguridad</strong>. Carga la información de un archivo de copia
+de seguridad y la muestra en el panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Actualizar firmware</strong>. Si está disponible un nuevo firmware para el
+ordenador de buceo, este será cargado al mismo.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_Preferences">13. Ajustar las Preferencias del usuario para <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varios ajustes en <em>Subsurface</em> que el usuario puede especificar. Se
encuentran a través de <em>Archivo → Preferencias</em>. Los ajustes se efectúan en
@@ -3186,77 +3669,77 @@ Tras aplicarlos todos se puede salir seleccionando <strong>Aceptar</strong> o <s guardar</strong> si
finalmente decide no hacer los cambios.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_predeterminados">11.1. Predeterminados</h3>
+<h3 id="_predeterminados">13.1. Predeterminados</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varios ajustes en el panel <strong>Predeterminados</strong>:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Pantalla de Predeterminados en Preferencias" />
+<img src="images/Pref1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Pantalla de Predeterminados en Preferencias" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Listas y tablas</strong>: Aquí se pueden elegir el tipo de fuente y el tamaño de la
-misma en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>. Reduciendo el tamaño de la fuente, se
-pueden ver más buceos en una sola pantalla.
+ misma en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>. Reduciendo el tamaño de la fuente, se
+ pueden ver más buceos en una sola pantalla.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Inmersiones</strong>: En este bloque se especifica la carpeta y nombre de archivo
-del registro de buceo electrónico. Es un archivo con extensión .xml. Al iniciar
-<em>Subsurface</em> sin argumentos cargará automáticamente el registro especificado
-aquí.
+ del registro de buceo electrónico. Es un archivo con extensión .xml. Al iniciar
+ <em>Subsurface</em> sin argumentos cargará automáticamente el registro especificado
+ aquí.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Mostrar invalidas</strong>: Las inmersiones pueden marcarse como "invalidas" (cuando
-el usuario desea ocultar buceos que no considere validos, p.e. en piscina, pero
-aún quiera mantenerlos registrados en el diario). Esta opción controla si estas
-inmersiones se muestran en la lista.
+ el usuario desea ocultar buceos que no considere validos, p.e. en piscina, pero
+ aún quiera mantenerlos registrados en el diario). Esta opción controla si estas
+ inmersiones se muestran en la lista.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Botella por defecto</strong>: Se puede especificar una botella por defecto de las
-que aparecen listadas en la pestaña <strong>Equipo</strong> del panel <strong>Notas de la inmersión</strong>.
-Es muy cómodo si se bucea habitualmente con el mismo tipo de botella, asigna a
-cada nueva inmersión una botella del tipo aquí definido.
+ que aparecen listadas en la pestaña <strong>Equipo</strong> del panel <strong>Notas de la inmersión</strong>.
+ Es muy cómodo si se bucea habitualmente con el mismo tipo de botella, asigna a
+ cada nueva inmersión una botella del tipo aquí definido.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Animaciones</strong>: Algunas acciones, al mostrar el perfil, se ejecutan utilizando
-animaciones. Por ejemplo, los valores de los ejes para la profundidad y el
-tiempo cambian de una inmersión a otra. Al visualizar inmersiones distintas
-estos cambios en las características de los ejes no suceden de forma
-instantánea, sino que son animados. La <em>Velocidad</em> de las animaciones puede
-controlarse ajustando esta regleta, con mayor velocidad a la izquierda y
-significando "0" ninguna animación en absoluto.
+ animaciones. Por ejemplo, los valores de los ejes para la profundidad y el
+ tiempo cambian de una inmersión a otra. Al visualizar inmersiones distintas
+ estos cambios en las características de los ejes no suceden de forma
+ instantánea, sino que son animados. La <em>Velocidad</em> de las animaciones puede
+ controlarse ajustando esta regleta, con mayor velocidad a la izquierda y
+ significando "0" ninguna animación en absoluto.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Servicio web de Subsurface</strong>: Cuando uno se suscribe al <a href="#S_Companion">servicio web de Subsurface</a>, se proporciona una ID de usuario muy larga y
-difícil de recordar. Este es el lugar donde guardar esa ID. Seleccionando la
-opción <em>¿Guardar localmente la ID de usuario?</em> nos aseguramos de que se guarda
-una copia de dicha ID en el ordenador.
+ difícil de recordar. Este es el lugar donde guardar esa ID. Seleccionando la
+ opción <em>¿Guardar localmente la ID de usuario?</em> nos aseguramos de que se guarda
+ una copia de dicha ID en el ordenador.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Borrar todos los ajustes</strong> Tal como se indica en el botón bajo esta cabecera,
-se borran todos los ajustes y se reinician con los valores por defecto.
+ se borran todos los ajustes y se reinician con los valores por defecto.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_unidades">11.2. Unidades</h3>
+<h3 id="_unidades">13.2. Unidades</h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Página de preferencias de unidades" />
+<img src="images/Pref2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Página de preferencias de unidades" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Aquí el usuario puede elegir entre medidas métricas o imperiales para
@@ -3270,56 +3753,56 @@ botella, habitualmente, manejan velocidades en m/min, sin embargo, los apneísta ascienden mucho más deprisa por lo que suelen utilizar velocidades en m/s.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_GradientFactors">11.3. Gráfico</h3>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<h3 id="_grafico">13.3. Gráfico</h3>
+<div class="imageblock" id="S_CCR_options" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref3.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Página de Preferencias del gráfico" />
+<img src="images/Pref3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Página de Preferencias del gráfico" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Este panel permite dos tipos de selecciones:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_GradientFactors"><p>Este panel permite dos tipos de selecciones:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Mostrar</strong>: Aquí los usuarios eligen la cantidad de información que se muestra
-como parte del perfil de la inmersión:
+ como parte del perfil de la inmersión:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Umbrales: <em>Subsurface</em> puede mostrar las presiones parciales de nitrógeno,
-oxígeno y helio durante el buceo. Se activan utilizando la barra de herramientas
-de la izquierda de panel <strong>Perfil de inmersión</strong>. Para cada uno de estos gases,
-los usuarios puede especifica un valor umbral a la derecha en el panel de
-Preferencias. Si cualquiera de los gráficos sube por encima de este nivel,
-entonces el gráfico se resalta en rojo, indicando que se ha excedido dicho
-umbral.
+ oxígeno y helio durante el buceo. Se activan utilizando la barra de herramientas
+ de la izquierda de panel <strong>Perfil de inmersión</strong>. Para cada uno de estos gases,
+ los usuarios puede especifica un valor umbral a la derecha en el panel de
+ Preferencias. Si cualquiera de los gráficos sube por encima de este nivel,
+ entonces el gráfico se resalta en rojo, indicando que se ha excedido dicho
+ umbral.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Trazar en rojo el techo informado por el ordenador de buceo</em>: Esta casilla
-seleccionable permite exactamente lo que dice. No todos los ordenadores de buceo
-facilitan los valores de los techos. Si el ordenador de buceo lo facilita, puede
-diferir de los techos calculados por <em>Subsurface</em>. Esto se debe al uso de
-diferentes algoritmos, diferentes factores de gradiente y a la forma dinámica en
-que los ordenadores de buceo calculan los techos durante la inmersión.
+ seleccionable permite exactamente lo que dice. No todos los ordenadores de buceo
+ facilitan los valores de los techos. Si el ordenador de buceo lo facilita, puede
+ diferir de los techos calculados por <em>Subsurface</em>. Esto se debe al uso de
+ diferentes algoritmos, diferentes factores de gradiente y a la forma dinámica en
+ que los ordenadores de buceo calculan los techos durante la inmersión.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Mostrar botellas no usadas en la pestaña equipo</em>: Esta casilla seleccionable
-permite mostrar información sobre botellas que no se han utilizado durante la
-inmersión, en la pestaña Equipo. Por el contrario, si la casilla no está
-seleccionada, cualquier botella que se haya registrado en la pestaña Equipo y no
-haya sido utilizada (p.e. botellas de bail-out) se omiten en la lista mostrada
-aunque siguen estando guardadas.
+ permite mostrar información sobre botellas que no se han utilizado durante la
+ inmersión, en la pestaña Equipo. Por el contrario, si la casilla no está
+ seleccionada, cualquier botella que se haya registrado en la pestaña Equipo y no
+ haya sido utilizada (p.e. botellas de bail-out) se omiten en la lista mostrada
+ aunque siguen estando guardadas.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Mostrar la profundidad media</em>: Activar esta casilla hace que <em>Subsurface</em>
-trace una línea roja a través del perfil, indicando la profundidad media del
-buceo.
+ trace una línea roja a través del perfil, indicando la profundidad media del
+ buceo.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -3332,21 +3815,21 @@ buceo. <li>
<p>
Factores de gradiente*: Aquí los usuarios puede fijar los <em>factores
-de gradiente</em> usados en la inmersión. El GF_bajo es el factor de gradiente a
-mayores profundidades y el GF_alto se usa justo debajo de la superficie. A
-profundidades intermedias se usan factores entre GF_bajo y GF_alto. Los factores
-de gradiente añaden conservadurismo a la exposición al nitrógeno durante un
-buceo, del mismo modo que muchos ordenadores de buceo tienen un ajuste del
-conservadurismo. Cuanto menor sea el valor de un factor de gradiente, más
-conservativos son los cálculos en relación a la carga de nitrógeno y más
-profundos serán los techos durante el ascenso. Factores de gradiente de 20/60
-son considerados conservadores y valores de 60/90 se consideran agresivos.
-Seleccionar la casilla <strong>GF bajo a la máxima profundidad</strong> hace que se use el
-GF_bajo en la mayor profundidad de la inmersión. Si no se selecciona, GF_bajo se
-aplica a todas las profundidades mayores que la primera parada deco. Para más
-información, ver:
+ de gradiente</em> usados en la inmersión. El GF_bajo es el factor de gradiente a
+ mayores profundidades y el GF_alto se usa justo debajo de la superficie. A
+ profundidades intermedias se usan factores entre GF_bajo y GF_alto. Los factores
+ de gradiente añaden conservadurismo a la exposición al nitrógeno durante un
+ buceo, del mismo modo que muchos ordenadores de buceo tienen un ajuste del
+ conservadurismo. Cuanto menor sea el valor de un factor de gradiente, más
+ conservativos son los cálculos en relación a la carga de nitrógeno y más
+ profundos serán los techos durante el ascenso. Factores de gradiente de 20/60
+ son considerados conservadores y valores de 60/90 se consideran agresivos.
+ Seleccionar la casilla <strong>GF bajo a la máxima profundidad</strong> hace que se use el
+ GF_bajo en la mayor profundidad de la inmersión. Si no se selecciona, GF_bajo se
+ aplica a todas las profundidades mayores que la primera parada deco. Para más
+ información, ver:
</p>
-</li>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
@@ -3359,14 +3842,60 @@ información, ver: </li>
</ul></div>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CCR: Mostrar setpoints al visualizar pO<sub>2</sub></em>: Con esta casilla activada, el
+ gráfico de pO<sub>2</sub> del perfil mostrará una línea en rojo que indicará los
+ valores de setpoint del CCR. Véase la sección en <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito cerrado</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CCR: Mostrar los valores de los sensores de O<sub>2</sub> al visualizar la pO<sub>2</sub></em>:
+ Muestra los valores de pO<sub>2</sub> asociados con cada uno de los sensores de
+ oxígeno de un sistema CCR. Ver la sección <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito cerrado</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Configurar la planificación de inmersiones usando equipo de rebreather</strong>:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Setpoint del CCR por defecto para la planificación de inmersiones</em>:
+ Especifica el setpoint de O<sub>2</sub> para planificar buceos con CCR. Este valor
+ determinará la pO<sub>2</sub> a mantener durante una inmersión. Este es el setpoint
+ que usa al inicio de la inmersión. Los cambios efectuados durante el buceo
+ se pueden añadir a través del menú contextual del perfil.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>pSCR Ratio de O<sub>2</sub> en el metabolismo</em>: Para un rebreather semicerrado (pSCR)
+ este es el volumen de oxígeno usado por el buceador cada minuto. Fija este
+ valor para planificar buceos con pSCR y cálculos de descompresión.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>pSCR Ratio</em>: En equipos pSCR el ratio de vertido es la cantidad de gas
+ expulsada del circuito frente a la cantidad de gas recirculada en el circuito.
+ Fija este valor para planificar buceos con pSCR.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_lenguaje">11.4. Lenguaje</h3>
+<h3 id="_lenguaje">13.4. Lenguaje</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se elige el lenguaje que debe utilizar <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref4.jpg" alt="FIGURA: página de preferencias de lenguaje" />
+<img src="images/Pref4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: página de preferencias de lenguaje" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Una casilla de selección permite usar el lenguaje <em>Predeterminado del sistema</em>
@@ -3378,12 +3907,12 @@ lista de traducciones. La casilla de texto <em>Filtro</em> permite listar lengua similares. Por ejemplo hay diversas variantes de inglés o francés.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_red">11.5. Red</h3>
+<h3 id="_red">13.5. Red</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Este panel facilita la comunicación entre <em>Subsurface</em> y las fuentes de datos en
internet.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref5.jpg" alt="FIGURA: página de preferencias de red" />
+<img src="images/Pref5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: página de preferencias de red" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esto es importante cuando <em>Subsurface</em> tiene que comunicarse con servicios como
@@ -3401,7 +3930,7 @@ para acceder a internet.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">12. El Planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">14. El Planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>La planificación de inmersiones es una característica avanzada de <em>Subsurface</em>
accesible desde <em>Registro → Planificar Inmersión</em> en el menú principal. Permite
@@ -3423,26 +3952,26 @@ condiciones:</td> <li>
<p>
El usuario está versado en la planificación de inmersiones y tiene el
-entrenamiento necesario para planificar inmersiones.
+ entrenamiento necesario para planificar inmersiones.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El usuario planifica buceos dentro de los límites para los que está
-certificado.
+ certificado.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
La planificación de inmersiones hace grandes suposiciones sobre las
-características de la <em>persona media</em> y no puede compensar las características
-fisiológicas individuales , de salud o de estilos de vida.
+ características de la <em>persona media</em> y no puede compensar las características
+ fisiológicas individuales , de salud o de estilos de vida.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
La seguridad de un plan de buceo depende mucho de la forma en que se use el
-planificador.
+ planificador.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3453,13 +3982,13 @@ El usuario esta familiarizado con la interfaz de usuario de <em>Subsurface</em>. <li>
<p>
Un usuario que no este completamente seguro de cualquiera de los requisitos
-anteriores, no debería utilizar esta capacidad de <em>Subsurface</em>.
+ anteriores, no debería utilizar esta capacidad de <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_la_pantalla_del_planificador_de_em_subsurface_em">12.1. La pantalla del planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h3>
+<h3 id="_la_pantalla_del_planificador_de_em_subsurface_em">14.1. La pantalla del planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Al igual que el diario de <em>Subsurface</em>, la pantalla del planificador se divide
en varias secciones (ver imagen a continuación). Los parámetros de ajuste de una
inmersión se introducen en las diversas secciones a la izquierda de la pantalla.
@@ -3475,59 +4004,67 @@ pueda copiarse con facilidad a otro software. También es donde se imprimirá cualquier mensaje de aviso sobre el plan de buceo.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/PlannerWindow1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Ventana de inicio del planificador" />
+<img src="images/PlannerWindow1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Ventana de inicio del planificador" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_iniciar_la_planificación_de_la_inmersión">12.2. Iniciar la planificación de la inmersión</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El Planificador comprende dos partes: <strong>construir un plan de buceo</strong> y <strong>evaluar</strong>
-dicho plan. Para llevar a cabo planificación de inmersiones, sigue estos pasos:</p></div>
+<h3 id="_inmersiones_con_circuito_abierto_como_ejemplo_de_planificacion_de_buceo">14.2. Inmersiones con circuito abierto como ejemplo de planificación de buceo</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Cerrar el diario de buceo actual y crear uno nuevo para planificar. Esto se
-hace seleccionando <em>Archivo → Nuevo registro</em> en el menú principal. De esta
-manera, los planes se mantienen separados del registro de inmersiones
-completadas.
+En la parte de abajo a la izquierda del planificador (círculo azul en la
+ a continuación) hay un desplegable con tres opciones. Selecciona la correcta
+ entre ellas:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Circuito abierto (por defecto)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+CCR
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-En el area de arriba a la izquierda de la pantalla, hay que asegurarse de que
-los parámetros constantes son correctos. Son: Fecha y hora de inicio de la
-inmersión, Presión atmosférica, y altura sobre el nivel del mar. Estos dos
-últimos están relacionados, variando uno se modifica el otro. La presión
-atmosférica por defecto son 1.013 bar.
+pSCR
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+En el area de arriba a la izquierda de la pantalla del planificador, hay que
+ asegurarse de que los parámetros constantes son correctos. Son: Fecha y hora
+ de inicio de la inmersión, Presión atmosférica, y altura sobre el nivel del
+ mar. Estos dos últimos están relacionados, variando uno se modifica el otro.
+ La presión atmosférica por defecto son 1.013 bar.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
En la tabla etiquetada como <em>Gases disponibles</em>, añadir la información de las
-botellas que se han de utilizar y la composición de los gases de cada botella.
-Esto se hace de forma similar a <a href="#S_CylinderData">como se rellena la información de botellas en un diario</a>. Se elige el tipo de botella de la lista desplegable
-y se especifica la presión de trabajo de la botella. Si dejamos en blanco la
-concentración de oxígeno (O2%) se asume que el gas que contiene es aire. En otro
-caso, se introducen las concentraciones de oxígeno y/o helio en las casillas del
-diálogo. Si es necesario , se añaden botellas utilizando el icono "+" de arriba
-a la derecha.
+ botellas que se han de utilizar y la composición de los gases de cada botella.
+ Esto se hace de forma similar a <a href="#S_CylinderData">como se rellena la información de botellas en un diario</a>. Se elige el tipo de botella de la lista desplegable
+ y se especifica la presión de trabajo de la botella. Si dejamos en blanco la
+ concentración de oxígeno (O2%) se asume que el gas que contiene es aire. En otro
+ caso, se introducen las concentraciones de oxígeno y/o helio en las casillas del
+ diálogo. Si es necesario , se añaden botellas utilizando el icono "+" de arriba
+ a la derecha.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
El diálogo llamado <em>Puntos del planificador</em> no se utiliza, normalmente, en
-esta etapa de la planificación.
+ esta etapa de la planificación.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_controlar_los_gases_inertes_el_oxígeno_y_el_consumo_de_gas">12.3. Controlar los gases inertes, el oxígeno y el consumo de gas</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>La planificación se efectúa en tres pasos:</p></div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-<strong>a) Control de gases inertes</strong>: Esto se consigue especificando las velocidades
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>La planificación se efectúa en tres pasos</strong>:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>a) Control de gases inertes</strong>: Esto se consigue especificando las velocidades
de descenso y ascenso, así como los factores de gradiente (GF bajo y GF alto)
bajo los encabezamientos <em>Velocidades</em> y <em>Planificar</em> en la parte inferior de la
pantalla de planificación. En principio se utilizan los factores de gradiente
@@ -3537,8 +4074,7 @@ modificar los marcados en las <em>Preferencias</em>. Los ajustes de los factores gradiente afectan enormemente a los techos calculados y sus profundidades.
Un <em>GF bajo</em> muy pequeño produce paradas de descompresión más pronto durante la
inmersión.
-Para más información externa a este manual ver:
-</p>
+Para más información externa a este manual ver:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -3554,27 +4090,18 @@ Para más información externa a este manual ver: <p>
<a href="http://www.amazon.com/Deco-Divers-Decompression-Theory-Physiology/dp/1905492073/ref=sr_1_1?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1403932320&sr=1-1&keywords=deco+for+divers"><em>Deco for Divers</em>, by Mark Powell (2008). Aquapress, Southend-on-Sea, UK. ISBN 10:1-905492-07-3. Un excelente estudio no técnico.</a>
</p>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-La velocidad de ascenso es crítica para la desgasificación al final de la
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La velocidad de ascenso es crítica para la desgasificación al final de la
inmersión y se especifica para varios rangos utilizando la profundidad media
-como vara de medir. La profundidad media del plan se indica en el perfil del
-panel verde del planificador. Las velocidades de ascenso en los niveles más
+como vara de medir. La profundidad media del plan se indica como una línea gris
+sobre el perfil. Las velocidades de ascenso en los niveles más
profundos se sitúan, a menudo, en el rango de 8 a 12 m/min, mientras que en los
niveles más superficiales suelen estar en los 3 a 6 m/min llegando en ocasiones
a 1 m/min. La velocidad de descenso también se especifica. Si activamos la
opción <em>Caer a la primera profundidad</em> , la fase de descenso se efectuará a la
-máxima velocidad indicada en la sección <em>Velocidades</em> de los ajustes.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-<strong>b) Control del oxígeno</strong>: En las <em>Opciones de gases</em> es necesario
+máxima velocidad indicada en la sección <em>Velocidades</em> de los ajustes.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>b) Control del oxígeno</strong>: En las <em>Opciones de gases</em> es necesario
especificar la máxima presión parcial de oxígeno para la parte del fondo
(<em>pO2 en fondo</em> ) y también para la fase de descompresión (<em>pO2 en deco</em>).
Los valores más comunes son 1.4 bar para el fondo de la inmersión y 1.6 bar
@@ -3582,19 +4109,16 @@ para las paradas de descompresión. Habitualmente no se excede una presión parcial de 1.6 bar de O2. Los ajustes de pO2 y la profundidad a la que cambiar
de gases también pueden editarse en el diálogo <em>Gases disponibles</em>. Normalmente
el planificador decide el cambio a otro gas cuando, durante el ascenso, la
-presión parcial del nuevo gas se sitúa por debajo de 1.6 bar.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-<strong>c) Control del gas</strong>: Es necesario mantenerse en los límites de la cantidad
+presión parcial del nuevo gas se sitúa por debajo de 1.6 bar.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>c) Control del gas</strong>: En inmersiones con circuito abierto esta es una
+consideración prioritaria. Es necesario mantenerse en los límites de la cantidad
de gas de la botella, manteniendo un margen de seguridad apropiado para regresar
a superficie, posiblemente compartiendo gas con un compañero. En las <em>Opciones
de gases</em> especifica la mejor (pero conservativa) estimación de tu "consumo de
aire equivalente a superficie" (CAS, del inglés SAC, también llamado RMV) en
litros/minuto (en estos momentos solo están soportadas las unidades del Sistema
Internacional). Se especifica el CAS para el fondo (<em>CAS en fondo</em>) y también
-para la fase de descompresión (<em>CAS en deco</em>). Son comunes valores de 20 a
+para la fase de descompresión (<em>CAS en deco</em>). Son comunes valores de 15 a
30 l/min. Para hacer una buena gestión del gas, una regla del pulgar no es
suficiente y se necesita monitorizar el consumo regularmente, dependiendo de
diferentes condiciones ambientales y de equipo. El planificador calculará el
@@ -3602,10 +4126,7 @@ volumen total de gas a utilizar durante la inmersión y emitirá un aviso si se excede la cantidad total de gas disponible. Las buenas prácticas exigen que no
se bucee al límite del gas disponible, sino que se mantenga una reserva de gas
apropiada para atender circunstancias imprevistas. En el caso del buceo técnico,
-esta reserva puede ser, fácilmente, del 66% del gas disponible.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
+esta reserva puede ser, fácilmente, del 66% del gas disponible.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Ahora, por fin, se puede empezar la planificación detallada de tiempos y
profundidades. <em>Subsurface</em> ofrece una interfaz gráfica única para llevar a cabo
esta parte de la planificación. El mecanismo es similar a introducir a mano un
@@ -3613,21 +4134,20 @@ perfil en el diario de inmersiones. Al activar el planificador, se genera un perfil por defecto de 40 minutos a 15 metros. Los puntos blancos (puntos de
paso) del perfil, se pueden arrastrar con el ratón. Se crean más puntos haciendo
doble-clic en la línea del perfil. Se arrastran los puntos de paso paso hasta
-estar seguros de que el perfil refleja la inmersión que se pretende efectuar. Si
-se sobrepasa cualquiera de los límites establecidos la superficie sobre el
+estar seguros de que el perfil refleja la inmersión que se pretende efectuar.
+No es necesario especificar la fase de ascenso ya que será calculada por el
+planificador basándose en los ajustes que se hayan especificado.
+Si se sobrepasa cualquiera de los límites establecidos, la superficie sobre el
perfil se volverá roja.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Cada punto de paso en el perfil crea un <em>punto en el planificador</em> en la tabla
a la izquierda del panel del planificador. Hay que asegurarse de que el valor
del <em>Gas usado</em> en cada fila de esta tabla corresponde a una de las mezclas
-especificadas en la tabla de <em>Gases disponibles</em> que está encima de los puntos
-del planificador. Se añaden nuevos puntos hasta que las principales
-características del buceo estén completas, p.e. el segmento de tiempo en el
-fondo y paradas profundas (si se implementan). Se dejan los restantes puntos del
-ascenso a <em>Subsurface</em>. En la mayoría de los casos <em>Subsurface</em> calcula puntos
-de paso adicionales para completar los requisitos de descompresión de la
-inmersión.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Un punto de paso puede moverse seleccionándolo y utilizando las teclas de
-flechas.</p></div>
+especificadas en la tabla de <em>Gases disponibles</em>. Se añaden nuevos puntos hasta
+que las principales características del buceo estén completas, p.e. el segmento
+de tiempo en el fondo y paradas profundas (si se implementan). Se dejan los
+restantes puntos del ascenso a <em>Subsurface</em>. En la mayoría de los casos
+<em>Subsurface</em> calcula puntos de paso adicionales para completar los requisitos
+de descompresión de la inmersión.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Los puntos de paso relacionados en el diálogo <em>Puntos del planificador</em> pueden
editarse a mano para obtener una representación precisa del plan. De hecho
podría crearse el plan completo editando los puntos desde el diálogo.</p></div>
@@ -3643,15 +4163,13 @@ adecuado.</p></div> seguido de un ascenso usando EAN50:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/DivePlanner2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Planificar una inmersión: construcción" />
+<img src="images/DivePlanner2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Planificar una inmersión: construcción" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Una vez que lo anterior se ha completado, se puede guardar clicando el botón
-<em>Guardar</em> a la izquierda del panel del planificador. El plan de buceo guardado
-aparecerá en el panel <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_los_detalles_del_plan_de_buceo">12.4. Los detalles del plan de buceo</h3>
+<em>Guardar</em> arriba en el centro del panel del planificador. El plan de buceo
+guardado aparecerá en el panel <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Los detalles del plan de buceo</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En la parte inferior derecha del planificador, bajo el encabezamiento <em>Detalles
del plan de buceo</em>, se proporcionan los detalles exactos del plan de inmersión.
Estos detalles pueden modificarse seleccionando cualquiera de las opciones bajo
@@ -3666,7 +4184,61 @@ embargo, si se selecciona <em>Mostrar transiciones en deco</em>, las transicione muestran separadamente de las duraciones de las paradas en cada nivel.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Replan">12.5. Modificar un plan de inmersión existente</h3>
+<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_con_ccr">14.3. Planificar inmersiones con CCR</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para planificar una inmersión utilizando un rebreather de circuito cerrado,
+selecciona la opción <em>CCR</em> en la lista desplegable (en un circulo azul en la
+imagen a continuación.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Gases disponibles</strong>: en la tabla de <em>Gases disponibles</em>, introduce los datos de
+la botella de diluyente y las de bail-out. NO indiques información para la
+botella de oxígeno, ya que está implícita al haber seleccionado <em>CCR</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Introducir setpoints</strong>: Especifica un setpoint por defecto en la pestaña de
+Preferencias seleccionando <em>Archivo → Preferencias → Gráfico</em> desde el menú
+principal. Todos los segmentos introducidos por el usuario en los <em>Puntos del
+planificador</em> utilizan el valor del setpoint por defecto. Luego se pueden
+especificar diferentes setpoints para los diferentes segmentos en la tabla.
+Un setpoint cero significa que el buceador ha pasado a circuito abierto para
+el segmento en que se ha indicado. La descompresión siempre se calcula usando
+el setpoint del último segmento que se haya añadido manualmente. De esta forma,
+si se desea planificar un ascenso de emergencia, se añadiría un segmento de un
+minuto al final de la inmersión con un setpoint de valor cero. El algoritmo de
+descompresión no cambia de mezclas automáticamente mientras se está en modo CCR
+pero, desde luego, lo hace para ascensos de emergencia en circuito abierto.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El perfil para una inmersión con CCR puede parecerse a la imagen a continuación</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Planner_CCR1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a CCR dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Fíjate que, en los <em>Detalles del plan de buceo</em>, no se calcula el consumo de
+gas para un segmento en CCR, por tanto, lo normal es obtener valores de 0 l.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_con_pscr">14.4. Planificar inmersiones con pSCR</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para planificar una inmersión usando un rebreather pasivo de circuito
+semi-cerrado, selecciona <em>pSCR</em> en lugar de <em>Circuito abiertp</em> en la lista
+desplegable.
+Los parámetros para la inmersción con pSCR se pueden ajustar seleccionando
+<em>Archivo → Preferencias → Gráfico</em> desde el menú principal, donde el cálculo
+de consumo de gas tiene en cuenta el ratio de vertido (por defecto 10:1) así
+como el ratio de metabolismo. El cálculo también tiene en cuenta la pérdida
+de oxígeno por la boquilla del rebreather. Si la pO<sub>2</sub> cae por debajo de lo que
+se considera un valor seguro, aparecerá un aviso en los <em>Detalles del plan de
+buceo</em>. Una configuración típica con pSCR es con una sola botella y una o más
+botellas de emergencia. Así pues, el ajuste de las tablas de <em>Gases disponibles</em>
+y <em>Puntos del planificador</em> son muy similares a las de un plan con CCR, como se
+ha descrito anteriormente. Sin embargo, no se especifican setpoints de oxígeno
+en las inmersiones con pSCR. A continuación hay un plan de inmersión para un
+buceo con pSCR. El buceo es comparable al anterior con CCR, pero hay que hacer
+notar la mayor duración del ascenso debido al menor contenido de oxígeno en el
+circuito por la caída de oxígeno en la boquilla del equipo pSCR.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Planner_pSCR1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a pSCR dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Replan">14.5. Modificar un plan de inmersión existente</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normalmente, cuando se ha guardado un plan de inmersión, se encuentra disponible
desde la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong> como cualquier buceo. Desde la <strong>Lista de
Inmersiones</strong> no hay forma de cambiar un plan. Para efectuar cambios a un plan de
@@ -3676,7 +4248,7 @@ el planificador, permitiendo hacer las modificaciones oportunas y guardarlas de la forma habitual.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_sucesivas">12.6. Planificar inmersiones sucesivas</h3>
+<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_sucesivas">14.6. Planificar inmersiones sucesivas</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se pueden planear fácilmente inmersiones sucesivas si la fecha y hora de las
mismas se especifican correctamente en el campo arriba a la izquierda <em>Hora de
inicio</em>. <em>SUbsurface</em> calcula las cargas de gases inertes de la primera
@@ -3693,7 +4265,7 @@ de la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> y se activa el planificador: el plan en cuenta la configuración de la plantilla seleccionada.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_imprimir_el_plan_de_inmersión">12.7. Imprimir el plan de inmersión</h3>
+<h3 id="_imprimir_el_plan_de_inmersion">14.7. Imprimir el plan de inmersión</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Seleccionar el botón <em>Imprimir</em> permite imprimir los <em>Detalles del plan de
buceo</em> para unas "wet notes". También se pueden copiar y pegar los <em>Detalles del
plan de buceo</em> para incluirlos en un archivo de texto o un procesador de
@@ -3713,24 +4285,24 @@ registro de inmersión.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_descripción_de_las_opciones_del_menú_principal_de_em_subsurface_em">13. Descripción de las opciones del menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="_descripcion_de_las_opciones_del_menu_principal_de_em_subsurface_em">15. Descripción de las opciones del menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta sección describe las funciones y manejo de las opciones del menú principal
de <em>Subsurface</em>. Varias de las opciones que veremos luego son links a secciones
de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_archivo">13.1. Archivo</h3>
+<h3 id="_archivo">15.1. Archivo</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_NewLogbook"><em>NuevoRegistro</em></a> - Cierra el diario abierto en estos momentos
-y limpia toda la información.
+ y limpia toda la información.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Abrir Registro</em> - Abre el navegador de archivos para seleccionar un archivo
-de registro que abrir.
+ de registro que abrir.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3751,7 +4323,7 @@ de registro que abrir. <li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ExportLog"><em>Exportar</em></a> - Exporta el diario abierto actualmente (o las
-inmersiones seleccionadas en el diario) a algún otro formato.
+ inmersiones seleccionadas en el diario) a algún otro formato.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3762,118 +4334,124 @@ inmersiones seleccionadas en el diario) a algún otro formato. <li>
<p>
<a href="#S_Preferences"><em>Preferencias</em></a> - Fija las preferencias del usuario de
-<em>Subsurface</em>.
+ <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Salir</em> - Sale de <em>Subsurface</em>.
+<a href="#S_Configure"><em>Configurar ordenador de buceo</em></a> - Edita la configuración de
+ un ordenador de buceo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Configure dive computer</em> - Esta opción está en fase experimental y en
-desarrollo.
+<em>Salir</em> - Sale de <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar">13.2. Importar</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar">15.2. Importar</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer"><em>Importar del ordenador de buceo</em></a> - Descarga
-información desde un ordenador de buceo.
+ información desde un ordenador de buceo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#Unified_import"><em>Importar Archivos de registro</em></a> - Importa información de
-buceo desde un fichero que esté en un formato compatible con <em>Subsurface</em>.
+ buceo desde un fichero que esté en un formato compatible con <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Importar datos GPS del Servicio Subsurface</em></a> - Carga
-coordenadas GPS desde la app para teléfonos móviles.
+<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Importar datos GPS del Servicio web de Subsurface</em></a> - Carga
+ coordenadas GPS desde la app para teléfonos móviles.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ImportingDivelogsDe"><em>Importar desde Divelogs.de</em></a> - Importa información
-de buceo desde www.divelogs.de.
+ de buceo desde www.divelogs.de.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_registro">13.3. Registro</h3>
+<h3 id="_registro">15.3. Registro</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_EnterData"><em>Añadir inmersión</em></a> - Añade manualmente una nueva inmersión al
-panel Lista de inmersiones.
+ panel Lista de inmersiones.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_DivePlanner"><em>Planificar inmersión</em></a> - Esta característica permite
-planificar inmersiones.
+ planificar inmersiones.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_Replan"><em>Re-planificar inmersión</em></a> - Edita un plan de buceo que se ha
-guardado en la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>.
+ guardado en la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_CopyComponents"><em>Copiar componentes</em></a> - Al seleccionar esta opción se
-se puede copiar información de varios campos de una inmersión al portapapeles.
+ se puede copiar información de varios campos de una inmersión al portapapeles.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<em>Pegar componentes</em> - Pega, en las inmersiones previamente seleccionadas de
-la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>, la información copiada previamente usando la opción
-<em>Copiar componentes</em>.
+ la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>, la información copiada previamente usando la opción
+ <em>Copiar componentes</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_Renumber"><em>Renumerar</em></a> - Renumera las inmersiones listadas en el panel
-Lista de inmersiones.
+ Lista de inmersiones.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_Group"><em>Auto agrupar</em></a> - Agrupa automáticamente los buceos de la Lista de
-inmersiones en viajes de buceo.
+ inmersiones en viajes de buceo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_DeviceNames"><em>Editar nombres de dispositivos</em></a> - Edita los nombres
-asignados a los ordenadores de buceo.
+ asignados a los ordenadores de buceo.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Filter"><em>Filtrar la lista de inmersiones</em></a> - Seleccionar únicamente
+ algunas inmersiones, basándose en criterios específicos.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_vista">13.4. Vista</h3>
+<h3 id="_vista">15.4. Vista</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Todo</em></a> - Se presentan los cuatro paneles principales de
-<em>Subsurface</em> simultáneamente.
+ <em>Subsurface</em> simultáneamente.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Lista_de_inmersiones</em></a> - Se visualiza solo el panel Lista de
-inmersiones.
+ inmersiones.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3889,8 +4467,12 @@ inmersiones. <li>
<p>
<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Globo</em></a> - Se presenta solo el panel Mapamundi.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
<em>Estadísticas anuales</em> - Muestra estadísticas anuales resumidas sobre las
-inmersiones efectuadas en este año y los pasados.
+ inmersiones efectuadas en este año y los pasados.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3911,28 +4493,24 @@ inmersiones efectuadas en este año y los pasados. </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_filtrar">13.5. Filtrar</h3>
+<h3 id="_ayuda">15.5. Ayuda</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Seleccionar eventos</em> - Esta opción no está implementada aún.
+<em>Acerca de Subsurface</em> - Muestra un panel con el número de versión de
+ <em>Subsurface</em> e información de la licencia.
</p>
</li>
-</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_ayuda">13.6. Ayuda</h3>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Acerca de Subsurface</em> - Muestra un panel con el número de versión de
-<em>Subsurface</em> e información de la licencia.
+<em>Comprobar si hay actualizaciones</em> - Encuentra si hay disponible una nueva
+ versión de <em>Subsurface</em> en la <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/">página web de <em>Subsurface</em></a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Comprobar si hay actualizaciones</em> - Encuentra si hay disponible una nueva
-versión de <em>Subsurface</em> en la <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/">página web de <em>Subsurface</em></a>.
+<a href="#S_UserSurvey"><em>Encuesta de usuarios</em></a> - Ayuda a hacer mejor <em>Subsurface</em>
+ tomando parte en nuestra encuesta a usuarios.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -3945,10 +4523,10 @@ versión de <em>Subsurface</em> en la <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/"> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_apéndice_a_información_específica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">14. APÉNDICE A: Información específica del sistema operativo para importar inmersiones desde un ordenador de buceo.</h2>
+<h2 id="_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">16. APÉNDICE A: Información específica del sistema operativo para importar inmersiones desde un ordenador de buceo.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_asegúrate_de_que_el_so_tiene_instalados_los_drivers_necesarios">14.1. Asegúrate de que el SO tiene instalados los drivers necesarios</h3>
+<h3 id="_asegurate_de_que_el_so_tiene_instalados_los_drivers_necesarios">16.1. Asegúrate de que el SO tiene instalados los drivers necesarios</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -3987,7 +4565,7 @@ de documentos y software de Silicon Labs</a>. </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">14.2. Como encontrar el nombre de dispositivo para conexiones USB y ajustar sus permisos de escritura</h3>
+<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">16.2. Como encontrar el nombre de dispositivo para conexiones USB y ajustar sus permisos de escritura</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4074,13 +4652,19 @@ verifica que se ha creado la pertenencia correcta al grupo. El grupo <code>dialo debería aparecer entre los diferentes IDs.
</p>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+En algunas circunstancias, este cambio solo tiene efecto (p.e. en Ubuntu) tras
+cerrar sesión y reiniciarla.
+</p>
+</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Con el nombre de dispositivo apropiado (p.e. <code>/dev/ttyUSB3</code>) y con permisos de
escritura para el puerto USB, el interface del ordenador de buceo puede
conectarse y se debería poder importar las inmersiones.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">14.3. Ajustar dispositivos con bluetooth</h3>
+<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">16.3. Ajustar dispositivos con bluetooth</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4149,21 +4733,21 @@ ejecuta algo como <code>sudo rc.config start bluetoothd</code> o <code>sudo <li>
<p>
<code>sudo hciconfig</code> muestra los dispositivos bluetooth disponibles en tu pc,
-seguramente verás un hci0, si no intenta sudo <code>hcitool -a</code> para buscar
-dispositivos inactivos y prueba <code>sudo hciconfig hci0 up</code> para activarlo.
+ seguramente verás un hci0, si no intenta sudo <code>hcitool -a</code> para buscar
+ dispositivos inactivos y prueba <code>sudo hciconfig hci0 up</code> para activarlo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<code>sudo hcitool scanning</code> usa esto para tener una lista de clientes activos,
-busca tu ordenador de buceo y recuerda la dirección MAC que aparecerá.
+ busca tu ordenador de buceo y recuerda la dirección MAC que aparecerá.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<code>sudo bluez-simple-agent hci0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> esto emparejará tu ordenador
-de buceo con la pila bluetooth de tu PC, copia/pega la dirección MAC de la
-salida del anterior <em>sudo hcitool scanning</em>.
+ de buceo con la pila bluetooth de tu PC, copia/pega la dirección MAC de la
+ salida del anterior <em>sudo hcitool scanning</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4173,9 +4757,9 @@ de hacerse manualmente ejecutando:</p></div> <li>
<p>
<code>sudo rfcomm bind /dev/rfcomm0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> enlaza el ordenador de buceo
-a un dispositivo de comunicaciones de tu PC, en caso de que rfcomm ya esté en
-uso, simplemente usa rfcomm1 o 2 … IMPORTANT: copia/pega la dirección MAC de la
-salida de hcitool scanning, la de aquí solo es un ejemplo.
+ a un dispositivo de comunicaciones de tu PC, en caso de que rfcomm ya esté en
+ uso, simplemente usa rfcomm1 o 2 … IMPORTANT: copia/pega la dirección MAC de la
+ salida de hcitool scanning, la de aquí solo es un ejemplo.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4186,10 +4770,10 @@ como nombre de dispositivo a utilizar.</p></div> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_apéndice_b_información_específica_por_ordenadores_de_buceo">15. APÉNDICE B: Información específica por ordenadores de buceo.</h2>
+<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">17. APÉNDICE B: Información específica por ordenadores de buceo.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">15.1. Importar desde un Uemis Zurich</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">17.1. Importar desde un Uemis Zurich</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4224,7 +4808,7 @@ tenga que repetir esta operación más de una vez dependiendo de cuantos buceos haya guardados en el ordenador.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">15.2. Importar buceos desde el Galileo de Uwatec</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">17.2. Importar buceos desde el Galileo de Uwatec</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4252,7 +4836,7 @@ en algunos sitios de internet p.e. OSX 10.6 o superior.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">15.3. Importar buceos desde Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">17.3. Importar buceos desde Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4269,7 +4853,26 @@ seguridad, de la calculada por el DR5.</td> </div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar_del_shearwater_predator_usando_bluetooth">15.4. Importar del Shearwater Predator usando Bluetooth</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingXDeep">17.4. Importar desde xDEEP BLACK</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/HW_xdeepblack.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Cada inmersión se ha de guardar individualmente como archivo UDDF utilizando la
+opción "Exportar a UDDF" en el menú del logbook del BLACK. Al montar el BLACK
+como disco USB, los archivos UDDF están disponibles en el directorio LOGBOOK.
+Nota: El xDEEP BLACK guarda el LND pero no parece guardar factores de gradiente
+ni información sobre deco, por lo que <em>Subsurface</em> no puede mostralos. Ajusta
+los factores de gradiente en <em>Gráfico</em> en las <em>Preferencias</em> para generar una
+capa de deco en el <strong>Perfil deinmersión</strong> de <em>Subsurface</em> pero fíjate que la
+deco calculada por <em>Subsurface</em> diferirá con toda probabilidad de la que
+mostraría el xDEEP BLACK.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_importar_del_shearwater_predator_usando_bluetooth">17.5. Importar del Shearwater Predator usando Bluetooth</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4287,7 +4890,7 @@ ocasiones, se puede resolver siguiendo estos pasos:</td> <li>
<p>
Utilizar el receptor bluetooth que viene con el Shearwater Predator en lugar
-del incorporado en el PC.
+ del incorporado en el PC.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4303,7 +4906,7 @@ Apagar Wi-Fi mientras se utiliza bluetooth </ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">15.5. Importar diarios desde el Poseidon MKVI Discovery</h3>
+<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">17.6. Importar desde el Poseidon MKVI Discovery</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4322,7 +4925,7 @@ archivos:</td> <li>
<p>
Configuración de ajustes para la inmersión y parámetros clave de la misma (es
-el archivo con extensión .txt).
+ el archivo con extensión .txt).
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4340,7 +4943,7 @@ comprimida del diario utilizando un formato propio. <div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> accede a los archivos .txt y .csv para obtener información.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar_diarios_del_ccr_apd_inspiration">15.6. Importar diarios del CCR APD Inspiration</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar_desde_el_ccr_apd_inspiration">17.7. Importar desde el CCR APD Inspiration</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4369,7 +4972,7 @@ Seleccionar la pestaña llamada <em>Datos</em> (<em>Data</em>). <li>
<p>
Si se muestran en la pantalla los datos del diario "en crudo", pulsar en
-<em>Copiar al portapapeles</em>.
+ <em>Copiar al portapapeles</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4380,13 +4983,13 @@ Abrir un editor de texto (p.e. Notepad en windows o TextWrangler en Mac). <li>
<p>
Copiar el contenido del portapapeles al editor y guardar el archivo de texto
-con extensión de archivo .csv.
+ con extensión de archivo .csv.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Desde Subsurface, seleccionar <em>Importar → Importar archivos de registro</em>
-para abrir el <a href="#Unified_import">diálogo de importación universal</a>.
+ para abrir el <a href="#Unified_import">diálogo de importación universal</a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4397,19 +5000,19 @@ En la lista desplegable de abajo del diálogo seleccionar <em>Archivos CSV</em>. <li>
<p>
En la lista de nombres de archivo, seleccionar el archivo .CSV que acabamos
-de crear y se abrirá un diálogo de importación.
+ de crear y se abrirá un diálogo de importación.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
En la lista desplegable llamada <em>Importaciones pre-configuradas</em>, seleccionar
-el <em>APD Log Viewer</em>.
+ el <em>APD Log Viewer</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Asegurarse que los otros ajustes del diario APD son correctas y pulsar
-<em>Aceptar</em>.
+ <em>Aceptar</em>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4418,7 +5021,7 @@ Asegurarse que los otros ajustes del diario APD son correctas y pulsar </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_apéndice_c_exportar_información_de_diarios_desde_otros_softwares_externos">16. APÉNDICE C: Exportar información de diarios desde otros softwares externos.</h2>
+<h2 id="_apendice_c_exportar_informacion_de_diarios_desde_otros_softwares_externos">18. APÉNDICE C: Exportar información de diarios desde otros softwares externos.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>La importación de datos de diarios de buceos desde softwares externos se
efectúa, habitualmente, utilizando el dialogo que resulta de seleccionar
@@ -4430,7 +5033,7 @@ efectuar dos pasos:</p></div> <li>
<p>
Exportar los datos del diario externo a un formato accesible por
-<em>Subsurface</em>.
+ <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4443,16 +5046,17 @@ Importar el diario accesible a <em>Subsurface</em>. diarios desde softwares externos. Los procedimientos a continuación se aplican
mayormente en Linux y/o Windows.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">16.1. Exportar inmersiones desde <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3 y DM4)</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">18.1. Exportar desde <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3, DM4 o DM5)</strong></h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/suuntologo.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Divemanager 3 (DM3) es una versión más antigua del software de Suunto. Los
-ordenadores de buceo más recientes usan Divemanager 4 (DM4). Las dos versiones
-de Divemanager usan diferentes métodos y diferentes nomenclaturas de archivos al
-exportar datos.</td>
+<td class="content">Divemanager es una aplicación en MS Windows para ordenadores de buceo Suunto.
+Divemanager 3 (DM3) es una versión más antigua del software de Suunto. Los
+ordenadores de buceo más recientes usan Divemanager 4 o 5 (DM4 o DM5). Las
+diferentes versiones de Divemanager usan diferentes métodos y diferentes
+nomenclaturas de archivos al exportar datos.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 3 (DM3):</strong></p></div>
@@ -4460,37 +5064,37 @@ exportar datos.</td> <li>
<p>
Iniciar <em>Suunto Divemanager 3</em> y registrarse con el nombre que contiene los
-diarios.
+ diarios.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Do iniciar el ayudante de importación para importar inmersiones desde el
-ordenador de buceo.
+No iniciar el ayudante de importación para importar inmersiones desde el
+ ordenador de buceo.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
En el árbol de la izquierda de la ventana del programa, seleccionar las
-inmersiones que correspondan.
+ inmersiones que correspondan.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
De la lista de buceos, seleccionar las inmersiones que se deseará descargar
-después:
+ después:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Para seleccionar alguna: mantén pulsada la tecla <em>ctrl</em> y haz clic en la
-inmersión.
+ inmersión.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Para seleccionarlas todas: Selecciona la primera, mantén pulsada la tecla
-<em>shift</em> y haz clic en la última inmersión.
+ <em>shift</em> y haz clic en la última inmersión.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4503,24 +5107,26 @@ Con las inmersiones marcadas se usa el menú <em>File → Export</em> <li>
<p>
Se mostrará el desplegable de exportación. En este desplegable hay un campo
-llamado Export Path.
+ llamado Export Path.
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Haz clic en el botón browse junto al campo Export Path
</p>
-</li>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Se despliega un navegador de archivos
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
Navega a la carpeta donde quieras que se guarde el archivo Divelog.SDE
</p>
-</li>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Opcionalmente cambia el nombre del archivo a guardar.
@@ -4531,6 +5137,8 @@ Opcionalmente cambia el nombre del archivo a guardar. Clica <em>Save</em>.
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
De vuelta en el desplegable de exportación, pulsa el botón <em>Export</em>.
@@ -4544,16 +5152,17 @@ Las inmersiones han quedado exportadas en el archivo Divelogs.SDE. </p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 4 (DM4):</strong></p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Para exportar un diario desde <em>Suunto DM4</em>, se necesita localizar la base de
-datos DM4 donde están guardadas las inmersiones. El usuario puede buscar la
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 4 (DM4) y Divemanager 5 (DM5):</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>DM4 y DM5 utilizan idénticos mecanismos para exportar los diarios.
+Para exportar un diario desde Divemanager, se necesita localizar la base de
+datos DM4/DM5 donde están guardadas las inmersiones. El usuario puede buscar la
base de datos original o hacer una copia de respaldo. A continuación se
describen ambos métodos.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Localizar la base de datos Suunto DM4:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Localizar la base de datos Suunto DM4 (o DM5):</p></div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-Iniciar Suunto DM4
+Iniciar Suunto DM4/DM5
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4564,7 +5173,7 @@ Seleccionar <em>Help → About</em> (Ayuda → Acerca de) <li>
<p>
Hacer clic en el botón <em>Copy</em> (Copiar) tras el texto <em>Copy log folder path to
-clipboard</em> (Copiar la ruta a la carpeta del registro al portapapeles)
+ clipboard</em> (Copiar la ruta a la carpeta del registro al portapapeles)
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4575,20 +5184,20 @@ Abrir el explorador de Windows <li>
<p>
Pegar la ruta en la casilla de direcciones en la parte de arriba del
-explorador
+ explorador
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-La base de datos se llama DM4.db
+La base de datos se llama DM4.db o DM5.db
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Hacer una copia de respaldo de Suunto DM4:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Hacer una copia de respaldo de la base de datos de Suunto DM4/DM5:</p></div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-Iniciar Suunto DM4
+Iniciar Suunto DM4/DN5
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4599,7 +5208,7 @@ Seleccionar <em>File → Create backup</em> (Archivo → Copia de seguridad) <li>
<p>
Desde el menú de archivos, seleccionar la carpeta y el nombre para la copia,
-aquí usaremos DM4 con la extensión por defecto .bak
+aquí usaremos DM4 (o DM5) con la extensión por defecto .bak
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4609,13 +5218,27 @@ Clicar <em>Save</em> (Guardar) </li>
<li>
<p>
-Los buceos se han exportado al archivo DM4.bak
+Los buceos se han exportado al archivo DM4.bak (o DM5.bak)
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="Mares_Export">16.2. Exportar desde Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
+<h3 id="Atomic_Export">18.2. Exportar desde Atomic Logbook</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="./images/icons/note.png" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Atomic Logbook es un software en Windows de Atomics Aquatics. Permite descargar
+información de buceo de los ordenadores Cobalt y Cobalt 2. El archivo se guarda
+en una base de datos SQlite en C:\ProgramData\AtomicsAquatics\Cobalt-Logbook\Cobalt.db.
+Este archivo se puede importar directamente a <em>Subsurface</em>.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="Mares_Export">18.3. Exportar desde Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4634,14 +5257,14 @@ exportar la información a otro formato compatible que pueda ser importado a <li>
<p>
En el Dive Organiser, selecciona <em>Database → Backup</em> en el menú principal y
-haz una copia de seguridad de la base de datos en el escritorio. Esto creará un
-archivo comprimido DiveOrganiserxxxxx.dbf
+ haz una copia de seguridad de la base de datos en el escritorio. Esto creará un
+ archivo comprimido DiveOrganiserxxxxx.dbf
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
Cambia el nombre del archivo a DiveOrganiserxxxxx.zip. Dentro de una carpeta
-comprimida en el archivo .zip, hay otro archivo llamado <em>DiveOrganiser.sdf</em>.
+ comprimida en el archivo .zip, hay otro archivo llamado <em>DiveOrganiser.sdf</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4657,7 +5280,7 @@ La password para acceder al archivo .zip es <em>mares</em>. </ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDivinglog">16.3. Exportar inmersiones desde <strong>DivingLog 5.0</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivingLog">18.4. Exportar desde <strong>DivingLog 5.0</strong></h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -4693,10 +5316,168 @@ Hacer clic en el botón de exportar y seleccionar un nombre de archivo. </div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_apendice_d_preguntas_frecuentes">17. APENDICE D: Preguntas Frecuentes.</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Appendix_D">19. APÉNDICE D: Exportar una hoja de cálculo a formato CSV</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores mantienen un diario en alguna forma de archivo digital, en
+muchos casos en una hoja de cálculo con varios campos de información. Estos
+registros se pueden importar con facilidad a <em>Subsurface</em>
+una vez que la hoja de cálculo se ha convertido a archivo .CSV .
+Esta sección explica el procedimiento para convertir un diario de buceo que
+se haya conservado en una hoja de cálculo en un archivo .CSV que se pueda,
+posteriormente, importar a <em>Subsurface</em>.
+Crear un .CSV es una tarea sencilla, aunque el procedimiento es algo distinto
+según el programa de hojas de cálculo que se utilice.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El primer paso consiste en organizar los datos en la hoja de cálculo, de forma
+que la primera fila contenga los nombres (o títulos) de cada columna y que la
+información de cada inmersión ocupe una sola fila.
+<em>Subsurface</em> soporta muchos tipos de datos (Número, Fecha, Hora, Duración,
+Ubicación, GPS, Prof. máxima, Prof. media, Compañero, Notas, Lastre y Etiquetas).
+El usuario puede organizar los datos siguiendo unas sencillas reglas:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Fecha: Usar uno de los siguientes formatos: aaaa-mm-dd, dd.mm.aaaa o
+ mm/dd/aaaa
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Duración: El formato debería ser minutos:segundos
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sistema de unidades: Solo debe usarse un sistema. Evitar la mezcla sistemas.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Etiquetas y compañeros: los valores deben separarse usando una coma.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Posición GPS: Se deben utilizar grados decimales, p.e. 30.22496 30.821798
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_em_libreoffice_calc_em_y_em_openoffice_calc_em">19.1. <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> y <em>OpenOffice Calc</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Son aplicaciones de hojas de cálculo de código abierto que forman parte de
+suits mayores que, a su vez, también son código abierto. La interacción del
+usuario con <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> y _OpenOffice Calc_es muy similar.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>En LibreOffice Calc el formato de tiempo debe ajustarse a minutos:segundos -
+[mm]:ss y las fechas se deben ajustar a aaaa-mm-dd, dd.mm.aaaa o mm/dd/aaaa.
+Un diario típico codría parecerse a esto:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_spreadsheetdata.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Datos de una hoja de cálculo" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para exportar los datos en archivo .CSV, desde LibreOffice clicar <em>Archivo →
+ Guardar como</em>. En el diálogo que se desplegará, seleccionar <em>Texto CSV (.csv)</em>
+como tipo de archivo y seleccionar la opción <em>Editar ajustes de filtros</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_save_as_options.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opciones de Guardar como" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Tras seleccionar <em>Guardar</em>, seleccionar el delimitador de campos apropiado
+(selecciona <em>TABULADOR</em> para evitar conflictos con las comas cuando estas se
+usen como coma decimal), luego seleccionar <em>OK</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_field_options.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opciones de campos" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede verificar el archivo .CSV abriéndolo con un editor de textos y luego
+se importaría como se explicó en <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importar inmersiones desde archivos <em>CSV</em> manuales</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_microsoft_em_excel_em">19.2. Microsoft <em>Excel</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El delimitador de campos (llamado "separador de listas" en los manuales de
+Microsoft) no está accesible desde <em>Excel</em> y debe ajustarse desde el <em>Panel de
+Control</em>. Tras cambiar el carácter separador todo el software del ordenador con
+Windows usará el nuevo carácter como separador.
+Se puede volver a cambiar el carácter al inicial siguiendo el mismo sistema.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+En Microsoft Windows, pulsar el botón <strong>Inicio</strong> y seleccionar el <em>Panel de
+ Control</em> de la lista de la izquierda.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Abrir el diálogo <em>Opciones de región y lenguaje</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Hacer una de las dos siguientes acciones:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+En Windows 7, clicar la pestaña <em>Formatos</em> y luego <em>Personalizar este
+ formato</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+En Windows XP, clicar la pestaña <em>Opciones de región</em> y luego <em>Personalizar</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Teclear un nuevo separador en el <em>Separador de listas</em>. Para utilizar un
+ tabulador teclea "TAB" en la casilla de texto.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Pulsar <em>OK</em> dos veces.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A continuación, una imagen del <em>Panel de Control</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Separador de listas en Win" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para exportar el archivo en formato CSV:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Con el diario abierto en <em>Excel</em>, seleccionar el botón redondo de Windows de
+arriba a la izquierda, luego <em>Guardar como</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción Guardar como en Excel" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Clicar en la parte izquierda de la opción <em>Guardar como</em>, <strong>NO</strong> sobre la flecha
+de la derecha. Esto desplegará un diálogo para guardar la hoja de cálculo en un
+formato alternativo. De la lista desplegable abajo en el diálogo, seleccionar
+<em>CSV(delimitado por comas) (*.CSV)</em>. Asegurarse de que se ha seleccionado la
+carpeta correcta para guardar el archivo.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save _CSV_ dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Seleccionar el botón <em>Guardar</em>. El archivo formateado en <em>CSV</em> se guardará en la
+carpeta que se hubiera seleccionado. Se puede verificar el archivo creado con
+un editor de textos y luego importar los datos de buceo como se explicó en
+<a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importar inmersiones desde archivos <em>CSV</em> manuales</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_apendice_e_preguntas_frecuentes">20. APENDICE E: Preguntas Frecuentes.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_em_subsurface_em_parece_calcular_mal_el_consumo_de_gas_y_el_cas">17.1. <em>Subsurface</em> parece calcular mal el consumo de gas y el CAS</h3>
+<h3 id="_em_subsurface_em_parece_calcular_mal_el_consumo_de_gas_y_el_cas">20.1. <em>Subsurface</em> parece calcular mal el consumo de gas y el CAS</h3>
<div class="paragraph" id="SAC_CALCULATION"><p><em>Pregunta</em>: Buceé con una botella de 12,2 l empezando con 220 bar y terminando
con 100 bar y yo calculo un CAS distinto al que calcula <em>Subsurface</em> ¿Está
calculándolo mal <em>Subsurface</em>?</p></div>
@@ -4728,7 +5509,7 @@ altas presiones. A 400 bar realmente no contiene el doble de aire que a 200 bar. A presiones más bajas, el aire se comporta bastante como un gas ideal.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_algunos_perfiles_de_inmersión_tienen_discrepancias_de_tiempos_con_las_muestras_que_toma_mi_ordenador_de_buceo">17.2. Algunos perfiles de inmersión tienen discrepancias de tiempos con las muestras que toma mi ordenador de buceo …</h3>
+<h3 id="_algunos_perfiles_de_inmersion_tienen_discrepancias_de_tiempos_con_las_muestras_que_toma_mi_ordenador_de_buceo">20.2. Algunos perfiles de inmersión tienen discrepancias de tiempos con las muestras que toma mi ordenador de buceo …</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> termina por ignorar el tiempo en superficie por varios motivos
(profundidad media, tiempo de inmersión, CAS, etc).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Pregunta</em>: ¿Por qué las duraciones de los buceos en mi ordenador difieren de
@@ -4748,7 +5529,7 @@ querrás que te cuente como algún tipo de inmersión larga.</p></div> <div id="footnotes"><hr /></div>
<div id="footer">
<div id="footer-text">
-Last updated 2014-11-18 13:04:52 GMT
+Last updated 2015-02-04 07:44:40 PST
</div>
</div>
</body>
diff --git a/Documentation/user-manual_fr.html.git b/Documentation/user-manual_fr.html.git index ff321c27a..b753b9852 100644 --- a/Documentation/user-manual_fr.html.git +++ b/Documentation/user-manual_fr.html.git @@ -1,4593 +1,5586 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8" /> -<meta name="generator" content="AsciiDoc 8.6.8" /> -<title></title> -<style type="text/css"> -/* - * compact_subsurface.css, a special style sheet for Subsurface, - * modified by Willem Ferguson and derived from: - * compact.css, version 1.3 by Alex Efros <powerman@powerman.name> - * Licence: Public Domain - * - * Usage: asciidoc -a theme=compact_subsurface ... - */ - -* { padding: 0; margin: 0; } -img { border: 0; } - -/*** Layout ***/ - -body { margin: 10px 20px; } -#header br { display: none; } -#revnumber { display: block; } -#toc { margin: 1em 0; } -.toclevel2 { margin-left: 1em; } -.toclevel3 { margin-left: 2em; } -#footer { margin-top: 2em; } - -#preamble .sectionbody, -h2, -h3, -h4, -h5 { margin: 1em 0 0 0; } - -.admonitionblock, -.listingblock, -.sidebarblock, -.exampleblock, -.tableblock, -.literalblock { margin: 1em 0; } -.admonitionblock td.icon { padding-right: 0.5em; } -.admonitionblock td.content { padding-left: 0.5em; } -.listingblock .content { padding: 0.5em; } -.sidebarblock > .content { padding: 0.5em; } -.exampleblock > .content { padding: 0 0.5em; } -.tableblock caption { padding: 0 0 0.5em 0; } -.tableblock thead th, -.tableblock tbody td, -.tableblock tfoot td { padding: 0 0.5em; } -.quoteblock { padding: 0 2.0em; } - -.paragraph { margin: 1em 0 0 0; } -.sidebarblock .paragraph:first-child, -.exampleblock .paragraph:first-child, -.admonitionblock .paragraph:first-child { margin: 0; } - - .ulist, .olist, .dlist, .hdlist, .qlist { margin: 1em 0; } -li .ulist, li .olist, li .dlist, li .hdlist, li .qlist, -dd .ulist, dd .olist, dd .dlist, dd .hdlist, dd .qlist { margin: 0; } -ul { margin-left: 1.5em; } -ol { margin-left: 2em; } -dd { margin-left: 3em; } -td.hdlist1 { padding-right: 1em; } - -/*** Fonts ***/ - -body { font-family: Verdana, sans-serif; } -#header { font-family: Arial, sans-serif; } -#header h1 { font-family: Arial, sans-serif; } -#footer { font-family: Georgia, serif; } -#email { font-size: 0.85em; } -#revnumber { font-size: 0.75em; } -#toc { font-size: 0.9em; } -#toctitle { font-weight: bold; } -#footer { font-size: 0.8em; } - -h2, h3, h4, h5, .title { font-family: Arial, sans-serif; } -h2 { font-size: 1.5em; } -.sectionbody { font-size: 0.85em; } -.sectionbody .sectionbody { font-size: inherit; } -h3 { font-size: 159%; } /* 1.35em */ -h4 { font-size: 141%; } /* 1.2em */ -h5 { font-size: 118%; } /* 1em */ -.title { font-size: 106%; /* 0.9em */ - font-weight: bold; - } - -tt, .monospaced { font-family: monospace; font-size: 106%; } /* 0.9em */ -dt, td.hdlist1, .qlist em { font-family: Times New Roman, serif; - font-size: 118%; /* 1em */ - font-style: italic; - } -.tableblock tfoot td { font-weight: bold; } - -/*** Colors and Backgrounds ***/ - -h1 { color: #527bbd; border-bottom: 2px solid silver; } -#footer { border-top: 2px solid silver; } - -h2 { color: #527bbd; border-bottom: 2px solid silver; } -h3 { color: #5D7EAE; border-bottom: 2px solid silver; } -h3 { display: inline-block; } -h4,h5 { color: #5D7EAE; } - -.admonitionblock td.content { border-left: 2px solid silver; } -.listingblock .content { background: #f4f4f4; border: 1px solid silver; border-left: 5px solid #e0e0e0; } -.sidebarblock > .content { background: #ffffee; border: 1px solid silver; border-left: 5px solid #e0e0e0; } -.exampleblock > .content { border-left: 2px solid silver; } -.quoteblock { border-left: 5px solid #e0e0e0; } -.tableblock table { - border-collapse: collapse; - border-width: 3px; - border-color: #527bbd; -} -.tableblock table[frame=hsides] { border-style: solid none; } -.tableblock table[frame=border] { border-style: solid; } -.tableblock table[frame=void] { border-style: none; } -.tableblock table[frame=vsides] { border-style: none solid; } -.tableblock table[rules=all] tbody tr *, -.tableblock table[rules=rows] tbody tr * { - border-top: 1px solid #527bbd; -} -.tableblock table[rules=all] tr *, -.tableblock table[rules=cols] tr * { - border-left: 1px solid #527bbd; -} -.tableblock table tbody tr:first-child * { - border-top: 1px solid white; /* none don't work here... %-[] */ -} -.tableblock table tr *:first-child { - border-left: none; -} -.tableblock table[frame] thead tr *, -.tableblock table[frame] thead tr * { - border-top: 1px solid white; - border-bottom: 2px solid #527bbd; -} -.tableblock table tr td p.table, -.tableblock table tr td p.table * { - border: 0px; -} - -tt, .monospaced { color: navy; } - -li { color: #a0a0a0; } -li > * { color: black; } - -span.aqua { color: aqua; } -span.black { color: black; } -span.blue { color: blue; } -span.fuchsia { color: fuchsia; } -span.gray { color: gray; } -span.green { color: green; } -span.lime { color: lime; } -span.maroon { color: maroon; } -span.navy { color: navy; } -span.olive { color: olive; } -span.purple { color: purple; } -span.red { color: red; } -span.silver { color: silver; } -span.teal { color: teal; } -span.white { color: white; } -span.yellow { color: yellow; } - -span.aqua-background { background: aqua; } -span.black-background { background: black; } -span.blue-background { background: blue; } -span.fuchsia-background { background: fuchsia; } -span.gray-background { background: gray; } -span.green-background { background: green; } -span.lime-background { background: lime; } -span.maroon-background { background: maroon; } -span.navy-background { background: navy; } -span.olive-background { background: olive; } -span.purple-background { background: purple; } -span.red-background { background: red; } -span.silver-background { background: silver; } -span.teal-background { background: teal; } -span.white-background { background: white; } -span.yellow-background { background: yellow; } - -span.big { font-size: 2em; } -span.small { font-size: 0.6em; } - -span.underline { text-decoration: underline; } -span.overline { text-decoration: overline; } -span.line-through { text-decoration: line-through; } - -/*** Misc ***/ - -.admonitionblock td.icon { vertical-align: top; } -.attribution { text-align: right; } - -ul { list-style-type: disc; } -ol.arabic { list-style-type: decimal; } -ol.loweralpha { list-style-type: lower-alpha; } -ol.upperalpha { list-style-type: upper-alpha; } -ol.lowerroman { list-style-type: lower-roman; } -ol.upperroman { list-style-type: upper-roman; } -.hdlist td { vertical-align: top; } - - -</style> -<script type="text/javascript"> -/*<+'])'); - // Function that scans the DOM tree for header elements (the DOM2 - // nodeIterator API would be a better technique but not supported by all - // browsers). - var iterate = function (el) { - for (var i = el.firstChild; i != null; i = i.nextSibling) { - if (i.nodeType == 1 /* Node.ELEMENT_NODE */) { - var mo = re.exec(i.tagName); - if (mo && (i.getAttribute("class") || i.getAttribute("className")) != "float") { - result[result.length] = new TocEntry(i, getText(i), mo[1]-1); - } - iterate(i); - } - } - } - iterate(el); - return result; - } - - var toc = document.getElementById("toc"); - if (!toc) { - return; - } - - // Delete existing TOC entries in case we're reloading the TOC. - var tocEntriesToRemove = []; - var i; - for (i = 0; i < toc.childNodes.length; i++) { - var entry = toc.childNodes[i]; - if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div' - && entry.getAttribute("class") - && entry.getAttribute("class").match(/^toclevel/)) - tocEntriesToRemove.push(entry); - } - for (i = 0; i < tocEntriesToRemove.length; i++) { - toc.removeChild(tocEntriesToRemove[i]); - } - - // Rebuild TOC entries. - var entries = tocEntries(document.getElementById("content"), toclevels); - for (var i = 0; i < entries.length; ++i) { - var entry = entries[i]; - if (entry.element.id == "") - entry.element.id = "_toc_" + i; - var a = document.createElement("a"); - a.href = "#" + entry.element.id; - a.appendChild(document.createTextNode(entry.text)); - var div = document.createElement("div"); - div.appendChild(a); - div.className = "toclevel" + entry.toclevel; - toc.appendChild(div); - } - if (entries.length == 0) - toc.parentNode.removeChild(toc); -}, - - -///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// -// Footnotes generator -///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// - -/* Based on footnote generation code from: - * http://www.brandspankingnew.net/archive/2005/07/format_footnote.html - */ - -footnotes: function () { - // Delete existing footnote entries in case we're reloading the footnodes. - var i; - var noteholder = document.getElementById("footnotes"); - if (!noteholder) { - return; - } - var entriesToRemove = []; - for (i = 0; i < noteholder.childNodes.length; i++) { - var entry = noteholder.childNodes[i]; - if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div' && entry.getAttribute("class") == "footnote") - entriesToRemove.push(entry); - } - for (i = 0; i < entriesToRemove.length; i++) { - noteholder.removeChild(entriesToRemove[i]); - } - - // Rebuild footnote entries. - var cont = document.getElementById("content"); - var spans = cont.getElementsByTagName("span"); - var refs = {}; - var n = 0; - for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) { - if (spans[i].className == "footnote") { - n++; - var note = spans[i].getAttribute("data-note"); - if (!note) { - // Use [\s\S] in place of . so multi-line matches work. - // Because JavaScript has no s (dotall) regex flag. - note = spans[i].innerHTML.match(/\s*\[([\s\S]*)]\s*/)[1]; - spans[i].innerHTML = - "[<a id='_footnoteref_" + n + "' href='#_footnote_" + n + - "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]"; - spans[i].setAttribute("data-note", note); - } - noteholder.innerHTML += - "<div class='footnote' id='_footnote_" + n + "'>" + - "<a href='#_footnoteref_" + n + "' title='Return to text'>" + - n + "</a>. " + note + "</div>"; - var id =spans[i].getAttribute("id"); - if (id != null) refs["#"+id] = n; - } - } - if (n == 0) - noteholder.parentNode.removeChild(noteholder); - else { - // Process footnoterefs. - for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) { - if (spans[i].className == "footnoteref") { - var href = spans[i].getElementsByTagName("a")[0].getAttribute("href"); - href = href.match(/#.*/)[0]; // Because IE return full URL. - n = refs[href]; - spans[i].innerHTML = - "[<a href='#_footnote_" + n + - "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]"; - } - } - } -}, - -install: function(toclevels) { - var timerId; - - function reinstall() { - asciidoc.footnotes(); - if (toclevels) { - asciidoc.toc(toclevels); - } - } - - function reinstallAndRemoveTimer() { - clearInterval(timerId); - reinstall(); - } - - timerId = setInterval(reinstall, 500); - if (document.addEventListener) - document.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded", reinstallAndRemoveTimer, false); - else - window.onload = reinstallAndRemoveTimer; -} - -} -asciidoc.install(3); -/*]]>*/ -</script> -</head> -<body class="article"> -<div id="header"> -</div> -<div id="content"> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Subsurface4Banner.jpg" alt="Banner" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="big">MANUEL UTILISATEUR</span></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Auteurs du manuel</strong> : Willem Ferguson, Jacco van Koll, Dirk Hohndel, Reinout Hoornweg, -Linus Torvalds, Miika Turkia, Amit Chaudhuri, Jan Schubert, Salvador Cuñat, Pedro Neves</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="blue"><em>Version 4.3, Décembre 2014</em></span></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Bienvenue en tant qu’utilisateur de <em>Subsurface</em>, un programme avancé -d’enregistrement de plongées (carnet de plongées) avec une bonne -infrastructure pour décrire, organiser, interpréter et imprimer des plongées -en scaphandre et en apnée. <em>Subsurface</em> offre de nombreux avantages par -rapport à d’autres solutions logicielles similaires :</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Do you need a flexible way of logging dives using recreational equipment, - even not using a dive computer? -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Do you use two different dive computer brands, each with its own proprietary - software for downloading dive logs? Do you dive with rebreathers as well as - open circuit or recreational equipment? Do you use a Reefnet Sensus - time-depth recorder in conjunction with a dive computer? <em>Subsurface</em> offers - a standard interface for downloading dive logs from all these different - pieces of equipment and to store and analyse the dive logs within a unified - system. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Do you use more than one operating system? <em>Subsurface</em> is fully compatible - with Mac, Linux and Windows, allowing you to access your dive log on each of - your operating systems using a single application. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Do you use Linux or Mac and your dive computer has only Windows-based - software for downloading dive information (e.g. Mares)? <em>Subsurface</em> - provides a way of downloading and analysing your dive logs on other - operating systems. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Do you need an intuitive graphical dive planner that integrates with and - takes into account the dives that have already been logged? -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> binaries are available for Windows PCs (Win XP or later), Intel -based Macs (OS/X) and many Linux distributions. <em>Subsurface</em> can be built -for many more hardware platforms and software environments where Qt and -libdivecomputer are available.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The scope of this document is the use of the <em>Subsurface</em> program. To -install the software, consult the <em>Downloads</em> page on the -<a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/"><em>Subsurface</em> web site</a>. Please discuss -issues with this program by sending an email to -<a href="mailto:subsurface@subsurface-divelog.org">our mailing list</a> and report bugs -at <a href="http://trac.hohndel.org">our bugtracker</a>. For instructions on how to -build the software and (if needed) its dependencies please consult the -INSTALL file included with the source code.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Audience</strong>: Recreational Scuba Divers, Free Divers, Tec Divers, Professional -Divers</p></div> -<div id="toc"> - <div id="toctitle">Table of Contents</div> - <noscript><p><b>JavaScript must be enabled in your browser to display the table of contents.</b></p></noscript> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_UserSurvey">1. Le sondage utilisateur</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In order to develop <em>Subsurface</em> in a way that serves its users in the best -possible way, it is important to have some user information. Upon launching -<em>Subsurface</em> after using this software for a week or so, a one-box user -survey pops up. It is entirely optional and the user controls what, if any, -data are sent to the <em>Subsurface</em> development team. Any data that the user -chooses to send is extremely useful, and will only be used to steer future -development and to customise the software to fit the needs of the -<em>Subsurface</em> users. If one completes the survey, or clicks the option not to -be asked again, that should be the last communication of this nature one -receives. However, if one’s diving and/or subsurface habits change and one -wishes to provide another survey, this can be done by launching <em>Subsurface</em> -with the <em>--survey</em> option on the command line.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_StartUsing">2. Start Using the Program</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Subsurface</em> window is usually divided into four panels with a <strong>Main -Menu</strong> (File Import Log View Filter Help) at the top of the window (for -Windows and Linux) or the top of the screen (for Mac and Ubuntu Unity). The -four panels are:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive List</strong> to the bottom left containing a list of all the dives in the -user’s dive log. A dive can be selected and highlighted on the dive list by -clicking on it. In most situations the up/down keys can be used to switch -between dives. The <strong>Dive List</strong> is an important tool for manipulating a dive -log.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive Map</strong> to the bottom right, showing the user’s dive sites on a world -map and centred on the site of the last dive selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive Info</strong> to the top left, giving more detailed information on the -dive selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, including some statistics for the selected -dive or for all highlighted dive(s).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive Profile</strong> to the top right, showing a graphical dive profile of the -selected dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dividers between panels can be dragged in order to change the size of -any of the panels. <em>Subsurface</em> remembers the position of the dividers, so -the next time <em>Subsurface</em> starts it uses the positions of the dividers from -when the program was last used.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If a dive is selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the dive location, detailed -information and profile of the <em>selected dive</em> are shown in the respective -panels. On the other hand, if one highlights more than one dive the last -highlighted dive is the <em>selected dive</em>, but summary data of all -<em>highlighted dives</em> are shown in the <strong>Stats</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Info</strong> panel -(maximum, minimum and average depths, durations, water temperatures and SAC; -total time and number of dives selected).</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" id="S_ViewPanels" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/main_window_f20.jpg" alt="The Main Window" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The user can determine which of the four panels are displayed by selecting -the <strong>View</strong> option on the main menu. This feature gives the user several -choices of display:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>All</strong>: show all four of the panels as in the screenshot above.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divelist</strong>: Show only the Dive List.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Profile</strong>: Show only the Dive Profile of the selected dive.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Info</strong>: Show only the Dive Notes about the last selected dive and statistics for -all highlighted dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Globe</strong>: Show only the world map, centred on the last selected dive.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Like many other functions that can be accessed via the Main Menu, these -options can be triggered using keyboard shortcuts. The shortcuts for a -particular system are shown with an underline in the main menu -entries. Since different Operating Systems and the user chosen language may -cause <em>Subsurface</em> to use different shortcut keys they are not listed here -in the user manual.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>When the program is started for the first time, it shows no information at -all. This is because the program doesn’t have any dive information -available. In the following sections, the procedures to create a new logbook -will be described.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_NewLogbook">3. Creating a new logbook</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Select <em>File → New Logbook</em> from the main menu. All existing dive data are -cleared so that new information can be added. If there are unsaved data in -an open logbook, the user is asked whether the open logbook should be saved -before a new logbook is created.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_GetInformation">4. Storing dive information in the logbook</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Now that a new logbook was created, it is simple to add dive data to it. -<em>Subsurface</em> allows several ways of adding dive data to a logbook, detailed -in the following sections.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If the user has a handwritten divelog, a spreadsheet or another form of -manually maintained divelog, dive data can be added to the logbook using one -of these approaches:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Enter dive information by hand. This is useful if the diver did not use a -dive computer and dives were recorded in a written logbook. See: -<a href="#S_EnterData">Entering dive information by hand</a></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Import dive log information that has been maintained either as a spreadsheet -or as a CSV file. Refer to: <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a -spreadsheet to CSV format</a> and the text about -<a href="#S_ImportingManualCSV">Importing dives from manually created CSV files</a> -and</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If one has dives recorded using a dive computer, the depth profile of the -dive and a large amount of additional information can be accessed. These -dives can be imported from:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -The divecomputer itself. See: <a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer">Importing new dive - information from a Dive Computer</a> or -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Proprietary software distributed by manufacturers of dive computers. Refer -to: <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive information from other -digital data sources or other data formats</a>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Import from spreadsheet or CSV files containing dive profiles. See: -<a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive computers -or other dive log software</a></p></div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_EnterData">4.1. Entering dive information by hand</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This is usually the approach for dives without a dive computer. The basic -record of information within <em>Subsurface</em> is a dive. The most important -information in a simple dive logbook usually includes dive type, date, time, -duration, depth, the names of your dive buddy and of the dive master or dive -guide, and some remarks about the dive. <em>Subsurface</em> can store much more -information than this for each dive. In order to add a dive to a dive log, -select <em>Log → Add Dive</em> from the Main Menu. The program then shows three -panels to enter information for a dive: two tabs in the <strong>Dive Info</strong> panel -(<strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong>), as well as the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel that -displays a graphical profile of each dive. These panels are respectively -marked <span class="red">A</span>, <span class="red">B</span> and <span class="red">C</span> in the figure below. Each of these -tabs will now be explained for data entry.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/AddDive1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Add dive" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>When one edits a field in Dive notes or Equipment panels, <em>Subsurface</em> -enters <strong>Editing Mode</strong>, indicated by the message in the blue box at the top -of the <em>Dive Notes</em> panel (see the image below). This message is displayed -in all the panels under Dive notes and Equipment when in <strong>Editing Mode</strong>.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="Blue edit bar" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Save</em> button should only be selected after all the parts of a dive have -been entered. When entering dives by hand, the <em>Info</em>, <em>Equipment</em> and -<em>Profile</em> tabs should be completed before saving the information. By -selecting the <em>Save</em> button, a local copy of the information for this -specific dive is saved in memory. When one closes Subsurface, the program -will ask again, this time whether the complete dive log should be saved on -disk or not.</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_dive_notes">4.1.1. Dive Notes</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel contains the date, time and place information for a particular -dive, environmental conditions, co-divers and buddies, as well as some -descriptive information. If one clicks on the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the -following fields are visible:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/AddDive2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and the time of the dive. By clicking the -date, a calendar is displayed from which one can choose the correct -date. Press ESC to escape from the calendar. The time values (hour and -minutes) can also be edited directly by clicking on each of them in the text -box and by overtyping the information displayed. The default date is the -present date and the default time is an hour in advance of the present time.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Air and water temperatures</strong>: the air and water temperatures during the -dive can be typed directly on the fields to the right of the Start time. -Temperature units are not needed, as they will be automatically supplied by -<em>Subsurface</em>. Only the numerical value must be -typed by the user (the units selected in the <em>Preferences</em> -will determine whether metric or imperial units are used).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Location</strong>: Here the name of the dive site can be entered, e.g. "Tihany, Lake -Balaton, -Hungary". Auto completion of location names will make this easier if one -frequently dives at the same sites.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Coordinates</strong>: The geographic coordinates of the dive site should be entered -here. These can come from three sources:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>One can find the coordinates on the world map in the bottom right hand part -of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "No -location data - Move the map and double-click to set the dive -location". Upon a double-click at the appropriate place, the green bar -disappears and the coordinates are stored.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The coordinates can be obtained from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if the -user has an Android device with GPS and if the coordinates of the dive site -were stored using that device. <a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more -information</a></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The coordinates can be entered by hand if they are known, using one of four -formats with latitude followed by longitude:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>ISO 6709 Annex D format e.g. 30°13'28.9"N 30°49'1.5"E -Degrees and decimal minutes, e.g. N30° 13.49760' , E30° 49.30788' -Degrees minutes seconds, e.g. N30° 13' 29.8" , E30° 49' 1.5" -Decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 , 30.821798</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Southern hemisphere latitudes are given with a <strong>S</strong>, e.g. S30°, or with a -negative value, e.g. -30.22496. Similarly western longitudes are given with -a <strong>W</strong>, e.g. W07°, or with a negative value, e.g. -7.34323.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Please note that GPS coordinates of a dive site are linked to the Location -name - so adding coordinates to dives that do not have a location -description will cause unexpected behaviour (Subsurface will think that all -of these dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates -the same).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: The name of the dive master or dive guide for this dive can be -entered here. -Again, this field offers auto completion based on the list of dive masters in -the current logbook.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Buddy</strong>: In this field one can enter the name(s) of the buddy / buddies -(separated by commas) who accompanied the user on the dive. Auto completion -is offered based on the list of buddies in the current logbook.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Suit</strong>: The type of diving suit used for the dive can be entered here. -As with the other items, auto completion of the suit description is available. -Some dry-suit users may choose to use this field to record what combination of -suit and thermal protection undersuit was used.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Rating</strong>: One can provide a subjective overall rating of the dive on a -5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star on the rating scale.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Visibility</strong>: Similarly, one can provide a rating of visibility during the -dive on a -5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Tags</strong>: Tags that describe the type of dive performed may -be entered here (separated by commas). Examples of common tags are boat, drift, -training, cave etc. <em>Subsurface</em> has many built-in tags. Auto completion is once again offered. -For instance, if <code>cav</code> was typed, then the tags <strong>cave</strong> and <strong>cavern</strong> are -shown for the user to choose from.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Notes</strong>: Any additional information can be typed here.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Save</strong> and <strong>Cancel</strong> buttons are used to save all the information for -tabs in the info panel and in the dive profile panel, so there’s no need to -use them until ALL other information has been added. Here is an example of a -completed Dive Notes panel:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_equipment">4.1.2. Equipment</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allows the user to enter information about the type of -cylinder and gas used, as well as the weights used for a dive. This is a -highly interactive part of <em>Subsurface</em> and the information on cylinders and -gases (entered here) affects the behaviour of the dive profile (top -right-hand panel).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph" id="S_CylinderData"><p><strong>Cylinders</strong>: The cylinder information is entered through a dialogue that looks -like this:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Gas_dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Initial cylinder dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The + button at the top right allows the user to add more cylinders for this -dive. The dark dustbin icon on the left allows one to delete information -for a particular cylinder. Note that it is not possible to delete a cylinder -if it is used during the dive. One cylinder is implicitly used in the dive, -even without a gas change event. Thus the first cylinder cannot be deleted -until another cylinder is created.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Start by selecting a cylinder type on the left-hand side of the table. To -select a cylinder, click in the <strong>Type</strong> box. This brings up a button that -can be used to display a dropdown list of cylinders:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Gas_dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The cylinder drop-down list button" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can be used to select the cylinder type used for the dive -or the user may start typing in the box which shows the available options -for the entered characters. The <strong>Size</strong> of the cylinder as well as its -working pressure (<strong>WorkPress</strong>) will automatically be shown in the -dialogue. If a cylinder is not shown in the dropdown list, type the name and -description of that cylinder into the <strong>Type</strong> field.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Next, indicate the starting pressure and the ending pressure of the gas used -during the dive. The unit of pressure (metric/imperial) corresponds to the -setting in the <em>Preferences</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, type in the gas mixture used in the <strong>O2%</strong> field. If air was used, a -value of 21% can be entered on this field, or it might be left blank. If -nitrox or trimix were used, their percentages of oxygen and/or helium must -be specified. Any inappropriate fields should be left empty. After typing -the information for the cylinder, press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click -outside the cell that contains the cursor. Information for any additional -cylinders can be added by using the + button at the top right -hand. Following is an example of a complete description for a dive made -using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used during a dive can be entered -using a dialogue very similar to that for the cylinder information. If the user -clicks the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks -like this:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Weights dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If one then clicks on the <strong>Type</strong> field, a drop-down list becomes accessible -through a down-arrow:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Weights type drop-down list button" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the type of weight system or -the user may start typing in the box which shows the available options for -the entered characters. In the <strong>Weight</strong> field, the weight used during the -dive must be typed. After typing the information for the weight system the -user must either press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click outside the cell -that contains the cursor. It is possible to enter information for more than -one weight system by adding an additional system using the + button on the -top right hand. Weight systems can be deleted using the dustbin icon on the -left hand. Here is an example of information for a dive with two types of -weights: integrated and a weight belt:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>There’s NO need to click the <em>Save</em> button before the dive profile has been -completed.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">4.1.3. Creating a Dive Profile</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive Profile</strong> (a graphical representation of the depth of the dive as a -function of time) is indicated in the panel on the top right hand of the -<em>Subsurface</em> window. When a dive is manually added to a logbook, -<em>Subsurface</em> presents a default dive profile that needs to be modified to -best represent the dive being described:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DiveProfile1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Modifying the dive profile</em>: When the cursor is moved around the dive -profile, its position is indicated by two coloured lines (red and green) as -shown below. The depth and time that the cursor represents are indicated at -the top of the black information box (@ and D). The units (metric/imperial) -on the axes are determined by the <strong>Preference</strong> settings. The dive profile -itself comprises several line segments demarcated by waypoints (white dots -on the profile, as shown above). The default dive depth is 15 m. If the -dive depth was 20 m then the user needs to drag the appropriate waypoints -downwards to represent 20 m. To add a waypoint, double-click on any line -segment. To move an additional waypoint, drag it. To remove this waypoint, -right-click on it and choose "Remove this point" from the context menu. The -user needs to drag the waypoints to represent an accurate time duration for -the dive. Below is a dive profile that represents a dive to 20 m for 30 min, -followed by a 5 minute safety stop at 5 m.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DiveProfile2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Edited dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Specifying the gas composition:</em> The gas composition used is clearly -indicated along the line segments of the dive profile. This defaults to the -first gas mixture specified in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab, which was air in the -case of the profile illustrated above. The gas mixtures of segments of the -dive profile can be edited. This is done by right-clicking on the particular -waypoint and selecting the appropriate gas from the context menu. Changing -the gas for a waypoint affects the gas shown in the segment <em>to the left</em> of -that waypoint. Note that only the gases defined in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab -appear in the context menu.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DiveProfile3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Gas composition context menu" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is the profile of a dive to 25 m for 30 min and with a switch from air -to EAN50 at the end of the duration at 20m. In this case the first cylinder -in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab contained air and the second cylinder contained -EAN50.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DiveProfile4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Completed dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_saving_the_hand_entered_dive_information">4.1.4. Saving the hand-entered dive information</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The information entered in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab as well -as the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> can now be saved in the user’s logbook by using the -two buttons on the top right hand of the Dive Notes tab. If the <em>Save</em> -button is clicked, the dive data are saved in the current logbook. If the -<em>Cancel</em> button is clicked, the newly entered dive data are discarded. When -exiting <em>Subsurface</em>, the user will be prompted once more to save the -logbook with the new dive(s).</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_ImportDiveComputer">4.2. Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</h3> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_connecting_and_importing_data_from_a_dive_computer">4.2.1. Connecting and importing data from a dive computer.</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The use of dive computers allows the collection of a large amount of -information about each dive, e.g. a detailed record of depth, duration, -rates of ascent/descent and of gas partial pressures. <em>Subsurface</em> can -capture this information and present it as part of the dive information, -using dive information from a wide range of dive computers. The latest list -of supported dive computers can be found at: -<a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/supported-dive-computers/"> -Supported dive computers</a>.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/warning2.png" alt="Warning" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Several dive computers consume more power when they are in their -PC-Communication mode. <strong>This could drain the dive computer’s battery</strong>. We -therefore recommend that the user checks if the dive computer is charged -when connected to the USB port of a PC. For example, several Suunto and -Mares dive computers do not recharge through the USB connection. Users -should refer to the dive computer’s manual if they are unsure whether the -dive computer recharges its batteries while connected to the USB port.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To import dive information from a dive computer to a computer with -<em>Subsurface</em>, it is necessary that the two pieces of equipment communicate -with one another. This involves setting up the communications port (or -mount point) of the computer with <em>Subsurface</em> that communicates with the -dive computer. In order to set up this communication, one needs to find the -appropriate information to instruct <em>Subsurface</em> where and how to import the -dive information. -<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix -A</a> provides the technical information to help the user achieving this for -different operating systems and -<a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix -B</a> has dive computer specific information.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After this, the dive computer can be hooked up to the user’s PC, which can -be achieved by following these steps:</p></div> -<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> -<li> -<p> -The interface cable should be connected to a free USB port (or the Infra-red - or Bluetooth connection set up as described later in this manual) -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -The dive computer should be placed into PC Communication mode. - (Users should refer to the manual of their specific dive computer) -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In <em>Subsurface</em>, from the Main Menu, the user must select <em>Import → Import -From Dive Computer</em>. Dialogue <strong>A</strong> in the figure below appears:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/ImportFromDC1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download dialogue 1" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive computers tend to keep a certain number of dives in their memory, even -though these dives have already been imported to <em>Subsurface</em>. For that -reason <em>Subsurface</em> only imports dives that have not been uploaded -before. This makes the download process faster on most dive computers and -also saves battery power of the dive computer (at least for those not -charging while connected via USB). If, for some reason, the user wishes to -import ALL dives from the dive computer, even though some may already be in -the logbook, then check the check box labelled <em>Force download of all -dives</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dialogue has two drop-down lists, <strong>Vendor</strong> and <strong>Dive Computer</strong>. On the -<strong>vendor</strong> drop-down list select the make of the computer, e.g. Suunto, -Oceanic, Uwatec, Mares. On the <strong>Dive Computer</strong> drop-down list, the model -name of the dive computer must be selected, e.g. D4 (Suunto), Veo200 -(Oceanic), or Puck (Mares).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Device or Mount Point</strong> drop-down list contains the USB or Bluetooth -port name that <em>Subsurface</em> needs in order to communicate with the dive -computer. The appropriate port name must be selected. Consult -<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix -A</a> and -<a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix -B</a> for technical details on how to find the appropriate port information for -a particular dive computer and, in some cases, how to do the correct -settings to the operating system of the computer on which <em>Subsurface</em> is -running.</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -If all the dives on the dive computer need to be downloaded, check the - checkbox <em>Force download of all dives</em>. Normally, <em>Subsurface</em> only - downloads dives after the date-time of the last dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong> - panel. If one or more of your dives in <em>Subsurface</em> have been accidentally - deleted or if there are older dives that still need to be downloaded from - the dive computer, this checkbox needs to be activated. Some dive computers - (e.g. Mares Puck) do not provide a contents list to <em>Subsurface</em> before the - download in order to select only new dives. Consequently, for these dive - computers, all dives are downloaded irrespective of the status of this check - box. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -If the checkbox <em>Always prefer downloaded dives</em> has been checked and, - during download, dives with identical date-times exist on the dive computer - and on the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, the record in the <em>Subsurface</em> - divelog will be overwritten by the record from the dive computer -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Do <strong>not</strong> check the checkboxes labelled <em>Save libdivecomputer logfile</em> and - <em>Save libdivecomputer dumpfile</em>. These are only used as diagnostic tools - when problems with downloads are experienced (see below). -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>OK</em> button must then be clicked. Dialogue <strong>B</strong> in the figure above -appears.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>With communication established, one can see how the data are retrieved from -the dive computer. Depending on the make of the dive computer and/or number -of recorded dives, this could take some time. The user should be -patient. The <em>Download</em> dialogue shows a progress bar at the bottom of the -dialogue (for some dive computers the progress information could be -inaccurate as we cannot determine how much downloadable data there is until -all data have been downloaded). When the download of the dive information is -complete, all the imported dives appear in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, sorted by date -and time. Disconnect and switch off the dive computer to conserve its -battery power. If a particular dive is selected, the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel -shows an informative graph of dive depth against time for that particular -dive.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If there is a problem in communicating with the dive computer, an error -message will be shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0 -Mares (Puck Pro)". Refer to the text in the box below.</p></div> -<div class="sidebarblock"> -<div class="content"> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>PROBLEMS WITH DATA DOWNLOAD FROM A DIVE COMPUTER?</strong></p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Check the following:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Is the dive computer still in PC-communication or Upload mode?</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Is the battery of the dive computer fully charged? If not then the battery -must be charged or replaced.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Is the connecting cable faulty? Does the cable work perfectly using other -software? Has it worked before, or is this the first time the cable is being -used? Are the contacts on the dive computer and the cable clean?</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Consult -<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix -A</a> and make sure that the correct Mount Point was specified (see above).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>On Unix-like operating systems, does the user have write permission to the -USB port? If not, consult -<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix -A</a></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If the <em>Subsurface</em> computer does not recognise the USB adaptor by showing -an appropriate device name next to the Mount Point, then there is a -possibility that the cable or USB adaptor is faulty. A faulty cable is the -most common cause of communication failure between dive computer and -<em>Subsurface</em> computer. It is also possible that the <em>Subsurface</em> computer -cannot interpret the data. Perform a download for diagnostic purposes with -the following two check boxes checked in the download dialogue discussed -above:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>Save libdivecomputer logfile -Save libdivecomputer dumpfile</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Important</strong>: These check boxes are only used when problems are encountered -during the download process: under normal circumstances they should not be checked. -When checking these boxes, the user is prompted to select a folder to -save the information to. The default folder is the one in which the <em>Subsurface</em> -dive log is kept.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Important:</strong> <em>After downloading with the above checkboxes -checked, no dives are added to the -<strong>Dive List</strong> but two files are created in the folder selected above</em>:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>subsurface.log -subsurface.bin</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>These files should be send to the <em>Subsurface</em> mail list: -<em>subsurface@subsurface-divelog.org</em> with a request for the files to be -analysed. Provide the dive computer make and model as well as contextual -information about the dives recorded on the dive computer.</p></div> -</div></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_DeviceNames">4.2.2. Changing the name of a dive computer</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>It may be necessary to distinguish between different dive computers used to -upload dive logs to <em>Subsurface</em>. For instance if one’s partner’s dive -computer is the same make and model as one’s own and dive logs are uploaded -from both dive computers to the same <em>Subsurface</em> computer, then one would -perhaps like to call one dc "Alice’s Suunto D4" and the other one "Bob’s -Suunto D4". Alternatively, perhaps a technical diver dives with two or more -dive computers of the same model, the logs of both (or all) being uploaded. -In this case it might be prudent to call one of them "Suunto D4 (1)" and -another one "Suunto D4 (2)". This is easily done in <em>Subsurface</em>. On the -<strong>Main Menu</strong>, select <em>Log → Edit device names</em>. A dialog opens, indicating -the current Model, ID and Nickname of the dive computers used for -upload. Edit the Nickname field for the appropriate dive computer. After -saving the Nickname, the dive logs show the nickname for that particular -device instead of the model name, allowing easy identification of devices.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_EditDiveInfo">4.2.3. Updating the dive information imported from the dive computer.</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The information from the dive computer is not complete and more details must -be added in order to have a fuller record of the dives. To do this, the -<strong>Dive Notes</strong> and the <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs on the top left hand of the -<em>Subsurface</em> window should be used.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_dive_notes_2">4.2.4. Dive Notes</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The date and time of the dive, gas mixture and (often) water temperature is -shown as obtained from the dive computer, but the user needs to add -additional information by hand in order to have a more complete dive -record. If the contents of this tab is changed or edited in any way, the -message in a blue box at the top of the panel indicates that the dive is -being edited. If one clicks on the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the following fields -are visible:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/AddDive3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and time of the dive. By clicking the -date, a calendar is displayed from which one can choose the correct -date. Press ESC to close the calendar. The time values (hour and minutes) -can also be edited directly by clicking on each of them in the text box and -by overtyping the information displayed.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Air/water temperatures</strong>: Air and water temperatures during the dive are shown -in these fields to the right of the Start time. Many dive computers supply water -temperature information and this field may therefore contain information obtained from the dive computer. -If air temperature is not provided by the dive computer, the first temperature reading -might be used for the air temperature. Generally this is close enough to the real air temperature as -the change in the temperature sensor reading is quite slow to follow the changes in the environment. -If editing is required, only a value is required, the units of temperature will be -automatically supplied by -<em>Subsurface</em> (according to the <em>Preferences</em>, metric or imperial units will -be used).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Location</strong>: In this field one should type in text that describes the site -where the dive was performed, e.g. "Tihany, Lake Balaton, Hungary". -Auto completion of location names will -make this easier if one frequently dives at the same sites.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Coordinates</strong>: The geographic coordinates of the dive site should be entered -here. These can come from three sources:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The user can find the coordinates on the world map in the bottom right hand -part of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "Move -the map and double-click to set the dive location". Double-click at the -appropriate place, the green bar disappears and the coordinates are stored.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The user can obtain the coordinates from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if -an Android device with GPS was used and if the coordinates of the dive site -were stored using that device. <a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more -information</a></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The coordinates can be entered by hand if they are known, using one of four -formats with latitude followed by longitude:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>ISO 6709 Annex D format e.g. 30°13'28.9"N 30°49'1.5"E -Degrees and decimal minutes, e.g. N30° 13.49760' , E30° 49.30788' -Degrees minutes seconds, e.g. N30° 13' 29.8" , E30° 49' 1.5" -Decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 , 30.821798</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Southern hemisphere latitudes are given with a <strong>S</strong>, e.g. S30°, or with a -negative value, e.g. -30.22496. Similarly, western longitudes are given with -a <strong>W</strong>, e.g. W07°, or with a negative value, e.g. -7.34323.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Please note that GPS coordinates of a dive site are linked to the Location -name - so adding coordinates to dives that do not have a location -description will cause unexpected behaviour (Subsurface will think that all -of these dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates -the same).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: The name of the dive master or dive guide for this dive should be -entered in this field -which offers auto completion based on the list of dive masters in -the current logbook.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Buddy</strong>: In this field, one enters the name(s) of the buddy / buddies -(separated with commas) who accompanied him/her on the -dive. Auto completion based on the list of buddies in the current logbook is -offered.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Suit</strong>: Here the type of diving suit used for the dive can be entered. -Auto completion of the suit description is available. -Some dry-suit users may choose to use this field to record what combination of -suit and thermal protection undersuit was used.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Rating</strong>: One can provide a subjective overall rating of the dive on a -5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star on the rating scale.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Visibility</strong>: Similarly, one can provide a rating of visibility during the -dive on a -5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Tags</strong>: Tags that describe the type of dive performed can be entered -here (separated by commas). Examples of common tags are boat, drift, training, -cave, etc. -<em>Subsurface</em> has many built-in tags. If the user starts typing a tag, the -program -will list the tags that correspond to the typing. For instance, if the user -typed -<code>cav</code>, then the tags <strong>cave</strong> and <strong>cavern</strong> are shown for the user to choose from.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Notes</strong>: Any additional information for the dive can be entered here.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Save</strong> and <strong>Cancel</strong> buttons are used to save all the information for -tabs in the info panel and in the dive profile panel, so there’s no need to -use them until ALL other information has been added. Here is an example of a -completed Dive Notes panel:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_equipment_2">4.2.5. Equipment</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allows one to enter information about the type of cylinder -and gas used as well as the weights used for the dive. The message in a blue -box at the top of the panel:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Blue edit bar" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>indicates that the dive is being edited. This is a highly interactive part -of <em>Subsurface</em> and the information on cylinders and gases (entered here) -determines the behaviour of the dive profile (top right-hand panel).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Cylinders</strong>: The cylinder information is entered through a dialogue that looks -like this:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DC_gas-dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial cylinder dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In most cases <em>Subsurface</em> obtains the gas used from the dive computer and -automatically inserts the gas composition(% oxygen) in the table. The<br /> -button at the top right allows the user to add more cylinders for this -dive. The dark dustbin icon on the left allows the deletion of information -for a cylinder. Note that it is not possible to delete a cylinder if it is -used during the dive. A cylinder might be implicitly used in the dive, even -without a gas change event.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The user should start by selecting a cylinder type on the left-hand side of -the table. To select a cylinder, the <strong>cylinder type</strong> box should be -clicked. This brings up a list button that can be used to display a dropdown -list of cylinders:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DC_gas-dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The cylinder drop-down list button" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the cylinder type that was -used for this dive or the user may start typing in the box which shows the -available options for the entered characters. The <strong>Size</strong> of the cylinder as -well as its working pressure (<strong>WorkPress</strong>) will automatically be shown in -the dialogue.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Next one must indicate the starting pressure and the ending pressure of the -specified gas during the dive. The unit of pressure (metric/imperial) -corresponds to the settings chosen in the <em>Preferences</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, provide the gas mixture used. If air was used, the value of 21% can -be entered or this field can be left blank. If nitrox or trimix were used, -their percentages of oxygen and/or helium should be entered. Any -inappropriate fields should be left empty. After typing the information for -the cylinder, either press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click outside the cell -that contains the cursor. Information for any additional cylinders can be -added by using the + button at the top right hand. Following is an example -of a complete description for a dive using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used can be entered -using a dialogue very similar to that of the cylinder information. If one -clicks -the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks like -this:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The Weights dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>By clicking on the <strong>Type</strong> field, a drop-down list becomes accessible through -a down-arrow:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Weights type drop-down list button" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the type of weight system used -during the dive or the user may start typing in the box which shows the -available options for the entered characters. In the <strong>Weight</strong> field, type -in the amount of weight used during the dive. After specifying the weight -system, the user can either press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click outside -the cell with the cursor. It is possible to enter information for more than -one weight system by adding an additional system using the + button on the -top right hand. Weight systems can be deleted using the dustbin icon on the -left hand. Here is an example of information for a dive with two types of -weights: integrated as well as a weight belt:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_editing_several_selected_dives_simultaneously">4.2.6. Editing several selected dives simultaneously</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>METHOD 1</em>: After uploading dives from a dive computer, the dive profiles of -the uploaded dives are shown in the <strong>Dive profile</strong> tab, as well as a few -items of information in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab (e.g. water temperature) and in -the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab (e.g. gas pressures and gas composition). However the -other fields remain empty. It may be useful to simultaneously edit some of -the fields in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. For instance, it is -possible that a diver performed several dives during a single day, using -identical equipment while diving at the same dive site or with the same dive -master and/or buddy or tags. Instead of completing the information for each -of these dives separately, one can select all the dives for that day in the -<strong>Dive List</strong> and insert the same information in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and -<strong>Equipment</strong> fields that need identical information. This is achieved by -editing the dive notes or the equipment for any one of the selected dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The simultaneous editing only works with fields that do not already contain -information. This means that, if some fields have been edited for a -particular dive among the selected dives, these are not changed while -editing the dives simultaneously. Technically, the rule for editing several -dives simultaneously is: if the data field being edited contains <em>exactly -the same information</em> for all the dives that have been selected, the new, -edited information is substituted for all the selected dives, otherwise only -the edited dive is changed, even though several dives have been selected in -the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This greatly speeds up the completion of the dive log after -several similar dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph" id="S_CopyComponents"><p><em>METHOD 2</em>:There is a different way of achieving the same goal. Select a -dive with all the appropriate information typed into the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and -<strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Copy dive -components</em>. A box is presented with a selection of check boxes for most of -the fields in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. Select the fields to -be copied from the currently selected dive, then select <em>OK</em>. Now, in the -<strong>Dive List</strong>, select the dives into which this information is to be -pasted. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Paste dive components</em>. -All the selected dives now contain the data initially selected in the -original source dive log.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_adding_bookmarks_to_a_dive">4.2.7. Adding Bookmarks to a dive</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers wish to annotate their dives with text that indicate particular -events during the dive, e.g. "Saw dolphins", or "Released surface -buoy". This is easily done:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Right-click at the appropriate point on the dive profile. This brings up -the dive profile context menu. Select <em>Add bookmark</em>. A red flag is placed -on the dive profile at the point that was initially selected (see <strong>A</strong> -below).</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Right-click on the red flag. This brings up the context menu (see <strong>B</strong> - below). Select <em>Edit name</em>. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>A text box is shown. Type the explanatory text for the bookmark (see <strong>C</strong> -below). Select <em>OK</em>. This saves the text associated with the bookmark.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If one hovers using the mouse over the red bookmark, the appropriate text is -shown at the bottom of the information box (see <strong>D</strong> below).</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Bookmarks.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Bookmark dialog" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_saving_the_updated_dive_information">4.2.8. Saving the updated dive information</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The information entered in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab and the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab can -be saved by using the two buttons on the top right hand of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> -tab. If the <em>Save</em> button is clicked, the dive data are saved. If the -<em>Cancel</em> button is clicked, then the newly entered dive data are deleted, -although the dive profile obtained from the dive computer will be -retained. When the user exits <em>Subsurface</em> there is a final prompt to -confirm that the new data should be saved.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_importing_dive_information_from_other_digital_data_sources_or_other_data_formats">4.3. Importing dive information from other digital data sources or other data formats</h3> -<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>If a user has been diving for some time, it is possible that several dives -were logged using other dive log software. This information does not need -retyping because these dive logs can probably be imported into -<em>Subsurface</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> will import dive logs from a range of other dive -log software. While some software is supported natively, for others the user -has to export the logbook(s) to an intermediate format so that they can then -be imported by <em>Subsurface</em>. Currently, <em>Subsurface</em> supports importing CSV -log files from several sources. APD LogViewer, XP5, Sensus and Seabear -files are preconfigured, but because the import is flexible, users can -configure their own imports. Manually kept log files (e.g. in spreadsheet) -can also be imported by configuring the CSV import. <em>Subsurface</em> can also -import UDDF and UDCF files used by some divelog software and some dive -computers, like the Heinrichs & Weikamp DR5. Finally, for some divelog -software like Mares Dive Organiser it is currently suggested to import the -logbooks first into a webservice like <em>divelogs.de</em> and then import them -from there with <em>Subsurface</em>, as divelogs.de supports a few additional -logbook formats that <em>Subsurface</em> currently cannot parse.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If the format of other software is supported natively on Subsurface, it -should be sufficient to select either <em>Import→Import log files</em> or -<em>File→Open log file</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> supports the data formats of many dive -computers, including Suunto and Shearwater. When importing dives, -<em>Subsurface</em> tries to detect multiple records for the same dive and merges -the information as best as it can. If there are no time zone issues (or -other reasons that would cause the beginning time of the dives to be -significantly different) <em>Subsurface</em> will not create duplicate entries.</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_using_the_universal_import_dialogue">4.3.1. Using the universal import dialogue</h4> -<div class="paragraph" id="Unified_import"><p>Importing dives from other software is performed through a universal -interface that is activated by selecting <em>Import</em> from the Main Menu, then -clicking on <em>Import Log Files</em>. This brings up the dialogue <strong>A</strong> below.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Import1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Import dialogue: step 1" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Towards the bottom right is a dropdown selector with a default label of -<em>Dive Log Files</em> which gives access to the different types of direct imports -available, as in dialogue <strong>B</strong>, above. Currently these are:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -XML-formatted dive logs (DivingLog 5.0, MacDive and several other dive log - systems) -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -UDDF-formatted dive logs (e.g. Kenozoooid) -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -UDCF-formatted dive logs -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Poseidon MkVI CCR logs -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -JDiveLog -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Suunto Dive Manager (DM3 and DM4) -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -CSV (text-based and spreadsheet-based) dive logs, including APD CCR logs -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the appropriate file in the file list of the dialogue opens the -imported dive log in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong>. Some other formats, not -accessible through the Import dialogue are also supported, as explained -below.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_importing_dive_logs_from_closed_circuit_rebreather_ccr_systems">4.3.2. Importing dive logs from closed circuit rebreather (CCR) systems</h4> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/APD.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Closed system rebreathers use advanced technology to recirculate gas that -has been breathed while doing two things to maintain a breathable oxygen -concentration: -a) remove carbon dioxide from the gas that has been exhaled -regulate the oxygen concentration to remain within safe diving limits. -Currently, within <em>Subsurface</em>, the Poseidon MkVI Discovery is the best -supported CCR dive computer. The CCR interface of <em>Subsurface</em> is currently -experimental and under active development. In contrast to a conventional -open circuit dive computer, a CCR system computer does not allow the -download of a log containing multiple dives. Rather, each dive is stored -independently. This means that <em>Subsurface</em> cannot download a dive log -directly from a CCR dive computer, but that it imports CCR dive logs in the -same way that it imports dive log data from other databases.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_import_a_ccr_dive">Import a CCR dive</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>See the section dealing with <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive -information from other digital sources</a>. From the main menu of <em>Subsurface</em>, -select <em>Import→Import log files</em> to bring up the -<a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>. As explained in the previous -section, the bottom right hand of the import dialogue contains a dropdown -list of appropriate devices that currently includes an option for MkVI -files. Having selected the appropriate CCR format and the directory where -the original dive logs have been stored from the CCR dive computer, one can -select a particular dive log file (in the case of the MkVI it is a file with -a .txt extension). After selecting the appropriate dive log, activate the -<em>Open</em> button at the bottom right hand of the universal import dialogue.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_displayed_information_for_a_dive">Displayed information for a dive</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Partial pressures of gases</em>: The graph of oxygen partial pressure shows the -information from the oxygen sensors of the CCR equipment. In the case of the -Poseidon MKVI, the mean value of the two oxygen sensors are shown. In the -case of the APD equipment, the mean of the three oxygen sensors are -shown. If one sensor shows a very different oxygen PO2 reading compared to -the others, the divergent sensor is ignored. For CCR dives the graph for -oxygen partial pressure should be fairly flat, reflecting the setpoint -settings during the dive. Partial pressures for nitrogen (and helium, if -applicable) are shown in the usual way as for other dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Cylinder pressures</em>: CCR dive computers like the Poseidon MkVI record the -pressures of the oxygen and diluent cylinders. The pressure of the oxygen -cylinder is shown on the dive profile. In addition, start and end pressures -for both oxygen and diluent cylinders are shown in the <em>Equipment Tab</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Equipment-specific information</em>: Equipment-specific information gathered by -<em>Subsurface</em> is shown in the <em>Extra data</em> tab. This may include setup -information or metadata about the dive.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>More equipment-specific information for downloading CCR dive logs can be -found in <a href="#S_PoseidonMkVI">Appendix B</a>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_importing_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">4.3.3. Importing from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Since Mares utilise proprietary Windows software not compatible with -multi-platform applications, these dive logs cannot be directly imported -into <em>Subsurface</em>. Mares dive logs need to be imported using a three-step -process, using <em>www.divelogs.de</em> as a mechanism to extract the dive log -information.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive log data from Mares Dive Organiser need to be exported to the user’s -desktop, using - a <em>.sdf</em> file name extension. Refer to <a href="#Mares_Export">Appendix C</a> for more -information. -Data should then be imported into <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. One needs to create a user -account in -<em>www.divelogs.de</em>, log into that web site, then -select <em>Import Logbook → Dive Organiser</em> from the menu on the left hand side. -The instructions must be carefully followed to transfer the dive information -(in <em>.sdf</em> format) from the Dive Organiser database to <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. -Finally, import the dives -from <em>divelogs.de</em> to <em>Subsurface</em>, using the instructions below.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">4.3.4. Importing dives from <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The import of dive information from <em>divelogs.de</em> is simple, using a single -dialogue box. The <em>Import→Import form Divelogs.de</em> option should be -selected from the Main Menu. This brings up a dialogue box (see figure on -left [<strong>A</strong>] below). Enter a user-ID and password for <em>divelogs.de</em> into the -appropriate fields and then select the <em>Download</em> button. Download from -<em>divelogs.de</em> starts immediately, displaying a progress bar in the dialogue -box. At the end of the download, the success status is indicated (see figure -on the right [<strong>B</strong>], below). The <em>Apply</em> button should then be selected, -after which the imported dives appear in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Divelogs1.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Download from Divelogs.de" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVData">4.3.5. Importing data in CSV format</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>A comma-separated file (.csv) can be used to import dive information either -as dive profiles (as in the case of the APD Inspiration and Evolution closed -circuit rebreathers) or as dive metadata (in case the user keeps dive data -in a spreadsheet). For an introduction to CSV-formatted files see -<a href="#S_CSV_Intro">A Diver’s Introduction To CSV Files</a>.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" /> -</td> -<td class="content">The CSV import has a couple of caveats. You should avoid some special -characters like ampersand (&), less than (<), greater than (>) and double -quotes ("), the latter if quoting text cells. The file should use UTF-8 -character set, if having non-ASCII characters. Also the size of the CSV file -might cause problems. Importing 100 dives at a time (without dive profile) -has worked previously, but larger files might exceed limits of the parser -used. When having problems with CSV imports, try first with a smaller sample -to make sure everything works.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive computers or other dive log software</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>CSV files are normally organised into a single line that provides the -headers (or <em>field names</em>) of the data columns, followed by the data, one -record per line. CSV files can be opened with a normal text editor. For -information of how to export a spreadsheet in CSV format see -<a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</a>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Before being able to import the data to <em>Subsurface</em> one needs to know:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Which character separates the different columns within a single line of -data? This field separator should be either a comma (,) or a TAB character. -This can be determined by opening the file with a text editor. If it is -comma-delimited, then the comma characters between the values are clearly -visible. If no commas are evident and the numbers are aligned in columns, -the file is probably TAB-delimited (i.e. it uses a TAB as a field separator, -as in the above example).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Which data columns need to be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>? The Dive Time and -Depth columns are always required. Open the file using a text editor and -note the titles of the columns to be imported and their column positions.</p></div> -<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha"> -<li> -<p> -Is the numeric information (e.g. dive depth) in metric or in imperial unis? -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Armed with this information, importing the data into <em>Subsurface</em> is -straightforward. Select <em>Import→Import Log Files</em> from the main menu. In -the resulting file selection menu, select <em>CSV files</em>, after which a common -configuration dialog appears for all the files with a CSV extension:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Import_CSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV download dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>There are pre-configured definitions for some dive computers, e.g. the APD -rebreathers. If the user’s dive computer is on this list, it should be -selected using the dropdown box labeled <em>Pre-configured imports</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If the dive computer is not on the pre-configured list, the user must select -the <em>Field Separator</em> (TAB or comma) for the particular CSV file, using the -appropriate dropdown list. For each data column used for import, the user -must check the appropriate check box and indicate in which column these data -are found.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally <em>OK</em> should be clicked and the dive(s) are imported and listed in -the <strong>Dive List</strong> tab of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_ImportingManualCSV">4.3.6. Importing dives from a manually kept CSV file or a spreadsheet</h4> -<div class="sidebarblock" id="S_CSV_Intro"> -<div class="content"> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>A Diver’s Introduction To CSV Files</strong></p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" /> -</td> -<td class="content">CSV is an abbreviation for a data file format: <em>Comma-Separated -Variables</em>. It is a file format allowing someone to view or edit the -information using a text editor such as Notebook (Windows), gedit (Linux) or -TextWrangler (OS/X). The two main advantages of the CSV format is that the -data are easily editable as text without any proprietary software and -ensuring all information is human-readable, not being obscured by the any -custom or proprietary attributes that proprietary software insert into -files. Because of its simplicity the CSV format is used as an interchange -format between many software packages, e.g. between spreadsheet, -statistical, graphics, database and diving software. Within <em>Subsurface</em>, -CSV files can also be used to import information from other sources such as -spreadsheet-based dive logs and even from some dive computers.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>CSV files can be created or edited with a normal text editor. The most -important attribute of a CSV file is the <em>field separator</em>, the character -used to separate fields within a single line. The field separator is -frequently a comma, a colon, a SPACE character or a TAB character. When -exporting data from spreadsheet software, the field separator needs to be -specified in order to create the CSV file. CSV files are normally organised -into a single line that provides the headers (or <em>field names</em>) of the data -columns, followed by the data, one record per line. Note that each field -name may comprise more than one word separated by spaces; for instance <em>Dive -site</em>, below. Here is an example of dive information for four dives using a -comma as a field separator:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>Dive site,Dive date,Time,Dive_duration, Dive_depth,Dive buddy -Illovo Beach,2012-11-23,10:45,46:15,18.4,John Smith -Key Largo,2012-11-24,09:12,34:15,20.4,Jason McDonald -Wismar Baltic,2012-12-01,10:13,35:27,15.4,Dieter Albrecht -Pulau Weh,2012-12-20,09:46,55:56,38.6,Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In this format the data are not easily read by a human. Here is the same -information in TAB-delimited format:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>Dive site Dive date Time Dive_duration Dive_depth Dive buddy -Illovo Beach 2012-11-23 10:45 46:15 18.4 John Smith -Key Largo 2012-11-24 09:12 34:15 20.4 Jason McDonald -Wismar Baltic 2012-12-01 10:13 35:27 15.4 Dieter Albrecht -Pulau Weh 2012-12-20 09:46 55:56 38.6 Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>It is clear why many people prefer the TAB-delimited format to the -comma-delimited format. The disadvantage is that one cannot see the TAB -characters. For instance, the space between <em>Dive</em> and <em>date</em> in the top -line may be a SPACE character or a TAB character (in this case it is a SPACE -character: the tabs are before and after <em>Dive date</em>). If the field names in -the first line are long, the alignment with data in the other lines cannot -be maintained. Here is a highly simplified and shortened TAB-delimited -example of a CSV dive log from an APD closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive -computer:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>Dive Time (s) Depth (m) pO₂ - Setpoint (Bar) pO₂ - C1 Cell 1 (Bar) Ambient temp. (Celsius) -0 0.0 0.70 0.81 13.1 -0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1 -0 0.0 0.70 0.71 13.1 -0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.2 -0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1 -10 1.6 0.70 0.72 12.7 -20 1.6 0.70 0.71 12.6 -30 1.7 0.70 0.71 12.6 -40 1.8 0.70 0.68 12.5</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>CSV files can therefore be used in many contexts for importing data into a -<em>Subsurface</em> dive log.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>An important aspect of the CSV format required by <em>Subsurface</em> is the -<em>Column Mapping</em>. In the example from different dive sites above, each line -of data is organised as follows:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>Column 1: Dive site (location) -Column 2: Dive date -Column 3: Dive time -Column 4: Dive duration -Column 5: Maximum dive depth (m) -Column 6: Name of dive buddy</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> requires the column number of each of these data items. For -these data the column specification may look like this:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/CSV_column_definition.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV column definition" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Knowledge of a few basic things about he content of the CSV file allows a -smooth import of the dives into <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If one keeps dive logs in a spreadsheet, there is an option to import those -dives, exported as a CSV file. See <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a -spreadsheet to CSV format</a> for information of how to export a spreadsheet in -CSV format. When importing manually kept log files into <em>Subsurface</em>, the -information needed is quite different from that accessible using a dive -computer, as we are importing only summary data, not depth profile samples.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>When importing dives in CSV format (see above), one needs to know the -internal format of the CSV data to import.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Which character separates the different columns within a single line of -data? A recommended field separator for the export is TAB, as commas might -be part of the decimal data values themselves. Therefore the use of an -appropriate field separator is very important. When exporting data from a -spreadsheet it is likely to request the user to supply an appropriate field -separator character.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Which columns need to be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>? Currently there are not -any mandatory input fields, but some, e.g. dive duration are crucial for the -log file to make any sense. Possible options can be seen in the image below -and one should include as many as possible of the fields available in the -original log file.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Units used for depth, weight and temperature. We consider depth to be either -feet or meters, weight kilograms or pounds and temperature either Celsius or -Fahrenheit. However, the users can select <em>Metric</em> or <em>Imperial</em> in the -<strong>Preferences</strong> tab of <em>Subsurface</em>. No mixture of unit systems is allowed for -the different fields.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Importing manually kept CSV log files is quite straight forward, but there -might be many fields and counting the field numbers is error -prone. Therefore validation of the data to be imported is critical.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To import the dives, select <em>Import→Import Log Files</em> from the menu bar. If -the CSV option in the dropdown list is selected and the file list includes -file names ending with .CSV, one can select the <em>Manual dives</em> tab that will -bring up the following configuration dialog:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Import_CSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download dialog for Manual CSV logs" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Check the check boxes corresponding to the data in the original import -file. For each of the checked data items, a corresponding column number -needs to be entered. For instance in the image above, the name of the dive -site (i.e. location) is located as the 11th item (or column) on each line -of the CSV import file. The input fields can be configured as appropriate, -and when everything is done the <em>OK</em> button should be selected to perform -the import. New dives should appear in the <strong>Dive List</strong> area of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_Companion">4.4. Importing GPS coordinates with the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> for mobile phones</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the <strong>Subsurface Companion App</strong> on an Android device with a GPS, the -coordinates for the diving location can be automatically passed to the -<em>Subsurface</em> dive log. The Companion App stores the dive locations on a -dedicated Internet-based file server. <em>Subsurface</em>, in turn, can collect the -localities from the file server.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To do this:</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_create_a_companion_app_account">4.4.1. Create a Companion App account</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Register on the <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web -page</em></a>. A confirmation email with instructions and a personal <strong>DIVERID</strong> -will be sent, a long number that gives access to the file server and -Companion App capabilities.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Download the app from -<a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.subsurface">Google Play -Store</a> or from -<a href="http://f-droid.org/repository/browse/?fdfilter=subsurface&fdid=org.subsurface">F-Droid</a>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_using_the_subsurface_companion_app_on_a_smartphone">4.4.2. Using the Subsurface companion app on a smartphone</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>On first use the app has three options:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Create a new account.</em> Equivalent to registering in <em>Subsurface</em> companion -page using an Internet browser. One can request a <strong>DIVERID</strong> using this -option, but this is supplied via email and followed up by interaction with -the <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web page</em></a> in order -to activate the account.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Retrieve an account.</em> If users forgot their <strong>DIVERID</strong> they will receive an -email to recover the number.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Use an existing account.</em> Users are prompted for their <strong>DIVERID</strong>. The app -saves this <strong>DIVERID</strong> and does not ask for it again unless one uses the -<em>Disconnect</em> menu option (see below).</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" /> -</td> -<td class="content">In the <em>Subsurface</em> main program, the <strong>DIVERID</strong> should also be entered on -the Default Preferences panel, obtained by selecting -<em>File→Preferences→Defaults</em> from the main menu in <em>Subsurface</em> itself. -This facilitates synchronisation between <em>Subsurface</em> and the Companion App.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_creating_new_dive_locations">Creating new dive locations</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Now one is ready to get a dive position and send it to the server. The -Android display will look like the left hand image (<strong>A</strong>) below, but without -any dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Touch the "+" icon on the top right to add a new dive site, a menu will be -showed with 3 options:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Current: A prompt for a place name (or a request to activate the GPS if it -is turned off) will be displayed, after which the current location is saved.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Use Map: This option allows the user to fix a position by searching a world -map. A world map is shown (see <strong>B</strong> below) on which one should indicate the -desired position with a <em>long press</em> on the touch sensitive screen (if the -marked location is erroneous, simply indicate a new location) and select -the check symbol in the upper right. A dialog is shown allowing to enter the -name of the dive location and the date-time of the dive (see <strong>C</strong> below). In -order to import this dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> it’s advisable to set the -time to agree with the time of that dive on the dive computer.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Companion_5.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Companion App, add location using map" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Import local GPX file: The android device searches for .gpx files and -located archives will be shown. The selected .gpx file is opened and the -stored locations shown. Now one needs to select the appropriate locations, -then select the tab in the upper right, after which the locations will be -sent to the web service and added to the list on the Android device.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_dive_lists_of_dive_locations">Dive lists of dive locations</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The main screen shows a list of dive locations, each with a name, date and -time (see <strong>A</strong> below). Some locations may have an arrow-up icon over the -selection box to the left indicating that they require upload to the -server. One can select individual dive locations from the list. A selected -location has a check mark in the selection box on the left. Group operations -(such as <em>Delete</em> or <em>Send</em>) are performed on several locations that are -selected.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive locations in this list can be viewed in two ways: a list of locations -or a map indicating the dive locations. The display mode (List or Map) is -changed by selecting <em>Dives</em> at the top left of the screen (see <strong>A</strong> below) -and then selecting the display mode. The display mode can be changed either -from the list of locations or from the map (see <strong>B</strong> below). If one selects a -location (on the list or on the map), an editing panel opens (see <strong>C</strong> below) -where the dive description or other details may be changed.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Companion_4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Companion App, add location using map" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>When one clicks on a dive (<strong>not</strong> selecting the check box), the name given to -it, date/time and GPS coordinates will be shown, with two options at the top -of the screen:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Edit (pencil): Change the text name or other characteristics of the dive - location. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Maps: Display a map showing the dive location. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After editing and saving a dive location (see <strong>C</strong> above), one needs to -upload it to the web service, as explained below.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_uploading_dive_locations">Uploading dive locations</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several ways to send locations to the server. The easiest is by -simply selecting the locations (See <strong>A</strong> below) and then touching the right -arrow at the top right of the screen.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Users must be careful, as the trash icon on the right means exactly what it -should; it deletes the selected dive location(s).</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Companion_1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Screen shots (A-B) of companion app" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After a dive trip using the Companion App, all dive locations are ready to -be downloaded to a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log (see below).</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_settings_on_the_companion_app">Settings on the Companion app</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the <em>Settings</em> menu option results in the right hand image above -(<strong>B</strong>).</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_server_and_account">Server and account</h5> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<em>Web-service URL.</em> This is predefined (<a href="http://api.hohndel.org/">http://api.hohndel.org/</a>) -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>User ID.</em> The DIVERID obtained by registering as described above. The -easiest way to obtain it is simply to copy and paste from the confirmation -email but, of course, users can also type this information.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_synchronisation">Synchronisation</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Synchronize on startup.</em> If selected, dive locations in the Android device -and those on the web service synchronise each time the app is started.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Upload new dives.</em> If selected, each time the user adds a dive location it -is automatically sent to the server.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_background_service">Background service</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Instead of entering a unique dive location, users can leave the service -running in the background of their Android device, allowing the continuous -collection of GPS locations.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The settings below define the behaviour of the service:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Min duration.</em> In minutes. The app will try to get a location every X -minutes until stopped by the user.</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<em>Min distance.</em> In meters. Minimum distance between two locations. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<em>Name template.</em> The name the app will use when saving the locations. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/info.jpg" alt="Tip" /> -</td> -<td class="content"><em>How does the background service work?</em> Assuming the user sets 5 minutes and -50 meters in the settings above, the app will start by recording a location -at the current location, followed by another one at every 5 minutes <strong>or</strong> -every time one moves 50m from previous location. If subsequent locations -are within a radius of 50 meters from the previous one, a new location is -not saved. If the user is not moving, only one location is saved, but if the -user is moving, a trace of the route is obtained by saving a location every -50 meters.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_other">Other</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Mailing List.</em> The mail box for <em>Subsurface</em>. Users can send an email to -the Subsurface mailing list.</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<em>Subsurface website.</em> A link to the URL of Subsurface web -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<em>Version.</em> Displays the current version of the Companion App. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_search">Search</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Search the saved dive locations by name or by date and time.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_start_service">Start service</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Initiates the <em>background service</em> following the previously defined -settings.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_disconnect">Disconnect</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This is a badly named option that disconnects the app from the server by -resetting the user ID in the app, showing the first screen where an account -can be created, retrieve the ID for an existing account or use the users own -ID. The disconnect option is useful if a user’s Android device was used to -download the dive locations of another registered diver.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect4"> -<h5 id="_send_all_locations">Send all locations</h5> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This option sends all locations stored in the Android device to the server.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_downloading_dive_locations_to_the_em_subsurface_em_divelog">4.4.3. Downloading dive locations to the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Download dive(s) from a dive computer or enter them manually into -<em>Subsurface</em> before obtaining the GPS coordinates from the server. The -download dialog can be reached via <em>Ctrl+G</em> or from the <em>Subsurface</em> Main -Menu <em>Import → Import GPS data from Subsurface Service</em>, resulting in the -image on the left (<strong>A</strong>), below. On first use the DIVERID text box is -blank. Provide a DIVERID, then select the <em>Download</em> button to initiate the -download process, after which the screen on the right (<strong>B</strong>) below appears:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DownloadGPS.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Downloading Companion app GPS data" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that the <em>Apply</em> button is now active. By clicking on it, users can -update the locations of the newly entered or uploaded dives in <em>Subsurface</em> -which applies the coordinates and names entered on the app for all the new -dives that match the date-times of the uploaded GPS localities. If one has -entered the name of the dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> before downloading the -GPS coordinates, this name will take precedence over downloaded one.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Since <em>Subsurface</em> matches GPS locations from the Android device and dive -information from the dive computer based on date-time data, automatic -assignment of GPS data to dives is dependent on agreement of the date-time -information between these two devices. Although <em>Subsurface</em> has a wide -range tolerance, it may be unable to identify the appropriate dive if there -is a large difference between the time in the dive computer and that of the -Android device, resulting in no updates.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Similar date-times may not always be possible and there may be many reasons -for this (e.g. time zones), or <em>Subsurface</em> may be unable to decide which is -the correct position for a dive (e.g. on repetitive dives while running -<em>background service</em> there may be several locations that would be included -in the time range that fit not only the first dive, but one or more -subsequent dives as well). A workaround for this situation to manually edit -the date-time of a dive in the <em>Subsurface</em> Dive List <strong>before</strong> downloading -the GPS data and then to change the date-time back again <strong>after</strong> downloading -GPS data.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/info.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">TIPS:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Background service</em>, being a very powerful tool, may fill the location list -with many unnecessary locations not corresponding to the exact dive point -but reflecting the boat’s route. Currently these locations are difficult to -delete from the server. In some situations it is therefore prudent to clean -up the list on the Android device before sending the dive points to the web -server by simply deleting the inappropriate locations. This might be -necessary, for instance, if one wants to keep the location list clear to see -dives in the web service map display (see above).</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>It may also make sense to give informative names to the locations sent to -the web server, or at least to use an informative name in the <em>Name -Template</em> setting while running the <em>background service</em>, especially on a -dive trip with many dives and dive locations.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_LoadImage">4.5. Adding photographs to dives</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Many (if not most) divers take a camera with them and take photographs -during a dive. One would like to associate each photograph with a specific -dive. <em>Subsurface</em> allows one to load photos into a dive. Photos are -superimposed on the dive profile, from where they can be viewed.</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_loading_photos_and_getting_synchronisation_between_dive_computer_and_camera">4.5.1. Loading photos and getting synchronisation between dive computer and camera</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Left-lick on a dive or on a group of dives on the dive list. Then -right-click on this dive or group of dives and choose the option <em>Load -Images</em>:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LoadImage1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The system file browser appears. Select the folder and photographs that need -to be loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and click the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LoadImage2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This brings one to the time synchronisation dialog, shown below. The -critical problem is that the time synchronisation is not perfect between the -dive computer used during a dive, and the camera used during that same -dive. These two devices often differ by several minutes. If <em>Subsurface</em> can -achieve synchronisation, then the exact times of photographs can be used to -position photographs on the dive profile.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> achieves this synchronisation in two ways:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Manually</strong>: If the user wrote down the exact camera time at the start of a dive, the -difference in time between the two devices can be determined. Actually, as long as the device -settings for time has not been changed in either device, one could write down the times of -both devices after the dive or even at the end of the day. One can then manually set the time -difference in the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. Towards the top of the dialog is a time setting tool -immediately under the heading <em>Shift times of image(s) by</em>, evident in figure <strong>A</strong> below. -If the camera time is 7 minutes later than that of the dive computer, set the time setting -tool to a value of 00:07. Select either the <em>earlier</em> or <em>later</em> radio button. -In the above example, the <em>earlier</em> option is appropriate, since the photos need to be shifted -7 minutes earlier (camera is 7 minutes ahead of dive computer). Ignore any "AM" or "PM" suffix -in that tool. Click the <em>OK</em> button and synchronisation is achieved.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LoadImage3b_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronisation dialog" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>By photograph</strong>: There is a very slick way of achieving synchronisation. If one takes a -photograph of the face of the dive computer showing the time, then <em>Subsurface</em> can obtain -the exact time the photograph was taken, using the metadata that the camera stores within -each photo. In order to do this, use the bottom half of the Time shift_ dialog. If one uses -the bottom part, the top part of the dialog is ignored. Click on -the horizontal bar entitled "<em>Select image of divecomputer showing time</em>. This brings up -a file browser with which one can select the photograph of the dive computer. Select the -photograph using the file browser and click on <em>OK</em>. This photograph of the dive computer -appears in the bottom panel of the <em>Shift times</em> dialog. Now <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly -when the photograph has been taken. Now set the date-time dialog to the left of the photo -so that this tool reflects the date and time of the dive computer in the photo. When the -date-time tool has been set, <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly what the time difference between -camera and dive computer is, and synchronisation is achieved. There is a -photograph with the face of the dive computer and with the date-time tool set to the -date-time on image <strong>B</strong> above.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If the timestamp of a photograph is long before or after the dive, it is not -placed on the dive profile. If the timestamp of the photo is within 30 -minutes of the dive, it is shown.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_viewing_the_photos">4.5.2. Viewing the photos</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In order to view the photos added to a dive, activate the <em>show-photos</em> -button in the tool bar to the left of the dive profile:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:left;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos_f20.png" alt="FIGURE:Show photos toolbar button" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After the images have been loaded, they appear in two places:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -the <em>Photos</em> tab of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -as tiny icons (stubs) on the dive profile at the appropriate positions - reflecting the time each photograph was taken. See below: -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LoadImage4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Photos on dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If one hovers with the mouse over any of the photo icons, then a thumbnail -photo is shown of the appropriate photo. See the image below:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LoadImage5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Thumbnail photo on dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Clicking on the thumbnail brings up a full size photo overlaid on the -<em>Subsurface</em> window. This allows good viewing of the photographs that have -been added (see the image below). Note that the thumbnail has a small -dustbin icon in the bottom right hand corner (see image above). If one -selects the dustbin, the image is removed from the dive. Therefore some care -is required when clicking on a thumbnail. Images can also be deleted using -the <em>Photos</em> tab (see text below).</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LoadImage6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Full-screen photo on dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_the_em_photos_em_tab">4.5.3. The <em>Photos</em> tab</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Photographs associated with a dive are shown as thumbnails in the <em>Photos</em> -tab of the <em>Dive Notes</em> panel. Photos taken in rapid succession during a -dive (therefore sometimes with large overlap on the dive profile) can easily -be accessed in the <em>Photos</em> tab. This tab serves as a tool for individually -accessing the photos of a dive, while the stubs on the dive profile give an -indication of when during a dive a photo was taken. By single-clicking on a -thumbnail in the <em>Photos</em> panel, a photo is selected. By double-clicking a -thumbnail, the full-sized image is shown, overlaying the <em>Subsurface</em> -window. A photo can be deleted from the <em>Photos</em> panel by selecting it -(single-click) and then by pressing the <em>Del</em> key on the keyboard. This -removes the photo both from the <em>Photos</em> tab as well as the dive profile.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_photos_on_an_external_hard_disk">4.5.4. Photos on an external hard disk</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Most underwater photographers store their photos on an external drive. If -such a drive can be mapped (almost always the case) the photos can be -directly accessed by <em>Subsurface</em>. This facilitates the interaction between -<em>Subsurface</em> and an external repository of photos. When associating a dive -profile with photos from an external drive, the normal procedure of -selection and synchronisation (see text above) is used. However, after the -external drive has been disconnected, <em>Subsurface</em> cannot access these -photos any more. If the display of photos is activated (using the toolbox -to the left of the <em>Dive Profile</em>), the program only shows a small white dot -where each photo should be on the dive profile. In addition the <em>Photos</em> -tab only shows the file names of the photos. This is normal behaviour. If, -later, the external drive with the photos is connected again, the photos can -be seen in the normal way.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_logging_special_types_of_dives">4.6. Logging special types of dives</h3> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_sidemount_dives">4.6.1. Sidemount dives</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> easily handles dives involving more than one -cylinder. Sidemount dive logging involves three steps:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>During the dive, recording cylinder switch events</strong>. Since sidemount diving normally involves two -cylinders with air or with the same gas mixture, <em>Subsurface</em> distinguishes among these different -cylinders. In contrast, most dive computers that allow gas switching only distinguish among different -<em>gases</em> used, not among different <em>cylinders</em> used. This means that when sidemount dives are downloaded -from these dive computers, the events of switching between cylinders with the same gas are not downloaded. This may mean -that one may have to keep a written log of cylinder switch times using a slate, or (if the dive computer -has this facility) marking each cylinder switch with a bookmark that can be retrieved later. Returning -from a dive with the information about cylinder changes is the only tricky part of logging sidemount dives. -<strong>Within <em>Subsurface</em> describe the cylinders used during the dive</strong>. The diver needs to provide the -specifications of the different cylinders, using the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Info Panel</strong> (see -image below where two 12 litre cylinder were used). -<strong>Indicate cylinder change events on the <em>Subsurface</em> dive profile</strong>. Once the dive log has been imported -from a dive computer into <em>Subsurface</em>, the cylinder switch events need to be indicated on the dive profile. -Cylinder changes are recorded by right-clicking at the appropriate point on the dive profile and then -selecting <em>Add gas change</em>. A list of the appropriate cylinders is shown with the -currently used cylinder greyed out. In the image below Tank 1 is greyed out, leaving only Tank 2 -to be selected. Select the appropriate cylinder. The cylinder change is then indicated on the dive -profile with a cylinder symbol. If the <strong>Tank Bar</strong> is activated using the toolbar to the left of the -profile, then the cylinder change is also indicated on the Tank Bar (see image below). After all -the cylinder change events have been recorded on the dive profile, the correct cylinder pressures -for both cylinders are shown on the dive profile, as inthe image below.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/sidemount1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Sidemount profile" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_obtaining_more_information_about_dives_entered_into_the_logbook">5. Obtaining more information about dives entered into the logbook</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_strong_dive_info_strong_tab_for_individual_dives">5.1. The <strong>Dive Info</strong> tab (for individual dives)</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The Dive Info tab gives some summary information about a particular dive -that has been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Useful information here includes -the surface interval before the dive, the maximum and mean depths of the -dive, the gas volume consumed, the surface air consumption (SAC) and the -number of oxygen toxicity units (OTU) incurred.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/info.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Gas consumption and SAC calculations: <em>Subsurface</em> calculates SAC and Gas -consumption taking in account gas incompressibility, particularly at tank -pressures above 200 bar, making them more accurate. Users should refer to -<a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Appendix D</a> for more information.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_strong_extra_data_strong_tab_usually_for_individual_dives">5.2. The <strong>Extra Data</strong> tab (usually for individual dives)</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>When using a dive computer, it often reports several data items that cannot -easily be presented in a standardised way because the nature of the -information differs from one dive computer to another. These data often -comprise setup information, metadata about a dive, battery levels, no fly -times, or gradient factors used during the dive. When possible, this -information is presented in the <strong>Extra Data</strong> tab. Below is an image showing -extra data for a dive using a Poseidon rebreather.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/ExtraDataTab_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Extra Data tab" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_strong_stats_strong_tab_for_groups_of_dives">5.3. The <strong>Stats</strong> tab (for groups of dives)</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The Stats tab gives summary statistics for more than one dive, assuming that -more than one dive has been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong> using the standard -Ctrl-click or Shift-click of the mouse. If only one dive has been selected, -figures pertaining to only that dive are given. This tab shows the number of -dives selected, the total amount of dive time in these dives, as well as the -minimum, maximum and mean for the dive duration, water temperature and -surface air consumption (SAC). It also shows the depth of the shallowest and -deepest dives of those selected.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">5.4. The <strong>Dive Profile</strong></h3> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Profile2.jpg" alt="Typical dive profile" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Of all the panels in <em>Subsurface</em>, the Dive Profile contains the most -detailed information about each dive. The Dive Profile has a <strong>button bar</strong> on -the left hand side that allows control over several display options. The -functions of these buttons are described below. The main item in the Dive -Profile is the graph of dive depth as a function of time. In addition to the -obvious information of the depth it also shows the ascent and descent rates -compared to the recommended speed of going up or down in the water -column. This information is given using different colours:</p></div> -<div class="tableblock"> -<table rules="all" -width="100%" -frame="border" -cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4"> -<col width="33%" /> -<col width="33%" /> -<col width="33%" /> -<tbody> -<tr> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table"><strong>Colour</strong></p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table"><strong>Descent speed (m/min)</strong></p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table"><strong>Ascent speed (m/min)</strong></p></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Red</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">> 30</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">> 18</p></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Orange</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">18 - 30</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">9 - 18</p></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Yellow</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">9 - 18</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">4 - 9</p></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Light green</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">1.5 - 9</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">1.5 - 4</p></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Dark green</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">< 1.5</p></td> -<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">< 1.5</p></td> -</tr> -</tbody> -</table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The profile also includes depth readings for the peaks and troughs in the -graph. Thus, users should see the depth of the deepest point and other -peaks. Mean depth is marked with a horizontal red line.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/scale.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">In some cases the dive profile does not fill the whole area of the <strong>Dive -Profile</strong> panel. Clicking the <strong>Scale</strong> button in the toolbar on the left of -the dive profile frequently increases the size of the dive profile to fill -the area of the panel efficiently.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Water temperature</strong> is displayed with its own blue line with temperature values -placed adjacent to significant changes.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive profile can include graphs of the <strong>partial pressures</strong> of O2, N2, -and He during the dive (see figure above) as well as a calculated and dive -computer reported deco ceilings (only visible for deep, long, or repetitive -dives). Partial pressures of oxygen are indicated in green, those of -nitrogen in black, and those of helium in dark red. These partial pressure -graphs are shown below the profile data.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/O2.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>oxygen</strong> -during the dive. This is depicted below the dive depth and water temperature -graphs.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/N2.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>nitrogen</strong> -during the dive.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/He.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>helium</strong> -during the dive. This is only of importance to divers using Trimix, -Helitrox or similar breathing gasses.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>air consumption</strong> graph displays the tank pressure and its change during -the dive. The air consumption takes depth into account so that even when -manually entering the start and end pressures the graph is not a straight -line. Similarly to the depth graph the slope of the tank pressure gives the -user information about the momentary SAC rate (Surface Air Consumption) when -using an air integrated dive computer. Here the colour coding is not -relative to some absolute values but relative to the average normalised air -consumption during the dive. So areas that are red or orange indicate times -of increased normalized air consumption while dark green reflects times when -the diver was using less gas than average.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/Heartbutton.png" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking on the heart rate button will allow the display of heart rate -information during the dive if the dive computer was attached to a heart -rate sensor.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>It is possible to <strong>zoom</strong> into the profile graph. This is done either by using -the scroll wheel / scroll gesture of your mouse or trackpad. By default -<em>Subsurface</em> always shows a profile area large enough for at least 30 minutes -and 30m - (100ft) – this way short or shallow dives are intuitively recognizable; -something -that free divers clearly won’t care about.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/MeasuringBar.png" alt="FIGURE: Measuring Bar" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/ruler.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Measurements of <strong>depth or time differences</strong> can be achieved by using the -<strong>ruler button</strong> on the left of the dive profile panel. The measurement is -done by dragging the red dots to the two points on the dive profile that the -user wishes to measure. Information is then given in the horizontal white -area underneath the two red dots.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos.png" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Photographs that have been added to a dive can be shown on the profile by -selecting the <strong>Show-photo</strong> button. The position of a photo on the profile -indicates the exact time when this photo was taken. If this button is not -active, the photos are hidden.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The profile can also include the dive computer reported <strong>ceiling</strong> (more -precisely, the deepest deco stop that the dive computer calculated for each -particular moment in time) as a red overlay on the dive profile. Ascent -ceilings arise when a direct ascent to the surface increases the risk of a -diver suffering from decompression sickness (DCS) and it is necessary to -either ascend slower or to perform decompression stop(s) before ascending to -the surface. Not all dive computers record this information and make it -available for download; for example all of the Suunto dive computers fail to -make this very useful data available to divelog software. <em>Subsurface</em> also -calculates ceilings independently, shown as a green overlay on the dive -profile. Because of the differences in algorithms used and amount of data -available (and other factors taken into consideration at the time of the -calculation) it is unlikely that ceilings from dive computers and from -<em>Subsurface</em> are the same, even if the same algorithm and <em>gradient factors</em> -(see below) are used. It is also quite common that <em>Subsurface</em> calculates -a ceiling for non-decompression dives when the dive computer stayed in -non-deco mode during the whole dive (represented by the <span class="green">dark green</span> -section in the profile at the beginning of this section). This is caused by -the fact that <em>Subsurface’s</em> calculations describe the deco obligation at -each moment during a dive, while dive computers usually take the upcoming -ascent into account. During the ascent some excess nitrogen (and possibly -helium) are already breathed off so even though the diver technically -encountered a ceiling at depth, the dive still does not require an explicit -deco stop. This feature allows dive computers to offer longer non-stop -bottom times.</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/cceiling.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">If the dive computer itself calculates a ceiling and makes it available to -<em>Subsurface</em> during upload of dives, this can be shown as a red area by -checking <strong>Dive computer reported ceiling</strong> button on the Profile Panel.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/ceiling1.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">If the <strong>Calculated ceiling</strong> button on the Profile Panel is clicked, then a -ceiling, calculated by <em>Subsurface</em>, is shown in green if it exists for a -particular dive (<strong>A</strong> in figure below). This setting can be modified in two -ways:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/ceiling2.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">If, in addition, the <strong>show all tissues</strong> button on the Profile Panel is -clicked, the ceiling is shown for the tissue compartments following the -Bühlmann model (<strong>B</strong> in figure below).</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/ceiling3.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">If, in addition, the <strong>3m increments</strong> button on the Profile Panel is clicked, -then the ceiling is indicated in 3 m increments (<strong>C</strong> in figure below).</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Ceilings2.jpg" alt="Figure: Ceiling with 3m resolution" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/ShowCylindersButton.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">By selecting this icon, the different cylinders used during a dive can be -represented as a coloured bar at the bottom of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. In -general oxygen is represented by a green bar, nitrogen with a yellow bar and -helium with a red bar. The image below shows a dive which first uses a -trimix cylinder (red and green), followed by a switch to a nitrox cylinder -(yellow and green) after 23 minutes. Cylinders with air are shown as a light -blue bar.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/ShowCylinders_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Cylinder use graph" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Display inert gas tissue pressures relative to ambient inert gas pressure -(horizontal grey line). Tissue pressures are calculated using the Bühlmann -ZH-L16 algorithm and are displayed as lines ranging from green (faster -tissues) to blue (slower tissues). The black line, graphed above the -ambient pressure, is the maximum allowable tissue supersaturation (pressure -limit) derived from the gradient factors specified in the <strong>Preferences</strong>. For -divers involved in planned decompression diving, efficient rates of -offgasing are obtained with tissue pressures between the ambient inert gas -pressure (grey line) and the pressure limit (black line). This display is a -representation of the tissue pressures during the whole dive. In contast, -the <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gas Pressure Graph</a> in the <strong>Information Box</strong> -on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> is an instantaneous reflection of tissue pressures at -the moment in time reflected by the position of the cursor on the dive -profile.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/tissuesGraph.jpg" alt="Figure: Inert gas tissue pressure graph" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their -depths. For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on -<a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>. The currently -used gradient factors (e.g. GF 35/75) are shown above the depth profile if -the appropriate toolbar buttons are activated. <strong>N.B.:</strong> The indicated -gradient factors are NOT the gradient factors in use by the dive computer, -but those used by <em>Subsurface</em> to calculate deco obligations during the -dive. For more information external to this manual see:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a> -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_dive_profile_context_menu">5.5. The Dive Profile context menu</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu for the Dive Profile is accessed by right-clicking while -the mouse cursor is over the Dive Profile panel. The menu allows the -creation of Bookmarks or Gas Change Event markers or manual CCR set-point -changes other than the ones that might have been imported from a Dive -Computer. Markers are placed against the depth profile line and with the -time of the event set by where the mouse cursor was when the right mouse -button was initially clicked to bring up the menu. Gas Change events involve -a selection of which gas is being switched to, the list of choices being -based on the available gases defined in the Equipment Tab. Set-point change -events open a dialog allowing to choose the next set-point value. As in the -planner, a set-point value of zero indicates the diver is breathing from an -open circuit system while any non-zero value indicates the use of a closed -circuit rebreather (CCR). By right-clicking while over an existing marker a -menu appears, adding options to allow deletion of the marker or to allow all -markers of that type to be hidden. Hidden events can be restored to view by -selecting Unhide all events from the context menu.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_strong_information_box_strong">5.6. The <strong>Information Box</strong></h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The Information box displays a large range of information pertaining to the -dive profile. Normally the Information Box is located to the top left of the -<strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. If the mouse points outside of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> -panel, then only the top line of the Information Box is visible (see -left-hand part of figure (<strong>A</strong>) below). The Information Box can be moved -around in the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel by click-dragging it with the mouse so -that it is not obstructing important detail. The position of the Information -Box is saved and used again during subsequent dive analyses.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/InfoBox2.jpg" alt="Figure: Information Box" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The moment the mouse points inside the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, the information -box expands and shows many data items. In this situation, the data reflect -the time point along the dive profile indicated by the mouse cursor (see -right-hand part of figure (<strong>B</strong>) above where the Information Box reflects the -situation at the position of the cursor [arrow] in that image). Therefore, -moving the cursor in the horizontal direction allows the Information Box to -show information for any point along the dive profile. In this mode, the -Information Box gives extensive statistics about depth, gas and ceiling -characteristics of the particular dive. These include: Time period into the -dive (indicated by a @), depth, cylinder pressure (P), temperature, -ascent/descent rate, surface air consumption (SAC), oxygen partial pressure, -maximum operating depth, equivalent air depth (EAD), equivalent narcotic -depth (END), equivalent air density depth (EADD), decompression requirements -at that instant in time (Deco), time to surface (TTS), the calculated -ceiling, as well as the calculated ceiling for several Bühlmann tissue -compartments.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The user has control over the display of several statistics, represented as -four buttons on the left of the profile panel. These are:</p></div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/MOD.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>Maximum -Operating Depth (MOD)</strong> of the dive, given the gas mixture used. MOD is -dependent on the oxygen concentration in the breathing gas. For air (21% -oxygen) it is around 57 m. Below the MOD there is a markedly increased risk -of exposure to the dangers associated with oxygen toxicity.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/NDL.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>No-deco -Limit (NDL)</strong> or the <strong>Total Time to Surface (TTS)</strong>. NDL is the time duration -that a diver can continue with a dive, given the present depth, that does -not require decompression (that is, before an ascent ceiling appears). Once -one has exceeded the NDL and decompression is required (that is, there is an -ascent ceiling above the diver, then TTS gives the number of minutes -required before the diver can surface. TTS includes ascent time as well as -decompression time.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/SAC.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>Surface Air -Consumption (SAC)</strong>. SAC is an indication of the surface-normalised -respiration rate of a diver. The value of SAC is less than the real -respiration rate because a diver at 10m uses breathing gas at a rate roughly -double that of the equivalent rate at the surface. SAC gives an indication -of breathing gas consumption rate independent of the depth of the dive so -that the respiratory rates of different dives can be compared. The units for -SAC is litres/min or cub ft/min.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/EAD.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Clicking this button displays the <strong>Equivalent Air Depth (EAD)</strong> for nitrox -dives as well as the <strong>Equivalent Narcotic Depth (END)</strong> for trimix -dives. These are numbers of importance to divers who use breathing gases -other than air. Their values are dependent on the composition of the -breathing gas. The EAD is the depth of a hypothetical air dive that has the -same partial pressure of nitrogen as the current depth of the nitrox dive at -hand. A nitrox dive leads to the same decompression obligation as an air -dive to the depth equalling the EAD. The END is the depth of a hypothetical -air dive that has the same sum of partial pressures of the narcotic gases -nitrogen and oxygen as the current trimix dive. A trimix diver can expect -the same narcotic effect as a diver breathing air diving at a depth -equalling the END.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Figure (<strong>B</strong>) above shows an information box with a nearly complete set of -data.</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">5.6.1. The Gas Pressure Bar Graph</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>On the left of the <strong>Information Box</strong> is a vertical bar graph indicating the -pressures of the nitrogen (and other inert gases, e.g. helium, if -applicable) that the diver was inhaling <em>at a particular instant during the -dive</em>, indicated by the position of the cursor on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The -drawing on the left below indicates the meaning of the different parts of -the Gas Pressure Bar Graph.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Gas Pressure bar Graph" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The light green area indicates the total gas, with the top margin of the -light green area indicating the total gas pressure inhaled by the diver and -measured from the bottom of the graph to the top of the light green -area. This pressure has a <em>relative</em> value in the graph and does not -indicate absolute pressure.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The horizontal black line underneath the light green margin indicates the -equilibrium pressure of the inert gases inhaled by the diver, usually -nitrogen. In the case of trimix, it is the pressures of nitrogen and helium -combined. In this example, the user is diving with EAN32, so the inert gas -pressure is 68% of the distance from the bottom of the graph to the total -gas pressure value.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dark green area at the bottom of the graph represents the pressures of -inert gas in each of the 16 tissue compartments, following the Bühlmann -algorithm, the fast tissues being on the left hand side.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The top black horizontal line indicates the gradient factor that applies to -the depth of the diver at the particular point on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The -appropriate gradient factor is an interpolation between the FGLow and GFHigh -values specified in the Graph tab of the <strong>Preferences Panel</strong> of -<strong>Subsurface</strong>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The bottom margin of the red area in the graph indicates the Bühlman-derived -M-value, that is the pressure value of inert gases at which bubble formation -is expected to be severe, resulting in decompression sickness.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>These five values are indicated on the left in the graph above. The way the -Gas Pressure Bar Graph changes during a dive is indicated on the right hand -side of the above figure for a diver using EAN32.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Graph <strong>A</strong> indicates the situation at the start of a dive with diver at the -surface. The pressures in all the tissue compartments are still at the -equilibrium pressure because no diving has taken place.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Graph <strong>B</strong> indicates the situation after a descent to 30 meters. Few of the -tissue compartments have had time to respond to the descent, their gas -pressures being far below the equilibrium gas pressure.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Graph <strong>C</strong> represents the pressures after 30 minutes at 30 m. The fast -compartments have attained equilibrium (i.e. they have reached the hight of -the black line indicating the equilibrium pressure). The slower compartments -(towards the right) have not reached equilibrium and are in the process of -slowly increasing in pressure.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Graph <strong>D</strong> shows the pressures after ascent to a depth of 4.5 meters. Since, -during ascent, the total inhaled gas pressure has decreased strongly from 4 -bar to 1.45 bar, the pressures in the different tissue compartments now -exceed that of the total gas pressure and approaches the gradient factor -value (i.e. the top black horizontal line). Further ascent will result in -exceeding the gradient factor value (GFHigh), endangering the diver.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Graph <strong>E</strong> indicates the situation after remaining at 4.5 meters for 10 -minutes. The fast compartments have decreased in pressure. As expected, the -pressures in the slow compartments have not changed much. The pressures in -the fast compartments do not approach the GFHigh value any more and the -diver is safer than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_organising_the_logbook_manipulating_groups_of_dives">6. Organising the logbook (Manipulating groups of dives)</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_dive_list_context_menu">6.1. The Dive List context menu</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Many actions within <em>Subsurface</em> are dependent on a context menu used mostly -to manipulate groups of dives. The context menu is found by selecting a dive -or a group of dives and then right-clicking.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/ContextMenu.jpg" alt="Figure: Context Menu" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu is used in many manipulations described below.</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_customising_the_information_showed_in_the_strong_dive_list_strong_panel">6.1.1. Customising the information showed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel</h4> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DiveListOptions.jpg" alt="Example: Dive list info options" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The default information in the <strong>Dive List</strong> includes, for each dive, -Dive_number, Date, Rating, Dive_depth, Dive_duration and Dive_location. This -information can be controlled and changed by right-clicking on the header -bar of the <strong>Dive List</strong>. For instance, a right-click on the <em>Date</em> header -brings up a list of items that can be shown in the dive list (see -above). Select an item to be shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> or to be deleted from -the dive list, and the list is immediately updated accordingly. Preferences -for information shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> is saved and used when <em>Subsurface</em> -is re-opened.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_selecting_dives_from_a_particular_dive_site">6.1.2. Selecting dives from a particular dive site</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers have long dive lists and it may be difficult to locate all the -dives at a particular site. By pressing <em>Ctl-F</em> on the keyboard, a text box -is opened at the top left hand of the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Type the name of a dive -site in this text box and the <strong>Dive List</strong> is immediately filtered to show -only the dives for that site.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_Renumber">6.2. Renumbering the dives</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives are normally numbered incrementally from non-recent dives (low -sequence numbers) to recent dives (having the highest sequence numbers). The -numbering of the dives is not always consistent. For instance, when -non-recent dives are added to the dive list the numbering does not -automatically follow on because of the dives that are more recent in -date/time than the newly-added dive with an older date/time. Therefore, one -may sometimes need to renumber the dives. This is performed by selecting -(from the Main Menu) <em>Log → Renumber</em>. Users are given a choice with -respect to the lowest sequence number to be used. Completing this operation -results in new sequence numbers (based on date/time) for the dives in the -<strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_Group">6.3. Grouping dives into trips and manipulating trips</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For regular divers, the dive list can rapidly become very long. <em>Subsurface</em> -can group dives into <em>trips</em>. It performs this by grouping dives that have -date/times that are not separated in time by more than two days, thus -creating a single heading for each diving trip represented in the dive -log. Below is an ungrouped dive list (<strong>A</strong>, on the left) as well as the -corresponding grouped dive list comprising five dive trips (<strong>B</strong>, on the -right):</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Group2.jpg" alt="Figure: Grouping dives" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Grouping into trips allows a rapid way of accessing individual dives without -having to scan a long lists of dives. In order to group the dives in a dive -list, (from the Main Menu) users must select <em>Log → Autogroup</em>. The <strong>Dive -List</strong> panel now shows only the titles for the trips.</p></div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_editing_the_title_and_associated_information_for_a_particular_trip">6.3.1. Editing the title and associated information for a particular trip</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, in the dive list, minimal information is included in the trip -title. More information about a trip can be added by selecting its trip -title from the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This shows a <strong>Trip Notes</strong> tab in the <strong>Dive -Notes</strong> panel. Here users can add or edit information about the date/time, -the trip location and any other general comments about the trip as a whole -(e.g. the dive company that was dived with, the general weather and surface -conditions during the trip, etc.). After entering this information, users -should select <strong>Save</strong> from the buttons at the top right of the <strong>Trip Notes</strong> -tab. The trip title in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel should now reflect some of the -edited information.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_viewing_the_dives_during_a_particular_trip">6.3.2. Viewing the dives during a particular trip</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dives have been grouped into trips, users can expand one or more -trips by clicking the arrow-head on the left of each trip title. This -expands the selected trip, revealing the individual dives performed during -the trip.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_collapsing_or_expanding_dive_information_for_different_trips">6.3.3. Collapsing or expanding dive information for different trips</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If a user right-clicks after selecting a particular trip in the dive list, -the resulting context menu allows several possibilities to expand or -collapse dives within trips. This includes expanding all trips, collapsing -all trips and collapsing all trips except the selected one.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_merging_dives_from_more_than_one_trip_into_a_single_trip">6.3.4. Merging dives from more than one trip into a single trip</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>By right-clicking on a selected trip title in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, a -context menu shows up that allows the merging of trips by either merging of -the selected trip with the trip below or with the trip above.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_splitting_a_single_trip_into_more_than_one_trip">6.3.5. Splitting a single trip into more than one trip</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If a trip includes five dives, the user can split this trip into two trips -(trip 1: top 3 dives; trip 2: bottom 2 dives) by selecting and -right-clicking the top three dives. The resulting context menu allows the -user to create a new trip by choosing the option <strong>Create new trip -above</strong>. The top three dives are then grouped into a separate trip. The -figures below shows the selection and context menu on the left (A) and the -completed action on the right (B):</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/SplitDive3a.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Split a trip into 2 trips" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_manipulating_single_dives">6.4. Manipulating single dives</h3> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_delete_a_dive_from_the_dive_log">6.4.1. Delete a dive from the dive log</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives can be permanently deleted from the dive log by selecting and -right-clicking them to bring up the context menu, and then selecting <strong>Delete -dive(s)</strong>. Typically this would apply to a case where a user wishes to delete -workshop calibration dives of the dive computer or dives of extremely short -duration.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_unlink_a_dive_from_a_trip">6.4.2. Unlink a dive from a trip</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Users can unlink dives from the trip to which they belong. In order to do -this, select and right-click the relevant dives to bring up the context -menu. Then select the option <strong>Remove dive(s) from trip</strong>. The dive(s) now -appear immediately above the trip to which they belonged.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_add_a_dive_to_the_trip_immediately_above">6.4.3. Add a dive to the trip immediately above</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Selected dives can be moved from the trip to which they belong and placed -within the trip immediately above the currently active trip. To do this, -select and right-click the dive(s) to bring up the context menu, and then -select <strong>Add dive(s) to trip immediately above</strong>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_shift_the_start_time_of_dive_s">6.4.4. Shift the start time of dive(s)</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the start time of a dive. This may apply -to situations where dives are performed in different time zones or when the -dive computer has an erroneous time. In order to do this, user must select -and right-click the dive(s) to be adjusted. This action brings up the -context menu on which the <strong>Shift times</strong> option should be selected. User must -then specify the time (in hours and minutes) by which the dives should be -adjusted and click on the option indicating whether the time adjustment -should be forwards or backwards.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect3"> -<h4 id="_merge_dives_into_a_single_dive">6.4.5. Merge dives into a single dive</h4> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes a dive is briefly interrupted, e.g. if a diver returns to the -surface for a few minutes, resulting in two or more dives being recorded by -the dive computer and appearing as different dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> -panel. Users can merge these dives onto a single dive by selecting the -appropriate dives, right-clicking them to bring up the context menu and then -selecting <strong>Merge selected dives</strong>. It may be necessary to edit the dive -information in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel to reflect events or conditions that -apply to the merged dive. The figure below shows the depth profile of two -such dives that were merged:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/MergedDive.png" alt="Example: Merged dive" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_Filter">6.5. Filtering the dive list</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel can be filtered, that is, one can select -only some of the dives based on their attributes, e.g. dive tags, dive site, -dive master, buddy or protective clothing. For instance, filtering allows -one to list the deep dives at a particular dive site, or otherwise the cave -dives with a particular buddy.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To open the filter, select <em>Log → Filter divelist</em> from the main menu. This -opens the <em>Filter Panel</em> at the top of the <em>Subsurface</em> window. Three icons -are located at the top right hand of the filter panel. The <em>Filter Panel</em> -can be reset (i.e. all current filters cleared) by selecting the <strong>+</strong>. The -<em>Filter Panel</em> may also be minimised by selecting the middle icon. When -minimised, only these three icons are shown. The panel can be maximised by -clicking the icon that minimised the panel. The filter may also be reset and -closed by selecting the button with the flag. An example of the <em>Filter -Panel</em> is shown in the figure below.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Filterpanel.jpg" alt="Figure: Filter panel" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Four filter criteria may be used to filter the dive list: dive tags, person -(buddy / dive master), dive site and dive suit, each of which is represented -by a check list with check boxes. Above each check list is a second-level -filter tool, allowing the listing of only some of the attributes within that -check list. For instance, typing "<em>ca</em>" in the filter textbox above the tags -check list results in the tags check list being reduced to "<em>cave</em>" and -"<em>cavern</em>". Filtering of the check list enables the rapid finding of search -terms for filtering the dive list.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To activate filtering of the dive list, the check box of at least one item -in one of the four check lists needs to be checked. The dive list is then -shortened to include only the dives that pertain to the selection criteria -specified in the check lists. The four check lists work as a filter with -<em>AND</em> operators, Subsurface filters therefore for <em>cave</em> as a tag AND <em>Joe -Smith</em> as a buddy; but the filters within a category are inclusive - -filtering for <em>cave</em> and <em>boat</em> shows those dives that have either one or -both of these tags.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_ExportLog">7. Exporting the dive log or parts of the dive log</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The export function can be reached by selecting <em>File → Export</em>, which -brings up the Export dialog. This dialog always gives two options: save ALL -dives, or save only the dives selected in <strong>Dive List</strong> panel of -<em>Subsurface</em>. Click the appropriate radio button (see images below).</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Export.jpg" alt="Figure: Export dialog" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>A dive log or part of it can be saved in three formats:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<em>Subsurface XML</em> format. This is the native format used by <em>Subsurface</em>. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Universal Dive Data Format (<em>UDDF</em>). Refer to <em>http://uddf.org</em> for more -information. UDDF is a generic format that enables communication among many -dive computers and computer programs.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Divelogs.de</em>, an Internet-based dive log repository. In order to upload to -<em>Divelogs.de</em>, one needs a user-ID as well as a password for -<em>Divelogs.de</em>. Log into <em>http://en.divelogs.de</em> and subscribe to this -service in order to upload dive log data from <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>CSV</em> format, that includes the most critical information of the dive -profile. Included information of a dive is: dive number, date, time, -duration, depth, temperature and pressure.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Worldmap</em> format, an HTML file with a world map upon which each dive and -some information about it are indicated. This map is not editable.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>HTML</em> format, in which the dive(s) are stored in HTML files, readable with -an Internet browser. Most modern web browsers are supported, but JavaScript -must be enabled. This generated HTML file is not intended to be edited by -the users. The HTML dive log contains most of the information and also -contains a search option to search the dive log. HTML export is specified on -the second tab of the Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above).</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<em>General Settings</em>, under the HTML tab, provides the following options: -</p> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Subsurface Numbers: if this option is checked, the dive(s) are exported with the -numbers associated with them in Subsurface, Otherwise the dive(s) will be numbered -starting from 1. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Export Yearly Statistics: if this option is checked, a yearly statistics table will -be attached with the HTML exports. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Export List only: a list of dives will only be exported and the detailed dive -information will not be available. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Under <em>Style Options</em> some style-related options are available like font -size and theme.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Export to other formats can be achieved through third party facilities, for -instance <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">8. Keeping a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log in the Cloud</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For each diver, dive log information is highly important. Not only is it a -record of diving activities for one’s own pleasure, but it is important -information required for admission to further training courses or -(sometimes) even diving sites. The security of the dive log is therefore -critical. In order to have a dive log that is resistant to failure of a home -computer hard drive, loss or theft of equipment, the Cloud is an obvious -solution. This also has the added benefit that one can access one’s dive log -from anywhere in the world without having to carry it with oneself. For this -reason, facilities such as <em>divelogs.de</em> and <em>Diving Log</em> offer facilities -to store dive log information on the Internet. Although <em>Subsurface</em> does -not offer integrated Cloud storage of dive logs, it is simple to achieve -this using several of the existing facilities on the Internet.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For instance <a href="http://www.dropbox.com/"><em>Dropbox</em></a> offers a free application -that allows files on the Dropbox servers to be seen as a local folder on -one’s desktop computer.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Cloud.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Dropbox folder" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Dropbox</em> program creates a copy of the <em>Dropbox</em> Internet Cloud content -on one’s desktop computer. When the computer is connected to the Internet, -the Internet content is automatically updated. Therefore both the <em>Open</em> and -<em>Save</em> of dive logs are done using the local copy of the dive log in the -local <em>Dropbox</em> folder, so there’s no need for a direct internet -connection. If the local copy is modified, e.g. by adding a dive, the remote -copy in the <em>Dropbox</em> server in the Cloud will be automatically updated -whenever Internet access is available.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In this way a dive log in one’s <em>Dropbox</em> folder can be accessed seamlessly -from the Internet and can be accessed from any place with Internet -access. Currently there are no costs involved for this service. Dropbox -(Windows, Mac and Linux) can be installed by accessing the -<a href="http://www.dropbox.com/install"><em>Install Page on the Dropbox website</em></a> -Alternatively one can use <em>Dropbox</em> as a mechanism to backup one’s dive -log. To Store a dive log in the Cloud, select <em>File→Save as</em> from the -<em>Subsurface</em> main menu, navigate to the <em>Dropbox</em> folder and select the -<em>Save</em> button. To access the dive log in the Cloud, select <em>File→Open -Logbook</em> from the <em>Subsurface</em> main menu and navigate to the dive log file -in the <em>Dropbox</em> folder and select the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Several paid services exist on the Internet (e.g. Google, Amazon) where the -same process could be used for the Cloud-based storage of dive logs.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">9. Printing a dive log</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> provides a simple interface to print a whole dive log or only a -few selected dives, including dive profiles and other contextual -information.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Before printing, two decisions are required:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Should the whole dive log be printed or only part of it? If only part of the -dive log is required, then the user must select the required dives from the -<strong>Dive List</strong> panel. -What gas partial pressure information is required on the dive profile? Users -should select the appropriate toggle-buttons on the button bar to the left -of the Dive Profile panel.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Now the print options should be selected to match the user’s needs. To do -this, user should select <em>File→Print</em> from the Main menu. The following -dialogue appears (see the image on the left [A], below).</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/PrintDiveLog.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Print dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Under <em>Print type</em> users need to select one of three options:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Print the complete Dive List: to do this, <em>Table Print</em> should be selected. -Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 6 -dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>6 dives per page</em>. -Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 2 -dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>2 dives per page</em>. -Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 1 dive -per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>1 dive per page</em>. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Under <em>Print options</em> users need to select:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Printing only the dives that have been selected from the dive list prior to -activating the print dialogue, achieved by checking the box <em>Print only -selected dives</em>. -- Printing in colour, achieved by checking the box with <em>Print in colour</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Ordering</em> affects the layout of the page (or part of it) for each -dive. The dive profile could be printed at the top of each dive, with the -textual information underneath, or it could be printed with the textual -information at the top with the dive profile underneath. Users should select -the appropriate option in the print dialogue. See the image below which has -a layout with text below the dive profile.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Users can <em>Preview</em> the printed page by selecting the <em>Preview</em> button on -the dialogue. After preview, changes to the options in the print dialogue -can be made, resulting in a layout that fits personal taste.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Next, select the <em>Print</em> button in the dialogue. This activates the regular -print dialogue used by the user operating system (image [<strong>B</strong>] in the middle, -above), allowing them to choose a printer and to set its properties (image -[<strong>C</strong>] on the right, above). It is important to set the print resolution of -the printer to an appropriate value by changing the printer -properties. Finally, one can print the dives. Below is a (rather small) -example of the output for one particular page.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Printpreview.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Print preview page" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_Preferences">10. Setting user <em>Preferences</em> for <em>Subsurface</em></h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings within <em>Subsurface</em> that the user can -specify. These are found when selecting <em>File→Preferences</em>. The settings -are performed in five groups: <strong>Defaults</strong>, <strong>Units</strong>, <strong>Graph</strong>, <strong>Language</strong> and -<strong>Network</strong>. All five sections operate on the same principles: the user must -specify the settings that are to be changed, then these changes are saved -using the <strong>Apply</strong> button. After applying all the new settings users can then -leave the settings panel by selecting <strong>OK</strong>.</p></div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_defaults">10.1. Defaults</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings in the <strong>Defaults</strong> panel:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Pref1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences defaults page" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Lists and tables</strong>: Here one can specify the font type and font size of the -<strong>Dive Table</strong> panel. By decreasing the font size of the <strong>Dive Table</strong>, users can see more dives on a screen. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Dives</strong>: For the <em>Default Dive File</em> one need to specify the directory and -file name of one’s -electronic dive log book. This is a file with filename extension .xml. When -launched, <em>Subsurface</em> will automatically load the specified dive log book. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Display invalid</strong>: Dives can be marked as invalid (when a user wishes to hide -dives that he/she don’t consider valid dives, e.g. pool dives, but still want to -keep them in the dive log). This controls whether those dives are displayed in -the dive list. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Default cylinder</strong>: Here users can specify the default cylinder listed in -the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Animations</strong>: Some actions in showing the dive profile are performed using -animations. For instance, the axis values for depth and time change from dive to -dive. When viewing a different dive, these changes in axis characteristics do not -happen instantaneously, but are animated. The <em>Speed</em> of animations can be controlled -by setting this slider -with faster animation speed to the left, with a 0 value representing no animation -at all. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Subsurface web service</strong>: When one subscribes to the <a href="#S_Companion">Subsurface web service</a>, a very -long and hard-to-remember userID is issued. This is the place to save that userID. By -checking the option <em>Save User ID locally?</em>, one ensures that a local copy of that userID -is saved. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Clear all settings</strong>: As indicated in the button below this heading, all settings are -cleared and set to default values. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_units">10.2. Units</h3> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Pref2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Units page" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Here user can choose between metric and imperial units of depth, pressure, -volume, temperature and mass. By selecting the Metric or Imperial radio -button at the top, users can specify that all units are in the chosen -measurement system. Alternatively, if one selects the <strong>Personalise</strong> radio -button, units can be selected independently, with some units in the metric -system and others in imperial.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_graph">10.3. Graph</h3> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Pref3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Graph page" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph" id="S_GradientFactors"><p>This panel allows two type of selections:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Show</strong>: Here users can specify the amount of information shown as part of -the dive profile: -<strong>* Thresholds: <em>Subsurface</em> can display the nitrogen, oxygen and the helium partial pressures during -the dive. These are enabled using the toolbar on the left hand side of the *Dive Profile</strong> -panel. For each of these graphs users can specify a threshold value on the right-hand side of the -Preferences panel. If any of the graphs go above this threshold level, the graph is -highlighted in red, indicating that the threshold has been exceeded.</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<em>Draw dive computer reported ceiling red</em>: This checkbox allows exactly what it says. -Not all dive computers report ceiling values. If the dive computer does report it, it may differ -from the ceilings calculated by <em>Subsurface</em>. This is because of the different algorithms and gradient factors available for calculating ceilings, as well as the dynamic way that a -dive computer can calculate ceilings during a dive. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<em>Show unused cylinders in Equipment Tab</em>: This checkbox allows display of information about unused cylinders when viewing the <strong>Equipment Tab</strong>. Conversely, if this box is not checked, and any cylinders entered using the <strong>Equipment Tab</strong> are not used (e.g. there was no gas switch to such a cylinder), then these cylinders are omitted from that list. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<em>Show average depth</em>: Activating this checkbox causes <em>Subsurface</em> to draw a red line across -the dive profile, indicating the mean depth of the dive. -</p> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Misc</strong>: -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Gradient Factors:* Here users can set the <em>gradient factors</em> used while diving. GF_Low is -the gradient factor at depth and GF_High is used just below the surface. -At intermediate depths gradient factors between GF_Low and GF_High are used. -Gradient factors add conservatism to the nitrogen exposure during a dive, in a -similar way that many dive computers have a conservatism setting. The lower -the value of a gradient factor, the more conservative the calculations are with -respect to nitrogen loading and the deeper the ascent ceilings are. Gradient -factors of 20/60 are considered conservative and values of 60/90 are considered -harsh. Checking <strong>GFLow at max depth</strong> box causes GF_Low to be used at the -deepest depth of a dive. If this box is not checked, GF_Low is applied at -all depths deeper than the first deco stop. For more information see: -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a> -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_language">10.4. Language</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Choose a language that <em>Subsurface</em> will use.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Pref4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Language page" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>A checkbox allows one to use the <em>System Default</em> language which in most -cases will be the correct setting; with this <em>Subsurface</em> simply runs in the -same language / country settings as the underlying OS. If this is for some -reason undesirable users can uncheck this checkbox and pick a language / -country combination from the list of included localizations. The <em>Filter</em> -text box allows one to list similar languages. For instance there are -several system variants of English or French. This particular preference -requires a restart of <em>Subsurface</em> to take effect.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_network">10.5. Network</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel facilitates communication between <em>Subsurface</em> and data sources -on the Internet.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Pref5.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Network page" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This is important, for instance, when <em>Subsurface</em> needs to communicate with -Internet services such as the <a href="#S_Companion"><em>Subsurface Companion app</em></a> or -data export/import from <em>Divelogs.de</em>. These Internet requirements are -determined by one’s type of connection to the Internet and by the Internet -Service Provider (ISP) used. One’s ISP should provide the appropriate -information. If a proxy server is used for Internet access, the appropriate -information needs to be provided here. The type of proxy needs to be -selected from the dropdown list. after which the IP address of the host and -the appropriate port number should be provided. If the proxy server uses -authentication, the appropriate userID and password also needs to be -provided so that <em>Subsurface</em> can automatically pass through the proxy -server to access the Internet.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">11. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive planning is an advanced feature of <em>Subsurface</em>, accessible by -selecting <em>Log → Plan Dive</em> from the main menu. It allows calculation of -nitrogen load during a dive by using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm with the -addition of gradient factors as implemented by Erik Baker.</p></div> -<div class="sidebarblock"> -<div class="content"> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/warning2.png" alt="Warning" /> -</td> -<td class="content">The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner IS CURRENTLY EXPERIMENTAL and assumes the user -is already familiar with the <em>Subsurface</em> user interface. It is explicitly -used under the following conditions:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The user is conversant with dive planning and has the necessary training to -perform dive planning. -- The user plans dives within his/her certification limits. -Dive planning makes large assumptions about the characteristics of the -<em>average person</em> and cannot compensate for individual physiology or health -or personal history or life style characteristics. -- The safety of a dive plan depends heavily on the way in which the planner is - used. -- The user is familiar with the user interface of <em>Subsurface</em>. -A user who is not absolutely sure about any of the above requirements should -not use this feature.</p></div> -</div></div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_em_subsurface_em_dive_planner_screen">11.1. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner screen</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Like the <em>Subsurface</em> dive log, the planner screen is divided into several -sections (see image below). The <strong>setup</strong> parameters for a dive are entered -into the several sections on the left hand side of the screen. The setup is -divided into several sections: Available Gases, Rates, Planning, Gas Options -and Dive Notes.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>At the top right hand is a green <strong>design panel</strong> upon which the profile of -the dive can be manipulated directly by dragging and clicking as explained -below. This feature makes the <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner unique in ease of -use.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>At the bottom right is a text panel with a heading of <em>Dive Plan -Details</em>. This is where the details of the dive plan are provided in a way -that can easily be copied to other software. This is also where any warning -messages about the dive plan are printed.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/PlannerWindow1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Dive planner startup window" /> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_initiating_dive_planning">11.2. Initiating dive planning</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive planner comprises two parts: <strong>constructing a dive plan</strong> and -<strong>evaluating</strong> that dive plan. To perform dive planning, perform these steps:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Clear the existing dive log by creating a new planning log. This is achieved -by selecting <em>File → New logbook</em> from the main menu. This way, dive plans -are kept separate from the existing dive log of completed dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In the top left-hand area of the screen, ensure that the constant dive -parameters are appropriate. These are: Start date and time of the dive, -Atmospheric Pressure and Altitude above sea level of the dive site. The -atmospheric pressure can also be entered as an altitude in metres, assuming -an atmospheric pressure of 1.013 bar.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In the table labelled <em>Available Gases</em>, add the information of the -cylinders to be used as well as the gas composition within that -cylinder. This is done in a similar way as for <a href="#S_CylinderData">providing cylinder data for dive logs</a>. Choose the cylinder type by double clicking -the cylinder type and using the dropdown list, then specify the work -pressure of this cylinder. By leaving the oxygen concentration (O2%) filed -empty, the dive gas is assumed to be air. Otherwise enter the oxygen and/or -helium concentration in the boxes provided in this dialogue. Add additional -cylinders by using the "+" icon to the top righthand of the dialogue.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The dialogue indicating <em>Dive Planner Points</em> is usually not used at this -stage of the dive planning.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_managing_nitrogen_oxygen_and_gas_consumption">11.3. Managing nitrogen, oxygen and gas consumption</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The planning is performed in three stages:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>a) Nitrogen management</strong>: This is performed by specifying the rates for descent and ascent, -as well as the gradient factors (GFLow and GFHigh) under the headings <em>Rates</em> and <em>Planning</em> -to the bottom left of the planning screen. Initially, the GFHigh and GFLow values in the <em>Preferences</em> -panel of <em>Subsurface</em> is used. If these are changed within the planner (see <em>Gas Options</em> within -the planner), the new values are -used without changing the original specifications in the <em>Preferences</em>. Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their depths. -A very low GFLow value brings about decompression stops early on during the dive. - ** For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>. -For more information external to this manual see:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="http://www.amazon.com/Deco-Divers-Decompression-Theory-Physiology/dp/1905492073/ref=sr_1_1?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1403932320&sr=1-1&keywords=deco+for+divers"><em>Deco for Divers</em>, by Mark Powell (2008). Aquapress</a> Southend-on-Sea, UK. ISBN 10: 1-905492-07-3. -An excellent non-technical review. -</p> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -The ascent rate is critical for nitrogen off-gassing at the end of the dive and is specified -for several depth ranges, utilising the average (or mean) depth as a yardstick. The mean depth -of the dive plan is indicated on the dive profile in the green panel of the dive planner. Ascent rates -at deeper levels are often in the range of 8-12 m/min, while ascent rates near the surface are -often in the range of 4-9 m/min. The descent rate is also specified. If the option <em>Drop to first depth</em> -is activated, then the descent phase of the planned dive will be at the maximal descent rate specified -in the <em>Rates</em> section of the dive setup. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>b) Oxygen management</strong>: In the <strong>Gas Options</strong> part of the dive specification, the maximum partial -pressure for oxygen needs to be specified for the -bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom po2</em>) as well as for the decompression part of the dive (<em>deco po2</em>). -The most commonly -used values are 1.4 bar for the bottom part of the dive and 1.6 bar for any decompression -stages. Normally, a partial pressure of 1.6 bar is not exceeded. PO2 settings and the depth at which switching to a gas takes place can also be edited in the -<em>Available Gases</em> dialog. Normally the planner decides on switching to a new gas when, during -ascent, the partial pressure of the new gas has decreased to 1.6 bar.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>c) Gas management</strong>: One needs keep within the limits of the amount of gas contained in the dive -cylinder(s), allowing for an appropriate margin for safe return to the surface, possibly -sharing with a buddy. Under the <em>Gas Options</em> heading, specify the best (but conservative) estimate -of your surface-equivalent air consumption (SAC, also termed RMV) in -litres/min (for the time being, only SI units are supported). Specify the SAC during the -bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom SAC</em>) as well as during the decompression or safety stops of the -dive (<em>deco SAC</em>). Values of 20-30 l/min are common. For good gas management, a thumbsuck guess -is not sufficient and one needs to -monitor one’s gas consumption on a regular basis, dependent on different dive conditions and/or equipment. -The planner will calculate the total volume of gas used during the dive and will issue a warning -if one exceeds the total amount of gas available. Good practice demands that one does not dive to -the limit of the gas supply but that an appropriate reserve is kept for unforeseen circumstances. -For technical diving, this reserve can be up to 66% of the total available gas.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Now (at last) one can start the detailed time-depth planning of the -dive. <em>Subsurface</em> offers a unique graphical interface for performing this -part of the planning. The mechanics of doing this is similar to -hand-entering a dive profile in the dive log part of <em>Subsurface</em>. Upon -activating the planner, a default dive of depth 15 m for 40 min is offered -in the green design surface to the top right hand of the screen. The white -dots (waypoints) on the profile can be dragged with a mouse. Create more -waypoints by double-clicking on the profile line and ensuring that the -profile reflects the intended dive. Drag the waypoints to represent the -depth and duration of the dive. If any of the management limits (for -nitrogen, oxygen or gas) is exceeded, the surface above the dive profile -changes from BLUE to RED.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Each waypoint on the dive profile creates a <em>Dive Planner Point</em> in the -table on the left of the dive planner panel. Ensure that the <em>Used Gas</em> -value in each row of that table corresponds to one of the gas mixtures -specified in the table with <em>Available Gases</em> immediately above the Dive -Planner Points. Add new waypoints until the main features of the dive have -been completed, e.g. the bottom time segment and deep stops (if these are -implemented). Leave the remaining waypoints on the ascent to -<em>Subsurface</em>. In most cases <em>Subsurface</em> computes additional way points in -order to fulfil decompression requirements for that dive. A waypoint can be -moved by selecting that waypoint and by using the arrow keys. The waypoints -listed in the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialogue can be edited by hand in order -to obtain a precise presentation of the dive plan. In fact, one can create -the whole dive profile by editing the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialog.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Indicate any changes in gas cylinder used by indicating gas changes as -explained in the section <a href="#S_CreateProfile">hand-creating a dive profile</a>. These changes should reflect the cylinders and gas compositions -defined in the table with <em>Available Gases</em>. If two or more gases are used, -automatic gas switches will be suggested during the ascent to the -surface. However, these changes can be deleted by right-clicking the gas -change and by manually creating a gas change by right-clicking on the -appropriate waypoint.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>A non-zero value in the "CC set point" column of the table of dive planner -points indicates a valid setpoint for oxygen partial pressure and that the -segment is dived using a closed circuit rebreather (CCR). If the last -manually entered segment is a CCR segment, the decompression phase is -computed assuming the diver uses a CCR with the specified set-point. If the -last segment (however short) is on open circuit (OC, indicated by a zero -set-point) the decompression is computed in OC mode. The planner only -considers gas changes in OC mode.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an example of a dive plan to 45m using EAN26, followed by an ascent -using EAN50 and using the settings as described above.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/DivePlanner2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a dive: setup" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the above has been completed, one can save it by clicking the <em>Save</em> -button towards the bottom left of the green design panel. The saved dive -plan will appear in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_the_dive_plan_details">11.4. The dive plan details</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>On the bottom right of the dive planner, under <em>Dive Plan Details</em>, the -exact details of the dive plan are provided. These details may be modified -by checking any of the options under the <em>Dive Notes</em> section of the dive -planner, immediately to the left of the <em>Dive Plan Details</em>. If a <em>Verbatim -diveplan</em> is requested, a detailed sentence-level explanation of the dive -plan is given. If any of the management specifications have been exceeded -during the planning, a warning message is printed underneath the dive plan -information.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If the option <em>Display segment duration</em> is checked, then the duration of -each depth level is indicated in the <em>Dive Plan Details</em>. This duration -INCLUDES the transition time to get to that level. However, if the <em>Display -transition in deco</em> option is checked, the transitions are shown separately -from the segment durations at a particular level.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_Replan">11.5. Modifying an existing dive plan</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, when a dive plan has been saved, it is accessible from the <strong>Dive -List</strong>, like any other dive log. Within the <strong>Dive List</strong> there is not a way to -change a saved dive plan. To perform changes to a dive plan, select it on -the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Then, in the main menu, select <em>Log → Re-plan dive</em>. This -will open the selected dive plan within the dive planner, allowing changes -to be made and saved as usual.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In addition there is the option "Save new". This keeps the original planned -dive and adds a (possibly modified) copy to the dive list. If that copy is -saved with the same start time as the original, the two dives are considered -two versions of the same dive and do not influence other each during -decompression calculation (see next section).</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_planning_for_repetitive_dives">11.6. Planning for repetitive dives</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Repetitive dives can easily be planned if the dates and start times of the -repetitive dive set is specified appropriately in the top left-hand <em>Start -Time</em> field. <em>Subsurface</em> calculates the gas loading figures correctly and -the effect of the first dive is evaluated on later dives.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If one has just completed a long/deep dive and is planning another dive, -then highlight, in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the dive that has just been completed -and then activate the planner. Depending on the start time of the planned -dive, the planner takes into account the gas loading incurred during the -completed dive and allows planning within these limitations.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>If only a few standard configurations are used (e.g. in GUE), then a -template dive can be created conforming to one of the configurations. If one -now wishes to plan a dive using this configuration, just highlight the -template dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong> and activate the planner: the planner takes -into account the configuration in the highlighted dive.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_printing_the_dive_plan">11.7. Printing the dive plan</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the <em>Print</em> button in the planner allows printing of the <em>Dive -Plan Details</em> for wet notes. Alternatively one can cut and paste the <em>Dive -Plan Details</em> for inclusion in a text file or word processing document.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive plans have many characteristics in common with dive logs (dive profile, -dive notes, etc). After a dive plan has been saved, the dive details and -gas calculations are saved in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab. While a dive plan is -being designed, it can be printed using the <em>Print</em> button in the dive -planner. This prints the dive details and gas calculations in the <em>Dive Plan -Details</em> panel of the dive planner. However, after the plan has been saved, -it is represented in a way very similar to a dive log and the gas -calculations cannot be accessed in the same way as during the planning -process. The only way to print the dive plan is to use the <em>File→Print</em> -facility on the main menu in the same way as for dive logs or by copy and -paste to a word processor.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_Configure">12. Configuring a dive computer</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> enables one to configure a dive computer. Currently the -Heinrichs-Weikamp (OSTC 2, OSTC 3) and Suunto Vyper (Stinger, Mosquito, D3, -Vyper, Vytec, Cobra, Gekko and Zoop) family of dive computers are -supported. A large number of settings of these dive computers can be read -and changed to different values. As a first step, ensure that the -appropriate hardware driver is installed for the dive computer and that the -device name of the dive computer is known. See -<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">APPENDIX A</a> for information on how to do this.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dive computer is connected to the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, select -<em>File→Configure dive computer</em> from the <em>Main Menu</em>. Provide the -appropriate device name in the text box at the top of the configuration -panel that opens and select the appropriate dive computer model from the -panel on the lefthand (see image below).</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Configure_dc_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Configure dive computer" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the appropriate buttons on the configuration panel, the following -actions can be performed:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Retrieve available details</strong>. This loads the existing configuration from the dive computer - to <em>Subsurface</em>, showing this in the configuration panel. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Save changes to device</strong>. This changes the configuration of the - dive computer to correspond to the information shown in the configuration panel. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Backup</strong>. This saves the configuration data to a file. <em>Subsurface</em> asks for - a file location and file name for the saved information. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Restore backup</strong>. This loads the information from a backup file and displays it - in the configuration panel. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Update firmware</strong>. If new firmware is available for the dive computer, this is - loaded into the dive computer. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_description_of_the_subsurface_main_menu_items">13. Description of the Subsurface Main Menu items</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This section describes the functions and operation of the items in the Main -Menu of Subsurface. Several of the items below are links to sections of this -manual dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_file">13.1. File</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p><a href="#S_NewLogbook"><em>New Logbook</em></a> - Close the currently open dive logbook and -clear all dive information. -<em>Open logbook</em> - This opens the file manager in order to select a dive -logbook to open. -- <em>Save</em> - Save the dive logbook that is currently open. -- <em>Save as</em> - Save the current logbook under a different file name. -- <em>Close</em> - Close the dive logbook that is currently open. -<a href="#S_ExportLog"><em>Export</em></a> - Export the currently open dive logbook (or the -selected dives in the logbook) to one of several formats. -- <a href="#S_PrintDivelog"><em>Print</em></a> - Print the currently open logbook. -- <a href="#S_Preferences"><em>Preferences</em></a> - Set the <em>Subsurface</em> preferences. -- <a href="#S_Configure"><em>Configure dive computer</em></a> - Edit the configuration of a dive - computer. -- <em>Quit</em> - Quit <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_import">13.2. Import</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p><a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer"><em>Import from dive computer</em></a> - Import dive -information from a dive computer. -<a href="#Unified_import"><em>Import Log Files</em></a> - Import dive information from a file -in in a <em>Subsurface</em>-compatible format. -<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Import GPS data from Subsurface web service</em></a> - Load GPS -coordinates from the <em>Subsurface</em> mobile phone app. -<a href="#S_ImportingDivelogsDe"><em>Import from Divelogs.de</em></a> - Import dive -information from <em>www.Divelogs.de</em>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_log">13.3. Log</h3> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<a href="#S_EnterData"><em>Add Dive</em></a> - Manually add a new dive to the <strong>Dive List</strong> - panel. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="#S_DivePlanner"><em>Plan Dive</em></a> - This feature allows the planning of dives. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="#S_Replan"><em>Re-plan dive</em></a> - Edit a dive plan that has been saved into the - <strong>Dive List</strong>. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="#S_CopyComponents"><em>Copy dive components</em></a> - By selecting this option, one - can copy information from several fields of a dive log onto the clipboard. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<em>Paste dive components</em> - Paste, into the selected dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, - the information copied using the <em>Copy dive components</em> option. -<a href="#S_Renumber"><em>Renumber</em></a> - Renumber the dives listed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> -panel. -<a href="#S_Group"><em>Auto Group</em></a> - Group the dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel into -dive trips. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="#S_DeviceNames"><em>Edit Device Names</em></a> - Edit the names of dive computers to - facilitate your logs. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -<a href="#S_Filter"><em>Filter divelist</em></a> - Select only some dives, based on specific - tags or dive criteria. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_view">13.4. View</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p><a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>All</em></a> - View the four main <em>Subsurface</em> panels -simmultaneously. -- <a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Dive List</em></a> - View only the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel. -- <a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Profile</em></a> - View only the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. -- <a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Info</em></a> - View only the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel. -- <a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Globe</em></a> - View only the <strong>World Map</strong> panel. -<em>Yearly Statistics</em> - Display summary statistics about dives during this and -past years. -- <em>Prev DC</em> - Switch to previous dive computer. -- <em>Next DC</em> - Switch to next dive computer. -- <em>Full Screen</em> - Toggles Full Screen mode.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_help">13.5. Help</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>About Subsurface</em> - Show a panel with the version number of <em>Subsurface</em> as -well as licensing information. -<em>Check for updates</em> - Find out whether a newer version of Subsurface is -available on the <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/"><em>Subsurface</em> web site</a>. -- <em>User Manual</em> - Open a window showing this user manual.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">14. APPENDIX A: Operating system specific information for importing dive information from a dive computer.</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_make_sure_that_the_os_has_the_required_drivers_installed">14.1. Make sure that the OS has the required drivers installed</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/drivers.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">The operating system of the desktop computer needs the appropriate drivers -in order to communicate with the dive computer in whichever way the dive -computer prefers (e.g. bluetooth, USB, infra-red).</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -On Linux users need to have the correct kernel module loaded. Most - distributions will do this automatically, so the user does not need to load - kernel modules. However, some communication protocols require an additional - driver, especially for rarely used technology such as infra-red. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -On Windows, the OS should offer to download the correct driver once the user - connects the dive computer to the USB port and operating system sees the - equipment for the first time. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>On a Mac users sometimes have to manually hunt for the correct driver. For -example the correct driver for the Mares Puck devices or any other dive -computer using a USB-to-serial interface based on the Silicon Labs CP2101 or -similar chip can be found as <em>Mac_OSX_VCP_Driver.zip</em> at the -<a href="http://www.silabs.com/support/pages/document-library.aspx?p=Interface&f=USB%20Bridges&pn=CP2101">Silicon -Labs document and software repository</a>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">14.2. How to Find the Device Name for USB devices and set its write permission</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/usb.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">When a user connects the dive computer by using a USB connector, usually -<em>Subsurface</em> will either propose a drop down list that contains the correct -device name (or mount point for the Uemis Zurich), or it will disable the -device select drop down if no device name is needed at all. In the rare -cases where this doesn’t work, here are some suggestions of ways to find out -what the device name is:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On Windows:</div><p>Simply try COM1, COM2, etc. The drop down list should contain all connected -COM devices.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On MacOS:</div><p>The drop down box should find all connected dive computers.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On Linux:</div><p>There is a definitive way to find the port:</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Disconnect the USB cable from the dive computer -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Open a terminal -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Type the command: <em>dmesg</em> and press enter -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Plug in the USB cable of the dive computer -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Type the command: <em>dmesg</em> and press enter -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>A message similar to this one should appear:</p></div> -<div class="literalblock"> -<div class="content"> -<pre><code>usb 2-1.1: new full speed USB device number 14 using ehci_hcd -usbcore: registered new interface driver usbserial -USB Serial support registered for generic -usbcore: registered new interface driver usbserial_generic -usbserial: USB Serial Driver core -USB Serial support registered for FTDI USB Serial Device -ftdi_sio 2-1.1:1.0: FTDI USB Serial Device converter detected -usb 2-1.1: Detected FT232BM -usb 2-1.1: Number of endpoints 2 -usb 2-1.1: Endpoint 1 MaxPacketSize 64 -usb 2-1.1: Endpoint 2 MaxPacketSize 64 -usb 2-1.1: Setting MaxPacketSize 64 -usb 2-1.1: FTDI USB Serial Device converter now attached to ttyUSB3 -usbcore: registered new interface driver ftdi_sio -ftdi_sio: v1.6.0:USB FTDI Serial Converters Driver</code></pre> -</div></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The third line from the bottom shows that the FTDI USB adapter is detected -and connected to <code>ttyUSB3</code>. This information can now be used in the import -settings as <code>/dev/ttyUSB3</code> which directs Subsurface to the correct USB port.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Ensuring that the user has write permission to the USB serial port:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>On Unix-like operating systems the USB ports can only be accessed by users -who are members of the <code>dialout</code> group. If one is not root, one may not be a -member of that group and will not be able to use the USB port. Let us assume -one’s username is <em>johnB</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>As root, type: <code>usermod -a -G dialout johnB</code> (Ubuntu users: <code>sudo usermod -a --G dialout johnB</code>) This makes johnB a member of the <code>dialout</code> group. -Type: <code>id johnB</code> This lists all the groups that johnB belongs to and -verifies that -the appropriate group membership has been created. The <code>dialout</code> group should -be listed -among the different IDs. -Under some circumstances this change takes only effect (eg. on Ubuntu) after -one logs out and then logs in again.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>With the appropriate device name (e.g. <code>dev/ttyUSB3</code>) and with write -permission to the USB port, the dive computer interface can connect and one -should be able to import dives.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">14.3. Setting up bluetooth enabled devices</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/bluetooth.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">For dive computers communicating through bluetooth like the Heinrichs -Weikamp Frog or the Shearwater Predator and Petrel there is a different -procedure to get the devices name to communicate with <em>Subsurface</em>. Follow -these steps:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<strong>For the dive computer, after enabling Bluetooth, ensure it is in Upload mode.</strong> -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For Bluetooth pairing of the dive computer, refer to the manufacturer’s user -guide. When using a Shearwater Predator/Petrel, select <em>Dive Log → Upload -Log</em> and wait for the <em>Wait PC</em> message.</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -<strong>Pair the <em>Subsurface</em> computer with the dive computer.</strong> -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On Windows:</div><p>Bluetooth is most likely already enabled. For pairing with the dive computer -choose <em>Control Panel→Bluetooth Devices→Add Wireless Device</em>. This should -bring up a dialog showing your dive computer (in Bluetooth mode) and -allowing pairing. Right click on it and choose <em>Properties→COM Ports</em> to -identify the port used for your dive computer. If there are several ports -listed, use the one saying "Outgoing" instead of "Incoming".</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For downloading to <em>Subsurface</em>, the <em>Subsurface</em> drop-down list should -contain this COM port already. If not, enter it manually.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Note: If there are issues afterwards when downloading from the dive computer -using other software, remove the existing pairing with the dive computer.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On MacOS:</div><p>Click on the Bluetooth symbol in the menu bar and select <em>Set up Bluetooth -Device…</em>. The dive computer should then show up in the list of -devices. Select it and go through the pairing process. This step should only -be needed once for initial setup.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the pairing is completed the correct device is shown in the <em>Device or -Mount Point</em> drop-down in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Import</strong> dialog.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">On Linux</div><p>Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on the <em>Subsurface</em> computer. On most common -distributions this should be true out of the box and pairing should be -straight forward. For instance, Gnome3 shows a Bluetooth icon in the upper -right corner of the desktop where one selects <em>Set up New Device</em>. This -should show a dialog where one can select the dive computer (which already -should be in Bluetooth mode) and pair it. If a PIN is required, try -manually setting <em>0000</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>In the rare cases where the above is not true, then depending on your -system, try <code>initd</code> or <code>systemd</code>. This might be different and also involve -loading modules specific to your hardware. In case your system is running -<code>systemd</code>, manually run <code>systemctl start bluetooth.service</code> to enable it, in -case of <code>initd</code>, run something like <code>rc.config start bluetoothd</code> or -<code>/etc/init.d/bluetooth start</code>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>One may also use a manual approach by using such commands:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><code>hciconfig</code> shows the Bluetooth devices available on your computer (not dive -computer), most likely one will see a hci0, if not try <code>hcitool -a</code> to see -inactive devices and run <code>sudo hciconfig hci0 up</code> to bring them up.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><code>hcitool scanning</code> gets a list of bluetooth enabled client devices, look for -the dive computer and remember the MAC address are shown there</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><code>bluez-simple-agent hci0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> pairs the dive computer with the -bluetooth stack of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, copy/paste the MAC address -from the output of <em>hcitool scanning</em></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Unfortunately on Linux binding to a communication device has to be done -manually by running:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><code>rfcomm bind /dev/rfcomm0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> binds the dive computer to a -communication device in the desktop computer, in case rfcomm is already -taken use rfcomm1 or up. IMPORTANT: Copy/paste the MAC address from the -output of <code>hcitool scanning</code>, the MAC address shown above will not work.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For downloading dives in <em>Subsurface</em> specify the device name connected to -the MAC address in the last step above, e.g. <em>/dev/rfcomm0</em>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">15. APPENDIX B: Dive Computer specific information for importing dive information.</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">15.1. Import from a Uemis Zurich</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/iumis.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content"><em>Subsurface</em> downloads the information stored on the SDA (the built-in file -system of the Uemis) including information about dive spots and -equipment. Buddy information is not yet downloadable. Things are very -similar to a normal USB-connected dive computer (the Uemis is one of those -that recharge when connected to the USB port). The main difference is that -one does not enter a device name, but instead the location where the -UEMISSDA file system is mounted once connected to the dive computer. On -Windows this is a drive letter ( often <em>E:</em> or <em>F:</em>), on a Mac this is -<em>/Volumes/UEMISSDA</em> and on Linux systems this differs depending on the -distribution. On Fedora it usually is -<em>/var/run/media/<your_username>/UEMISSDA</em>. In all cases <em>Subsurface</em> should -suggest the correct location in the drop down list.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After selecting the above device name, download the dives from the Uemis -Zurich. One technical issue with the Uemis Zurich download implementation -(this is a Uemis firmware limitation, not a <em>Subsurface</em> issue) is that one -cannot download more than about 40-50 dives without running out of memory on -the SDA. This will usually only happen the very first time one downloads -dives from the Uemis Zurich. Normally when downloading at the end of a day -or even after a dive trip, the capacity is sufficient. If <em>Subsurface</em> -displays an error that the dive computer ran out of space the solution is -straight forward. Disconnect the SDA, turn it off and on again, and -reconnect it. You can now retry (or start a new download session) and the -download will continue where it stopped previously. One may have to do this -more than once, depending on how many dives are stored on the dive computer.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">15.2. Importing dives from the Uwatec Galileo</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/Galileo.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">The Uwatec Galileo dive computers use infra red (IrDA) communication between -the dive computer and Subsurface. The Uwatec hardware uses a USB dongle -based on the serial infra-red (SIR) protocol and the MSC7780 IrDA controller -manufactured by MosChip and marketed by Scubapro and some electronics -companies. Under Linux, the kernel already provides for communication using -the IrDA protocol. However, the user additionally needs to load a driver for -the IrDA interface with the dive computer. The easiest way is to load the -<strong>irda-tools</strong> package from the -<a href="http://irda.sourceforge.net/docs/startirda.html">Linux IrDA Project</a>. After -the installation of the irda-tools, the <strong>root user</strong> can specify a device -name from the console as follows: <code>irattach irda0</code></td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After executing this command, Subsurface will recognise the Galileo dive -computer and download dive information.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Under Windows, a similar situation exists. Drivers for the MCS7780 are -available from some Internet web sites e.g. -<a href="http://www.drivers-download.com/Drv/MosChip/MCS7780/">www.drivers-download.com</a>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>For the Apple Mac, IrDA communication via the MCS7780 link is not available -for OSX 10.6 or higher.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">15.3. Importing dives from Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/HW_DR5.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">When mounted as a USB drive the Heinrichs Weikamp DR5 saves a single UDDF -file for every dive. Mark all the dives you’d like to import or open. -Note: The DR5 does not seem to store gradient factors nor deco information, -so for <em>Subsurface</em> it is not possible to display them. Adjust the gradient -factors in the <em>Graph Settings</em> in <em>Subsurface</em> to generate a deco overlay -in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel but please note that the deco -calculated by <em>Subsurface</em> will most likely differ from the one displayed on -the DR5.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_import_from_shearwater_predator_using_bluetooth">15.4. Import from Shearwater Predator using Bluetooth</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/predator.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Using a Shearwater Predator one may be able to pair Bluetooth but then -encounter issues when downloading, showing errors like <em>Slip RX: unexp. SLIP -END</em> on the Predator. This might also arise when using other dive log -software and operating systems other than Linux. We have no detailed idea -about the source and how to fix this, but it is reported to be solved -sometimes by one of these steps:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -use the Bluetooth dongle which came with the Shearwater Predator instead of - the built-in one of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -switch to different Bluetooth drivers for the same hardware -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -switch off WiFi while using Bluetooth -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">15.5. Importing dive logs from the Poseidon MkVI Discovery</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/MkVI.jpeg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Download of dive logs from the MkVI is performed using a custom -communications adapter and the <em>Poseidon PC Configuration Software</em>, -obtained when purchasing the MKVI equipment. The latter is a Windows -application allowing configuration of equipment and storage of dive -logs. Communication between dive computer and desktop computer utilises the -IrDA infra-red protocol. Only data for one dive can be downloaded at a time, -comprising three files:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Setup configuration for the dive and key dive parameters (file with a .txt -extension) -- Dive log details (file with a .csv extension) -Redbook format dive log (file with .cvsr extension). This is a compressed -version of the dive log using a proprietary format.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> accesses the .txt and the .csv files to obtain dive log -information.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_importing_dive_logs_from_the_apd_inspiration_ccr">15.6. Importing dive logs from the APD Inspiration CCR</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/APDComputer.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">The dive logs of an APD Inspiration or similar CCR dive computer are -downloaded using a communications adapter and <em>AP Communicator</em>, obtained -when purchasing the equipment. The dive logs can be viewed using the <em>AP Log -Viewer</em>, within Windows or Mac/OS. However, APD logs can be viewed and -managed from within <em>Subsurface</em> (together with dives using many other types -of dive computer). The APD inspiration dive logs are imported into -<em>Subsurface</em> as follows:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Open a dive within the <em>AP Log Viewer</em>. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Select the tab at the top of the screen, entitled "<em>Data</em>". -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -If the raw dive log data show on the screen, click on "<em>Copy to Clipboard</em>". -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Open a text editor, e.g. Notepad (Windows), TextWrangler (Mac). -Copy the contents of the clipboard into the text editor and save the text -file with a filename extension of .CSV -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Within <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import→Import log files</em> to open the - <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -In the dropdown list towards the bottom right of the dialogue, select "<em>CSV - files</em>". -On the list of file names select the .CSV file that has been created -above. An import dialogue opens. -In the dropdown list on the middle right labeled '<em>Pre-configured imports</em>", -select <em>APD Log Viewer</em>. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Ensure the other settings for the ADP dive log are appropriate, then select - <em>OK</em>. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The APD dive log will appear within <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_appendix_c_exporting_dive_log_information_from_external_dive_log_software">16. APPENDIX C: Exporting Dive log information from external dive log software.</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The import of dive log data from external dive log software is mostly -performed using the dialogue found by selecting <em>Import</em> from the Main Menu, -then clicking on <em>Import Log Files</em>. This is a single-step process, more -information about which can be found <a href="#Unified_import">here.</a> However, in -some cases, a two-step process may be required:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Export the foreign dive log data to format that is accessible from -<em>Subsurface</em>. -2. Import the accessible dive log data into <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>This appendix provides some information about approaches to export dive log -data from foreign dive log software. The procedures below mostly apply to -Linux and/or Windows.</p></div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">16.1. Exporting dives from <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3, DM4 or DM5)</strong></h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/suuntologo.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">DiveManager is a MS Windows application for Suunto dive computers. -Divemanager 3 (DM3) is an older version of the Suunto software. More recent -Suunto dive computers use Divemanager version 4 or 5 (DM4 or DM5). The -different versions of Divemanager use different methods and different file -naming conventions to export dive log data.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 3 (DM3):</strong></p></div> -<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> -<li> -<p> -Start <em>Suunto Divemanager 3</em> and log in with the name containing the logs -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Do not start the import wizard to import dives from the dive computer. -In the navigation tree on the left side of the program-window, select the -appropriate dives. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Within the list of dives, select the dives you would like to import later: -</p> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -To select certain dives: hold <em>ctrl</em> and click the dive -To select all dives: Select the first dive, hold down shift and select the -last dive -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</li> -<li> -<p> -With the dives marked, use the program menu <em>File → Export</em> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -The export pop-up will show. Within this pop-up, there is one field called - <em>Export Path</em>. -</p> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -Click the browse button next to the field Export Path -</p> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -A file-manager like window pops up -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Navigate to the directory for storing the -Divelog.SDE file -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Optionally change the name of the file for saving -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Click <em>Save</em> -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Back in the Export pop-up, press the button <em>Export</em> -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -</li> -<li> -<p> -The dives are now exported to the file Divelog.SDE. -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 4 (DM4) and Divemanager 5 (DM5):</strong></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>DM4 and DM5 use identical mechanisms for exporting dive logs. To export a -divelog from Divemanager one needs to locate the DM4/DM5 database where the -dives are stored. the user can either look for the original database or make -a backup of the dives. Both methods are described here.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Locating the Suunto DM4 (or DM5) database:</p></div> -<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> -<li> -<p> -Start Suunto DM4/DM5 -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Select <em>Help → About</em> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Click <em>Copy</em> after text <em>Copy log folder path to clipboard</em> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Now open Windows Explorer -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Paste the address to the path box at the top of the File Explorer -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -The database is called DM4.db or DM5.db -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Making a backup copy of the Suunto DM4/DM5 database:</p></div> -<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> -<li> -<p> -Start Suunto DM4/DM5 -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Select <em>File - Create backup</em> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -From the file menu select the location and name for the backup, we’ll use - DM4 (or DM5) in here with the default extension .bak -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Click <em>Save</em> -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -The dives are now exported to the file DM4.bak (or DM5.bak) -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_exporting_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">16.2. Exporting from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3> -<div class="admonitionblock" id="Mares_Export"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/mareslogo.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Mares Dive Organiser is a Windows application. The dive log is kept as a -Microsoft SQL Compact Edition database with a <em>.sdf</em> filename extension. The -database includes all Dive Organiser-registered divers on the particular -computer and all Mares dive computers used. The safest way to obtain a copy -of the dive database is to export the information to another compatible -format which can be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>.</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Within Dive Organiser, select <em>Database → Backup</em> from the main menu and -back up the database to the desk top. This creates a zipped file -DiveOrganiserxxxxx.dbf. -Rename the file to DiveOrganiserxxxxx.zip. Inside the zipped directory is a -file <em>DiveOrganiser.sdf</em>. -3. Extract the <em>.sdf</em> file from the zipped folder to your Desktop. -4. The password for accessing the .zip file is <em>mares</em>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="S_ImportingDivingLog">16.3. Exporting dives from <strong>DivingLog 5.0</strong></h3> -<div class="admonitionblock"> -<table><tr> -<td class="icon"> -<img src="images/icons/divingloglogo.jpg" alt="Note" /> -</td> -<td class="content">Unfortunately DivingLog XML files give us no indication on the preferences -set on one’s system. So in order for <em>Subsurface</em> to be able to successfully -import XML files from DivingLog one first needs to ensure that DivingLog is -configured to use the Metric system (one can easily change this within -Diving Log by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Units and Language</em> by -clicking the <em>Metric</em> button). Then do the following:</td> -</tr></table> -</div> -<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> -<li> -<p> -In DivingLog open the <em>File → Export → XML</em> menu -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Select the dives to export -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Click on the export button and select the filename -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="S_Appendix_D">17. APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers keep a diving log in some form of a digital file, commonly a -spreadsheet with various fields of information. These logs can be easily -imported into <em>Subsurface</em> (<a href="#S_ImportingManualCSV">Importing dives -from_manually kept CSV file</a>), after the spreadsheet is converted in a .CSV -file. This section explains the procedure to convert a diving logbook -stored in a spreadsheet to a .CSV file that will later be imported from -<em>Subsurface</em>. Creating a .CSV is a straightforward task, although the -procedure is somewhat different according to which spreadsheet program is -used.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The first step is to organize the diving data in the spreadsheet, so that -the first row contains the names (or titles) of each column and the -information for each dive is stored in a single row. <em>Subsurface</em> supports -many data items (Dive #, Date, Time, Duration, Location, GPS, Max Depth, -Mean Depth, Buddy, Notes, Weight and Tags). The user can organize dive data -following a few simple rules:</p></div> -<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> -<li> -<p> -Date: use one of the following formats: yyyy-mm-dd, dd.mm.yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Duration: the format should be minutes:seconds. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Unit system: only one unit system shold be used (i.e., no mixture between - imperial and metric units) -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Tags and buddies: values should be separated using a comma. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -GPS position: users must use decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 30.821798 -</p> -</li> -</ol></div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_em_libreoffice_calc_em_and_em_openoffice_calc_em">17.1. <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> and <em>OpenOffice Calc</em></h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>These are open source spreadsheet applications forming parts of larger open -source office suite applications. The user interaction with <em>LibreOffice</em> -and <em>OpenOffice</em> is very similar. In Libreoffice Calc the time format -should be set to minutes:seconds - [mm]:ss and dates should be set to one -of: yyyy-mm-dd, dd.mm.yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy. A typical dive log may look like -this:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LOffice_spreadsheetdata.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Spreadsheet data" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To export the data as a .CSV file from within LibreOffice click <em>File → -Save As</em>. On the dialogue that comes up, select the <em>Text CSV (.csv)</em> as the -file type and select the option <em>Edit filter settings</em>.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LOffice_save_as_options.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Save as options" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>After selecting <em>Save</em>, select the appropriate field delimiter (choose <em>Tab</em> -to prevent conflicts with the comma when using this as a decimal point), -then select <em>OK</em>.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/LOffice_field_options.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Field options" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>One can double check the .CSV file by opening it with a text editor, and -then import the dive data as explained on the section -<a href="#S_ImportingManualCSV">Importing dives from manually kept CSV files</a>.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_microsoft_em_excel_em">17.2. Microsoft <em>Excel</em></h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p>The field delimiter (called "<em>list separator</em>" in Microsoft manuals) is not -accessible from within <em>Excel</em> and needs to be set through the <em>Microsoft -Control Panel</em>. After changing the separator character, all software on the -Windows machine use the new character as a separator. One can change the -character back to the default character by following the same procedure, -outlined below.</p></div> -<div class="ulist"><ul> -<li> -<p> -In Microsoft Windows, click the <strong>Start</strong> button, and then select <em>Control - Panel</em> from the list on the right-hand side. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Open the <em>Regional and Language Options</em> dialog box. -Do one of the following: <strong> In Windows 7, click the <em>Formats</em> tab, and then -click <em>Customize this format</em>. </strong> In Windows XP, click the <em>Regional -Options</em> tab, and then click <em>Customize</em>. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Type a new separator in the <em>List separator</em> box. To use a TAB-delimited - file, type the word TAB in the box. -</p> -</li> -<li> -<p> -Click <em>OK</em> twice. -</p> -</li> -</ul></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an image of the <em>Control Panel</em>:</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Win List separator" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>To export the dive log in CSV format:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>With the dive log opened in <em>Excel</em>, select the round Windows button at the -top left, then <em>Save As</em>.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save as option" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Click on the left-hand part of the <em>Save as</em> option, NOT on the arrow on the -right-hand. This brings up a dialogue for saving the spreadsheet in an -alternative format. From the dropdown list at the bottom of the dialogue, -marked <em>Save as Type:</em>, select <em>CSV(Comma delimited) (*.CSV)</em>. Ensure that -the appropriate folder has been selected to save the CSV file into.</p></div> -<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;"> -<div class="content"> -<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save CSV dialogue" /> -</div> -</div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>Select the <em>Save</em> button. The CSV-formatted file is saved into the folder -that was selected. One can double check the .CSV file by opening it with a -text editor, and then import the dive data as explained on the section -<a href="#S_ImportingManualCSV">Importing dives from manually kept CSV files</a>.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="sect1"> -<h2 id="_appendix_e_faqs">18. APPENDIX E: FAQs.</h2> -<div class="sectionbody"> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_subsurface_appears_to_miscalculate_gas_consumption_and_sac">18.1. Subsurface appears to miscalculate gas consumption and SAC</h3> -<div class="paragraph" id="SAC_CALCULATION"><p><em>Question</em>: I dived with a 12.2 l tank, starting with 220 bar and ending -with 100 bar, and I calculate a different SAC compared what <em>Subsurface</em> -calculates. Is <em>Subsurface</em> miscalculating?</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Answer</em>: Not really. What happens is that <em>Subsurface</em> actually calculates -gas consumption differently - and better - than you expect. In particular, -it takes the incompressibility of the gas into account. Traditionally, Gas -consumption and SAC should be: <code>consumption = tank size x (start pressure - -end pressure)</code></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>and that’s true for an ideal gas, and it’s what you get taught in dive -theory. But an "ideal gas" doesn’t actually exist, and real gases actually -don’t compress linearly with pressure. Also, you are missing the fact that -one atmosphere of pressure isn’t actually one bar. So the <strong>real</strong> -calculation is:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><code>consumption = (amount_of_air_at_beginning - amount_of_air_at_end)</code></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>where the amount of air is <strong>not</strong> just "tank size times pressure in bar". -It’s a combination of: "take compressibility into account" (which is a -fairly small issue under 220 bar - you’ll see more differences when you do -high-pressure tanks with 300bar) and "convert bar to atm" (which is the -majority of your discrepancy). Remember: one ATM is ~1.013 bar, so without -the compressibility, your gas use is:</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><code>12.2*((220-100)/1.013)</code></p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>which is about 1445, not 1464. So there was 19 l too much in your simple -calculation that ignored the difference between 1 bar and one ATM. The -compressibility does show up above 200 bar, and takes that 1445 down about -eight litres more, so you really did use only about 1437 l of air at surface -pressure.</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p>So be happy: your SAC really is better than your calculations indicated. Or -be sad: your cylinder contains less air than you thought it did. And as -mentioned, the "contains less air than you thought it did" really starts -becoming much more noticeable at high pressure. A 400 bar really does not -contain twice as much air as a 200 bar one. At lower pressures, air acts -pretty much like an ideal gas.</p></div> -</div> -<div class="sect2"> -<h3 id="_some_dive_profiles_have_time_discrepancies_with_the_recorded_samples_from_my_dive_computer_8230">18.2. Some dive profiles have time discrepancies with the recorded samples from my dive computer…</h3> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> ends up ignoring surface time for many things (average depth, -divetime, SAC, etc). <em>Question</em>: Why do dive durations in my dive computer -differ from that given by <em>Subsurface</em>?</p></div> -<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Answer</em>: For example, if you end up doing a weight check (deep enough to -trigger the "dive started") but then come back up and wait five minutes for -your buddies, your dive computer may say that your dive is 50 minutes long - -because you have fifty minutes worth of samples - but subsurface will say -it’s 45 minutes - because you were actually diving for 45 minutes. It’s -even more noticeable if you do things like divemastering the initial OW -dives, when you may stay in the water for a long time, but spend most of it -at the surface. And then you don’t want that to count as some kind of long -dive”.</p></div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div id="footnotes"><hr /></div> -<div id="footer"> -<div id="footer-text"> -Last updated 2015-01-14 16:18:29 CET -</div> -</div> -</body> -</html> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="application/xhtml+xml; charset=UTF-8" />
+<meta name="generator" content="AsciiDoc 8.6.8" />
+<title></title>
+<style type="text/css">
+/*
+ * compact_subsurface.css, a special style sheet for Subsurface,
+ * modified by Willem Ferguson and derived from:
+ * compact.css, version 1.3 by Alex Efros <powerman@powerman.name>
+ * Licence: Public Domain
+ *
+ * Usage: asciidoc -a theme=compact_subsurface ...
+ */
+
+* { padding: 0; margin: 0; }
+img { border: 0; }
+
+/*** Layout ***/
+
+body { margin: 10px 20px; }
+#header br { display: none; }
+#revnumber { display: block; }
+#toc { margin: 1em 0; }
+.toclevel2 { margin-left: 1em; }
+.toclevel3 { margin-left: 2em; }
+#footer { margin-top: 2em; }
+
+#preamble .sectionbody,
+h2,
+h3,
+h4,
+h5 { margin: 1em 0 0 0; }
+
+.admonitionblock,
+.listingblock,
+.sidebarblock,
+.exampleblock,
+.tableblock,
+.literalblock { margin: 1em 0; }
+.admonitionblock td.icon { padding-right: 0.5em; }
+.admonitionblock td.content { padding-left: 0.5em; }
+.listingblock .content { padding: 0.5em; }
+.sidebarblock > .content { padding: 0.5em; }
+.exampleblock > .content { padding: 0 0.5em; }
+.tableblock caption { padding: 0 0 0.5em 0; }
+.tableblock thead th,
+.tableblock tbody td,
+.tableblock tfoot td { padding: 0 0.5em; }
+.quoteblock { padding: 0 2.0em; }
+
+.paragraph { margin: 1em 0 0 0; }
+.sidebarblock .paragraph:first-child,
+.exampleblock .paragraph:first-child,
+.admonitionblock .paragraph:first-child { margin: 0; }
+
+ .ulist, .olist, .dlist, .hdlist, .qlist { margin: 1em 0; }
+li .ulist, li .olist, li .dlist, li .hdlist, li .qlist,
+dd .ulist, dd .olist, dd .dlist, dd .hdlist, dd .qlist { margin: 0; }
+ul { margin-left: 1.5em; }
+ol { margin-left: 2em; }
+dd { margin-left: 3em; }
+td.hdlist1 { padding-right: 1em; }
+
+/*** Fonts ***/
+
+body { font-family: Verdana, sans-serif; }
+#header { font-family: Arial, sans-serif; }
+#header h1 { font-family: Arial, sans-serif; }
+#footer { font-family: Georgia, serif; }
+#email { font-size: 0.85em; }
+#revnumber { font-size: 0.75em; }
+#toc { font-size: 0.9em; }
+#toctitle { font-weight: bold; }
+#footer { font-size: 0.8em; }
+
+h2, h3, h4, h5, .title { font-family: Arial, sans-serif; }
+h2 { font-size: 1.5em; }
+.sectionbody { font-size: 0.85em; }
+.sectionbody .sectionbody { font-size: inherit; }
+h3 { font-size: 159%; } /* 1.35em */
+h4 { font-size: 141%; } /* 1.2em */
+h5 { font-size: 118%; } /* 1em */
+.title { font-size: 106%; /* 0.9em */
+ font-weight: bold;
+ }
+
+tt, .monospaced { font-family: monospace; font-size: 106%; } /* 0.9em */
+dt, td.hdlist1, .qlist em { font-family: Times New Roman, serif;
+ font-size: 118%; /* 1em */
+ font-style: italic;
+ }
+.tableblock tfoot td { font-weight: bold; }
+
+/*** Colors and Backgrounds ***/
+
+h1 { color: #527bbd; border-bottom: 2px solid silver; }
+#footer { border-top: 2px solid silver; }
+
+h2 { color: #527bbd; border-bottom: 2px solid silver; }
+h3 { color: #5D7EAE; border-bottom: 2px solid silver; }
+h3 { display: inline-block; }
+h4,h5 { color: #5D7EAE; }
+
+.admonitionblock td.content { border-left: 2px solid silver; }
+.listingblock .content { background: #f4f4f4; border: 1px solid silver; border-left: 5px solid #e0e0e0; }
+.sidebarblock > .content { background: #ffffee; border: 1px solid silver; border-left: 5px solid #e0e0e0; }
+.exampleblock > .content { border-left: 2px solid silver; }
+.quoteblock { border-left: 5px solid #e0e0e0; }
+.tableblock table {
+ border-collapse: collapse;
+ border-width: 3px;
+ border-color: #527bbd;
+}
+.tableblock table[frame=hsides] { border-style: solid none; }
+.tableblock table[frame=border] { border-style: solid; }
+.tableblock table[frame=void] { border-style: none; }
+.tableblock table[frame=vsides] { border-style: none solid; }
+.tableblock table[rules=all] tbody tr *,
+.tableblock table[rules=rows] tbody tr * {
+ border-top: 1px solid #527bbd;
+}
+.tableblock table[rules=all] tr *,
+.tableblock table[rules=cols] tr * {
+ border-left: 1px solid #527bbd;
+}
+.tableblock table tbody tr:first-child * {
+ border-top: 1px solid white; /* none don't work here... %-[] */
+}
+.tableblock table tr *:first-child {
+ border-left: none;
+}
+.tableblock table[frame] thead tr *,
+.tableblock table[frame] thead tr * {
+ border-top: 1px solid white;
+ border-bottom: 2px solid #527bbd;
+}
+.tableblock table tr td p.table,
+.tableblock table tr td p.table * {
+ border: 0px;
+}
+
+tt, .monospaced { color: navy; }
+
+li { color: #a0a0a0; }
+li > * { color: black; }
+
+span.aqua { color: aqua; }
+span.black { color: black; }
+span.blue { color: blue; }
+span.fuchsia { color: fuchsia; }
+span.gray { color: gray; }
+span.green { color: green; }
+span.lime { color: lime; }
+span.maroon { color: maroon; }
+span.navy { color: navy; }
+span.olive { color: olive; }
+span.purple { color: purple; }
+span.red { color: red; }
+span.silver { color: silver; }
+span.teal { color: teal; }
+span.white { color: white; }
+span.yellow { color: yellow; }
+
+span.aqua-background { background: aqua; }
+span.black-background { background: black; }
+span.blue-background { background: blue; }
+span.fuchsia-background { background: fuchsia; }
+span.gray-background { background: gray; }
+span.green-background { background: green; }
+span.lime-background { background: lime; }
+span.maroon-background { background: maroon; }
+span.navy-background { background: navy; }
+span.olive-background { background: olive; }
+span.purple-background { background: purple; }
+span.red-background { background: red; }
+span.silver-background { background: silver; }
+span.teal-background { background: teal; }
+span.white-background { background: white; }
+span.yellow-background { background: yellow; }
+
+span.big { font-size: 2em; }
+span.small { font-size: 0.6em; }
+
+span.underline { text-decoration: underline; }
+span.overline { text-decoration: overline; }
+span.line-through { text-decoration: line-through; }
+
+/*** Misc ***/
+
+.admonitionblock td.icon { vertical-align: top; }
+.attribution { text-align: right; }
+
+ul { list-style-type: disc; }
+ol.arabic { list-style-type: decimal; }
+ol.loweralpha { list-style-type: lower-alpha; }
+ol.upperalpha { list-style-type: upper-alpha; }
+ol.lowerroman { list-style-type: lower-roman; }
+ol.upperroman { list-style-type: upper-roman; }
+.hdlist td { vertical-align: top; }
+
+
+</style>
+<script type="text/javascript">
+/*<+'])');
+ // Function that scans the DOM tree for header elements (the DOM2
+ // nodeIterator API would be a better technique but not supported by all
+ // browsers).
+ var iterate = function (el) {
+ for (var i = el.firstChild; i != null; i = i.nextSibling) {
+ if (i.nodeType == 1 /* Node.ELEMENT_NODE */) {
+ var mo = re.exec(i.tagName);
+ if (mo && (i.getAttribute("class") || i.getAttribute("className")) != "float") {
+ result[result.length] = new TocEntry(i, getText(i), mo[1]-1);
+ }
+ iterate(i);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ iterate(el);
+ return result;
+ }
+
+ var toc = document.getElementById("toc");
+ if (!toc) {
+ return;
+ }
+
+ // Delete existing TOC entries in case we're reloading the TOC.
+ var tocEntriesToRemove = [];
+ var i;
+ for (i = 0; i < toc.childNodes.length; i++) {
+ var entry = toc.childNodes[i];
+ if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div'
+ && entry.getAttribute("class")
+ && entry.getAttribute("class").match(/^toclevel/))
+ tocEntriesToRemove.push(entry);
+ }
+ for (i = 0; i < tocEntriesToRemove.length; i++) {
+ toc.removeChild(tocEntriesToRemove[i]);
+ }
+
+ // Rebuild TOC entries.
+ var entries = tocEntries(document.getElementById("content"), toclevels);
+ for (var i = 0; i < entries.length; ++i) {
+ var entry = entries[i];
+ if (entry.element.id == "")
+ entry.element.id = "_toc_" + i;
+ var a = document.createElement("a");
+ a.href = "#" + entry.element.id;
+ a.appendChild(document.createTextNode(entry.text));
+ var div = document.createElement("div");
+ div.appendChild(a);
+ div.className = "toclevel" + entry.toclevel;
+ toc.appendChild(div);
+ }
+ if (entries.length == 0)
+ toc.parentNode.removeChild(toc);
+},
+
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Footnotes generator
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/* Based on footnote generation code from:
+ * http://www.brandspankingnew.net/archive/2005/07/format_footnote.html
+ */
+
+footnotes: function () {
+ // Delete existing footnote entries in case we're reloading the footnodes.
+ var i;
+ var noteholder = document.getElementById("footnotes");
+ if (!noteholder) {
+ return;
+ }
+ var entriesToRemove = [];
+ for (i = 0; i < noteholder.childNodes.length; i++) {
+ var entry = noteholder.childNodes[i];
+ if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div' && entry.getAttribute("class") == "footnote")
+ entriesToRemove.push(entry);
+ }
+ for (i = 0; i < entriesToRemove.length; i++) {
+ noteholder.removeChild(entriesToRemove[i]);
+ }
+
+ // Rebuild footnote entries.
+ var cont = document.getElementById("content");
+ var spans = cont.getElementsByTagName("span");
+ var refs = {};
+ var n = 0;
+ for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) {
+ if (spans[i].className == "footnote") {
+ n++;
+ var note = spans[i].getAttribute("data-note");
+ if (!note) {
+ // Use [\s\S] in place of . so multi-line matches work.
+ // Because JavaScript has no s (dotall) regex flag.
+ note = spans[i].innerHTML.match(/\s*\[([\s\S]*)]\s*/)[1];
+ spans[i].innerHTML =
+ "[<a id='_footnoteref_" + n + "' href='#_footnote_" + n +
+ "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]";
+ spans[i].setAttribute("data-note", note);
+ }
+ noteholder.innerHTML +=
+ "<div class='footnote' id='_footnote_" + n + "'>" +
+ "<a href='#_footnoteref_" + n + "' title='Return to text'>" +
+ n + "</a>. " + note + "</div>";
+ var id =spans[i].getAttribute("id");
+ if (id != null) refs["#"+id] = n;
+ }
+ }
+ if (n == 0)
+ noteholder.parentNode.removeChild(noteholder);
+ else {
+ // Process footnoterefs.
+ for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) {
+ if (spans[i].className == "footnoteref") {
+ var href = spans[i].getElementsByTagName("a")[0].getAttribute("href");
+ href = href.match(/#.*/)[0]; // Because IE return full URL.
+ n = refs[href];
+ spans[i].innerHTML =
+ "[<a href='#_footnote_" + n +
+ "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]";
+ }
+ }
+ }
+},
+
+install: function(toclevels) {
+ var timerId;
+
+ function reinstall() {
+ asciidoc.footnotes();
+ if (toclevels) {
+ asciidoc.toc(toclevels);
+ }
+ }
+
+ function reinstallAndRemoveTimer() {
+ clearInterval(timerId);
+ reinstall();
+ }
+
+ timerId = setInterval(reinstall, 500);
+ if (document.addEventListener)
+ document.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded", reinstallAndRemoveTimer, false);
+ else
+ window.onload = reinstallAndRemoveTimer;
+}
+
+}
+asciidoc.install(3);
+/*]]>*/
+</script>
+</head>
+<body class="article">
+<div id="header">
+</div>
+<div id="content">
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Subsurface4Banner.jpg" alt="Banner" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="big">MANUEL UTILISATEUR</span></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Auteurs du manuel</strong> : Willem Ferguson, Jacco van Koll, Dirk Hohndel, Reinout Hoornweg,
+Linus Torvalds, Miika Turkia, Amit Chaudhuri, Jan Schubert, Salvador Cuñat, Pedro Neves</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="blue"><em>Version 4.4, Février 2015</em></span></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Bienvenue en tant qu’utilisateur de <em>Subsurface</em>, un programme avancé
+d’enregistrement de plongées (carnet de plongées) avec une bonne
+infrastructure pour décrire, organiser, interpréter et imprimer des plongées
+en scaphandre et en apnée. <em>Subsurface</em> offre de nombreux avantages par
+rapport à d’autres solutions logicielles similaires :</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Avez-vous besoin d’une façon d’enregistrer vos plongées utilisant des
+ équipements loisirs, même sans utiliser d’ordinateur de plongée ?
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Utilisez-vous deux marques différentes d’ordinateurs de plongée, chacun avec
+ son propre logiciel propriétaire pour télécharger les enregistrements des
+ plongées ? Plongez-vous avec un recycleur ou un équipement en circuit ouvert
+ ou de loisir ? Utilisez-vous un enregistreur de profondeur et de durée
+ Reefnet Sensus avec un ordinateur de plongée ? <em>Subsurface</em> offre une
+ interface standard pour télécharger les enregistrements des plongées à
+ partir de tous ces équipements de plongée et pour enregistrer et analyser
+ ces enregistrements dans un système unique.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Utilisez-vous plus d’un système d’exploitation ? <em>Subsurface</em> est
+ intégralement compatible avec Mac, Linux et Windows, ce qui vous permet
+ d’accéder à vos enregistrements de plongées sur chaque système
+ d’exploitation en utilisant une application unique.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Utilisez-vous Linux ou Mac et votre ordinateur de plongée n’a que des
+ logiciels pour Windows pour télécharger les informations de plongées (par
+ exemple Mares) ? <em>Subsurface</em> fournit un moyen de télécharger et d’analyser
+ vos enregistrements de plongées sur d’autres systèmes d’exploitation.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Avez-vous besoin d’un planificateur de plongée graphique intuitif qui
+ intègre et prend en compte les plongées qui ont déjà été enregistrées ?
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> est disponible pour Windows (Win XP ou plus récent), les Macs
+basés sur processeurs Intel (OS/X) et de nombreuses distributions
+Linux. <em>Subsurface</em> peut être compilé pour bien plus de plateformes
+matérielles et d’environnements logiciels où Qt et libdivecomputer sont
+disponibles.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Le but de ce document est l’utilisation du programme Subsurface. Pour
+installer le logiciel, consultez la page <em>Téléchargement</em> sur le
+<a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/">site web de <em>Subsurface</em></a>. En cas de
+problème, vous pouvez envoyer un e-mail sur
+<a href="mailto:subsurface@subsurface-divelog.org">notre liste de diffusion</a> et
+rapportez les bogues sur <a href="http://trac.hohndel.org">notre bugtracker</a>. Pour
+des instructions de compilation du logiciel et (si besoin) de ses
+dépendances, merci de consulter le fichier INSTALL inclus dans les sources
+logicielles.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Public</strong> : Plongeurs loisirs, apnéistes, plongeurs Tek et plongeurs
+professionnels</p></div>
+<div id="toc">
+ <div id="toctitle">Table of Contents</div>
+ <noscript><p><b>JavaScript must be enabled in your browser to display the table of contents.</b></p></noscript>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_UserSurvey">1. Utilisation de ce manuel</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Lorsqu’il est ouvert depuis <em>Subsurface</em>, ce manuel n’a pas de contrôles
+externes. Cependant, une fonction de <em>RECHERCHE</em> est importante. Elle est
+activée par la combinaison de touches du clavier Ctrl-F ou commande-F. Un
+champ de recherche apparait en bas de la fenêtre. Il suffit de l’utiliser
+pour rechercher n’importe quel terme dans le manuel.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_le_sondage_utilisateur">2. Le sondage utilisateur</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dans le but de développer <em>Subsurface</em> d’une manière qui serve ses
+utilisateurs de la meilleur manière qu’il soit, il est important d’avoir des
+informations sur les utilisateurs. À l’ouverture de <em>Subsurface</em> après avoir
+utilisé le logiciel pendant une semaine environ, une fenêtre de sondage
+apparait. Cela est complètement optionnel et l’utilisateur contrôle quelles
+informations sont envoyées ou non à l'équipe de développement de
+<em>Subsurface</em>. Toutes les données que l’utilisateur choisit d’envoyer sont
+extrêmement utiles et ne seront utilisées que pour les futures
+développements et modifications du logiciel pour coller au mieux aux besoins
+des utilisateurs de <em>Subsurface</em>. Si vous complétez le sondage ou cliquez
+sur l’option pour ne plus être sondé, cela devrait être la dernière
+communication de ce type que vous recevrez. Cependant, si vos habitudes de
+plongées ou d’utilisation de Subsurface changent, vous pouvez envoyer un
+nouveau sondage en démarrant <em>Subsurface</em> avec l’option <em>--survey</em> sur la
+ligne de commande.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_StartUsing">3. Commencer à utiliser le programme</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La fenêtre <em>Subsurface</em> est généralement divisée en 4 panneaux avec un <strong>Menu
+principal</strong> (Fichier Importer Journal Vue Aide) en haut de la fenêtre (pour
+Windows et Linux) ou en haut de l'écran (pour Mac et Ubuntu Unity). Les
+quatre panneaux sont :</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La <strong>liste des plongées</strong> en bas à gauche, contenant une liste de toutes les
+plongées du journal (carnet) de plongées de l’utilisateur. Une plongée peut
+être sélectionnée et mise en surbrillance dans la liste en cliquant
+dessus. Dans la plupart des cas, les touches haut/bas peuvent être utilisée
+pour passer d’une plongée à l’autre. La <strong>liste des plongées</strong> est un outil
+important pour manipuler un journal (carnet) de plongée.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La <strong>carte de plongée</strong> en bas à droite, affiche les sites de plongées de
+l’utilisateur, sur une carte mondiale et centrée sur le site de la dernière
+plongée sélectionnée dans la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Les <strong>informations de plongée</strong> en haut à gauche, fournissent des informations
+détaillées sur la plongée sélectionnée dans la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>, dont
+des statistiques pour la plongée sélectionnée ou pour toutes les plongées
+mises en surbrillance.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Le <strong>profil de plongée</strong> en haut à droite, affiche un profil de plongée
+graphique de la plongée sélectionnée dans la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Les séparateurs entre ces panneaux peuvent être déplacés pour modifier la
+taille de chaque panneau. <em>Subsurface</em> mémorise la position de ces
+séparateurs, pour qu’au prochain lancement <em>Subsurface</em> utilise ces
+positions.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Si une plongée est sélectionnée dans la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>, l’emplacement
+de la plongée, les informations détaillées et le profil de la <em>plongée
+sélectionnée</em> sont affichées dans les panneaux respectifs. D’autre part, si
+plus d’une plongée est mise en surbrillance seule la dernière mise en
+surbrillance est la <em>plongée sélectionnée</em>, mais les données de <em>toutes les
+plongées mises en surbrillances</em> sont affichées dans l’onglet <strong>Stats</strong> du
+panneau <strong>informations de plongée</strong> (profondeur maximale, minimale et moyenne,
+les durées, les températures de l’eau et le SAC (air consommé); temps total
+et nombre de plongées sélectionnées).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" id="S_ViewPanels" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/main_window_f20.jpg" alt="The Main Window" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>L’utilisateur peut déterminer si lesquels des quatre panneaux sont affichés
+en sélectionnant l’option <strong>Vue</strong> dans le menu principal. Cette fonctionnalité
+permet plusieurs choix d’affichage :</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Tout</strong> : affiche les quatre panneaux tels que sur la capture d'écran ci-dessus.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Liste des plongées</strong> : affiche uniquement la liste des plongées.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Profil</strong> : affiche uniquement le profile de plongée de la plongée sélectionnée.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Info</strong> : affiche uniquement les notes de plongées de la dernière plongée sélectionnée et les statistiques pour
+toutes les plongées mises en surbrillance.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Globe</strong> : affiche uniquement la carte mondiale, centrée sur la dernière plongée sélectionnée.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Comme la plupart des autre fonctions qui peuvent être accédée via le menu
+principal, ces options peuvent être utilisées par des raccourcis
+clavier. Les raccourcis pour un système particulier sont affichés avec un
+souligné des les entrées de menu. À cause des différents systèmes
+d’exploitation et des divers langues, <em>Subsurface</em> peut utiliser différentes
+touches de raccourcis et ne sont donc pas détaillées ici.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Lorsque le programme est lancé pour la première fois, il n’affiche aucune
+information. Ceci parce que le programme n’a aucune information de plongée
+disponible. Dans les sections suivantes, le procédure pour créer a nouveau
+carnet de plongée sera détaillée.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_NewLogbook">4. Créer un nouveau carnet de plongée</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Sélectionner <em>Fichier → Nouveau carnet de plongée</em> à partir du menu
+principal. Toutes les données de plongées sont effacées pour que de
+nouvelles puissent être ajoutées. S’il existe des données non encore
+enregistrées dans le carnet ouvert, l’utilisateur devra sélectionner s’il
+faut les enregistrer ou non avant de créer le nouveau carnet.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_GetInformation">5. Storing dive information in the logbook</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now that a new logbook was created, it is simple to add dive data to it.
+<em>Subsurface</em> allows several ways of adding dive data to a logbook, detailed
+in the following sections.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>1) If the user has a handwritten divelog, a spreadsheet or another form of
+ manually maintained divelog, dive data can be added to the logbook using one
+ of these approaches:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Enter dive information by hand. This is useful if the diver did not
+ use a dive computer and dives were recorded in a written logbook. See:
+ <a href="#S_EnterData">Entering dive information by hand</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Import dive log information that has been maintained either as a spreadsheet
+ or as a CSV file. Refer to: <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a
+ spreadsheet to CSV format</a> and to <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives
+ in CSV format</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>2) If one has dives recorded using a dive computer, the depth profile of the
+ dive and a large amount of additional information can be accessed. These
+ dives can be imported from:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The divecomputer itself. See: <a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer">Importing new dive
+ information from a Dive Computer</a> or
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Proprietary software distributed by manufacturers of dive computers. Refer
+ to: <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive information from other
+ digital data sources or other data formats</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Import from spreadsheet or CSV files containing dive profiles.
+ See: <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive
+ computers or other dive log software</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_EnterData">5.1. Entering dive information by hand</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This is usually the approach for dives without a dive computer. The basic
+record of information within <em>Subsurface</em> is a dive. The most important
+information in a simple dive logbook usually includes dive type, date, time,
+duration, depth, the names of your dive buddy and of the dive master or dive
+guide, and some remarks about the dive. <em>Subsurface</em> can store much more
+information than this for each dive. In order to add a dive to a dive log,
+select <em>Log → Add Dive</em> from the Main Menu. The program then shows three
+panels to enter information for a dive: two tabs in the <strong>Dive Info</strong> panel
+(<strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong>), as well as the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel that
+displays a graphical profile of each dive. These panels are respectively
+marked <span class="red">A</span>, <span class="red">B</span> and <span class="red">C</span> in the figure below. Each of these
+tabs will now be explained for data entry.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/AddDive1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Add dive" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When one edits a field in Dive notes or Equipment panels, <em>Subsurface</em>
+enters <strong>Editing Mode</strong>, indicated by the message in the blue box at the top
+of the <em>Dive Notes</em> panel (see the image below). This message is displayed
+in all the panels under Dive notes and Equipment when in <strong>Editing Mode</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="Blue edit bar" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Save</em> button should only be selected after all the parts of a dive have
+been entered. When entering dives by hand, the <em>Info</em>, <em>Equipment</em> and
+<em>Profile</em> tabs should be completed before saving the information. By
+selecting the <em>Save</em> button, a local copy of the information for this
+specific dive is saved in memory. When one closes Subsurface, the program
+will ask again, this time whether the complete dive log should be saved on
+disk or not.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_notes_de_plongée">5.1.1. Notes de plongée</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel contains the date, time and place information for a particular
+dive, environmental conditions, co-divers and buddies, as well as some
+descriptive information. If one clicks on the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the
+following fields are visible:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/AddDive2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and the time of the dive. By clicking the
+date, a calendar is displayed from which one can choose the correct
+date. Press ESC to escape from the calendar. The time values (hour and
+minutes) can also be edited directly by clicking on each of them in the text
+box and by overtyping the information displayed. The default date is the
+present date and the default time is an hour in advance of the present time.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Air and water temperatures</strong>: the air and water temperatures during the
+dive can be typed directly on the fields to the right of the Start time.
+Temperature units are not needed, as they will be automatically supplied by
+<em>Subsurface</em>. Only the numerical value must be
+typed by the user (the units selected in the <em>Preferences</em>
+will determine whether metric or imperial units are used).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Location</strong>: Here the name of the dive site can be entered, e.g. "Tihany, Lake
+Balaton,
+Hungary". Auto completion of location names will make this easier if one
+frequently dives at the same sites.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Coordinates</strong>: The geographic coordinates of the dive site should be entered
+here. These can come from three sources:</p></div>
+<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
+<li>
+<p>
+One can find the coordinates on the world map in the bottom right hand part
+ of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "No
+ location data - Move the map and double-click to set the dive
+ location". Upon a double-click at the appropriate place, the green bar
+ disappears and the coordinates are stored.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The coordinates can be obtained from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if the
+ user has an Android or iPhone device with GPS and if the coordinates of the
+ dive site were stored using that device. <a href="#S_Companion">Click here for
+ more information</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The coordinates can be entered by hand if they are known, using one of four
+ formats with latitude followed by longitude:
+</p>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>ISO 6709 Annex D format e.g. 30°13'28.9"N 30°49'1.5"E Degrees and decimal
+minutes, e.g. N30° 13.49760' , E30° 49.30788' Degrees minutes seconds,
+e.g. N30° 13' 29.8" , E30° 49' 1.5" Decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 ,
+30.821798</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Southern hemisphere latitudes are given with a <strong>S</strong>, e.g. S30°, or with a
+negative value, e.g. -30.22496. Similarly western longitudes are given with
+a <strong>W</strong>, e.g. W07°, or with a negative value, e.g. -7.34323.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Please note that GPS coordinates of a dive site are linked to the Location
+name - so adding coordinates to dives that do not have a location
+description will cause unexpected behaviour (Subsurface will think that all
+of these dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates
+the same).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive mode</strong>: This is a dropdown box allowing one to choose the type of dive
+performed. The options are OC (Open Circuit, the default setting, meant for most recreational dives),
+Freedive (dive without SCUBA equipment), CCR (Closed-circuit
+rebreather) and pSCR (Passive semi-closed rebreather).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: The name of the dive master or dive guide for this dive can be
+entered here.
+Again, this field offers auto completion based on the list of dive masters in
+the current logbook.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Buddy</strong>: In this field one can enter the name(s) of the buddy / buddies
+(separated by commas) who accompanied the user on the dive. Auto completion
+is offered based on the list of buddies in the current logbook.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Suit</strong>: The type of diving suit used for the dive can be entered here.
+As with the other items, auto completion of the suit description is available.
+Some dry-suit users may choose to use this field to record what combination of
+suit and thermal protection undersuit was used.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Rating</strong>: One can provide a subjective overall rating of the dive on a
+5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star on the rating scale.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Visibility</strong>: Similarly, one can provide a rating of visibility during the
+dive on a
+5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Tags</strong>: Tags that describe the type of dive performed may
+be entered here (separated by commas). Examples of common tags are boat, drift,
+training, cave etc. <em>Subsurface</em> has many built-in tags. Auto completion is once again offered.
+For instance, if <code>cav</code> was typed, then the tags <strong>cave</strong> and <strong>cavern</strong> are
+shown for the user to choose from.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Notes</strong>: Any additional information can be typed here.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Save</strong> and <strong>Cancel</strong> buttons are used to save all the information for
+tabs in the info panel and in the dive profile panel, so there’s no need to
+use them until ALL other information has been added. Here is an example of a
+completed Dive Notes panel:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_equipment">5.1.2. Equipment</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allows the user to enter information about the type of
+cylinder and gas used, as well as the weights used for a dive. This is a
+highly interactive part of <em>Subsurface</em> and the information on cylinders and
+gases (entered here) affects the behaviour of the dive profile (top
+right-hand panel).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_CylinderData"><p><strong>Cylinders</strong>: The cylinder information is entered through a dialogue that looks
+like this:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Gas_dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Initial cylinder dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The + button at the top right allows the user to add more cylinders for this
+dive. The dark dustbin icon on the left allows one to delete information
+for a particular cylinder. Note that it is not possible to delete a cylinder
+if it is used during the dive. One cylinder is implicitly used in the dive,
+even without a gas change event. Thus the first cylinder cannot be deleted
+until another cylinder is created.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Start by selecting a cylinder type on the left-hand side of the table. To
+select a cylinder, click in the <strong>Type</strong> box. This brings up a button that
+can be used to display a dropdown list of cylinders:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Gas_dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The cylinder drop-down list button" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can be used to select the cylinder type used for the dive
+or the user may start typing in the box which shows the available options
+for the entered characters. The <strong>Size</strong> of the cylinder as well as its
+working pressure (<strong>WorkPress</strong>) will automatically be shown in the
+dialogue. If a cylinder is not shown in the dropdown list, type the name and
+description of that cylinder into the <strong>Type</strong> field.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Next, indicate the starting pressure and the ending pressure of the gas used
+during the dive. The unit of pressure (metric/imperial) corresponds to the
+setting in the <em>Preferences</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, type in the gas mixture used in the <strong>O2%</strong> field. If air was used, a
+value of 21% can be entered on this field, or it might be left blank. If
+nitrox or trimix were used, their percentages of oxygen and/or helium must
+be specified. Any inappropriate fields should be left empty. After typing
+the information for the cylinder, press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click
+outside the cell that contains the cursor. Information for any additional
+cylinders can be added by using the + button at the top right
+hand. Following is an example of a complete description for a dive made
+using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used during a dive can be entered
+using a dialogue very similar to that for the cylinder information. If the user
+clicks the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks
+like this:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Weights dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If one then clicks on the <strong>Type</strong> field, a drop-down list becomes accessible
+through a down-arrow:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Weights type drop-down list button" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the type of weight system or
+the user may start typing in the box which shows the available options for
+the entered characters. In the <strong>Weight</strong> field, the weight used during the
+dive must be typed. After typing the information for the weight system the
+user must either press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click outside the cell
+that contains the cursor. It is possible to enter information for more than
+one weight system by adding an additional system using the + button on the
+top right hand. Weight systems can be deleted using the dustbin icon on the
+left hand. Here is an example of information for a dive with two types of
+weights: integrated and a weight belt:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There’s NO need to click the <em>Save</em> button before the dive profile has been
+completed.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">5.1.3. Creating a Dive Profile</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Dive Profile</strong> (a graphical representation of the depth of the dive as a
+function of time) is indicated in the panel on the top right hand of the
+<em>Subsurface</em> window. When a dive is manually added to a logbook,
+<em>Subsurface</em> presents a default dive profile that needs to be modified to
+best represent the dive being described:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DiveProfile1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Modifying the dive profile</em>: When the cursor is moved around the dive
+profile, its position is indicated by two coloured lines (red and green) as
+shown below. The depth and time that the cursor represents are indicated at
+the top of the black information box (@ and D). The units (metric/imperial)
+on the axes are determined by the <strong>Preference</strong> settings. The dive profile
+itself comprises several line segments demarcated by waypoints (white dots
+on the profile, as shown above). The default dive depth is 15 m. If the
+dive depth was 20 m then the user needs to drag the appropriate waypoints
+downwards to represent 20 m. To add a waypoint, double-click on any line
+segment. To move an additional waypoint, drag it. To remove this waypoint,
+right-click on it and choose "Remove this point" from the context menu. The
+user needs to drag the waypoints to represent an accurate time duration for
+the dive. Below is a dive profile that represents a dive to 20 m for 30 min,
+followed by a 5 minute safety stop at 5 m.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DiveProfile2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Edited dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Specifying the gas composition:</em> The gas composition used is clearly
+indicated along the line segments of the dive profile. This defaults to the
+first gas mixture specified in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab, which was air in the
+case of the profile illustrated above. The gas mixtures of segments of the
+dive profile can be edited. This is done by right-clicking on the particular
+waypoint and selecting the appropriate gas from the context menu. Changing
+the gas for a waypoint affects the gas shown in the segment <em>to the left</em> of
+that waypoint. Note that only the gases defined in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab
+appear in the context menu.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DiveProfile3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Gas composition context menu" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is the profile of a dive to 25 m for 30 min and with a switch from air
+to EAN50 at the end of the duration at 20m. In this case the first cylinder
+in the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab contained air and the second cylinder contained
+EAN50.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DiveProfile4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Completed dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_saving_the_hand_entered_dive_information">5.1.4. Saving the hand-entered dive information</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The information entered in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab as well
+as the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> can now be saved in the user’s logbook by using the
+two buttons on the top right hand of the Dive Notes tab. If the <em>Save</em>
+button is clicked, the dive data are saved in the current logbook. If the
+<em>Cancel</em> button is clicked, the newly entered dive data are discarded. When
+exiting <em>Subsurface</em>, the user will be prompted once more to save the
+logbook with the new dive(s).</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportDiveComputer">5.2. Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</h3>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_connecting_and_importing_data_from_a_dive_computer">5.2.1. Connecting and importing data from a dive computer.</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The use of dive computers allows the collection of a large amount of
+information about each dive, e.g. a detailed record of depth, duration,
+rates of ascent/descent and of gas partial pressures. <em>Subsurface</em> can
+capture this information and present it as part of the dive information,
+using dive information from a wide range of dive computers. The latest list
+of supported dive computers can be found at:
+<a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/supported-dive-computers/">
+Supported dive computers</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/warning2.png" alt="Warning" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Several dive computers consume more power when they are in their
+PC-Communication mode. <strong>This could drain the dive computer’s battery</strong>. We
+therefore recommend that the user checks if the dive computer is charged
+when connected to the USB port of a PC. For example, several Suunto and
+Mares dive computers do not recharge through the USB connection. Users
+should refer to the dive computer’s manual if they are unsure whether the
+dive computer recharges its batteries while connected to the USB port.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To import dive information from a dive computer to a computer with
+<em>Subsurface</em>, it is necessary that the two pieces of equipment communicate
+with one another. This involves setting up the communications port (or
+mount point) of the computer with <em>Subsurface</em> that communicates with the
+dive computer. In order to set up this communication, one needs to find the
+appropriate information to instruct <em>Subsurface</em> where and how to import the
+dive information.
+<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix
+A</a> provides the technical information to help the user achieving this for
+different operating systems and
+<a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix
+B</a> has dive computer specific information.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After this, the dive computer can be hooked up to the user’s PC, which can
+be achieved by following these steps:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+The interface cable should be connected to a free USB port (or the Infra-red
+ or Bluetooth connection set up as described later in this manual)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dive computer should be placed into PC Communication mode.
+ (Users should refer to the manual of their specific dive computer)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In <em>Subsurface</em>, from the Main Menu, the user must select <em>Import → Import
+ From Dive Computer</em>. Dialogue <strong>A</strong> in the figure below appears:
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DC_import_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download dialogue 1" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive computers tend to keep a certain number of dives in their memory, even
+though these dives have already been imported to <em>Subsurface</em>. For that
+reason, if the divecomputer allows this, <em>Subsurface</em> only imports dives
+that have not been uploaded before. This makes the download process faster
+on most dive computers and also saves battery power of the dive computer (at
+least for those not charging while connected via USB). If, for some reason,
+the user wishes to import ALL dives from the dive computer, even though some
+may already be in the logbook, then check the check box labelled <em>Force
+download of all dives</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dialogue has two drop-down lists, <strong>Vendor</strong> and <strong>Dive Computer</strong>. On the
+ <strong>vendor</strong> drop-down list select the make of the computer, e.g. Suunto,
+ Oceanic, Uwatec, Mares. On the <strong>Dive Computer</strong> drop-down list, the model
+ name of the dive computer must be selected, e.g. D4 (Suunto), Veo200
+ (Oceanic), or Puck (Mares).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The <strong>Device or Mount Point</strong> drop-down list contains the USB or Bluetooth
+ port name that <em>Subsurface</em> needs in order to communicate with the dive
+ computer. The appropriate port name must be selected. Consult
+ <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix
+ A</a> and
+ <a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix
+ B</a> for technical details on how to find the appropriate port information for
+ a particular dive computer and, in some cases, how to do the correct
+ settings to the operating system of the computer on which <em>Subsurface</em> is
+ running.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If all the dives on the dive computer need to be downloaded, check the
+ checkbox <em>Force download of all dives</em>. Normally, <em>Subsurface</em> only
+ downloads dives after the date-time of the last dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong>
+ panel. If one or more of your dives in <em>Subsurface</em> have been accidentally
+ deleted or if there are older dives that still need to be downloaded from
+ the dive computer, this checkbox needs to be activated. Some dive computers
+ (e.g. Mares Puck) do not provide a contents list to <em>Subsurface</em> before the
+ download in order to select only new dives. Consequently, for these dive
+ computers, all dives are downloaded irrespective of the status of this check
+ box.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If the checkbox <em>Always prefer downloaded dives</em> has been checked and,
+ during download, dives with identical date-times exist on the dive computer
+ and on the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, the dive in the <em>Subsurface</em>
+ divelog will be overwritten by the dive record from the dive computer
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The checkbox marked <em>Download into new trip</em> ensures that, after upload, the
+ downloaded dives are grouped together as a new trip(s) in the <strong>Dive List</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Do <strong>not</strong> check the checkboxes labelled <em>Save libdivecomputer logfile</em> and
+ <em>Save libdivecomputer dumpfile</em>. These are only used as diagnostic tools
+ when problems with downloads are experienced (see below).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Then select the <em>Download</em> button. After successful download, Dialogue <strong>B</strong>
+ in the figure above appears.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+With communication established, one can see how the data are retrieved from
+ the dive computer. Depending on the make of the dive computer and/or number
+ of recorded dives, this could take some time. Be patient. The <em>Download</em>
+ dialogue shows a progress bar at the bottom of the dialogue (for some dive
+ computers the progress information could be inaccurate as we cannot
+ determine how much downloadable data there is until all data have been
+ downloaded). When the download of the dive information is complete, all the
+ imported dives appear in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, sorted by date and
+ time. Disconnect and switch off the dive computer to conserve its battery
+ power. If a particular dive is selected, the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel shows an
+ informative graph of dive depth against time for that particular dive.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After the dives have been downloaded, they appear in a tabular format on the
+righthand side of the dialogue (see image <strong>B</strong>, above). Each dive comprises a
+row in the table, with the date, duration and depth shown. Next to each dive
+is a checkbox: check all the dives that need to be transfered to the <strong>Dive
+List</strong>. In the case of the image above, the last six dives are checked and
+will be transfered to the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After this has been completed, select the OK button. The checked dives are
+transfered to the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+If there is a problem in communicating with the dive computer, an error
+ message will be shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0
+ Mares (Puck Pro)". Refer to the text in the box below.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="sidebarblock">
+<div class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>PROBLEMS WITH DATA DOWNLOAD FROM A DIVE COMPUTER?</strong></p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Check the following:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Is the dive computer still in PC-communication or Upload mode?
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Is the battery of the dive computer fully charged? If not then the battery
+ must be charged or replaced.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Is the connecting cable faulty? Does the cable work perfectly using other
+ software? Has it worked before, or is this the first time the cable is being
+ used? Are the contacts on the dive computer and the cable clean?
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Consult
+ <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix
+ A</a> and make sure that the correct Mount Point was specified (see above).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+On Unix-like operating systems, does the user have write permission to the
+ USB port? If not, consult
+ <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">Appendix
+ A</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If the <em>Subsurface</em> computer does not recognise the USB adaptor by showing
+an appropriate device name next to the Mount Point, then there is a
+possibility that the cable or USB adaptor is faulty. A faulty cable is the
+most common cause of communication failure between dive computer and
+<em>Subsurface</em> computer. It is also possible that the <em>Subsurface</em> computer
+cannot interpret the data. Perform a download for diagnostic purposes with
+the following two check boxes checked in the download dialogue discussed
+above:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Save libdivecomputer logfile
+Save libdivecomputer dumpfile</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Important</strong>: These check boxes are only used when problems are encountered
+during the download process: under normal circumstances they should not be checked.
+When checking these boxes, the user is prompted to select a folder to
+save the information to. The default folder is the one in which the <em>Subsurface</em>
+dive log is kept.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Important:</strong> <em>After downloading with the above checkboxes
+checked, no dives are added to the
+<strong>Dive List</strong> but two files are created in the folder selected above</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>subsurface.log
+subsurface.bin</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>These files should be send to the <em>Subsurface</em> mail list:
+<em>subsurface@subsurface-divelog.org</em> with a request for the files to be
+analysed. Provide the dive computer make and model as well as contextual
+information about the dives recorded on the dive computer.</p></div>
+</div></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_DeviceNames">5.2.2. Changing the name of a dive computer</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>It may be necessary to distinguish between different dive computers used to
+upload dive logs to <em>Subsurface</em>. For instance if one’s partner’s dive
+computer is the same make and model as one’s own and dive logs are uploaded
+from both dive computers to the same <em>Subsurface</em> computer, then one would
+perhaps like to call one dc "Alice’s Suunto D4" and the other one "Bob’s
+Suunto D4". Alternatively, perhaps a technical diver dives with two or more
+dive computers of the same model, the logs of both (or all) being uploaded.
+In this case it might be prudent to call one of them "Suunto D4 (1)" and
+another one "Suunto D4 (2)". This is easily done in <em>Subsurface</em>. On the
+<strong>Main Menu</strong>, select <em>Log → Edit device names</em>. A dialog opens, indicating
+the current Model, ID and Nickname of the dive computers used for
+upload. Edit the Nickname field for the appropriate dive computer. After
+saving the Nickname, the dive logs show the nickname for that particular
+device instead of the model name, allowing easy identification of devices.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_EditDiveInfo">5.2.3. Updating the dive information imported from the dive computer.</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>With the uploaded dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the information from the dive
+computer is not complete and more details must be added in order to have a
+fuller record of the dives. To do this, the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and the <strong>Equipment</strong>
+tabs on the top left hand of the <em>Subsurface</em> window should be used.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_notes_de_plongée_2">5.2.4. Notes de plongée</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The date and time of the dive, gas mixture and (often) water temperature are
+usually shown as obtained from the dive computer, but the user needs to add
+additional information by hand in order to have a more complete dive
+record. In a few cases, (e.g. APD rebreathers) one also has to provide the
+date and time of the dive. If the contents of this tab is changed or edited
+in any way, the message in a blue box at the top of the panel indicates that
+the dive is being edited. If one clicks on the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab, the
+following fields are visible:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/AddDive3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The Dive Notes tab" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and time of the dive. By clicking the
+date, a calendar is displayed from which one can choose the correct
+date. Press ESC to close the calendar. The time values (hour and minutes)
+can also be edited directly by clicking on each of them in the text box and
+by overtyping the information displayed.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Air/water temperatures</strong>: Air and water temperatures during the dive are shown
+in these fields to the right of the Start time. Many dive computers supply water
+temperature information and this field may therefore contain information obtained from the dive computer.
+If air temperature is not provided by the dive computer, the first temperature reading
+might be used for the air temperature. Generally this is close enough to the real air temperature as
+the change in the temperature sensor reading is quite slow to follow the changes in the environment.
+If editing is required, only a value is required, the units of temperature will be
+automatically supplied by
+<em>Subsurface</em> (according to the <em>Preferences</em>, metric or imperial units will
+be used).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Location</strong>: In this field one should type in text that describes the site
+where the dive was performed, e.g. "Tihany, Lake Balaton, Hungary".
+Auto completion of location names will
+make this easier if one frequently dives at the same sites.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Coordinates</strong>: The geographic coordinates of the dive site should be entered
+here. These can come from three sources:</p></div>
+<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
+<li>
+<p>
+The user can find the coordinates on the world map in the bottom right hand
+ part of the Subsurface window. The map displays a green bar indicating "Move
+ the map and double-click to set the dive location". Double-click at the
+ appropriate place, the green bar disappears and the coordinates are stored.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The user can obtain the coordinates from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if
+ an Android or iPhone device with GPS was used and if the coordinates of the
+ dive site were stored using that device. <a href="#S_Companion">Click here for
+ more information</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The coordinates can be entered by hand if they are known, using one of four
+ formats with latitude followed by longitude:
+</p>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>ISO 6709 Annex D format e.g. 30°13'28.9"N 30°49'1.5"E Degrees and decimal
+minutes, e.g. N30° 13.49760' , E30° 49.30788' Degrees minutes seconds,
+e.g. N30° 13' 29.8" , E30° 49' 1.5" Decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 ,
+30.821798</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Southern hemisphere latitudes are given with a <strong>S</strong>, e.g. S30°, or with a
+negative value, e.g. -30.22496. Similarly, western longitudes are given with
+a <strong>W</strong>, e.g. W07°, or with a negative value, e.g. -7.34323.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Please note that GPS coordinates of a dive site are linked to the Location
+name - so adding coordinates to dives that do not have a location
+description will cause unexpected behaviour (Subsurface will think that all
+of these dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates
+the same).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive mode</strong>: This is a dropdown box allowing one to choose the type of dive
+performed. The options are OC (Open Circuit, the default seting, meant for most recreational dives),
+Freedive (dive without SCUBA equipment), CCR (Closed-circuit
+rebreather) and pSCR (Passive semi-closed rebreather).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemaster</strong>: The name of the dive master or dive guide for this dive should be
+entered in this field
+which offers auto completion based on the list of dive masters in
+the current logbook.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Buddy</strong>: In this field, one enters the name(s) of the buddy / buddies
+(separated with commas) who accompanied him/her on the
+dive. Auto completion based on the list of buddies in the current logbook is
+offered.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Suit</strong>: Here the type of diving suit used for the dive can be entered.
+Auto completion of the suit description is available.
+Some dry-suit users may choose to use this field to record what combination of
+suit and thermal protection undersuit was used.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Rating</strong>: One can provide a subjective overall rating of the dive on a
+5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star on the rating scale.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Visibility</strong>: Similarly, one can provide a rating of visibility during the
+dive on a
+5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Tags</strong>: Tags that describe the type of dive performed can be entered
+here (separated by commas). Examples of common tags are boat, drift, training,
+cave, etc.
+<em>Subsurface</em> has many built-in tags. If the user starts typing a tag, the
+program
+will list the tags that correspond to the typing. For instance, if the user
+typed
+<code>cav</code>, then the tags <strong>cave</strong> and <strong>cavern</strong> are shown for the user to choose from.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Notes</strong>: Any additional information for the dive can be entered here.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>Save</strong> and <strong>Cancel</strong> buttons are used to save all the information for
+tabs in the info panel and in the dive profile panel, so there’s no need to
+use them until ALL other information has been added. Here is an example of a
+completed Dive Notes panel:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CompletedDiveInfo_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed Dive Notes tab" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_equipment_2">5.2.5. Equipment</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allows one to enter information about the type of cylinder
+and gas used as well as the weights used for the dive. The message in a blue
+box at the top of the panel:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Blue edit bar" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>indicates that the dive is being edited. This is a highly interactive part
+of <em>Subsurface</em> and the information on cylinders and gases (entered here)
+determines the behaviour of the dive profile (top right-hand panel).</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Cylinders</strong>: The cylinder information is entered through a dialogue that looks
+like this:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DC_gas-dialogue1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Initial cylinder dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In most cases <em>Subsurface</em> obtains the gas used from the dive computer and
+automatically inserts the gas composition(% oxygen) in the table. The<br />
+button at the top right allows the user to add more cylinders for this
+dive. The dark dustbin icon on the left allows the deletion of information
+for a cylinder. Note that it is not possible to delete a cylinder if it is
+used during the dive. A cylinder might be implicitly used in the dive, even
+without a gas change event.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The user should start by selecting a cylinder type on the left-hand side of
+the table. To select a cylinder, the <strong>cylinder type</strong> box should be
+clicked. This brings up a list button that can be used to display a dropdown
+list of cylinders:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DC_gas-dialogue2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: The cylinder drop-down list button" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the cylinder type that was
+used for this dive or the user may start typing in the box which shows the
+available options for the entered characters. The <strong>Size</strong> of the cylinder as
+well as its working pressure (<strong>WorkPress</strong>) will automatically be shown in
+the dialogue.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Next one must indicate the starting pressure and the ending pressure of the
+specified gas during the dive. The unit of pressure (metric/imperial)
+corresponds to the settings chosen in the <em>Preferences</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, provide the gas mixture used. If air was used, the value of 21% can
+be entered or this field can be left blank. If nitrox or trimix were used,
+their percentages of oxygen and/or helium should be entered. Any
+inappropriate fields should be left empty. After typing the information for
+the cylinder, either press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click outside the cell
+that contains the cursor. Information for any additional cylinders can be
+added by using the + button at the top right hand. Following is an example
+of a complete description for a dive using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CylinderDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: a completed cylinder dive information table" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used can be entered
+using a dialogue very similar to that of the cylinder information. If one
+clicks
+the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks like
+this:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:The Weights dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>By clicking on the <strong>Type</strong> field, a drop-down list becomes accessible through
+a down-arrow:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Weights type drop-down list button" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The drop-down list can then be used to select the type of weight system used
+during the dive or the user may start typing in the box which shows the
+available options for the entered characters. In the <strong>Weight</strong> field, type
+in the amount of weight used during the dive. After specifying the weight
+system, the user can either press <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or click outside
+the cell with the cursor. It is possible to enter information for more than
+one weight system by adding an additional system using the + button on the
+top right hand. Weight systems can be deleted using the dustbin icon on the
+left hand. Here is an example of information for a dive with two types of
+weights: integrated as well as a weight belt:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/WeightsDataEntry3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: A completed weights information table" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_editing_several_selected_dives_simultaneously">5.2.6. Editing several selected dives simultaneously</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>METHOD 1</em>: After uploading dives from a dive computer, the dive profiles of
+the uploaded dives are shown in the <strong>Dive profile</strong> tab, as well as a few
+items of information in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab (e.g. water temperature) and in
+the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab (e.g. gas pressures and gas composition). However the
+other fields remain empty. It may be useful to simultaneously edit some of
+the fields in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. For instance, it is
+possible that a diver performed several dives during a single day, using
+identical equipment while diving at the same dive site or with the same dive
+master and/or buddy or tags. Instead of completing the information for each
+of these dives separately, one can select all the dives for that day in the
+<strong>Dive List</strong> and insert the same information in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and
+<strong>Equipment</strong> fields that need identical information. This is achieved by
+editing the dive notes or the equipment for any one of the selected dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The simultaneous editing only works with fields that do not already contain
+information. This means that, if some fields have been edited for a
+particular dive among the selected dives, these are not changed while
+editing the dives simultaneously. Technically, the rule for editing several
+dives simultaneously is: if the data field being edited contains <em>exactly
+the same information</em> for all the dives that have been selected, the new,
+edited information is substituted for all the selected dives, otherwise only
+the edited dive is changed, even though several dives have been selected in
+the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This greatly speeds up the completion of the dive log after
+several similar dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_CopyComponents"><p><em>METHOD 2</em>:There is a different way of achieving the same goal. Select a
+dive with all the appropriate information typed into the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and
+<strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Copy dive
+components</em>. A box is presented with a selection of check boxes for most of
+the fields in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> and <strong>Equipment</strong> tabs. Select the fields to
+be copied from the currently selected dive, then select <em>OK</em>. Now, in the
+<strong>Dive List</strong>, select the dives into which this information is to be
+pasted. Then, from the main menu, select <em>Log → Paste dive components</em>.
+All the selected dives now contain the data initially selected in the
+original source dive log.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_adding_bookmarks_to_a_dive">5.2.7. Adding Bookmarks to a dive</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers wish to annotate their dives with text that indicate particular
+events during the dive, e.g. "Saw dolphins", or "Released surface
+buoy". This is easily done:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Right-click at the appropriate point on the dive profile. This brings up
+ the dive profile context menu. Select <em>Add bookmark</em>. A red flag is placed
+ on the dive profile at the point that was initially selected (see <strong>A</strong>
+ below).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Right-click on the red flag. This brings up the context menu (see <strong>B</strong>
+ below). Select <em>Edit name</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+A text box is shown. Type the explanatory text for the bookmark (see <strong>C</strong>
+ below). Select <em>OK</em>. This saves the text associated with the bookmark.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If one hovers using the mouse over the red bookmark, the appropriate text is
+ shown at the bottom of the information box (see <strong>D</strong> below).
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Bookmarks.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Bookmark dialog" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_saving_the_updated_dive_information">5.2.8. Saving the updated dive information</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The information entered in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab and the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab can
+be saved by using the two buttons on the top right hand of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong>
+tab. If the <em>Save</em> button is clicked, the dive data are saved. If the
+<em>Cancel</em> button is clicked, then the newly entered dive data are deleted,
+although the dive profile obtained from the dive computer will be
+retained. When the user exits <em>Subsurface</em> there is a final prompt to
+confirm that the new data should be saved.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_importing_dive_information_from_other_digital_data_sources_or_other_data_formats">5.3. Importing dive information from other digital data sources or other data formats</h3>
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>If a user has been diving for some time, it is possible that several dives
+were logged using other dive log software. This information does not need
+retyping because these dive logs can probably be imported into
+<em>Subsurface</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> will import dive logs from a range of other dive
+log software. While some software is supported natively, for others the user
+has to export the logbook(s) to an intermediate format so that they can then
+be imported by <em>Subsurface</em>. Currently, <em>Subsurface</em> supports importing CSV
+log files from several sources. APD LogViewer, XP5, Sensus and Seabear
+files are preconfigured, but because the import is flexible, users can
+configure their own imports. Manually kept log files (e.g. in spreadsheet)
+can also be imported by configuring the CSV import. <em>Subsurface</em> can also
+import UDDF and UDCF files used by some divelog software and some dive
+computers, like the Heinrichs & Weikamp DR5. Finally, for some divelog
+software like Mares Dive Organiser it is currently suggested to import the
+logbooks first into a webservice like <em>divelogs.de</em> and then import them
+from there with <em>Subsurface</em>, as divelogs.de supports a few additional
+logbook formats that <em>Subsurface</em> currently cannot parse.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If the format of other software is supported natively on Subsurface, it
+should be sufficient to select either <em>Import → Import log files</em> or <em>File
+→ Open log file</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> supports the data formats of many dive
+computers, including Suunto and Shearwater. When importing dives,
+<em>Subsurface</em> tries to detect multiple records for the same dive and merges
+the information as best as it can. If there are no time zone issues (or
+other reasons that would cause the beginning time of the dives to be
+significantly different) <em>Subsurface</em> will not create duplicate entries.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_using_the_universal_import_dialogue">5.3.1. Using the universal import dialogue</h4>
+<div class="paragraph" id="Unified_import"><p>Importing dives from other software is performed through a universal
+interface that is activated by selecting <em>Import</em> from the Main Menu, then
+clicking on <em>Import Log Files</em>. This brings up the dialogue <strong>A</strong> below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Import1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Import dialogue: step 1" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Towards the bottom right is a dropdown selector with a default label of
+<em>Dive Log Files</em> which gives access to the different types of direct imports
+available, as in dialogue <strong>B</strong>, above. Currently these are:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+XML-formatted dive logs (DivingLog 5.0, MacDive and several other dive log
+ systems)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+UDDF-formatted dive logs (e.g. Kenozoooid)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+UDCF-formatted dive logs
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Poseidon MkVI CCR logs
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+JDiveLog
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Suunto Dive Manager (DM3 and DM4)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+CSV (text-based and spreadsheet-based) dive logs, including APD CCR logs
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the appropriate file in the file list of the dialogue opens the
+imported dive log in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong>. Some other formats, not
+accessible through the Import dialogue are also supported, as explained
+below.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_importing_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">5.3.2. Importing from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Since Mares utilise proprietary Windows software not compatible with
+multi-platform applications, these dive logs cannot be directly imported
+into <em>Subsurface</em>. Mares dive logs need to be imported using a three-step
+process, using <em>www.divelogs.de</em> as a mechanism to extract the dive log
+information.</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+The dive log data from Mares Dive Organiser need to be exported to the
+ user’s desktop, using a <em>.sdf</em> file name extension. Refer to
+ <a href="#Mares_Export">Appendix C</a> for more information.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Data should then be imported into <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. One needs to create a
+ user account in <em>www.divelogs.de</em>, log into that web site, then select
+ <em>Import Logbook → Dive Organiser</em> from the menu on the left hand side. The
+ instructions must be carefully followed to transfer the dive information (in
+ <em>.sdf</em> format) from the Dive Organiser database to <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Finally, import the dives from <em>divelogs.de</em> to <em>Subsurface</em>, using the
+ instructions below.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">5.3.3. Importing dives from <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The import of dive information from <em>divelogs.de</em> is simple, using a single
+dialogue box. The <em>Import → Import from Divelogs.de</em> option should be
+selected from the Main Menu. This brings up a dialogue box (see figure on
+left [<strong>A</strong>] below). Enter a user-ID and password for <em>divelogs.de</em> into the
+appropriate fields and then select the <em>Download</em> button. Download from
+<em>divelogs.de</em> starts immediately, displaying a progress bar in the dialogue
+box. At the end of the download, the success status is indicated (see figure
+on the right [<strong>B</strong>], below). The <em>Apply</em> button should then be selected,
+after which the imported dives appear in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Divelogs1.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Download from Divelogs.de" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVData">5.3.4. Importing data in CSV format</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A comma-separated file (.csv) can be used to import dive information either
+as dive profiles (as in the case of the APD Inspiration and Evolution closed
+circuit rebreathers) or as dive metadata (in case the user keeps dive data
+in a spreadsheet). The <em>CSV</em> format is a universal simplified format that
+allows for easy information exchange between different computers or software
+packages. For an introduction to CSV-formatted files see <a href="#S_CSV_Intro">A
+Diver’s Introduction To CSV Files</a>. <em>Subsurface</em> dive logs can also be
+exported in <em>CSV</em> format to other software that reads this format. See
+<a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</a> for
+information that may be helpful for importing spreadsheet-based data into
+<em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive computers or other dive log software</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One can view a <em>CSV</em> file by using an ordinary text editor. It is normally
+organised into a single line that provides the headers (or <em>field names</em> or
+<em>column headings</em>) of the data columns, followed by the data, one record per
+line.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are two types of <em>CSV</em> dive logs that can be imported into
+<em>Subsurface</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CSV dive details</em>: This dive log format contains similar information to
+ that of a typical written dive log, e.g. dive date and time, dive depth,
+ dive duration, names of buddy and dive master and perhaps some information
+ about cylinder pressures before and after the dive, as well as a comment or
+ two about the dive. All the data for a single dive go on a single line of
+ text, following the order of the column headings.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CSV dive profile</em>: This dive log format includes much more information
+ about a single dive. For instance there may be information at 30-second
+ intervals, indicating depth, water temperature at that depth, and cylinder
+ pressure at that moment in time. Each line contains the information for a
+ single instant in time during the dive, 30 seconds after that of the
+ previous instant. Many lines are required to complete the depth profile
+ information for a single dive. This is a common export format used by
+ closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive equipment and many software packages
+ that handle dive computer data and/or dive logs.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Before being able to import the <em>CSV</em> data to <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>one needs to
+know a few things about the data being imported</strong>:</p></div>
+<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
+<li>
+<p>
+Which character separates the different columns within a single line of
+ data? This field separator should be either a comma (,) or a TAB character.
+ This can be determined by opening the file with a text editor. If it is
+ comma-delimited, then the comma characters between the values are clearly
+ visible. If no commas are evident and the numbers are aligned in columns,
+ the file is probably TAB-delimited (i.e. it uses a TAB as a field
+ separator).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Which data columns need to be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>? Is it a <em>CSV dive
+ details</em> file or a <em>CSV dive profile</em> file? Open the file using a text
+ editor and note the titles of the columns to be imported and their column
+ positions.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Is the numeric information (e.g. dive depth) in metric or in imperial unis?
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Armed with this information, importing the data into <em>Subsurface</em> is
+straightforward. Select <em>Import → Import Log Files</em> from the main menu. In
+the resulting file selection menu, select <em>CSV files</em> (towards the bottom
+right). This shows all .CSV files in the selected directory. Select the file
+that needs to be imported. A configuration panel appears as depicted below:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/csv_import1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV download dialogue 1" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Notice that, at the top left, there is a dropdown list containing
+pre-configured settings for some of the more common dive computers and
+software packages encountered by divers. If the <em>CSV</em> file being imported
+originated from any of these pre-configured items, then select it. Otherwise
+use the <em>Manual Import</em> option. The configuration panel also has dropdown
+lists for the specification of the appropriate field separator (Tab, comma
+or semicolon), the date format used in the <em>CSV</em> file, the time units
+(seconds, minutes or minutes:seconds), as well as the unit system (metric or
+imperial). Selecting the appropriate options among these is critical for the
+successful import of the data.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The last remaining task is to ensure that all the data columns have the
+appropriate column headings. The top line of the white part of the data
+table contains the column headings found in the <em>CSV</em> data file. The blue
+row of cells immediately above these contains the names understood by
+<em>Subsurface</em>. The white area below the dropdown lists contains all the field
+names that <em>Subsurface</em> recognises. These names are in blue balloons and can
+be moved using a drag-and-frop action. For instance, <em>Subsurface</em> expects
+the column heading for Dive number (" # ") to be "Dive # ". If the column
+heading that <em>Subsurface</em> expects is not in the blue cells, then drag the
+appropriate column heading from the upper area and drop it in the
+appropriate blue cell at the top of the table. To indicate the correct
+column for "Dive #", drag the ballooned item labelled "Dive # " and drop it
+in the blue cell immediately above the white cell containing " # ". This is
+depicted in the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/csv_import2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CSV download dialogue 2" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Continue in this way to ensure that all the column headings in the blue row
+of cells correspond to the headings listed in the top part of the
+dialogue. Having completed this task, select the <em>OK</em> button to the bottom
+right og the dialogue. The data from the <em>CSV</em> file are imported and shown
+in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
+<div class="sidebarblock" id="S_CSV_Intro">
+<div class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>A Diver’s Introduction to <em>CSV</em> Files</strong></p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content"><em>CSV</em> is an abbreviation for a data file format: <em>Comma-Separated
+Variables</em>. It is a file format allowing someone to view or edit the
+information using a text editor such as Notebook (Windows), gedit (Linux) or
+TextWrangler (OS/X). The two main advantages of the <em>CSV</em> format is that the
+data are easily editable as text without any proprietary software and
+ensuring all information is human-readable, not being obscured by any custom
+or proprietary attributes that proprietary software insert into files.
+Because of its simplicity the <em>CSV</em> format is used as an interchange format
+between many software packages, e.g. between spreadsheet, statistical,
+graphics, database and diving software. Within <em>Subsurface</em>, <em>CSV</em> files can
+also be used to import information from other sources such as
+spreadsheet-based dive logs and even from some dive computers.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>CSV</em> files can be created or edited with a normal text editor. The most
+important attribute of a <em>CSV</em> file is the <em>field separator</em>, the character
+used to separate fields within a single line. The field separator is
+frequently a comma, a colon, a SPACE character or a TAB character. When
+exporting data from spreadsheet software, the field separator needs to be
+specified in order to create the <em>CSV</em> file. <em>CSV</em> files are normally
+organised into a single line that provides the headers (or <em>field names</em>) of
+the data columns, followed by the data, one record per line. Note that each
+field name may comprise more than one word separated by spaces; for instance
+<em>Dive site</em>, below. Here is an example of dive information for four dives
+using a comma as a field separator:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive site,Dive date,Time,Dive_duration, Dive_depth,Dive buddy
+Illovo Beach,2012-11-23,10:45,46:15,18.4,John Smith
+Key Largo,2012-11-24,09:12,34:15,20.4,Jason McDonald
+Wismar Baltic,2012-12-01,10:13,35:27,15.4,Dieter Albrecht
+Pulau Weh,2012-12-20,09:46,55:56,38.6,Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In this format the data are not easily read by a human. Here is the same
+information in TAB-delimited format:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive site Dive date Time Dive_duration Dive_depth Dive buddy
+Illovo Beach 2012-11-23 10:45 46:15 18.4 John Smith
+Key Largo 2012-11-24 09:12 34:15 20.4 Jason McDonald
+Wismar Baltic 2012-12-01 10:13 35:27 15.4 Dieter Albrecht
+Pulau Weh 2012-12-20 09:46 55:56 38.6 Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>It is clear why many people prefer the TAB-delimited format to the
+comma-delimited format. The disadvantage is that one cannot see the TAB
+characters. For instance, the space between <em>Dive</em> and <em>date</em> in the top
+line may be a SPACE character or a TAB character (in this case it is a SPACE
+character: the tabs are before and after <em>Dive date</em>). If the field names in
+the first line are long, the alignment with data in the other lines cannot
+be maintained. Here is a highly simplified and shortened TAB-delimited
+example of a <em>CSV</em> dive log from an APD closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive
+computer:</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>Dive Time (s) Depth (m) pO₂ - Setpoint (Bar) pO₂ - C1 Cell 1 (Bar) Ambient temp. (Celsius)
+0 0.0 0.70 0.81 13.1
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
+0 0.0 0.70 0.71 13.1
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.2
+0 1.2 0.70 0.71 13.1
+10 1.6 0.70 0.72 12.7
+20 1.6 0.70 0.71 12.6
+30 1.7 0.70 0.71 12.6
+40 1.8 0.70 0.68 12.5</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When a <em>CSV</em> file is selected for import, <em>Subsurface</em> displays the column
+headers as well as some of the data in the first few lines of the <em>CSV</em>
+file, making it much easier to work with <em>CSV</em> files. <em>CSV</em> files can
+therefore be used in many contexts for importing data into a <em>Subsurface</em>
+dive log. Knowledge of a few basic things about the content of the <em>CSV</em>
+file allows a smooth import of the dives into <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+</div></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">The <em>CSV</em> import has a couple of caveats. One should avoid some special
+characters like ampersand (&), less than (<), greater than (>) and double
+quotes (") as part of the numbers or text within a cell. The file should use
+UTF-8 character set, if using non-ASCII characters. Also the size of the
+<em>CSV</em> file might cause problems. Importing 100 dives at a time (<em>CSV dive
+details</em>) works, but larger files might exceed limits of the parser
+used. When encountering problems with <em>CSV</em> imports, first try with a
+smaller file to make sure everything works.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Companion">5.4. Importing GPS coordinates with the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> for mobile phones</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the <strong>Subsurface Companion App</strong> on an <em>Android device</em> with a GPS or
+<a href="#S_iphone"><em>iPhone</em></a>, the coordinates for the diving location can be
+automatically passed to the <em>Subsurface</em> dive log. The Companion App stores
+the dive locations on a dedicated Internet-based file server. <em>Subsurface</em>,
+in turn, can collect the localities from the file server.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To do this:</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_create_a_companion_app_account">5.4.1. Create a Companion App account</h4>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Register on the <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web
+ page</em></a>. A confirmation email with instructions and a personal <strong>DIVERID</strong>
+ will be sent, a long number that gives access to the file server and
+ Companion App capabilities.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Download the app from
+ <a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=org.subsurface">Google Play
+ Store</a> or from
+ <a href="http://f-droid.org/repository/browse/?fdfilter=subsurface&fdid=org.subsurface">F-Droid</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_using_the_subsurface_companion_app_on_an_android_smartphone">5.4.2. Using the Subsurface companion app on an Android smartphone</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>On first use the app has three options:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Create a new account.</em> Equivalent to registering in <em>Subsurface</em> companion
+ page using an Internet browser. One can request a <strong>DIVERID</strong> using this
+ option, but this is supplied via email and followed up by interaction with
+ the <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web page</em></a> in order
+ to activate the account.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Retrieve an account.</em> If users forgot their <strong>DIVERID</strong> they will receive an
+ email to recover the number.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Use an existing account.</em> Users are prompted for their <strong>DIVERID</strong>. The app
+ saves this <strong>DIVERID</strong> and does not ask for it again unless one uses the
+ <em>Disconnect</em> menu option (see below).
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">In the <em>Subsurface</em> main program, the <strong>DIVERID</strong> should also be entered on
+the Default Preferences panel, obtained by selecting <em>File → Preferences →
+Defaults</em> from the main menu in <em>Subsurface</em> itself. This facilitates
+synchronisation between <em>Subsurface</em> and the Companion App.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_creating_new_dive_locations">Creating new dive locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now one is ready to get a dive position and send it to the server. The
+Android display will look like the left hand image (<strong>A</strong>) below, but without
+any dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Touch the "+" icon on the top right to add a new dive site, a menu will be
+showed with 3 options:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Current: A prompt for a place name (or a request to activate the GPS if it
+ is turned off) will be displayed, after which the current location is saved.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Use Map: This option allows the user to fix a position by searching a world
+ map. A world map is shown (see <strong>B</strong> below) on which one should indicate the
+ desired position with a <em>long press</em> on the touch sensitive screen (if the
+ marked location is erroneous, simply indicate a new location) and select
+ the check symbol in the upper right. A dialog is shown allowing to enter the
+ name of the dive location and the date-time of the dive (see <strong>C</strong> below). In
+ order to import this dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> it’s advisable to set the
+ time to agree with the time of that dive on the dive computer.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Companion_5.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Companion App, add location using map" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Import local GPX file: The android device searches for .gpx files and
+ located archives will be shown. The selected .gpx file is opened and the
+ stored locations shown. Now one needs to select the appropriate locations,
+ then select the tab in the upper right, after which the locations will be
+ sent to the web service and added to the list on the Android device.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_dive_lists_of_dive_locations">Dive lists of dive locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The main screen shows a list of dive locations, each with a name, date and
+time (see <strong>A</strong> below). Some locations may have an arrow-up icon over the
+selection box to the left indicating that they require upload to the
+server. One can select individual dive locations from the list. A selected
+location has a check mark in the selection box on the left. Group operations
+(such as <em>Delete</em> or <em>Send</em>) are performed on several locations that are
+selected.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive locations in this list can be viewed in two ways: a list of locations
+or a map indicating the dive locations. The display mode (List or Map) is
+changed by selecting <em>Dives</em> at the top left of the screen (see <strong>A</strong> below)
+and then selecting the display mode. The display mode can be changed either
+from the list of locations or from the map (see <strong>B</strong> below). If one selects a
+location (on the list or on the map), an editing panel opens (see <strong>C</strong> below)
+where the dive description or other details may be changed.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Companion_4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Companion App, add location using map" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When one clicks on a dive (<strong>not</strong> selecting the check box), the name given to
+it, date/time and GPS coordinates will be shown, with two options at the top
+of the screen:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Edit (pencil): Change the text name or other characteristics of the dive
+ location.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Maps: Display a map showing the dive location.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After editing and saving a dive location (see <strong>C</strong> above), one needs to
+upload it to the web service, as explained below.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_uploading_dive_locations">Uploading dive locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several ways to send locations to the server. The easiest is by
+simply selecting the locations (See <strong>A</strong> below) and then touching the right
+arrow at the top right of the screen.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Users must be careful, as the trash icon on the right means exactly what it
+should; it deletes the selected dive location(s).</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Companion_1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Screen shots (A-B) of companion app" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After a dive trip using the Companion App, all dive locations are ready to
+be downloaded to a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log (see below).</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_settings_on_the_companion_app">Settings on the Companion app</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the <em>Settings</em> menu option results in the right hand image above
+(<strong>B</strong>).</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_server_and_account">Server and account</h5>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Web-service URL.</em> This is predefined (<a href="http://api.hohndel.org/">http://api.hohndel.org/</a>)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>User ID.</em> The DIVERID obtained by registering as described above. The
+ easiest way to obtain it is simply to copy and paste from the confirmation
+ email but, of course, users can also type this information.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_synchronisation">Synchronisation</h5>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Synchronize on startup.</em> If selected, dive locations in the Android device
+ and those on the web service synchronise each time the app is started.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Upload new dives.</em> If selected, each time the user adds a dive location it
+ is automatically sent to the server.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_background_service">Background service</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Instead of entering a unique dive location, users can leave the service
+running in the background of their Android device, allowing the continuous
+collection of GPS locations.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The settings below define the behaviour of the service:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Min duration.</em> In minutes. The app will try to get a location every X
+ minutes until stopped by the user.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Min distance.</em> In meters. Minimum distance between two locations.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Name template.</em> The name the app will use when saving the locations.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/info.jpg" alt="Tip" />
+</td>
+<td class="content"><em>How does the background service work?</em> Assuming the user sets 5 minutes and
+50 meters in the settings above, the app will start by recording a location
+at the current location, followed by another one at every 5 minutes <strong>or</strong>
+every time one moves 50m from previous location. If subsequent locations
+are within a radius of 50 meters from the previous one, a new location is
+not saved. If the user is not moving, only one location is saved, but if the
+user is moving, a trace of the route is obtained by saving a location every
+50 meters.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_other">Other</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Mailing List.</em> The mail box for <em>Subsurface</em>. Users can send an email to
+the Subsurface mailing list.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Subsurface website.</em> A link to the URL of Subsurface web
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Version.</em> Displays the current version of the Companion App.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_search">Search</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Search the saved dive locations by name or by date and time.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_start_service">Start service</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Initiates the <em>background service</em> following the previously defined
+settings.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_disconnect">Disconnect</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This is a badly named option that disconnects the app from the server by
+resetting the user ID in the app, showing the first screen where an account
+can be created, retrieve the ID for an existing account or use the users own
+ID. The disconnect option is useful if a user’s Android device was used to
+download the dive locations of another registered diver.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_send_all_locations">Send all locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This option sends all locations stored in the Android device to the server.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_iphone">5.4.3. Using the Subsurface companion app on an <em>iPhone</em> to record dive locations</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The iPhone interface is quite simple. One needs to type the user ID
+(obtained during registration) into the space reserved for it, then select
+"Dive in" (see left part of the image below) and start collecting dive
+location information.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/iphone.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Using iPhone companion application" width="640" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives can be added automatically or manually. In manual mode, a dive
+location or waypoint is added to the GPS input stream. In automatic mode, a
+continuous path of GPS locations is created from which, much later, after
+import, subsurface can select the appropriate GPS locations based on the
+times of dives. The default mode for the <em>iphone</em> is automatic. When one
+adds a dive, the location service is started automatically and a red bar
+appears at the bottom of the screen. After the dive one can click on the red
+bar to end the location service. While the location service is running one
+can only add dives using the manual mechanism.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One can edit the site name afterwards by selecting the dive from the dive
+list and clicking on the site name. There are no other editable fields. The
+dive list is automatically uploaded from the iphone to the webservice and
+there is not an option to trigger upload manually.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_downloading_dive_locations_to_the_em_subsurface_em_divelog">5.4.4. Downloading dive locations to the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Download dive(s) from a dive computer or enter them manually into
+<em>Subsurface</em> before obtaining the GPS coordinates from the server. The
+download dialog can be reached via <em>Ctrl+G</em> or from the <em>Subsurface</em> Main
+Menu <em>Import → Import GPS data from Subsurface Service</em>, resulting in the
+image on the left (<strong>A</strong>), below. On first use the DIVERID text box is
+blank. Provide a DIVERID, then select the <em>Download</em> button to initiate the
+download process, after which the screen on the right (<strong>B</strong>) below appears:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DownloadGPS.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Downloading Companion app GPS data" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that the <em>Apply</em> button is now active. By clicking on it, users can
+update the locations of the newly entered or uploaded dives in <em>Subsurface</em>
+which applies the coordinates and names entered on the app for all the new
+dives that match the date-times of the uploaded GPS localities. If one has
+entered the name of the dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> before downloading the
+GPS coordinates, this name will take precedence over downloaded one.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Since <em>Subsurface</em> matches GPS locations from the Android device and dive
+information from the dive computer based on date-time data, automatic
+assignment of GPS data to dives is dependent on agreement of the date-time
+information between these two devices. Although <em>Subsurface</em> has a wide
+range tolerance, it may be unable to identify the appropriate dive if there
+is a large difference between the time in the dive computer and that of the
+Android device, resulting in no updates.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Similar date-times may not always be possible and there may be many reasons
+for this (e.g. time zones), or <em>Subsurface</em> may be unable to decide which is
+the correct position for a dive (e.g. on repetitive dives while running
+<em>background service</em> there may be several locations that would be included
+in the time range that fit not only the first dive, but one or more
+subsequent dives as well). A workaround for this situation to manually edit
+the date-time of a dive in the <em>Subsurface</em> Dive List <strong>before</strong> downloading
+the GPS data and then to change the date-time back again <strong>after</strong> downloading
+GPS data.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/info.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">TIPS:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Background service</em>, being a very powerful tool, may fill the location list
+ with many unnecessary locations not corresponding to the exact dive point
+ but reflecting the boat’s route. Currently these locations are difficult to
+ delete from the server. In some situations it is therefore prudent to clean
+ up the list on the Android device before sending the dive points to the web
+ server by simply deleting the inappropriate locations. This might be
+ necessary, for instance, if one wants to keep the location list clear to see
+ dives in the web service map display (see above).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+It may also make sense to give informative names to the locations sent to
+ the web server, or at least to use an informative name in the <em>Name
+ Template</em> setting while running the <em>background service</em>, especially on a
+ dive trip with many dives and dive locations.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_LoadImage">5.5. Adding photographs to dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many (if not most) divers take a camera with them and take photographs
+during a dive. One would like to associate each photograph with a specific
+dive. <em>Subsurface</em> allows one to load photos into a dive. Photos are
+superimposed on the dive profile, from where they can be viewed.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_loading_photos_and_getting_synchronisation_between_dive_computer_and_camera">5.5.1. Loading photos and getting synchronisation between dive computer and camera</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Left-lick on a dive or on a group of dives on the dive list. Then
+right-click on this dive or group of dives and choose the option <em>Load
+Images</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The system file browser appears. Select the folder and photographs that need
+to be loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and click the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This brings one to the time synchronisation dialog, shown below. The
+critical problem is that the time synchronisation is not perfect between the
+dive computer used during a dive, and the camera used during that same
+dive. These two devices often differ by several minutes. If <em>Subsurface</em> can
+achieve synchronisation, then the exact times of photographs can be used to
+position photographs on the dive profile.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> achieves this synchronisation in two ways:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Manually</strong>: If the user wrote down the exact camera time at the start of a dive, the
+ difference in time between the two devices can be determined. Actually, as long as the device
+ settings for time has not been changed in either device, one could write down the times of
+ both devices after the dive or even at the end of the day. One can then manually set the time
+ difference in the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. Towards the top of the dialog is a time setting tool
+ immediately under the heading <em>Shift times of image(s) by</em>, evident in figure <strong>A</strong> below.
+ If the camera time is 7 minutes later than that of the dive computer, set the time setting
+ tool to a value of 00:07. Select either the <em>earlier</em> or <em>later</em> radio button.
+ In the above example, the <em>earlier</em> option is appropriate, since the photos need to be shifted
+ 7 minutes earlier (camera is 7 minutes ahead of dive computer). Ignore any "AM" or "PM" suffix
+ in that tool. Click the <em>OK</em> button and synchronisation is achieved.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage3b_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronisation dialog" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>By photograph</strong>: There is a very slick way of achieving synchronisation. If one takes a
+ photograph of the face of the dive computer showing the time, then <em>Subsurface</em> can obtain
+ the exact time the photograph was taken, using the metadata that the camera stores within
+ each photo. In order to do this, use the bottom half of the Time shift_ dialog. If one uses
+ the bottom part, the top part of the dialog is ignored. Click on
+ the horizontal bar entitled "<em>Select image of divecomputer showing time</em>. This brings up
+ a file browser with which one can select the photograph of the dive computer. Select the
+ photograph using the file browser and click on <em>OK</em>. This photograph of the dive computer
+ appears in the bottom panel of the <em>Shift times</em> dialog. Now <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly
+ when the photograph has been taken. Now set the date-time dialog to the left of the photo
+ so that this tool reflects the date and time of the dive computer in the photo. When the
+ date-time tool has been set, <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly what the time difference between
+ camera and dive computer is, and synchronisation is achieved. There is a
+ photograph with the face of the dive computer and with the date-time tool set to the
+ date-time on image <strong>B</strong> above.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If the timestamp of a photograph is long before or after the dive, it is not
+placed on the dive profile. If the timestamp of the photo is within 30
+minutes of the dive, it is shown.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_viewing_the_photos">5.5.2. Viewing the photos</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In order to view the photos added to a dive, activate the <em>show-photos</em>
+button in the tool bar to the left of the dive profile:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:left;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos_f20.png" alt="FIGURE:Show photos toolbar button" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After the images have been loaded, they appear in two places:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+the <em>Photos</em> tab of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+as tiny icons (stubs) on the dive profile at the appropriate positions
+ reflecting the time each photograph was taken. See below:
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Photos on dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If one hovers with the mouse over any of the photo icons, then a thumbnail
+photo is shown of the appropriate photo. See the image below:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Thumbnail photo on dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Clicking on the thumbnail brings up a full size photo overlaid on the
+<em>Subsurface</em> window. This allows good viewing of the photographs that have
+been added (see the image below). Note that the thumbnail has a small
+dustbin icon in the bottom right hand corner (see image above). If one
+selects the dustbin, the image is removed from the dive. Therefore some care
+is required when clicking on a thumbnail. Images can also be deleted using
+the <em>Photos</em> tab (see text below).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Full-screen photo on dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_the_em_photos_em_tab">5.5.3. The <em>Photos</em> tab</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Photographs associated with a dive are shown as thumbnails in the <em>Photos</em>
+tab of the <em>Dive Notes</em> panel. Photos taken in rapid succession during a
+dive (therefore sometimes with large overlap on the dive profile) can easily
+be accessed in the <em>Photos</em> tab. This tab serves as a tool for individually
+accessing the photos of a dive, while the stubs on the dive profile give an
+indication of when during a dive a photo was taken. By single-clicking on a
+thumbnail in the <em>Photos</em> panel, a photo is selected. By double-clicking a
+thumbnail, the full-sized image is shown, overlaying the <em>Subsurface</em>
+window. A photo can be deleted from the <em>Photos</em> panel by selecting it
+(single-click) and then by pressing the <em>Del</em> key on the keyboard. This
+removes the photo both from the <em>Photos</em> tab as well as the dive profile.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_photos_on_an_external_hard_disk">5.5.4. Photos on an external hard disk</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Most underwater photographers store their photos on an external drive. If
+such a drive can be mapped (almost always the case) the photos can be
+directly accessed by <em>Subsurface</em>. This facilitates the interaction between
+<em>Subsurface</em> and an external repository of photos. When associating a dive
+profile with photos from an external drive, the normal procedure of
+selection and synchronisation (see text above) is used. However, after the
+external drive has been disconnected, <em>Subsurface</em> cannot access these
+photos any more. If the display of photos is activated (using the toolbox
+to the left of the <em>Dive Profile</em>), the program only shows a small white dot
+where each photo should be on the dive profile. In addition the <em>Photos</em>
+tab only shows the file names of the photos. This is normal behaviour. If,
+later, the external drive with the photos is connected again, the photos can
+be seen in the normal way.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_logging_special_types_of_dives">5.6. Logging special types of dives</h3>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_sidemount_dives">5.6.1. Sidemount dives</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> easily handles dives involving more than one
+cylinder. Sidemount dive logging involves three steps:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>During the dive, recording cylinder switch events</strong>. Since sidemount diving normally involves two
+ cylinders with air or with the same gas mixture, <em>Subsurface</em> distinguishes among these different
+ cylinders. In contrast, most dive computers that allow gas switching only distinguish among different
+ <em>gases</em> used, not among different <em>cylinders</em> used. This means that when sidemount dives are downloaded
+ from these dive computers, the events of switching between cylinders with the same gas are not downloaded. This may mean
+ that one may have to keep a written log of cylinder switch times using a slate, or (if the dive computer
+ has this facility) marking each cylinder switch with a bookmark that can be retrieved later. Returning
+ from a dive with the information about cylinder changes is the only tricky part of logging sidemount dives.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Within <em>Subsurface</em> describe the cylinders used during the dive</strong>. The diver needs to provide the
+ specifications of the different cylinders, using the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Info Panel</strong> (see
+ image below where two 12 litre cylinder were used).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Indicate cylinder change events on the <em>Subsurface</em> dive profile</strong>. Once the dive log has been imported
+ from a dive computer into <em>Subsurface</em>, the cylinder switch events need to be indicated on the dive profile.
+ Cylinder changes are recorded by right-clicking at the appropriate point on the dive profile and then
+ selecting <em>Add gas change</em>. A list of the appropriate cylinders is shown with the
+ currently used cylinder greyed out. In the image below Tank 1 is greyed out, leaving only Tank 2
+ to be selected. Select the appropriate cylinder. The cylinder change is then indicated on the dive
+ profile with a cylinder symbol. If the <strong>Tank Bar</strong> is activated using the toolbar to the left of the
+ profile, then the cylinder change is also indicated on the Tank Bar (see image below). After all
+ the cylinder change events have been recorded on the dive profile, the correct cylinder pressures
+ for both cylinders are shown on the dive profile, as inthe image below.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/sidemount1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Sidemount profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This section gives an example of the versatility of <em>Subsurface</em> as a give
+logging tool.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_CCR_dives">5.6.2. Closed circuit rebreather (CCR) dives</h4>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/APD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Closed system rebreathers use advanced technology to recirculate gas that
+has been breathed while doing two things to maintain a breathable oxygen
+concentration:
+a) remove carbon dioxide from the gas that has been exhaled
+regulate the oxygen concentration to remain within safe diving limits.
+Currently, within <em>Subsurface</em>, the Poseidon MkVI Discovery is the best
+supported CCR dive computer. The CCR interface of <em>Subsurface</em> is currently
+experimental and under active development. In contrast to a conventional
+recreational dive computer, a CCR system computer does not allow the
+download of a log containing multiple dives. Rather, each dive is stored
+independently. This means that <em>Subsurface</em> cannot download a dive log
+directly from a CCR dive computer, but that it imports CCR dive logs in the
+same way that it imports dive log data from other digital databases.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_import_a_ccr_dive">Import a CCR dive</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>See the section dealing with <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive
+information from other digital sources</a>. From the main menu of <em>Subsurface</em>,
+select <em>Import → Import log files</em> to bring up the
+<a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>. As explained in that
+section, the bottom right hand of the import dialogue contains a dropdown
+list of appropriate devices that currently includes an option for (Poseidon)
+MkVI files (import for other CCR equipment is under active
+development). Having selected the appropriate CCR format and the directory
+where the original dive logs have been stored from the CCR dive computer,
+one can select a particular dive log file (in the case of the MkVI it is a
+file with a .txt extension). After selecting the appropriate dive log,
+activate the <em>Open</em> button at the bottom right hand of the universal import
+dialogue.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_displayed_information_for_a_ccr_dive">Displayed information for a CCR dive</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Partial pressures of gases</em>: The graph of oxygen partial pressure shows the
+information from the oxygen sensors of the CCR equipment. In contrast to
+recreational equipment (where pO<sub>2</sub> values are calculated based on gas
+composition and dive depth), CCR equipment provide actual measurements of
+pO<sub>2</sub>, derived from oxygen sensors. In this case the graph for oxygen
+partial pressure should be fairly flat, reflecting the setpoint settings
+during the dive. The mean pO<sub>2</sub> is NOT the mean oxygen partial pressure as
+given by the CCR equipment, but a value calculated by <em>Subsurface</em> as
+follows:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+For TWO O<sub>2</sub> sensors the mean value of the two sensors are given.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+For THREE-sensor systems (e.g. APD), the mean value is also used. However
+ differences of more than 0,1 bar in the simultaneous readings of different
+ sensors are treated as spurious. If one of the three sensors provides
+ spurious data, it is ignored.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If no sensor data is available, the pO<sub>2</sub> value is assumed to be equal to
+ the setpoint.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The mean pO<sub>2</sub> of the sensors is indicated with a green line,</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The oxygen setpoint values as well as the readings from the individual
+oxygen sensors can be shown. The display of additional CCR information is
+turned on by checking the appropriate checkboxes in the <em>Preferences</em> panel
+(accessible by selecting <a href="#S_CCR_options"><em>File → Preferences →
+Graph</em></a>). This part of the <em>Preferences</em> panel look like this, representing
+two checkboxes that modify the display of pO<sub>2</sub> when the appropriate toolbar
+button on the Dive Profile has been activated.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_preferences_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR preferences panel" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Checking any of the check boxes allows the display of additional
+oxygen-related information whenever the pO<sub>2</sub> toolbar button on the
+<em>Profile</em> panel is activated. The first checkbox allows the display of
+setpoint information. This is a red line superimposed on the green oxygen
+partial pressure graph and allows a comparison of the mean measured oxygen
+partial pressure and the setpoint values, as in the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_setpoint_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR setpoint and po2 graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The second checkbox allows the display of the data from each individual
+oxygen sensor of the CCR equipment. The data for each sensor is colour-coded
+as follows:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 1: grey
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 2: blue
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Sensor 3: brown
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The mean oxygen pO<sub>2</sub> is indicated by the green line. This allows the direct
+comparison of data from each of the oxygen sensors, useful for detecting
+abnormally low or erratic readings from a particular sensor.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_sensor_data_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR sensor data graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The setpoint data can be overlaid on the oxygen sensor data by activating
+both of the above check boxes. Partial pressures for nitrogen (and helium,
+if applicable) are shown in the usual way as for open circuit dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Events</em>: Several events are logged, e.g. switching the mouthpiece to open
+circuit. These events are indicated by yellow triangles and, if one hovers
+over a triangle, a description of that event is given as the bottom line in
+the <a href="#S_InfoBox">Information Box</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Cylinder pressures</em>: Some CCR dive computers like the Poseidon MkVI record
+the pressures of the oxygen and diluent cylinders. The pressures of these
+two cylinders are shown as green lines overlapping the depth profile. In
+addition, start and end pressures for both oxygen and diluent cylinders are
+shown in the <em>Equipment Tab</em>. Below is a dive profile for a CCR dive,
+including an overaly of setpoint and oxygen sensor data, as well as the
+cylinder pressure data. In this case there is good agreement from the
+readings of the two oxygen sensors.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/CCR_dive_profile_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: CCR dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Equipment-specific information</em>: Equipment-specific information gathered by
+<em>Subsurface</em> is shown in the <a href="#S_ExtraDataTab">Extra data tab</a>. This may
+include setup information or metadata about the dive.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>More equipment-specific information for downloading CCR dive logs for
+Poseidon MkVI and APD equipment can be found in <a href="#S_PoseidonMkVI">Appendix
+B</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_obtaining_more_information_about_dives_entered_into_the_logbook">6. Obtaining more information about dives entered into the logbook</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_the_strong_dive_info_strong_tab_for_individual_dives">6.1. The <strong>Dive Info</strong> tab (for individual dives)</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Dive Info tab gives some summary information about a particular dive
+that has been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Useful information here includes
+the surface interval before the dive, the maximum and mean depths of the
+dive, the gas volume consumed, the surface air consumption (SAC) and the
+number of oxygen toxicity units (OTU) incurred.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/info.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Gas consumption and SAC calculations: <em>Subsurface</em> calculates SAC and Gas
+consumption taking in account gas incompressibility, particularly at tank
+pressures above 200 bar, making them more accurate. Users should refer to
+<a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Appendix D</a> for more information.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ExtraDataTab">6.2. The <strong>Extra Data</strong> tab (usually for individual dives)</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When using a dive computer, it often reports several data items that cannot
+easily be presented in a standardised way because the nature of the
+information differs from one dive computer to another. These data often
+comprise setup information, metadata about a dive, battery levels, no fly
+times, or gradient factors used during the dive. When possible, this
+information is presented in the <strong>Extra Data</strong> tab. Below is an image showing
+extra data for a dive using a Poseidon rebreather.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ExtraDataTab_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Extra Data tab" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_the_strong_stats_strong_tab_for_groups_of_dives">6.3. The <strong>Stats</strong> tab (for groups of dives)</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Stats tab gives summary statistics for more than one dive, assuming that
+more than one dive has been selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong> using the standard
+Ctrl-click or Shift-click of the mouse. If only one dive has been selected,
+figures pertaining to only that dive are given. This tab shows the number of
+dives selected, the total amount of dive time in these dives, as well as the
+minimum, maximum and mean for the dive duration, water temperature and
+surface air consumption (SAC). It also shows the depth of the shallowest and
+deepest dives of those selected.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">6.4. The <strong>Dive Profile</strong></h3>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Profile2.jpg" alt="Typical dive profile" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Of all the panels in <em>Subsurface</em>, the Dive Profile contains the most
+detailed information about each dive. The Dive Profile has a <strong>button bar</strong> on
+the left hand side that allows control over several display options. The
+functions of these buttons are described below. The main item in the Dive
+Profile is the graph of dive depth as a function of time. In addition to the
+obvious information of the depth it also shows the ascent and descent rates
+compared to the recommended speed of going up or down in the water
+column. This information is given using different colours:</p></div>
+<div class="tableblock">
+<table rules="all"
+width="100%"
+frame="border"
+cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
+<col width="33%" />
+<col width="33%" />
+<col width="33%" />
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table"><strong>Couleur</strong></p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table"><strong>Vitesse de descente (m/min)</strong></p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table"><strong>Vitesse de remontée (m/min)</strong></p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Rouge</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">> 30</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">> 18</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Orange</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">18 - 30</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">9 - 18</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Jaune</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">9 - 18</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">4 - 9</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Vert clair</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">1.5 - 9</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">1.5 - 4</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">Vert foncé</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">< 1.5</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">< 1.5</p></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The profile also includes depth readings for the peaks and troughs in the
+graph. Thus, users should see the depth of the deepest point and other
+peaks. Mean depth is marked with a horizontal red line.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/scale.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">In some cases the dive profile does not fill the whole area of the <strong>Dive
+Profile</strong> panel. Clicking the <strong>Scale</strong> button in the toolbar on the left of
+the dive profile frequently increases the size of the dive profile to fill
+the area of the panel efficiently.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Water temperature</strong> is displayed with its own blue line with temperature values
+placed adjacent to significant changes.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive profile can include graphs of the <strong>partial pressures</strong> of O2, N2,
+and He during the dive (see figure above) as well as a calculated and dive
+computer reported deco ceilings (only visible for deep, long, or repetitive
+dives). Partial pressures of oxygen are indicated in green, those of
+nitrogen in black, and those of helium in dark red. These partial pressure
+graphs are shown below the profile data.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/O2.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>oxygen</strong>
+during the dive. This is depicted below the dive depth and water temperature
+graphs.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/N2.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>nitrogen</strong>
+during the dive.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/He.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>helium</strong>
+during the dive. This is only of importance to divers using Trimix,
+Helitrox or similar breathing gasses.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>air consumption</strong> graph displays the tank pressure and its change during
+the dive. The air consumption takes depth into account so that even when
+manually entering the start and end pressures the graph is not a straight
+line. Similarly to the depth graph the slope of the tank pressure gives the
+user information about the momentary SAC rate (Surface Air Consumption) when
+using an air integrated dive computer. Here the colour coding is not
+relative to some absolute values but relative to the average normalised air
+consumption during the dive. So areas that are red or orange indicate times
+of increased normalized air consumption while dark green reflects times when
+the diver was using less gas than average.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/Heartbutton.png" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking on the heart rate button will allow the display of heart rate
+information during the dive if the dive computer was attached to a heart
+rate sensor.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>It is possible to <strong>zoom</strong> into the profile graph. This is done either by using
+the scroll wheel / scroll gesture of your mouse or trackpad. By default
+<em>Subsurface</em> always shows a profile area large enough for at least 30 minutes
+and 30m
+ (100ft) – this way short or shallow dives are intuitively recognizable;
+something
+that free divers clearly won’t care about.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MeasuringBar.png" alt="FIGURE: Measuring Bar" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ruler.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Measurements of <strong>depth or time differences</strong> can be achieved by using the
+<strong>ruler button</strong> on the left of the dive profile panel. The measurement is
+done by dragging the red dots to the two points on the dive profile that the
+user wishes to measure. Information is then given in the horizontal white
+area underneath the two red dots.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ShowPhotos.png" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Photographs that have been added to a dive can be shown on the profile by
+selecting the <strong>Show-photo</strong> button. The position of a photo on the profile
+indicates the exact time when this photo was taken. If this button is not
+active, the photos are hidden.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The profile can also include the dive computer reported <strong>ceiling</strong> (more
+precisely, the deepest deco stop that the dive computer calculated for each
+particular moment in time) as a red overlay on the dive profile. Ascent
+ceilings arise when a direct ascent to the surface increases the risk of a
+diver suffering from decompression sickness (DCS) and it is necessary to
+either ascend slower or to perform decompression stop(s) before ascending to
+the surface. Not all dive computers record this information and make it
+available for download; for example all of the Suunto dive computers fail to
+make this very useful data available to divelog software. <em>Subsurface</em> also
+calculates ceilings independently, shown as a green overlay on the dive
+profile. Because of the differences in algorithms used and amount of data
+available (and other factors taken into consideration at the time of the
+calculation) it is unlikely that ceilings from dive computers and from
+<em>Subsurface</em> are the same, even if the same algorithm and <em>gradient factors</em>
+(see below) are used. It is also quite common that <em>Subsurface</em> calculates
+a ceiling for non-decompression dives when the dive computer stayed in
+non-deco mode during the whole dive (represented by the <span class="green">dark green</span>
+section in the profile at the beginning of this section). This is caused by
+the fact that <em>Subsurface’s</em> calculations describe the deco obligation at
+each moment during a dive, while dive computers usually take the upcoming
+ascent into account. During the ascent some excess nitrogen (and possibly
+helium) are already breathed off so even though the diver technically
+encountered a ceiling at depth, the dive still does not require an explicit
+deco stop. This feature allows dive computers to offer longer non-stop
+bottom times.</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/cceiling.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">If the dive computer itself calculates a ceiling and makes it available to
+<em>Subsurface</em> during upload of dives, this can be shown as a red area by
+checking <strong>Dive computer reported ceiling</strong> button on the Profile Panel.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ceiling1.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">If the <strong>Calculated ceiling</strong> button on the Profile Panel is clicked, then a
+ceiling, calculated by <em>Subsurface</em>, is shown in green if it exists for a
+particular dive (<strong>A</strong> in figure below). This setting can be modified in two
+ways:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ceiling2.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">If, in addition, the <strong>show all tissues</strong> button on the Profile Panel is
+clicked, the ceiling is shown for the tissue compartments following the
+Bühlmann model (<strong>B</strong> in figure below).</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ceiling3.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">If, in addition, the <strong>3m increments</strong> button on the Profile Panel is clicked,
+then the ceiling is indicated in 3 m increments (<strong>C</strong> in figure below).</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Ceilings2.jpg" alt="Figure: Ceiling with 3m resolution" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/ShowCylindersButton.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">By selecting this icon, the different cylinders used during a dive can be
+represented as a coloured bar at the bottom of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. In
+general oxygen is represented by a green bar, nitrogen with a yellow bar and
+helium with a red bar. The image below shows a dive which first uses a
+trimix cylinder (red and green), followed by a switch to a nitrox cylinder
+(yellow and green) after 23 minutes. Cylinders with air are shown as a light
+blue bar.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ShowCylinders_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Cylinder use graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Display inert gas tissue pressures relative to ambient inert gas pressure
+(horizontal grey line). Tissue pressures are calculated using the Bühlmann
+ZH-L16 algorithm and are displayed as lines ranging from green (faster
+tissues) to blue (slower tissues). The black line, graphed above the
+ambient pressure, is the maximum allowable tissue supersaturation (pressure
+limit) derived from the gradient factors specified in the <strong>Preferences</strong>. For
+divers involved in planned decompression diving, efficient rates of
+offgasing are obtained with tissue pressures between the ambient inert gas
+pressure (grey line) and the pressure limit (black line). This display is a
+representation of the tissue pressures during the whole dive. In contast,
+the <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gas Pressure Graph</a> in the <strong>Information Box</strong>
+on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> is an instantaneous reflection of tissue pressures at
+the moment in time reflected by the position of the cursor on the dive
+profile.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/tissuesGraph.jpg" alt="Figure: Inert gas tissue pressure graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their
+depths. For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on
+<a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>. The currently
+used gradient factors (e.g. GF 35/75) are shown above the depth profile if
+the appropriate toolbar buttons are activated. <strong>N.B.:</strong> The indicated
+gradient factors are NOT the gradient factors in use by the dive computer,
+but those used by <em>Subsurface</em> to calculate deco obligations during the
+dive. For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_the_dive_profile_context_menu">6.5. The Dive Profile context menu</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu for the Dive Profile is accessed by right-clicking while
+the mouse cursor is over the Dive Profile panel. The menu allows the
+creation of Bookmarks or Gas Change Event markers or manual CCR set-point
+changes other than the ones that might have been imported from a Dive
+Computer. Markers are placed against the depth profile line and with the
+time of the event set by where the mouse cursor was when the right mouse
+button was initially clicked to bring up the menu. Gas Change events involve
+a selection of which gas is being switched to, the list of choices being
+based on the available gases defined in the Equipment Tab. Set-point change
+events open a dialog allowing to choose the next set-point value. As in the
+planner, a set-point value of zero indicates the diver is breathing from an
+open circuit system while any non-zero value indicates the use of a closed
+circuit rebreather (CCR). By right-clicking while over an existing marker a
+menu appears, adding options to allow deletion of the marker or to allow all
+markers of that type to be hidden. Hidden events can be restored to view by
+selecting Unhide all events from the context menu.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_InfoBox">6.6. The <strong>Information Box</strong></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Information box displays a large range of information pertaining to the
+dive profile. Normally the Information Box is located to the top left of the
+<strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. If the mouse points outside of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
+panel, then only the top line of the Information Box is visible (see
+left-hand part of figure (<strong>A</strong>) below). The Information Box can be moved
+around in the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel by click-dragging it with the mouse so
+that it is not obstructing important detail. The position of the Information
+Box is saved and used again during subsequent dive analyses.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/InfoBox2.jpg" alt="Figure: Information Box" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The moment the mouse points inside the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, the information
+box expands and shows many data items. In this situation, the data reflect
+the time point along the dive profile indicated by the mouse cursor (see
+right-hand part of figure (<strong>B</strong>) above where the Information Box reflects the
+situation at the position of the cursor [arrow] in that image). Therefore,
+moving the cursor in the horizontal direction allows the Information Box to
+show information for any point along the dive profile. In this mode, the
+Information Box gives extensive statistics about depth, gas and ceiling
+characteristics of the particular dive. These include: Time period into the
+dive (indicated by a @), depth, cylinder pressure (P), temperature,
+ascent/descent rate, surface air consumption (SAC), oxygen partial pressure,
+maximum operating depth, equivalent air depth (EAD), equivalent narcotic
+depth (END), equivalent air density depth (EADD), decompression requirements
+at that instant in time (Deco), time to surface (TTS), the calculated
+ceiling, as well as the calculated ceiling for several Bühlmann tissue
+compartments.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The user has control over the display of several statistics, represented as
+four buttons on the left of the profile panel. These are:</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/MOD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>Maximum
+Operating Depth (MOD)</strong> of the dive, given the gas mixture used. MOD is
+dependent on the oxygen concentration in the breathing gas. For air (21%
+oxygen) it is around 57 m. Below the MOD there is a markedly increased risk
+of exposure to the dangers associated with oxygen toxicity.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/NDL.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>No-deco
+Limit (NDL)</strong> or the <strong>Total Time to Surface (TTS)</strong>. NDL is the time duration
+that a diver can continue with a dive, given the present depth, that does
+not require decompression (that is, before an ascent ceiling appears). Once
+one has exceeded the NDL and decompression is required (that is, there is an
+ascent ceiling above the diver, then TTS gives the number of minutes
+required before the diver can surface. TTS includes ascent time as well as
+decompression time.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/SAC.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>Surface Air
+Consumption (SAC)</strong>. SAC is an indication of the surface-normalised
+respiration rate of a diver. The value of SAC is less than the real
+respiration rate because a diver at 10m uses breathing gas at a rate roughly
+double that of the equivalent rate at the surface. SAC gives an indication
+of breathing gas consumption rate independent of the depth of the dive so
+that the respiratory rates of different dives can be compared. The units for
+SAC is litres/min or cub ft/min.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/EAD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Clicking this button displays the <strong>Equivalent Air Depth (EAD)</strong> for nitrox
+dives as well as the <strong>Equivalent Narcotic Depth (END)</strong> for trimix
+dives. These are numbers of importance to divers who use breathing gases
+other than air. Their values are dependent on the composition of the
+breathing gas. The EAD is the depth of a hypothetical air dive that has the
+same partial pressure of nitrogen as the current depth of the nitrox dive at
+hand. A nitrox dive leads to the same decompression obligation as an air
+dive to the depth equalling the EAD. The END is the depth of a hypothetical
+air dive that has the same sum of partial pressures of the narcotic gases
+nitrogen and oxygen as the current trimix dive. A trimix diver can expect
+the same narcotic effect as a diver breathing air diving at a depth
+equalling the END.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Figure (<strong>B</strong>) above shows an information box with a nearly complete set of
+data.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">6.6.1. The Gas Pressure Bar Graph</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>On the left of the <strong>Information Box</strong> is a vertical bar graph indicating the
+pressures of the nitrogen (and other inert gases, e.g. helium, if
+applicable) that the diver was inhaling <em>at a particular instant during the
+dive</em>, indicated by the position of the cursor on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The
+drawing on the left below indicates the meaning of the different parts of
+the Gas Pressure Bar Graph.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Gas Pressure bar Graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The light green area indicates the total gas, with the top margin of the
+ light green area indicating the total gas pressure inhaled by the diver and
+ measured from the bottom of the graph to the top of the light green
+ area. This pressure has a <em>relative</em> value in the graph and does not
+ indicate absolute pressure.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The horizontal black line underneath the light green margin indicates the
+ equilibrium pressure of the inert gases inhaled by the diver, usually
+ nitrogen. In the case of trimix, it is the pressures of nitrogen and helium
+ combined. In this example, the user is diving with EAN32, so the inert gas
+ pressure is 68% of the distance from the bottom of the graph to the total
+ gas pressure value.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dark green area at the bottom of the graph represents the pressures of
+ inert gas in each of the 16 tissue compartments, following the Bühlmann
+ algorithm, the fast tissues being on the left hand side.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The top black horizontal line indicates the gradient factor that applies to
+ the depth of the diver at the particular point on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The
+ appropriate gradient factor is an interpolation between the FGLow and GFHigh
+ values specified in the Graph tab of the <strong>Preferences Panel</strong> of
+ <strong>Subsurface</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The bottom margin of the red area in the graph indicates the Bühlman-derived
+ M-value, that is the pressure value of inert gases at which bubble formation
+ is expected to be severe, resulting in decompression sickness.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>These five values are indicated on the left in the graph above. The way the
+Gas Pressure Bar Graph changes during a dive is indicated on the right hand
+side of the above figure for a diver using EAN32.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>A</strong> indicates the situation at the start of a dive with diver at the
+ surface. The pressures in all the tissue compartments are still at the
+ equilibrium pressure because no diving has taken place.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>B</strong> indicates the situation after a descent to 30 meters. Few of the
+ tissue compartments have had time to respond to the descent, their gas
+ pressures being far below the equilibrium gas pressure.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>C</strong> represents the pressures after 30 minutes at 30 m. The fast
+ compartments have attained equilibrium (i.e. they have reached the hight of
+ the black line indicating the equilibrium pressure). The slower compartments
+ (towards the right) have not reached equilibrium and are in the process of
+ slowly increasing in pressure.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>D</strong> shows the pressures after ascent to a depth of 4.5 meters. Since,
+ during ascent, the total inhaled gas pressure has decreased strongly from 4
+ bar to 1.45 bar, the pressures in the different tissue compartments now
+ exceed that of the total gas pressure and approaches the gradient factor
+ value (i.e. the top black horizontal line). Further ascent will result in
+ exceeding the gradient factor value (GFHigh), endangering the diver.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>E</strong> indicates the situation after remaining at 4.5 meters for 10
+ minutes. The fast compartments have decreased in pressure. As expected, the
+ pressures in the slow compartments have not changed much. The pressures in
+ the fast compartments do not approach the GFHigh value any more and the
+ diver is safer than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_organising_the_logbook_manipulating_groups_of_dives">7. Organising the logbook (Manipulating groups of dives)</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_the_dive_list_context_menu">7.1. The Dive List context menu</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many actions within <em>Subsurface</em> are dependent on a context menu used mostly
+to manipulate groups of dives. The context menu is found by selecting a dive
+or a group of dives and then right-clicking.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/ContextMenu.jpg" alt="Figure: Context Menu" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu is used in many manipulations described below.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_customising_the_information_showed_in_the_strong_dive_list_strong_panel">7.1.1. Customising the information showed in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel</h4>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DiveListOptions.jpg" alt="Example: Dive list info options" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The default information in the <strong>Dive List</strong> includes, for each dive,
+Dive_number, Date, Rating, Dive_depth, Dive_duration and Dive_location. This
+information can be controlled and changed by right-clicking on the header
+bar of the <strong>Dive List</strong>. For instance, a right-click on the <em>Date</em> header
+brings up a list of items that can be shown in the dive list (see
+above). Select an item to be shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> or to be deleted from
+the dive list, and the list is immediately updated accordingly. Preferences
+for information shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> is saved and used when <em>Subsurface</em>
+is re-opened.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_selecting_dives_from_a_particular_dive_site">7.1.2. Selecting dives from a particular dive site</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers have long dive lists and it may be difficult to locate all the
+dives at a particular site. By pressing <em>Ctl-F</em> on the keyboard, a text box
+is opened at the top left hand of the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Type the name of a dive
+site in this text box and the <strong>Dive List</strong> is immediately filtered to show
+only the dives for that site.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Renumber">7.2. Renumbering the dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives are normally numbered incrementally from non-recent dives (low
+sequence numbers) to recent dives (having the highest sequence numbers). The
+numbering of the dives is not always consistent. For instance, when
+non-recent dives are added to the dive list the numbering does not
+automatically follow on because of the dives that are more recent in
+date/time than the newly-added dive with an older date/time. Therefore, one
+may sometimes need to renumber the dives. This is performed by selecting
+(from the Main Menu) <em>Log → Renumber</em>. Users are given a choice with
+respect to the lowest sequence number to be used. Completing this operation
+results in new sequence numbers (based on date/time) for the dives in the
+<strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Group">7.3. Grouping dives into trips and manipulating trips</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For regular divers, the dive list can rapidly become very long. <em>Subsurface</em>
+can group dives into <em>trips</em>. It performs this by grouping dives that have
+date/times that are not separated in time by more than two days, thus
+creating a single heading for each diving trip represented in the dive
+log. Below is an ungrouped dive list (<strong>A</strong>, on the left) as well as the
+corresponding grouped dive list comprising five dive trips (<strong>B</strong>, on the
+right):</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Group2.jpg" alt="Figure: Grouping dives" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Grouping into trips allows a rapid way of accessing individual dives without
+having to scan a long lists of dives. In order to group the dives in a dive
+list, (from the Main Menu) users must select <em>Log → Autogroup</em>. The <strong>Dive
+List</strong> panel now shows only the titles for the trips.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_editing_the_title_and_associated_information_for_a_particular_trip">7.3.1. Editing the title and associated information for a particular trip</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, in the dive list, minimal information is included in the trip
+title. More information about a trip can be added by selecting its trip
+title from the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This shows a <strong>Trip Notes</strong> tab in the <strong>Dive
+Notes</strong> panel. Here users can add or edit information about the date/time,
+the trip location and any other general comments about the trip as a whole
+(e.g. the dive company that was dived with, the general weather and surface
+conditions during the trip, etc.). After entering this information, users
+should select <strong>Save</strong> from the buttons at the top right of the <strong>Trip Notes</strong>
+tab. The trip title in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel should now reflect some of the
+edited information.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_viewing_the_dives_during_a_particular_trip">7.3.2. Viewing the dives during a particular trip</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dives have been grouped into trips, users can expand one or more
+trips by clicking the arrow-head on the left of each trip title. This
+expands the selected trip, revealing the individual dives performed during
+the trip.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_collapsing_or_expanding_dive_information_for_different_trips">7.3.3. Collapsing or expanding dive information for different trips</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If a user right-clicks after selecting a particular trip in the dive list,
+the resulting context menu allows several possibilities to expand or
+collapse dives within trips. This includes expanding all trips, collapsing
+all trips and collapsing all trips except the selected one.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_merging_dives_from_more_than_one_trip_into_a_single_trip">7.3.4. Merging dives from more than one trip into a single trip</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>By right-clicking on a selected trip title in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel, a
+context menu shows up that allows the merging of trips by either merging of
+the selected trip with the trip below or with the trip above.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_splitting_a_single_trip_into_more_than_one_trip">7.3.5. Splitting a single trip into more than one trip</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If a trip includes five dives, the user can split this trip into two trips
+(trip 1: top 3 dives; trip 2: bottom 2 dives) by selecting and
+right-clicking the top three dives. The resulting context menu allows the
+user to create a new trip by choosing the option <strong>Create new trip
+above</strong>. The top three dives are then grouped into a separate trip. The
+figures below shows the selection and context menu on the left (A) and the
+completed action on the right (B):</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/SplitDive3a.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Split a trip into 2 trips" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_manipulating_single_dives">7.4. Manipulating single dives</h3>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_delete_a_dive_from_the_dive_log">7.4.1. Delete a dive from the dive log</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dives can be permanently deleted from the dive log by selecting and
+right-clicking them to bring up the context menu, and then selecting <strong>Delete
+dive(s)</strong>. Typically this would apply to a case where a user wishes to delete
+workshop calibration dives of the dive computer or dives of extremely short
+duration.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_unlink_a_dive_from_a_trip">7.4.2. Unlink a dive from a trip</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Users can unlink dives from the trip to which they belong. In order to do
+this, select and right-click the relevant dives to bring up the context
+menu. Then select the option <strong>Remove dive(s) from trip</strong>. The dive(s) now
+appear immediately above the trip to which they belonged.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_add_a_dive_to_the_trip_immediately_above">7.4.3. Add a dive to the trip immediately above</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Selected dives can be moved from the trip to which they belong and placed
+within the trip immediately above the currently active trip. To do this,
+select and right-click the dive(s) to bring up the context menu, and then
+select <strong>Add dive(s) to trip immediately above</strong>.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_shift_the_start_time_of_dive_s">7.4.4. Shift the start time of dive(s)</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the start time of a dive. This may apply
+to situations where dives are performed in different time zones or when the
+dive computer has an erroneous time. In order to do this, user must select
+and right-click the dive(s) to be adjusted. This action brings up the
+context menu on which the <strong>Shift times</strong> option should be selected. User must
+then specify the time (in hours and minutes) by which the dives should be
+adjusted and click on the option indicating whether the time adjustment
+should be forwards or backwards.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_merge_dives_into_a_single_dive">7.4.5. Merge dives into a single dive</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes a dive is briefly interrupted, e.g. if a diver returns to the
+surface for a few minutes, resulting in two or more dives being recorded by
+the dive computer and appearing as different dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong>
+panel. Users can merge these dives onto a single dive by selecting the
+appropriate dives, right-clicking them to bring up the context menu and then
+selecting <strong>Merge selected dives</strong>. It may be necessary to edit the dive
+information in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel to reflect events or conditions that
+apply to the merged dive. The figure below shows the depth profile of two
+such dives that were merged:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MergedDive.png" alt="Example: Merged dive" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Filter">7.5. Filtering the dive list</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel can be filtered, that is, one can select
+only some of the dives based on their attributes, e.g. dive tags, dive site,
+dive master, buddy or protective clothing. For instance, filtering allows
+one to list the deep dives at a particular dive site, or otherwise the cave
+dives with a particular buddy.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To open the filter, select <em>Log → Filter divelist</em> from the main menu. This
+opens the <em>Filter Panel</em> at the top of the <em>Subsurface</em> window. Three icons
+are located at the top right hand of the filter panel. The <em>Filter Panel</em>
+can be reset (i.e. all current filters cleared) by selecting the <strong>+</strong>. The
+<em>Filter Panel</em> may also be minimised by selecting the middle icon. When
+minimised, only these three icons are shown. The panel can be maximised by
+clicking the icon that minimised the panel. The filter may also be reset and
+closed by selecting the button with the flag. An example of the <em>Filter
+Panel</em> is shown in the figure below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Filterpanel.jpg" alt="Figure: Filter panel" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Four filter criteria may be used to filter the dive list: dive tags, person
+(buddy / dive master), dive site and dive suit, each of which is represented
+by a check list with check boxes. Above each check list is a second-level
+filter tool, allowing the listing of only some of the attributes within that
+check list. For instance, typing "<em>ca</em>" in the filter textbox above the tags
+check list results in the tags check list being reduced to "<em>cave</em>" and
+"<em>cavern</em>". Filtering of the check list enables the rapid finding of search
+terms for filtering the dive list.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To activate filtering of the dive list, the check box of at least one item
+in one of the four check lists needs to be checked. The dive list is then
+shortened to include only the dives that pertain to the selection criteria
+specified in the check lists. The four check lists work as a filter with
+<em>AND</em> operators, Subsurface filters therefore for <em>cave</em> as a tag AND <em>Joe
+Smith</em> as a buddy; but the filters within a category are inclusive -
+filtering for <em>cave</em> and <em>boat</em> shows those dives that have either one or
+both of these tags.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_ExportLog">8. Exporting the dive log or parts of the dive log</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are two routes for the export of dive information from Subsurface:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Exporter les informations de plongée vers <em>Facebook</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Export_other">Exporter des informations de plongée vers d’autres
+ destinations ou formats</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_facebook">8.1. Export des informations de plongée vers <em>Facebook</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>L’export des plongées vers <em>Facebook</em> est géré différemment des autres types
+d’export. Cela est du au fait que l’export vers <em>Facebook</em> nécessite une
+connexion vers <em>Facebook</em>, nécessitant un identifiant et un mot de passe. À
+partir du menu principal, si vous sélectionnez <em>Fichier → Préférences →
+Facebook</em>, un écran de connexion est présenté (voir l’image <strong>A</strong> sur la
+gauche, ci dessous). Entrez vos identifiant et mot de passe <em>Facebook</em>. Une
+fois connecté à <em>Facebook</em>, le panneau de l’image <strong>B</strong> ci dessous est
+présenté. Ce panneau a un bouton qui doit être sélectionné pour fermer la
+connexion <em>Facebook</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/facebook1_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Facebook login" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Having established a login to <em>Facebook</em>, transfer of a dive profile to
+one’s <em>Facebook</em> timeline is easy. A <em>Facebook</em> icon appears in the <strong>Dive
+Notes</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em> (See image <strong>A</strong> below). Ensure that the dive
+that you want to transfer to the timeline is depicted in the <em>Subsurface</em>
+<strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. Select the <em>Facebook</em> icon, and a dialogue is shown,
+determining the amount of additional information transferred with the dive
+profile (see image <strong>B</strong>, below). In order to transfer a dive profile to
+<em>Facebook</em>, the name of a <em>Facebook</em> album needs to be provided. The
+checkboxes on the lefthand side allow one to determine how much additional
+information should be transferred with the dive profile. This information is
+shown in the text box on the right hand side of the panel (see image <strong>B</strong>,
+below). You can easily edit the message that will be posted right there in
+the text box. Having specified the additional information and verified the
+text you want to post, select the <em>OK</em> button which triggers the transfer to
+<em>Facebook</em>. After a while, an acknowledgement dialogue appears, indicating
+successful transfer to <em>Facebook</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Both the Album created and the post to your time line will be marked as
+private. In order for friends to be able to see the post you have to change
+its permissions from a regular Facebook login either in a browser or a
+Facebook app. While this is an extra step the developers felt that this was
+the better solution to avoid having unwanted posts in your public timeline.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/facebook2_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Facebook login" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If required, then close the <em>Facebook</em> connection by either closing
+<em>Subsurface</em> or by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Facebook</em> from the Main
+Menu, and clicking the appropriate button on the Facebook Preferences panel.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Export_other">8.2. Export dive information to other destinations or formats</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For non-<em>Facebook exports</em>, the export function can be reached by selecting
+<em>File → Export</em>, which brings up the Export dialog. This dialog always
+gives two options: save ALL dives, or save only the dives selected in <strong>Dive
+List</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em>. Click the appropriate radio button (see images
+below).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Export_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Export dialog" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A dive log or part of it can be saved in three formats:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Subsurface XML</em> format. This is the native format used by <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Universal Dive Data Format (<em>UDDF</em>). Refer to <em>http://uddf.org</em> for more
+ information. UDDF is a generic format that enables communication among many
+ dive computers and computer programs.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Divelogs.de</em>, an Internet-based dive log repository. In order to upload to
+ <em>Divelogs.de</em>, one needs a user-ID as well as a password for
+ <em>Divelogs.de</em>. Log into <em>http://en.divelogs.de</em> and subscribe to this
+ service in order to upload dive log data from <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>DiveShare</em> is also a dive log repostory on the Internet focusing on the
+ recreational dives. In order to upload dives one has to provide a used ID,
+ so registration with <em>http://scubadiveshare.com</em> is required.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CSV dive details</em>, that includes the most critical information of the dive
+ profile. Included information of a dive is: dive number, date, time, buddy,
+ duration, depth, temperature and pressure: in short, most of the information
+ that recreational divers enter into handwritten log books.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CSV dive profile</em>, that includes a large amount of detail for each dive,
+ including the depth profile, temperature and pressure information of each
+ dive.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>HTML</em> format, in which the dive(s) are stored in HTML files, readable with
+ an Internet browser. Most modern web browsers are supported, but JavaScript
+ must be enabled. This HTML file is not intended to be edited by the users.
+ The HTML dive log contains most of the information and also contains a
+ search option to search the dive log. HTML export is specified on the second
+ tab of the Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above). A typical use of this option is
+ to export all one’s dives to a smartphone or a tablet where it would serve
+ as a very portable record of dives useful for dive companies that wish to
+ verify the dive history of a diver. This does away with the need to carry
+ one’s original logbook with one when doing dives with dive companies.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Worldmap</em> format, an HTML file with a world map upon which each dive and
+ some information about it are indicated. This map is not editable. However,
+ if one selects any of the dive sites on the map, a summary of the dive is
+ available in text, as shown in the image below.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/mapview_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: HTML Map export view" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Image depths</em>, which creates a text file that contains the file names of
+ all photos or images attached to any of the selected dives in the <em>Dive
+ List</em>, together with the depth under water where of each of those photos
+ were taken.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>General Settings</em>, under the HTML tab, provides the following options:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Subsurface Numbers: if this option is checked, the dive(s) are exported with the
+ numbers associated with them in Subsurface, Otherwise the dive(s) will be numbered
+ starting from 1.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Export Yearly Statistics: if this option is checked, a yearly statistics table will
+ be attached with the HTML exports.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Export List only: a list of dives will only be exported and the detailed dive
+ information will not be available.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Under <em>Style Options</em> some style-related options are available like font
+ size and theme.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Export to other formats can be achieved through third party facilities, for
+instance <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">9. Keeping a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log in the Cloud</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For each diver, dive log information is highly important. Not only is it a
+record of diving activities for one’s own pleasure, but it is important
+information required for admission to further training courses or
+(sometimes) even diving sites. The security of the dive log is therefore
+critical. In order to have a dive log that is resistant to failure of a home
+computer hard drive, loss or theft of equipment, the Cloud is an obvious
+solution. This also has the added benefit that one can access one’s dive log
+from anywhere in the world without having to carry it with oneself. For this
+reason, facilities such as <em>divelogs.de</em> and <em>Diving Log</em> offer facilities
+to store dive log information on the Internet. Although <em>Subsurface</em> does
+not offer integrated Cloud storage of dive logs, it is simple to achieve
+this using several of the existing facilities on the Internet.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For instance <a href="http://www.dropbox.com/"><em>Dropbox</em></a> offers a free application
+that allows files on the Dropbox servers to be seen as a local folder on
+one’s desktop computer.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Cloud.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Dropbox folder" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Dropbox</em> program creates a copy of the <em>Dropbox</em> Internet Cloud content
+on one’s desktop computer. When the computer is connected to the Internet,
+the Internet content is automatically updated. Therefore both the <em>Open</em> and
+<em>Save</em> of dive logs are done using the local copy of the dive log in the
+local <em>Dropbox</em> folder, so there’s no need for a direct internet
+connection. If the local copy is modified, e.g. by adding a dive, the remote
+copy in the <em>Dropbox</em> server in the Cloud will be automatically updated
+whenever Internet access is available.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In this way a dive log in one’s <em>Dropbox</em> folder can be accessed seamlessly
+from the Internet and can be accessed from any place with Internet
+access. Currently there are no costs involved for this service. Dropbox
+(Windows, Mac and Linux) can be installed by accessing the
+<a href="http://www.dropbox.com/install"><em>Install Page on the Dropbox website</em></a>
+Alternatively one can use <em>Dropbox</em> as a mechanism to backup one’s dive
+log. To Store a dive log in the Cloud, select <em>File → Save as</em> from the
+<em>Subsurface</em> main menu, navigate to the <em>Dropbox</em> folder and select the
+<em>Save</em> button. To access the dive log in the Cloud, select <em>File → Open
+Logbook</em> from the <em>Subsurface</em> main menu and navigate to the dive log file
+in the <em>Dropbox</em> folder and select the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Several paid services exist on the Internet (e.g. Google, Amazon) where the
+same process could be used for the Cloud-based storage of dive logs.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">10. Printing a dive log</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> provides a simple interface to print a whole dive log or only a
+few selected dives, including dive profiles and other contextual
+information.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Before printing, two decisions are required:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Should the whole dive log be printed or only part of it? If only part of the
+ dive log is required, then the user must select the required dives from the
+ <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+What gas partial pressure information is required on the dive profile? Users
+ should select the appropriate toggle-buttons on the button bar to the left
+ of the Dive Profile panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now the print options should be selected to match the user’s needs. To do
+this, user should select <em>File → Print</em> from the Main menu. The following
+dialogue appears (see the image on the left [A], below).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/PrintDiveLog.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Print dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Under <em>Print type</em> users need to select one of three options:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Print the complete Dive List: to do this, <em>Table Print</em> should be selected.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 6
+ dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>6 dives per page</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 2
+ dives per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>2 dives per page</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Print the selected dives (dive profiles and all other information) at 1 dive
+ per printed page: to do this, users should select <em>1 dive per page</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Under <em>Print options</em> users need to select:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Printing only the dives that have been selected from the dive list prior to
+ activating the print dialogue, achieved by checking the box <em>Print only
+ selected dives</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Printing in colour, achieved by checking the box with <em>Print in colour</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Ordering</em> affects the layout of the page (or part of it) for each
+dive. The dive profile could be printed at the top of each dive, with the
+textual information underneath, or it could be printed with the textual
+information at the top with the dive profile underneath. Users should select
+the appropriate option in the print dialogue. See the image below which has
+a layout with text below the dive profile.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Users can <em>Preview</em> the printed page by selecting the <em>Preview</em> button on
+the dialogue. After preview, changes to the options in the print dialogue
+can be made, resulting in a layout that fits personal taste.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Next, select the <em>Print</em> button in the dialogue. This activates the regular
+print dialogue used by the user operating system (image [<strong>B</strong>] in the middle,
+above), allowing them to choose a printer and to set its properties (image
+[<strong>C</strong>] on the right, above). It is important to set the print resolution of
+the printer to an appropriate value by changing the printer
+properties. Finally, one can print the dives. Below is a (rather small)
+example of the output for one particular page.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Printpreview.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Print preview page" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_Configure">11. Configurer un ordinateur de plongée</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> permet de configurer son ordinateur de plongée. Actuellement,
+les familles d’ordinateurs supportés sont Heinrichs-Weikamp (OSTC 2, OSTC 3)
+et Suunto Vyper (Stinger, Mosquito, D3, Vyper, Vytec, Cobra, Gekko et
+Zoop). De nombreux paramètres de ces ordinateurs de plongée peuvent être
+lues et modifiées. La première étape est de s’assurer que les pilotes pour
+votre ordinateur de plongée sont installés et que le nom de périphérique de
+l’ordinateur de plongée est connu. Voir
+<a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">APPENDIX A</a> pour plus d’informations sur la manière de procéder.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Une fois que l’ordinateur de plongée est connecté à <em>Subsurface</em>,
+sélectionner <em>Fichier → Configurer l’ordinateur de plongée</em>, à partir du
+menu principal. Fournir le nom du périphérique dans le champ en haut du
+panneau de configuration qui ouvre et sélectionne le bon modèle d’ordinateur
+de plongée à partir du panneau à gauche (voir l’image ci-dessous).</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Configure_dc_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Configure dive computer" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>En utilisant les boutons appropriés du panneau de configuration, les actions
+suivantes peuvent être réalisées :</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Récupérer les détails disponibles</strong>. Cela charge la configuration existante à partir de l’ordinateur de plongée
+ dans <em>Subsurface</em>, en l’affichant dans le panneau de configuration.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Enregistrer les modifications sur le périphérique</strong>. Cela change la configuration de l’ordinateur
+ de plongée pour correspondre aux informations affichées dans le panneau de configuration.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Sauvegarder</strong>. Cela enregistre la configuration dans un fichier. <em>Subsurface</em> demande
+ l’emplacement et le nom du fichier pour enregistrer les informations.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Restaurer une sauvegarde</strong>. Cela charge les informations à partir d’un fichier de sauvegarde et l’affiche
+ dans le panneau de configuration.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Mettre à jour le firmware</strong>. Si un nouveau firmware est disponible pour l’ordinateur de plongée,
+ il sera chargé dans l’ordinateur de plongée.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_Preferences">12. Setting user <em>Preferences</em> for <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings within <em>Subsurface</em> that the user can
+specify. These are found when selecting <em>File → Preferences</em>. The settings
+are performed in five groups: <strong>Defaults</strong>, <strong>Units</strong>, <strong>Graph</strong>, <strong>Language</strong> and
+<strong>Network</strong>. All five sections operate on the same principles: the user must
+specify the settings that are to be changed, then these changes are saved
+using the <strong>Apply</strong> button. After applying all the new settings users can then
+leave the settings panel by selecting <strong>OK</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_defaults">12.1. Defaults</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings in the <strong>Defaults</strong> panel:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences defaults page" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Lists and tables</strong>: Here one can specify the font type and font size of the
+ <strong>Dive Table</strong> panel. By decreasing the font size of the <strong>Dive Table</strong>, users can see more dives on a screen.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Dives</strong>: For the <em>Default Dive File</em> one need to specify the directory and
+ file name of one’s
+ electronic dive log book. This is a file with filename extension .xml. When
+ launched, <em>Subsurface</em> will automatically load the specified dive log book.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Display invalid</strong>: Dives can be marked as invalid (when a user wishes to hide
+ dives that he/she don’t consider valid dives, e.g. pool dives, but still want to
+ keep them in the dive log). This controls whether those dives are displayed in
+ the dive list.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Default cylinder</strong>: Here users can specify the default cylinder listed in
+ the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> panel.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Animations</strong>: Some actions in showing the dive profile are performed using
+ animations. For instance, the axis values for depth and time change from dive to
+ dive. When viewing a different dive, these changes in axis characteristics do not
+ happen instantaneously, but are animated. The <em>Speed</em> of animations can be controlled
+ by setting this slider
+ with faster animation speed to the left, with a 0 value representing no animation
+ at all.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Subsurface web service</strong>: When one subscribes to the <a href="#S_Companion">Subsurface web service</a>, a very
+ long and hard-to-remember userID is issued. This is the place to save that userID. By
+ checking the option <em>Save User ID locally?</em>, one ensures that a local copy of that userID
+ is saved.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Clear all settings</strong>: As indicated in the button below this heading, all settings are
+ cleared and set to default values.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_units">12.2. Units</h3>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Units page" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Here user can choose between metric and imperial units of depth, pressure,
+volume, temperature and mass. By selecting the Metric or Imperial radio
+button at the top, users can specify that all units are in the chosen
+measurement system. Alternatively, if one selects the <strong>Personalise</strong> radio
+button, units can be selected independently, with some units in the metric
+system and others in imperial.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_graph">12.3. Graph</h3>
+<div class="imageblock" id="S_CCR_options" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Graph page" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_GradientFactors"><p>This panel allows two type of selections:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Show</strong>: Here users can specify the amount of information shown as part of
+the dive profile:
+<strong>* Thresholds: <em>Subsurface</em> can display the nitrogen, oxygen and the helium partial pressures during
+ the dive. These are enabled using the toolbar on the left hand side of the *Dive Profile</strong>
+ panel. For each of these graphs users can specify a threshold value on the right-hand side of the
+ Preferences panel. If any of the graphs go above this threshold level, the graph is
+ highlighted in red, indicating that the threshold has been exceeded.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Draw dive computer reported ceiling red</em>: This checkbox allows exactly what it says.
+ Not all dive computers report ceiling values. If the dive computer does report it, it may differ
+ from the ceilings calculated by <em>Subsurface</em>. This is because of the different algorithms and gradient factors available for calculating ceilings, as well as the dynamic way that a
+ dive computer can calculate ceilings during a dive.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Show unused cylinders in Equipment Tab</em>: This checkbox allows display of information about unused cylinders when viewing the <strong>Equipment Tab</strong>. Conversely, if this box is not checked, and any cylinders entered using the <strong>Equipment Tab</strong> are not used (e.g. there was no gas switch to such a cylinder), then these cylinders are omitted from that list.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Show average depth</em>: Activating this checkbox causes <em>Subsurface</em> to draw a red line across
+ the dive profile, indicating the mean depth of the dive.
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Misc</strong>:
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Gradient Factors:* Here users can set the <em>gradient factors</em> used while diving. GF_Low is
+ the gradient factor at depth and GF_High is used just below the surface.
+ At intermediate depths gradient factors between GF_Low and GF_High are used.
+ Gradient factors add conservatism to the nitrogen exposure during a dive, in a
+ similar way that many dive computers have a conservatism setting. The lower
+ the value of a gradient factor, the more conservative the calculations are with
+ respect to nitrogen loading and the deeper the ascent ceilings are. Gradient
+ factors of 20/60 are considered conservative and values of 60/90 are considered
+ harsh. Checking <strong>GFLow at max depth</strong> box causes GF_Low to be used at the
+ deepest depth of a dive. If this box is not checked, GF_Low is applied at
+ all depths deeper than the first deco stop. For more information see:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CCR: Show setpoints when viewing pO2:</em> With this checkbox ativated, the pO<sub>2</sub>
+ graph on the dive profile has an overlay in red which inticates the CCR setpoint
+ values. See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>CCR: Show individual O<sub>2</sub> sensor values when viewing pO<sub>2</sub>:</em> Show the pO<sub>2</sub>
+ values associated with each of the individual oxygen sensors of a CCR system.
+ See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Configuring dive planning using rebreather equipment:</strong>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Default CCR setpoint for dive planning:</em> Specify the O<sub>2</sub> setpoint for a
+ CCR dive plan. This determines the pO<sub>2</sub> that will be maintained
+ during a particular dive. This is the setpoint that is used at the start
+ of any CCR dive. Setpoint changes during the dive can be added via the
+ profile context menu.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>pSCR O<sub>2</sub> metabolism rate:</em> For a semiclosed rebreather (pSCR) system, this is the
+ volume of oxygen used by a diver each minute. Set this value for pSCR dive planning
+ and decompression calculations.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>pSCR ratio:</em> For pSCR equipment the dump ratio is the ratio of gas released to the
+ environment to that of the gas recirculated to the diver. Set this value for a
+ pSCR dive plan.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_language">12.4. Language</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Choose a language that <em>Subsurface</em> will use.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Language page" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A checkbox allows one to use the <em>System Default</em> language which in most
+cases will be the correct setting; with this <em>Subsurface</em> simply runs in the
+same language / country settings as the underlying OS. If this is for some
+reason undesirable users can uncheck this checkbox and pick a language /
+country combination from the list of included localizations. The <em>Filter</em>
+text box allows one to list similar languages. For instance there are
+several system variants of English or French. This particular preference
+requires a restart of <em>Subsurface</em> to take effect.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_network">12.5. Network</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel facilitates communication between <em>Subsurface</em> and data sources
+on the Internet.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Network page" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This is important, for instance, when <em>Subsurface</em> needs to communicate with
+Internet services such as the <a href="#S_Companion"><em>Subsurface Companion app</em></a> or
+data export/import from <em>Divelogs.de</em>. These Internet requirements are
+determined by one’s type of connection to the Internet and by the Internet
+Service Provider (ISP) used. One’s ISP should provide the appropriate
+information. If a proxy server is used for Internet access, the appropriate
+information needs to be provided here. The type of proxy needs to be
+selected from the dropdown list. after which the IP address of the host and
+the appropriate port number should be provided. If the proxy server uses
+authentication, the appropriate userID and password also needs to be
+provided so that <em>Subsurface</em> can automatically pass through the proxy
+server to access the Internet.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_facebook_accesss">12.6. Facebook Accesss</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel allows one to log into a Facebook account in order to transfer
+information from Subsurface to Facefook.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Pref6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Facebook login panel" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If one provides a valid Facebook userID and password, a connection to
+Facebook is created. The connection to Facebook is closed when one closes
+down Subsurface. At this point the checkbox labelled "Keep connection to
+Subsurface", on the login screen has no effect. See the section
+<a href="#S_facebook">Exporting dive profiles to Facebook</a> for more information.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">13. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive planning is an advanced feature of <em>Subsurface</em>, accessible by
+selecting <em>Log → Plan Dive</em> from the main menu. It allows calculation of
+nitrogen load during a dive by using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm with the
+addition of gradient factors as implemented by Erik Baker.</p></div>
+<div class="sidebarblock">
+<div class="content">
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/warning2.png" alt="Warning" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner IS CURRENTLY EXPERIMENTAL and assumes the user
+is already familiar with the <em>Subsurface</em> user interface. It is explicitly
+used under the following conditions:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The user is conversant with dive planning and has the necessary training to
+ perform dive planning.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The user plans dives within his/her certification limits.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Dive planning makes large assumptions about the characteristics of the
+ <em>average person</em> and cannot compensate for individual physiology or health
+ or personal history or life style characteristics.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The safety of a dive plan depends heavily on the way in which the planner is
+ used.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The user is familiar with the user interface of <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+A user who is not absolutely sure about any of the above requirements should
+ not use this feature.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_the_em_subsurface_em_dive_planner_screen">13.1. The <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner screen</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Like the <em>Subsurface</em> dive log, the planner screen is divided into several
+sections (see image below). The <strong>setup</strong> parameters for a dive are entered
+into the several sections on the left hand side of the screen. The setup is
+divided into several sections: Available Gases, Rates, Planning, Gas Options
+and Dive Notes.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>At the top right hand is a green <strong>design panel</strong> upon which the profile of
+the dive can be manipulated directly by dragging and clicking as explained
+below. This feature makes the <em>Subsurface</em> dive planner unique in ease of
+use.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>At the bottom right is a text panel with a heading of <em>Dive Plan
+Details</em>. This is where the details of the dive plan are provided in a way
+that can easily be copied to other software. This is also where any warning
+messages about the dive plan are printed.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/PlannerWindow1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Dive planner startup window" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_open_circuit_dives_as_an_example_of_dive_planning">13.2. Open circuit dives as an example of dive planning</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Towards the left bottom of the planner (circled in blue in the image below)
+ is a dropbox with three options. Select the appropriate one of these:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Open Circuit (the default)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+CCR
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+pSCR
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In the top left-hand area of the planning screen, ensure that the constant
+ dive parameters are appropriate. These are: Start date and time of the dive,
+ Atmospheric Pressure and Altitude above sea level of the dive site. The
+ atmospheric pressure can also be entered as an altitude in metres, assuming
+ an atmospheric pressure of 1.013 bar.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In the table labelled <em>Available Gases</em>, add the information of the
+ cylinders to be used as well as the gas composition within that
+ cylinder. This is done in a similar way as for <a href="#S_CylinderData">providing cylinder data for dive logs</a>. Choose the cylinder type by double clicking
+ the cylinder type and using the dropdown list, then specify the work
+ pressure of this cylinder. By leaving the oxygen concentration (O2%) filed
+ empty, the cylinder is assumed to contain air. Otherwise enter the oxygen
+ and/or helium concentration in the boxes provided in this dialogue. Add
+ additional cylinders by using the "+" icon to the top righthand of the
+ dialogue.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dialogue indicating <em>Dive Planner Points</em> is usually not used at this
+ stage of the dive planning.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>The planning is performed in three stages</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>a) Nitrogen management</strong>: This is performed by specifying the rates for descent and ascent,
+as well as the gradient factors (GFLow and GFHigh) under the headings <em>Rates</em> and <em>Planning</em>
+to the bottom left of the planning screen. Initially, the GFHigh and GFLow values in the <em>Preferences</em>
+panel of <em>Subsurface</em> is used. If these are changed within the planner (see <em>Gas Options</em> within
+the planner), the new values are
+used without changing the original values in the <em>Preferences</em>. Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their depths.
+A very low GFLow value brings about decompression stops early on during the dive.
+ ** For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>.
+For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding
+ M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient
+ factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a>
+<a href="http://www.amazon.com/Deco-Divers-Decompression-Theory-Physiology/dp/1905492073/ref=sr_1_1?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1403932320&sr=1-1&keywords=deco+for+divers"><em>Deco
+for Divers</em>, by Mark Powell (2008). Aquapress</a> Southend-on-Sea, UK. ISBN 10:
+1-905492-07-3. An excellent non-technical review.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The ascent rate is critical for nitrogen off-gassing at the end of the dive
+and is specified for several depth ranges, utilising the average (or mean)
+depth as a yardstick. The mean depth of the dive plan is indicated by a
+light grey line on the dive profile. Ascent rates at deeper levels are often
+in the range of 8-12 m/min, while ascent rates near the surface are often in
+the range of 4-9 m/min. The descent rate is also specified. If the option
+<em>Drop to first depth</em> is activated, then the descent phase of the planned
+dive will be at the maximal descent rate specified in the <em>Rates</em> section of
+the dive setup.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>b) Oxygen management</strong>: In the <strong>Gas Options</strong> part of the dive specification, the maximum partial
+pressure for oxygen needs to be specified for the
+bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom po2</em>) as well as for the decompression part of the dive (<em>deco po2</em>).
+The most commonly
+used values are 1.4 bar for the bottom part of the dive and 1.6 bar for any decompression
+stages. Normally, a partial pressure of 1.6 bar is not exceeded. PO2 settings and the depth at which switching to a gas takes place can also be edited in the
+<em>Available Gases</em> dialog. Normally the planner decides on switching to a new gas when, during
+ascent, the partial pressure of the new gas has increased to 1.6 bar.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>c) Gas management</strong>: With open-circuit dives this is a primary consideration. One needs to keep within the limits of the amount of gas within the dive
+cylinder(s), allowing for an appropriate margin for a safe return to the surface, possibly
+sharing with a buddy. Under the <em>Gas Options</em> heading, specify the best (but conservative) estimate
+of your surface-equivalent air consumption (SAC, also termed RMV) in
+litres/min (for the time being, only SI units are supported). Specify the SAC during the
+bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom SAC</em>) as well as during the decompression or safety stops of the
+dive (<em>deco SAC</em>). Values of 15-30 l/min are common. For good gas management, a thumbsuck guess
+is not sufficient and one needs to
+monitor one’s gas consumption on a regular basis, dependent on different dive conditions and/or equipment.
+The planner calculates the total volume of gas used during the dive and issues a warning
+if one exceeds the total amount of gas available. Good practice demands that one does not dive to
+the limit of the gas supply but that an appropriate reserve is kept for unforeseen circumstances.
+For technical diving, this reserve can be up to 66% of the total available gas.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Now (at last) one can start the detailed time-depth planning of the
+dive. <em>Subsurface</em> offers a unique graphical interface for performing this
+part of the planning. The mechanics of doing this is similar to
+hand-entering a dive profile in the dive log part of <em>Subsurface</em>. Upon
+activating the planner, a default dive of depth 15 m for 40 min is offered
+in the bue design surface to the top right hand of the screen. The white
+dots (waypoints) on the profile can be dragged with a mouse. Create more
+waypoints by double-clicking on the profile line and ensuring that the
+profile reflects the intended dive. Drag the waypoints to represent the
+depth and duration of the dive. It is NOt necessary to specify the ascent
+part of the dive since the planner calculates this, based on the settings
+that have been specified. If any of the management limits (for nitrogen,
+oxygen or gas) is exceeded, the surface above the dive profile changes from
+BLUE to RED.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Each waypoint on the dive profile creates a <em>Dive Planner Point</em> in the
+table on the left of the dive planner panel. Ensure that the <em>Used Gas</em>
+value in each row of that table corresponds to one of the gas mixtures
+specified in the <em>Available Gases</em> table. Add new waypoints until the main
+features of the dive have been completed, e.g. the bottom time segment and
+deep stops (if these are implemented). Leave the remaining waypoints on the
+ascent to <em>Subsurface</em>. In most cases <em>Subsurface</em> computes additional way
+points in order to fulfil decompression requirements for that dive. A
+waypoint can be moved by selecting that waypoint and by using the arrow
+keys. The waypoints listed in the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialogue can be
+edited by hand in order to obtain a precise presentation of the dive
+plan. In fact, one can create the whole dive profile by editing the <em>Dive
+Planner Points</em> dialog.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Indicate any changes in gas cylinder used by indicating gas changes as
+explained in the section <a href="#S_CreateProfile">hand-creating a dive profile</a>. These changes should reflect the cylinders and gas compositions
+defined in the table with <em>Available Gases</em>. If two or more gases are used,
+automatic gas switches will be suggested during the ascent to the
+surface. However, these changes can be deleted by right-clicking the gas
+change and by manually creating a gas change by right-clicking on the
+appropriate waypoint.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A non-zero value in the "CC set point" column of the table of dive planner
+points indicates a valid setpoint for oxygen partial pressure and that the
+segment is dived using a closed circuit rebreather (CCR). If the last
+manually entered segment is a CCR segment, the decompression phase is
+computed assuming the diver uses a CCR with the specified set-point. If the
+last segment (however short) is on open circuit (OC, indicated by a zero
+set-point) the decompression is computed in OC mode. The planner only
+considers gas changes in OC mode.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an example of a dive plan to 45m using EAN26, followed by an ascent
+using EAN50 and using the settings as described above.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/DivePlanner2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the above has been completed, one can save it by clicking the <em>Save</em>
+button towards the top middle of the planner. The saved dive plan will
+appear in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel of <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>The dive plan details</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>On the bottom right of the dive planner, under <em>Dive Plan Details</em>, the
+exact details of the dive plan are provided. These details may be modified
+by checking any of the options under the <em>Dive Notes</em> section of the dive
+planner, immediately to the left of the <em>Dive Plan Details</em>. If a <em>Verbatim
+diveplan</em> is requested, a detailed sentence-level explanation of the dive
+plan is given. If any of the management specifications have been exceeded
+during the planning, a warning message is printed underneath the dive plan
+information.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If the option <em>Display segment duration</em> is checked, then the duration of
+each depth level is indicated in the <em>Dive Plan Details</em>. This duration
+INCLUDES the transition time to get to that level. However, if the <em>Display
+transition in deco</em> option is checked, the transitions are shown separately
+from the segment durations at a particular level.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_planning_ccr_dives">13.3. Planning CCR dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To plan a dive using a closed circuit rebreather, select the <em>CCR</em> option in
+the dropdown list, circled in blue in the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Available gases</strong>: In the <em>Available gases</em> table, enter the cylinder information for the
+diluent cylinder and for any bail-out cylinders. Do NOT enter the information for the oxygen
+cylinder since it is implied when the <em>CCR</em> dropdown selection is made.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Entering setpoints</strong>: Specify a default setpoint in the Preferences tab, by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Graph</em> from the main menu. All user-entered segments in the <em>Dive planner points</em> table
+use the default setpoint value. Then, different setpoints can be specified for dive segments
+in the <em>Dive planner points</em> table. A zero setpoint
+means the diver bails out to open circuit mode for that segment. The decompression is always calculated
+using the setpoint of the last manually entered segment. So, to plan a bail out ascent for a
+CCR dive, add a one-minute dive segment to the end with a setpoint value of 0. The decompression
+algorithm does not switch deco-gases automatically while in CCR mode (i.e. when a positive setpoint is specified) but, of course, this is calculated for bail out ascents.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive profile for a CCR dive may look something like the image below.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Planner_CCR1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a CCR dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that, in the <em>Dive plan details</em>, the gas consumption for a CCR segment
+is not calculated, so gas consumptions of 0 litres are the norm.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_planning_pscr_dives">13.4. Planning pSCR dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To plan a dive using a passive semi-closed rebreather (pSCR), select <em>pSCR</em> rather than
+<em>Open circuit</em> in the dropdown list.
+The parameters of the pSCR diver can be set by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Graph</em>
+from the main menu, where the gas consumption calculation takes into account the pSCR dump
+ratio (default 10:1) as well as the metabolism rate. The calculation also takes the oxygen drop
+accross the mouthpiece of the rebreather into account. If the
+pO<sub>2</sub> drops below what is considered a save value, a warning apears in the <em>Dive plan
+details</em>. A typical pSCR configuration is with a single cylinder and one or more bail-out
+cylinders. Therefore the setup of the <em>Available gases</em> and the <em>Dive planner points</em> tables
+are very similar to that of a CCR dive plan, described above. However, no oxygen setpoints
+are specified for pSCR dives. Below is a dive plan for a pSCR dive. The dive is comparable
+to that of the CCR dive above, but note the longer ascent duration due to the lower oxygen
+in the loop due to the oxygen drop accross the mouthpiece of the pSCR equipment.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Planner_pSCR1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Planning a pSCR dive: setup" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_Replan">13.5. Modifying an existing dive plan</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, when a dive plan has been saved, it is accessible from the <strong>Dive
+List</strong>, like any other dive log. Within the <strong>Dive List</strong> there is not a way to
+change a saved dive plan. To perform changes to a dive plan, select it on
+the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Then, in the main menu, select <em>Log → Re-plan dive</em>. This
+will open the selected dive plan within the dive planner, allowing changes
+to be made and saved as usual.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In addition there is the option "Save new". This keeps the original planned
+dive and adds a (possibly modified) copy to the dive list. If that copy is
+saved with the same start time as the original, the two dives are considered
+two versions of the same dive and do not influence other each during
+decompression calculation (see next section).</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_planning_for_repetitive_dives">13.6. Planning for repetitive dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Repetitive dives can easily be planned if the dates and start times of the
+repetitive dive set is specified appropriately in the top left-hand <em>Start
+Time</em> field. <em>Subsurface</em> calculates the gas loading figures correctly and
+the effect of the first dive is evaluated on later dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If one has just completed a long/deep dive and is planning another dive,
+then highlight, in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the dive that has just been completed
+and then activate the planner. Depending on the start time of the planned
+dive, the planner takes into account the gas loading incurred during the
+completed dive and allows planning within these limitations.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If only a few standard configurations are used (e.g. in GUE), then a
+template dive can be created conforming to one of the configurations. If one
+now wishes to plan a dive using this configuration, just highlight the
+template dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong> and activate the planner: the planner takes
+into account the configuration in the highlighted dive.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_printing_the_dive_plan">13.7. Printing the dive plan</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the <em>Print</em> button in the planner allows printing of the <em>Dive
+Plan Details</em> for wet notes. Alternatively one can cut and paste the <em>Dive
+Plan Details</em> for inclusion in a text file or word processing document.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive plans have many characteristics in common with dive logs (dive profile,
+dive notes, etc). After a dive plan has been saved, the dive details and
+gas calculations are saved in the <strong>Dive Notes</strong> tab. While a dive plan is
+being designed, it can be printed using the <em>Print</em> button in the dive
+planner. This prints the dive details and gas calculations in the <em>Dive Plan
+Details</em> panel of the dive planner. However, after the plan has been saved,
+it is represented in a way very similar to a dive log and the gas
+calculations cannot be accessed in the same way as during the planning
+process. The only way to print the dive plan is to use the <em>File → Print</em>
+facility on the main menu in the same way as for dive logs or by copy and
+paste to a word processor.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_description_des_éléments_du_menu_principal_de_subsurface">14. Description des éléments du menu principal de Subsurface</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Cette section décrit les fonctions et les opérations des éléments du menu
+principal de Subsurface. Plusieurs éléments ci-dessous sont des liens vers
+des sections de ce manuel traitant des opérations relatives.</p></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_fichier">14.1. Fichier</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_NewLogbook"><em>Nouveau carnet de plongée</em></a> - Fermer le carnet de plongée
+ actuellement ouvert et supprime toutes les informations de plongées.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Ouvrir un carnet de plongée</em> - Cela ouvre une fenêtre pour sélectionner le
+ carnet de plongée à ouvrir.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Sauvegarder</em> - Enregistrer le carnet de plongée qui est actuellement
+ ouvert.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Enregsitrer sous</em> - Enregistrer le carnet actuel sous un nom différent.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Fermer</em> - Fermer le carnet de plongée actuellement ouvert.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ExportLog"><em>Exporter</em></a> - Exporter le carnet de plongée actuellement
+ ouvert (ou les plongées sélectionnées dans le carnet) vers un des nombreux
+ formats.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_PrintDivelog"><em>Imprimer</em></a> - Imprimer le carnet de plongée actuellement
+ ouvert.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Preferences"><em>Préférences</em></a> - Définir les préférences de <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Configure"><em>Configurer l’ordinateur de plongée</em></a> - Modifier la
+ configuration d’un ordinateur de plongée.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Quitter</em> - Quitter <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_importer">14.2. Importer</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer"><em>Importer depuis un l’ordinateur de plongée</em></a> -
+ Importer des informations de plongées à partir de l’ordinateur de plongée.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#Unified_import"><em>Importer des fichiers de log</em></a> - Importer des
+ informations de plongées à partir d’un fichier d’un format compatible avec
+ <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Importer les données GPS depis le service web Subsurface</em></a> -
+ Charge les coordonnées GPS à partir de l’application mobile <em>Subsurface</em>
+ (téléphones et tablettes).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ImportingDivelogsDe"><em>Importer depuis Divelogs.de</em></a> - Importer des
+ informations de plongées à partir de <em>www.Divelogs.de</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_journal_log">14.3. Journal (log)</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_EnterData"><em>Ajouter une plongée</em></a> - Ajouter manuellement une nouvelle
+ plongée au panneau de la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_DivePlanner"><em>Planifier une plongée</em></a> - Cette fonctionnalité permet de
+ planifier des plongées.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Replan"><em>Replanifier une plongée</em></a> - Modifier une plongée planifiée qui
+ a été enregistrée dans la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_CopyComponents"><em>Copier les composants de la plongée</em></a> - En
+ sélectionnant cette option, vous pouvez copier les informations de plusieurs
+ champs d’un journal de plongée vers le presse-papier.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Coller les composants de la plongée</em> - Colle, dans les plongées
+ sélectionnées dans la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>, les informations copiées au
+ préalable avec l’option <em>Copier les composants de la plongée</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Renumber"><em>Renuméroter</em></a> - Renuméroter les plongées sélectionnées dans
+ le panneau de la <strong>liste des plongées</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Group"><em>Grouper automatiquement</em></a> - Grouper les plongées du panneau de
+ <strong>liste des plongées</strong> dans des voyages de plongées.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_DeviceNames"><em>Editer les noms des ordinateurs de plongée</em></a> - Modifier
+ les noms des ordinateurs de plongée pour faciliter vos journaux (logs).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_Filter"><em>Filtrer la liste des plongées</em></a> - Sélectionner seulement
+ certaines plongées, à partir de tags ou de critères de plongées.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_vue">14.4. Vue</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Tout</em></a> - Affiche les quatre panneaux principaux de
+ <em>Subsurface</em> simultanément.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Liste des plongées</em></a> - Affiche uniquement le panneau de la
+ <strong>liste des plongées</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Profil</em></a> - Affiche uniquement le panneau du <strong>profil de la
+ plongée</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Info</em></a> - Affiche uniquement le panneau des <strong>notes de
+ plongée</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_ViewPanels"><em>Globe</em></a> - Affiche uniquement le panneau de la <strong>carte
+ mondiale</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Statistiques annuelles</em> - Affiche par année le résumé des statistiques des
+ plongées effectuées.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Ordinateur précédent</em> - Passer à l’ordinateur de plongée précédent.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Ordinateur suivant</em> - Passer à l’ordinateur de plongée suivant.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Plein écran</em> - Passer en mode plein écran.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_aide">14.5. Aide</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>À propos de Subsurface</em> - Affiche un panneau avec le numéro de version de
+ <em>Subsurface</em> ainsi que les informations de licence.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Vérifier les mises à jour</em> - Vérifier si une nouvelle version de
+ Subsurface est disponible sur le <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/">site web de
+ <em>Subsurface</em> </a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="#S_UserSurvey"><em>User survey</em></a> - Help to make <em>Subsurface</em> even better by
+ taking part in our user survey.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Manuel utilisateur</em> - Ouvre une fenêtre affichant ce manuel utilisateur.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information_from_a_dive_computer">15. APPENDIX A: Operating system specific information for importing dive information from a dive computer.</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_make_sure_that_the_os_has_the_required_drivers_installed">15.1. Make sure that the OS has the required drivers installed</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/drivers.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">The operating system of the desktop computer needs the appropriate drivers
+in order to communicate with the dive computer in whichever way the dive
+computer prefers (e.g. bluetooth, USB, infra-red).</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+On Linux users need to have the correct kernel module loaded. Most
+ distributions will do this automatically, so the user does not need to load
+ kernel modules. However, some communication protocols require an additional
+ driver, especially for rarely used technology such as infra-red.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+On Windows, the OS should offer to download the correct driver once the user
+ connects the dive computer to the USB port and operating system sees the
+ equipment for the first time.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>On a Mac users sometimes have to manually hunt for the correct driver. For
+example the correct driver for the Mares Puck devices or any other dive
+computer using a USB-to-serial interface based on the Silicon Labs CP2101 or
+similar chip can be found as <em>Mac_OSX_VCP_Driver.zip</em> at the
+<a href="http://www.silabs.com/support/pages/document-library.aspx?p=Interface&f=USB%20Bridges&pn=CP2101">Silicon
+Labs document and software repository</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">15.2. How to Find the Device Name for USB devices and set its write permission</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/usb.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">When a user connects the dive computer by using a USB connector, usually
+<em>Subsurface</em> will either propose a drop down list that contains the correct
+device name (or mount point for the Uemis Zurich), or it will disable the
+device select drop down if no device name is needed at all. In the rare
+cases where this doesn’t work, here are some suggestions of ways to find out
+what the device name is:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">Sur Windows :</div><p>Essayez simplement COM1, COM2, etc. La liste déroulante devrait contenir
+tous les périphériques COM connectés.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">Sur MacOS :</div><p>La liste déroulante devrait contenir tous les ordinateurs de plongée
+connectés.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">Sur Linux :</div><p>Il existe un moyen sûr de trouver le port :</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Déconnecter le cable USB de l’ordinateur de plongée
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Ouvrir un terminal
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Taper la commande <em>dmesg</em> et appuyer sur la touche Entrer
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Connecter le cable USB de l’ordinateur de plongée
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Taper la commande <em>dmesg</em> et appuyer sur la touche Entrer
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Un message similaire à celui-ci devrait apparaitre :</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code>usb 2-1.1: new full speed USB device number 14 using ehci_hcd
+usbcore: registered new interface driver usbserial
+USB Serial support registered for generic
+usbcore: registered new interface driver usbserial_generic
+usbserial: USB Serial Driver core
+USB Serial support registered for FTDI USB Serial Device
+ftdi_sio 2-1.1:1.0: FTDI USB Serial Device converter detected
+usb 2-1.1: Detected FT232BM
+usb 2-1.1: Number of endpoints 2
+usb 2-1.1: Endpoint 1 MaxPacketSize 64
+usb 2-1.1: Endpoint 2 MaxPacketSize 64
+usb 2-1.1: Setting MaxPacketSize 64
+usb 2-1.1: FTDI USB Serial Device converter now attached to ttyUSB3
+usbcore: registered new interface driver ftdi_sio
+ftdi_sio: v1.6.0:USB FTDI Serial Converters Driver</code></pre>
+</div></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La troisième ligne en partant du bas montre que l’adaptateur FTDI USB est
+détecté et connecté sur <code>ttyUSB3</code>. Cette information peut à présent être
+utilisée pour les paramètres d’importation en tant que <code>/dev/ttyUSB3</code> pour
+que Subsurface utilise le bon port USB.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Ensuring that the user has write permission to the USB serial port:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>On Unix-like operating systems the USB ports can only be accessed by users
+who are members of the <code>dialout</code> group. If one is not root, one may not be a
+member of that group and will not be able to use the USB port. Let us assume
+one’s username is <em>johnB</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>As root, type: <code>usermod -a -G dialout johnB</code> (Ubuntu users: <code>sudo usermod -a
+-G dialout johnB</code>) This makes johnB a member of the <code>dialout</code> group.
+Type: <code>id johnB</code> This lists all the groups that johnB belongs to and
+verifies that
+the appropriate group membership has been created. The <code>dialout</code> group should
+be listed
+among the different IDs.
+Under some circumstances this change takes only effect (eg. on Ubuntu) after
+one logs out and then logs in again.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>With the appropriate device name (e.g. <code>dev/ttyUSB3</code>) and with write
+permission to the USB port, the dive computer interface can connect and one
+should be able to import dives.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">15.3. Setting up bluetooth enabled devices</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/bluetooth.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">For dive computers communicating through bluetooth like the Heinrichs
+Weikamp Frog or the Shearwater Predator and Petrel there is a different
+procedure to get the devices name to communicate with <em>Subsurface</em>. Follow
+these steps:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>For the dive computer, after enabling Bluetooth, ensure it is in Upload mode.</strong>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For Bluetooth pairing of the dive computer, refer to the manufacturer’s user
+guide. When using a Shearwater Predator/Petrel, select <em>Dive Log → Upload
+Log</em> and wait for the <em>Wait PC</em> message.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<strong>Pair the <em>Subsurface</em> computer with the dive computer.</strong>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">Sur Windows :</div><p>Bluetooth is most likely already enabled. For pairing with the dive computer
+choose <em>Control Panel → Bluetooth Devices → Add Wireless Device</em>. This
+should bring up a dialog showing your dive computer (in Bluetooth mode) and
+allowing pairing. Right click on it and choose <em>Propertie s→ COM Ports</em> to
+identify the port used for your dive computer. If there are several ports
+listed, use the one saying "Outgoing" instead of "Incoming".</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For downloading to <em>Subsurface</em>, the <em>Subsurface</em> drop-down list should
+contain this COM port already. If not, enter it manually.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Note: If there are issues afterwards when downloading from the dive computer
+using other software, remove the existing pairing with the dive computer.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">Sur MacOS :</div><p>Click on the Bluetooth symbol in the menu bar and select <em>Set up Bluetooth
+Device…</em>. The dive computer should then show up in the list of
+devices. Select it and go through the pairing process. This step should only
+be needed once for initial setup.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the pairing is completed the correct device is shown in the <em>Device or
+Mount Point</em> drop-down in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Import</strong> dialog.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><div class="title">Sur Linux</div><p>Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on the <em>Subsurface</em> computer. On most common
+distributions this should be true out of the box and pairing should be
+straight forward. For instance, Gnome3 shows a Bluetooth icon in the upper
+right corner of the desktop where one selects <em>Set up New Device</em>. This
+should show a dialog where one can select the dive computer (which already
+should be in Bluetooth mode) and pair it. If a PIN is required, try
+manually setting <em>0000</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In the rare cases where the above is not true, then depending on your
+system, try <code>initd</code> or <code>systemd</code>. This might be different and also involve
+loading modules specific to your hardware. In case your system is running
+<code>systemd</code>, manually run <code>systemctl start bluetooth.service</code> to enable it, in
+case of <code>initd</code>, run something like <code>rc.config start bluetoothd</code> or
+<code>/etc/init.d/bluetooth start</code>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One may also use a manual approach by using such commands:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<code>hciconfig</code> shows the Bluetooth devices available on your computer (not dive
+ computer), most likely one will see a hci0, if not try <code>hcitool -a</code> to see
+ inactive devices and run <code>sudo hciconfig hci0 up</code> to bring them up.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<code>hcitool scanning</code> gets a list of bluetooth enabled client devices, look for
+ the dive computer and remember the MAC address are shown there
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<code>bluez-simple-agent hci0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> pairs the dive computer with the
+ bluetooth stack of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, copy/paste the MAC address
+ from the output of <em>hcitool scanning</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Unfortunately on Linux binding to a communication device has to be done
+manually by running:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<code>rfcomm bind /dev/rfcomm0 10:00:E8:C4:BE:C4</code> binds the dive computer to a
+ communication device in the desktop computer, in case rfcomm is already
+ taken use rfcomm1 or up. IMPORTANT: Copy/paste the MAC address from the
+ output of <code>hcitool scanning</code>, the MAC address shown above will not work.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For downloading dives in <em>Subsurface</em> specify the device name connected to
+the MAC address in the last step above, e.g. <em>/dev/rfcomm0</em>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">16. APPENDIX B: Dive Computer specific information for importing dive data.</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">16.1. Importing from Uemis Zurich</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/iumis.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content"><em>Subsurface</em> downloads the information stored on the SDA (the built-in file
+system of the Uemis) including information about dive spots and
+equipment. Buddy information is not yet downloadable. Things are very
+similar to a normal USB-connected dive computer (the Uemis is one of those
+that recharge when connected to the USB port). The main difference is that
+one does not enter a device name, but instead the location where the
+UEMISSDA file system is mounted once connected to the dive computer. On
+Windows this is a drive letter ( often <em>E:</em> or <em>F:</em>), on a Mac this is
+<em>/Volumes/UEMISSDA</em> and on Linux systems this differs depending on the
+distribution. On Fedora it usually is
+<em>/var/run/media/<your_username>/UEMISSDA</em>. In all cases <em>Subsurface</em> should
+suggest the correct location in the drop down list.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After selecting the above device name, download the dives from the Uemis
+Zurich. One technical issue with the Uemis Zurich download implementation
+(this is a Uemis firmware limitation, not a <em>Subsurface</em> issue) is that one
+cannot download more than about 40-50 dives without running out of memory on
+the SDA. This will usually only happen the very first time one downloads
+dives from the Uemis Zurich. Normally when downloading at the end of a day
+or even after a dive trip, the capacity is sufficient. If <em>Subsurface</em>
+displays an error that the dive computer ran out of space the solution is
+straight forward. Disconnect the SDA, turn it off and on again, and
+reconnect it. You can now retry (or start a new download session) and the
+download will continue where it stopped previously. One may have to do this
+more than once, depending on how many dives are stored on the dive computer.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">16.2. Importing from Uwatec Galileo</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/Galileo.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">The Uwatec Galileo dive computers use infra red (IrDA) communication between
+the dive computer and Subsurface. The Uwatec hardware uses a USB dongle
+based on the serial infra-red (SIR) protocol and the MSC7780 IrDA controller
+manufactured by MosChip and marketed by Scubapro and some electronics
+companies. Under Linux, the kernel already provides for communication using
+the IrDA protocol. However, the user additionally needs to load a driver for
+the IrDA interface with the dive computer. The easiest way is to load the
+<strong>irda-tools</strong> package from the
+<a href="http://irda.sourceforge.net/docs/startirda.html">Linux IrDA Project</a>. After
+the installation of the irda-tools, the <strong>root user</strong> can specify a device
+name from the console as follows: <code>irattach irda0</code></td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After executing this command, Subsurface will recognise the Galileo dive
+computer and download dive information.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Under Windows, a similar situation exists. Drivers for the MCS7780 are
+available from some Internet web sites e.g.
+<a href="http://www.drivers-download.com/Drv/MosChip/MCS7780/">www.drivers-download.com</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For the Apple Mac, IrDA communication via the MCS7780 link is not available
+for OSX 10.6 or higher.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">16.3. Importing from Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/HW_DR5.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">When mounted as a USB drive the Heinrichs Weikamp DR5 saves a single UDDF
+file for every dive. Mark all the dives you’d like to import or open.
+Note: The DR5 does not seem to store gradient factors nor deco information,
+so for <em>Subsurface</em> it is not possible to display them. Adjust the gradient
+factors in the <em>Graph Settings</em> in <em>Subsurface</em> to generate a deco overlay
+in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel but please note that the deco
+calculated by <em>Subsurface</em> will most likely differ from the one displayed on
+the DR5.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportingXDeep">16.4. Importing from xDEEP BLACK</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/HW_xdeepblack.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Each dive has to be individually saved as UDDF file using "Export UDDF"
+option in BLACK’s logbook menu. When mounted as a USB drive UDDF files are
+available in LOGBOOK directory. Note: The xDEEP BLACK saves NDL time but
+does not seem to store gradient factors nor deco information, so for
+<em>Subsurface</em> it is not possible to display them. Adjust the gradient factors
+in the <em>Graph Settings</em> in <em>Subsurface</em> to generate a deco overlay in the
+<em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel but please note that the deco calculated
+by <em>Subsurface</em> will most likely differ from the one displayed on the xDEEP
+BLACK.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_importing_from_shearwater_predator_using_bluetooth">16.5. Importing from Shearwater Predator using Bluetooth</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/predator.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Using a Shearwater Predator one may be able to pair Bluetooth but then
+encounter issues when downloading, showing errors like <em>Slip RX: unexp. SLIP
+END</em> on the Predator. This might also arise when using other dive log
+software and operating systems other than Linux. We have no detailed idea
+about the source and how to fix this, but it is reported to be solved
+sometimes by one of these steps:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+use the Bluetooth dongle which came with the Shearwater Predator instead of
+ the built-in one of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+switch to different Bluetooth drivers for the same hardware
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+switch off WiFi while using Bluetooth
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">16.6. Importing from Poseidon MkVI Discovery</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/MkVI.jpeg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Download of dive logs from the MkVI is performed using a custom
+communications adapter and the <em>Poseidon PC Configuration Software</em>,
+obtained when purchasing the MKVI equipment. The latter is a Windows
+application allowing configuration of equipment and storage of dive
+logs. Communication between dive computer and desktop computer utilises the
+IrDA infra-red protocol. Only data for one dive can be downloaded at a time,
+comprising three files:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Setup configuration for the dive and key dive parameters (file with a .txt
+ extension)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Dive log details (file with a .csv extension)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Redbook format dive log (file with .cvsr extension). This is a compressed
+ version of the dive log using a proprietary format.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> accesses the .txt and the .csv files to obtain dive log
+information.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_importing_from_apd_inspiration_ccr">16.7. Importing from APD Inspiration CCR</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/APDComputer.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">The dive logs of an APD Inspiration or similar CCR dive computer are
+downloaded using a communications adapter and <em>AP Communicator</em>, obtained
+when purchasing the equipment. The dive logs can be viewed using the <em>AP Log
+Viewer</em>, within Windows or Mac/OS. However, APD logs can be viewed and
+managed from within <em>Subsurface</em> (together with dives using many other types
+of dive computer). The APD inspiration dive logs are imported into
+<em>Subsurface</em> as follows:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Open a dive within the <em>AP Log Viewer</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Select the tab at the top of the screen, entitled "<em>Data</em>".
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If the raw dive log data show on the screen, click on "<em>Copy to Clipboard</em>".
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Open a text editor, e.g. Notepad (Windows), TextWrangler (Mac).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Copy the contents of the clipboard into the text editor and save the text
+ file with a filename extension of .CSV
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Within <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import → Import log files</em> to open the
+ <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In the dropdown list towards the bottom right of the dialogue, select "<em>CSV
+ files</em>".
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+On the list of file names select the .CSV file that has been created
+ above. An import dialogue opens.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In the dropdown list on the middle right labeled '<em>Pre-configured imports</em>",
+ select <em>APD Log Viewer</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Ensure the other settings for the ADP dive log are appropriate, then select
+ <em>OK</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The APD dive log will appear within <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_appendix_c_exporting_dive_log_information_from_external_dive_log_software">17. APPENDIX C: Exporting Dive log information from external dive log software.</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The import of dive log data from external dive log software is mostly
+performed using the dialogue found by selecting <em>Import</em> from the Main Menu,
+then clicking on <em>Import Log Files</em>. This is a single-step process, more
+information about which can be found <a href="#Unified_import">here.</a> However, in
+some cases, a two-step process may be required:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Export the foreign dive log data to format that is accessible from
+ <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Import the accessible dive log data into <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This appendix provides some information about approaches to export dive log
+data from foreign dive log software. The procedures below mostly apply to
+Linux and/or Windows.</p></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">17.1. Exporting from <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3, DM4 or DM5)</strong></h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/suuntologo.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">DiveManager is a MS Windows application for Suunto dive computers.
+Divemanager 3 (DM3) is an older version of the Suunto software. More recent
+Suunto dive computers use Divemanager version 4 or 5 (DM4 or DM5). The
+different versions of Divemanager use different methods and different file
+naming conventions to export dive log data.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 3 (DM3):</strong></p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Start <em>Suunto Divemanager 3</em> and log in with the name containing the logs
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Do not start the import wizard to import dives from the dive computer.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+In the navigation tree on the left side of the program-window, select the
+ appropriate dives.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Within the list of dives, select the dives you would like to import later:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+To select certain dives: hold <em>ctrl</em> and click the dive
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+To select all dives: Select the first dive, hold down shift and
+ select the last dive
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+With the dives marked, use the program menu <em>File → Export</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The export pop-up will show. Within this pop-up, there is one field called
+ <em>Export Path</em>.
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click the browse button next to the field Export Path
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+A file-manager like window pops up
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Navigate to the directory for storing the
+ Divelog.SDE file
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Optionally change the name of the file for saving
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click <em>Save</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Back in the Export pop-up, press the button <em>Export</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dives are now exported to the file Divelog.SDE.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Divemanager 4 (DM4) and Divemanager 5 (DM5):</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>DM4 and DM5 use identical mechanisms for exporting dive logs. To export a
+divelog from Divemanager one needs to locate the DM4/DM5 database where the
+dives are stored. the user can either look for the original database or make
+a backup of the dives. Both methods are described here.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Locating the Suunto DM4 (or DM5) database:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Start Suunto DM4/DM5
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Select <em>Help → About</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click <em>Copy</em> after text <em>Copy log folder path to clipboard</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Now open Windows Explorer
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Paste the address to the path box at the top of the File Explorer
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The database is called DM4.db or DM5.db
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Making a backup copy of the Suunto DM4/DM5 database:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Start Suunto DM4/DM5
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Select <em>File - Create backup</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+From the file menu select the location and name for the backup, we’ll use
+ DM4 (or DM5) in here with the default extension .bak
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click <em>Save</em>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dives are now exported to the file DM4.bak (or DM5.bak)
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_exporting_from_atomic_logbook">17.2. Exporting from Atomic Logbook</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock" id="Atomic_Export">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="./images/icons/note.png" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Atomic Logbook is a Windows software by Atomic Aquatics. It allows
+downloading of dive information from Cobalt and Cobalt 2 dive computers.
+The divelog is kept in a SQlite database at
+C:\ProgramData\AtomicsAquatics\Cobalt-Logbook\Cobalt.db. This file can be
+directly imported to Subsurface.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_exporting_from_mares_dive_organiser_v2_1">17.3. Exporting from Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock" id="Mares_Export">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/mareslogo.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Mares Dive Organiser is a Windows application. The dive log is kept as a
+Microsoft SQL Compact Edition database with a <em>.sdf</em> filename extension. The
+database includes all Dive Organiser-registered divers on the particular
+computer and all Mares dive computers used. The safest way to obtain a copy
+of the dive database is to export the information to another compatible
+format which can be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Within Dive Organiser, select <em>Database → Backup</em> from the main menu and
+ back up the database to the desk top. This creates a zipped file
+ DiveOrganiserxxxxx.dbf.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Rename the file to DiveOrganiserxxxxx.zip. Inside the zipped directory is a
+ file <em>DiveOrganiser.sdf</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Extract the <em>.sdf</em> file from the zipped folder to your Desktop.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The password for accessing the .zip file is <em>mares</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivingLog">17.4. Exporting from <strong>DivingLog 5.0</strong></h3>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/divingloglogo.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Unfortunately DivingLog XML files give us no indication on the preferences
+set on one’s system. So in order for <em>Subsurface</em> to be able to successfully
+import XML files from DivingLog one first needs to ensure that DivingLog is
+configured to use the Metric system (one can easily change this within
+Diving Log by selecting <em>File → Preferences → Units and Language</em> by
+clicking the <em>Metric</em> button). Then do the following:</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+In DivingLog open the <em>File → Export → XML</em> menu
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Select the dives to export
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click on the export button and select the filename
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="S_Appendix_D">18. APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many divers keep a diving log in some form of a digital file, commonly a
+spreadsheet with various fields of information. These logs can be easily
+imported into <em>Subsurface</em> after the spreadsheet is converted in a .CSV
+file. This section explains the procedure to convert a diving logbook
+stored in a spreadsheet to a .CSV file that will later be imported from
+<em>Subsurface</em>. Creating a .CSV is a straightforward task, although the
+procedure is somewhat different according to which spreadsheet program is
+used.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The first step is to organize the diving data in the spreadsheet, so that
+the first row contains the names (or titles) of each column and the
+information for each dive is stored in a single row. <em>Subsurface</em> supports
+many data items (Dive #, Date, Time, Duration, Location, GPS, Max Depth,
+Mean Depth, Buddy, Notes, Weight and Tags). The user can organize dive data
+following a few simple rules:</p></div>
+<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
+<li>
+<p>
+Date: use one of the following formats: yyyy-mm-dd, dd.mm.yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Duration: the format should be minutes:seconds.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Unit system: only one unit system shold be used (i.e., no mixture between
+ imperial and metric units)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Tags and buddies: values should be separated using a comma.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+GPS position: users must use decimal degrees, e.g. 30.22496 30.821798
+</p>
+</li>
+</ol></div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_em_libreoffice_calc_em_and_em_openoffice_calc_em">18.1. <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> and <em>OpenOffice Calc</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>These are open source spreadsheet applications forming parts of larger open
+source office suite applications. The user interaction with <em>LibreOffice</em>
+and <em>OpenOffice</em> is very similar. In Libreoffice Calc the time format
+should be set to minutes:seconds - [mm]:ss and dates should be set to one
+of: yyyy-mm-dd, dd.mm.yyyy, mm/dd/yyyy. A typical dive log may look like
+this:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_spreadsheetdata.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Spreadsheet data" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To export the data as a .CSV file from within LibreOffice click <em>File →
+Save As</em>. On the dialogue that comes up, select the <em>Text CSV (.csv)</em> as the
+file type and select the option <em>Edit filter settings</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_save_as_options.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Save as options" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After selecting <em>Save</em>, select the appropriate field delimiter (choose <em>Tab</em>
+to prevent conflicts with the comma when using this as a decimal point),
+then select <em>OK</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LOffice_field_options.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Field options" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>One can double check the .CSV file by opening it with a text editor, and
+then import the dive data as explained on the section
+<a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing CSV dives</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_microsoft_em_excel_em">18.2. Microsoft <em>Excel</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The field delimiter (called "<em>list separator</em>" in Microsoft manuals) is not
+accessible from within <em>Excel</em> and needs to be set through the <em>Microsoft
+Control Panel</em>. After changing the separator character, all software on the
+Windows machine use the new character as a separator. One can change the
+character back to the default character by following the same procedure,
+outlined below.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+In Microsoft Windows, click the <strong>Start</strong> button, and then select <em>Control
+ Panel</em> from the list on the right-hand side.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Open the <em>Regional and Language Options</em> dialog box.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Do one of the following: <strong> In Windows 7, click the <em>Formats</em> tab, and then
+ click <em>Customize this format</em>. </strong> In Windows XP, click the <em>Regional
+ Options</em> tab, and then click <em>Customize</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Type a new separator in the <em>List separator</em> box. To use a TAB-delimited
+ file, type the word TAB in the box.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Click <em>OK</em> twice.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an image of the <em>Control Panel</em>:</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV2.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Win List separator" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>To export the dive log in CSV format:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>With the dive log opened in <em>Excel</em>, select the round Windows button at the
+top left, then <em>Save As</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save as option" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Click on the left-hand part of the <em>Save as</em> option, NOT on the arrow on the
+right-hand. This brings up a dialogue for saving the spreadsheet in an
+alternative format. From the dropdown list at the bottom of the dialogue,
+marked <em>Save as Type:</em>, select <em>CSV(Comma delimited) (*.CSV)</em>. Ensure that
+the appropriate folder has been selected to save the CSV file into.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/Win_SaveCSV3.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Excel save CSV dialogue" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Select the <em>Save</em> button. The CSV-formatted file is saved into the folder
+that was selected. One can double check the .CSV file by opening it with a
+text editor, and then import the dive data as explained on the section
+<a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing CSV dives</a>.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1">
+<h2 id="_appendix_e_faqs">19. APPENDIX E: FAQs.</h2>
+<div class="sectionbody">
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_subsurface_appears_to_miscalculate_gas_consumption_and_sac">19.1. Subsurface appears to miscalculate gas consumption and SAC</h3>
+<div class="paragraph" id="SAC_CALCULATION"><p><em>Question</em>: I dived with a 12.2 l tank, starting with 220 bar and ending
+with 100 bar, and I calculate a different SAC compared what <em>Subsurface</em>
+calculates. Is <em>Subsurface</em> miscalculating?</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Answer</em>: Not really. What happens is that <em>Subsurface</em> actually calculates
+gas consumption differently - and better - than you expect. In particular,
+it takes the incompressibility of the gas into account. Traditionally, Gas
+consumption and SAC should be: <code>consumption = tank size x (start pressure -
+end pressure)</code></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>and that’s true for an ideal gas, and it’s what you get taught in dive
+theory. But an "ideal gas" doesn’t actually exist, and real gases actually
+don’t compress linearly with pressure. Also, you are missing the fact that
+one atmosphere of pressure isn’t actually one bar. So the <strong>real</strong>
+calculation is:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><code>consumption = (amount_of_air_at_beginning - amount_of_air_at_end)</code></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>where the amount of air is <strong>not</strong> just "tank size times pressure in bar".
+It’s a combination of: "take compressibility into account" (which is a
+fairly small issue under 220 bar - you’ll see more differences when you do
+high-pressure tanks with 300bar) and "convert bar to atm" (which is the
+majority of your discrepancy). Remember: one ATM is ~1.013 bar, so without
+the compressibility, your gas use is:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><code>12.2*((220-100)/1.013)</code></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>which is about 1445, not 1464. So there was 19 l too much in your simple
+calculation that ignored the difference between 1 bar and one ATM. The
+compressibility does show up above 200 bar, and takes that 1445 down about
+eight litres more, so you really did use only about 1437 l of air at surface
+pressure.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>So be happy: your SAC really is better than your calculations indicated. Or
+be sad: your cylinder contains less air than you thought it did. And as
+mentioned, the "contains less air than you thought it did" really starts
+becoming much more noticeable at high pressure. A 400 bar really does not
+contain twice as much air as a 200 bar one. At lower pressures, air acts
+pretty much like an ideal gas.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_some_dive_profiles_have_time_discrepancies_with_the_recorded_samples_from_my_dive_computer_8230">19.2. Some dive profiles have time discrepancies with the recorded samples from my dive computer…</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> ends up ignoring surface time for many things (average depth,
+divetime, SAC, etc). <em>Question</em>: Why do dive durations in my dive computer
+differ from that given by <em>Subsurface</em>?</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Answer</em>: For example, if you end up doing a weight check (deep enough to
+trigger the "dive started") but then come back up and wait five minutes for
+your buddies, your dive computer may say that your dive is 50 minutes long -
+because you have fifty minutes worth of samples - but subsurface will say
+it’s 45 minutes - because you were actually diving for 45 minutes. It’s
+even more noticeable if you do things like divemastering the initial OW
+dives, when you may stay in the water for a long time, but spend most of it
+at the surface. And then you don’t want that to count as some kind of long
+dive”.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="footnotes"><hr /></div>
+<div id="footer">
+<div id="footer-text">
+Last updated 2015-02-04 07:41:58 PST
+</div>
+</div>
+</body>
+</html>
|